all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Professional Installation Guide | Users Manual | 1.98 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Regulatory Flyer | Users Manual | 385.35 KiB | September 05 2007 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Users Manual Part I | Users Manual | 1.69 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Users Manual Part II | Users Manual | 1.62 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
manual 1 | Users Manual | 1.73 MiB | September 05 2007 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
manual 2 | Users Manual | 3.24 MiB | September 05 2007 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Attestation Statements | September 05 2007 / December 10 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | September 05 2007 / December 10 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | September 05 2007 / December 10 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | External Photos | September 05 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | May 10 2007 / December 10 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | September 05 2007 / December 10 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | May 10 2007 / December 10 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | September 05 2007 / December 10 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | September 05 2007 / December 10 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | September 05 2007 / December 10 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | September 05 2007 / December 10 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Attestation Statements | September 05 2007 / December 10 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Setup Photos | September 05 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info |
1 2 3 4 5 | Professional Installation Guide | Users Manual | 1.98 MiB |
Part Number 69143 Tsunami MP.11 Version 2.1 Antenna Installation Guide NOTICES Copyright 2003, 2004 Proxim Corporation, Sunnyvale, CA. All rights reserved. Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents: 5,231,634; 5,875,179; 6,006,090; 5,809,060; 6,075,812; 5,077,753. This manual and the software described herein are copyrighted with all rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form by any means without the written permission of Proxim Corporation. Trademarks Tsunami, Proxim, and the Proxim logo are trademarks of Proxim Corporation. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners. REGULATORY INFORMATION The Tsunami outdoor antenna solution must be installed and used in strict accordance with the instructions as described in this Antenna Installation Guide. Note: Radio approvals for the Tsunami outdoor antenna solution are valid only when using the exact combination of outdoor antenna cabling components and antennas as listed in this Tsunami MP.11a Antenna Installation Guide. Using other combinations of parts and components in outdoor antenna solutions voids the radio type approval and may be in violation of local radio regulations. Proxim Corporation and its authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from failing to comply with these guidelines. This document provides regulatory information for the following wireless products:
Tsunami MP.11a Base Station Unit, Subscriber Unit, Residential Subscriber Unit This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference
(1)
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Proxim Corporation could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception
(which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to attempt to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. This product must be fixed/mounted on permanent structures with a separation distance of at least two meters from all persons during normal operation. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Notices 2 Contents Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Notices...................................................................................................................................................2 Regulatory Information ..........................................................................................................................2 CONTENTS..................................................................................................................................................3 Figures...................................................................................................................................................3 Tables.....................................................................................................................................................4 ABOUT THIS BOOK....................................................................................................................................5 Who Should Use This Guide .................................................................................................................5 Finding Additional Information ...............................................................................................................6 About the Tsunami MP.11 ......................................................................................................................6 Safety Precautions.................................................................................................................................7 CHAPTER 1. PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION.....................................................................................8 Planning Antenna Installation ................................................................................................................8 Installation Process Overview................................................................................................................8 Site Prerequisites...................................................................................................................................9 Installation..............................................................................................................................................9 Outdoor Installation..............................................................................................................................12 Before Climbing the Roof... ................................................................................................................19 CHAPTER 2. DETERMINING RANGE AND CLEARANCE ....................................................................20 Determining the Outdoor Range..........................................................................................................20 Distance Assumptions and Expectations.............................................................................................24 Data Speed of the Wireless Link .........................................................................................................26 Cable Factor ........................................................................................................................................26 Clearance Factor .................................................................................................................................27 Examples .............................................................................................................................................31 CHAPTER 3. ANTENNA CABLING SYSTEM .........................................................................................35 Selecting the Correct Cables...............................................................................................................35 Regulatory Information ........................................................................................................................36 Selecting the Correct Connector Type.................................................................................................37 Outdoor Cabling Components .............................................................................................................39 CHAPTER 4. RECOMMENDED ANTENNAS..........................................................................................41 Type of Outdoor Antenna Equipment ..................................................................................................41 14 dBi Directional Antenna ..................................................................................................................42 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Unit Antenna..........................................................................................47 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Unit Antenna........................................................................................51 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna...............................................................................................55 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna ..........................................................................................59 5 dBi Omni-Directional Antenna ..........................................................................................................65 High Gain Panel Directional Antenna for 2.4 GHz...............................................................................69 Surge Protector....................................................................................................................................71 LMR 600 cable 50 ft..........................................................................................................................73 SUPPORT AND WARRANTY ...................................................................................................................75 Technical Support ................................................................................................................................75 Warranty and Repair............................................................................................................................75 FIGURES Figure 1. Cable Setup for Antenna Installation .........................................................................................10 Figure 2. Potential Obstacles for a Directional Antenna ...........................................................................13 Figure 3. Fresnel Zone..............................................................................................................................27 Figure 4. Clearance Factor Diagram.........................................................................................................28 Figure 5. Calculating Point-to-Point Range...............................................................................................31 Figure 6. Calculating Point-to-Multipoint Range .......................................................................................33 Figure 7. Surge Arrestor............................................................................................................................39 Figure 8. Mounting 14 dBi Antenna to a Mast...........................................................................................43 Contents 3 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Figure 9. Azimuth Plane (Horizontal), 14 dBi Directional Antenna............................................................45 Figure 10. Elevation Plane (Vertical), 14 dBi Directional Antenna............................................................46 Figure 11. Mounting the 7 dBi Antenna to a Mast .....................................................................................48 Figure 12. Azimuth Plane (Horizontal), 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Unit Antenna .................................49 Figure 13. Elevation Plane (Vertical), 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Unit Antenna ...................................50 Figure 14. Mounting the 10 dBi Antenna...................................................................................................51 Figure 15. Azimuth Plane (Horizontal), 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Unit Antenna ...............................53 Figure 16. Elevation Plane (Vertical), 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Unit Antenna .................................54 Figure 17. Mounting the 12 dBi Wide Angle Antenna ...............................................................................55 Figure 18. Azimuth Plane (Horizontal), 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna ......................................57 Figure 19. Elevation Plane (Vertical), 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna.........................................58 Figure 20. Assemble the Reflector............................................................................................................60 Figure 21. Determine Polarization.............................................................................................................60 Figure 22. Attach Mounting Bracket..........................................................................................................61 Figure 23. Azimuth Plane (Horizontal), 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna..................................63 Figure 24. Elevation Plane (Vertical), 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna ....................................64 Figure 25. 5 dBi Omni-Directional Antenna...............................................................................................65 Figure 26. Azimuth Plane (Horizontal), 5 dBi Omni-Directional Antenna..................................................67 Figure 27. Elevation Plane (Vertical), 5 dBi Omni-Directional Antenna ....................................................68 TABLES Table 1. Maximum Outdoor Range for FCC Products, Part 1...................................................................22 Table 2. Maximum Outdoor Range for FCC Products, Part 2...................................................................23 Table 3. Maximum Range for ETSI/FR/JP Products.................................................................................24 Table 4. Cable Factor ................................................................................................................................26 Table 5. FCC Outdoor Range with 10 m 933 ft) Clearance, Part 1...........................................................29 Table 6. FCC Outdoor Range with 10 m 933 ft) Clearance, Part 2...........................................................30 Table 7. Certified Cable and Antenna Combinations FCC........................................................................35 Table 8. Certified Channel and Antenna Combinations FCC....................................................................36 Table 9. Standard N-Type Connector Diagram .........................................................................................37 Table 10. Reverse Polarity-N Cabling Diagram ........................................................................................37 Table 11. Specifications 14 dBi Directional Antenna .................................................................................44 Table 12. Specifications 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Unit Antenna ........................................................48 Table 13. Specifications 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Unit Antenna ......................................................52 Table 14. Specifications 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna..............................................................56 Table 15. Specifications 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna.........................................................62 Table 16. Specifications 5 dBi Omni-Directional Antenna .........................................................................66 Contents 4 About This Book Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide This Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide explains how to install and set up an outdoor antenna with the Tsunami MP.11 hardware. This guide does not explain how to erect antenna masts or how to install a safety grounding system. These prerequisites must be in place before installing the directional antenna. WHO SHOULD USE THIS GUIDE The installation of outdoor wireless links requires technical expertise. At the very least, you should be able to:
Understand, or have a working knowledge of, installation procedures for network operating systems using Install and configure the network components, such as the Tsunami MP.11 hardware Microsoft Windows Mount the outdoor antenna and surge arrestor. Proxim Corporation recommends the installation is performed by a qualified antenna installation service WARNING!
The Tsunami outdoor antennas are intended for mounting on an antenna tower, a roof, or on the side of a building. Anyone not trained or experienced in this type of work must not attempt this installation. The antenna must be installed by a suitably trained professional installation technician or by a qualified antenna installation service. A person familiar with the national electrical code and other regulations governing this type of installation must check the site prerequisites. As radio regulations differ between the various worldwide countries, it may be that not all of the outdoor solutions described in this Tsunami Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide are allowed in the country in which you plan to install this equipment. Local radio regulations or legislation may impose restrictions on the use of specific combinations of:
Low-loss antenna cables and outdoor antennas Radio channels selected at the radios that are connected to specific outdoor antennas Note: A basic rule for selecting a combination of cables and antennas is that no combination is allowed unless explicitly approved in this Tsunami Antenna Installation Guide. Therefore, always use this Appendix in combination with Chapter 2. Determining Range and Clearance on page 20 of this document to select the correct type of antenna equipment and to inform your antenna installer and LAN administrator about the impact of regulatory constraints on their job or activities. CAUTION At all times, it is the customers responsibility to ensure that an outdoor antenna installation complies with local radio regulations.1 The customer must verify that:
The antenna installer is aware of these regulations
The correct cable type and surge arrestor have been used, according to the instructions described in this document Proxim Corporation and its resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from failing to comply with these guidelines. 1In case you are not certain about the regulations that apply in your country, consult your local Proxim Corporation Sales Office. About this Book 5 FINDING ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Installing Tsunami MP.11 Hardware Tsunami outdoor antennas typically are used in combination with Tsunami MP.11 systems. The hardware installation of these devices is described in the installation guide included with each product. Configuration and Management Configuration and management of outdoor wireless links is accomplished with management tools that come with the Tsunami MP.11 systems. Some examples of management tools are:
Web-based management Telnet Wireless Network Manager Hardware Specifications Tsunami MP.11 hardware and radio frequency specifications are described in the documentation that comes with the product. Hardware specifications for the outdoor antennas, the cabling system, and the surge arrestor are listed in Chapter 4 of this guide. Additional Files on Your Software CD-ROM All software CD-ROMs that come with your Tsunami products, include a readme.txt file. This file contains information about the software version and drivers. You are advised to print and read the readme.txt file prior to installing your Tsunami products, as it may contain additional information that was not available when this document was printed. Other Sources of Information All documentation listed above can be downloaded from the Proxim support website:
http://support.proxim.com. Visit the website regularly for the latest available information and documentation, software updates and other Proxim news. ABOUT THE TSUNAMI MP.11 The Tsunami MP.11 lets you set up a wireless system based upon two basic topologies:
A point-to-point link lets you set up a connection between two locations as an alternative to:
Leased lines in building-to-building connections Wired Ethernet backbones between wireless access points in difficult-to-wire environments If you want to connect more than two buildings, you can set up a single point-to-multipoint network with a single Base station and multiple Subscriber Units A link between two locations always consists of a Base Unit and a Subscriber Unit. A Base Unit can, depending upon its configuration, connect to one or more Subscriber Units; a Subscriber Unit, however, can connect to only one Base Unit. Note: Depending upon local radio regulations and legislation, the outdoor antenna solutions described in this document may not be available in all parts of the world. About this Book 6 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read this section carefully before beginning the installation. All of the following requirements should be satisfied prior to starting installation of your outdoor antennas. DANGER!
The Tsunami outdoor antennas are intended for mounting on a roof or on the side of a building. Any person not trained or experienced in this type of work should not attempt this installation. A suitably trained professional installation technician must install the antenna. The site prerequisites must be checked by a person familiar with the national electrical code, and with other regulations governing this type of installation. Outdoor antennas and antenna cables are electrical conductors. Transients or electrostatic discharges that may occur at the antenna (for example a lightning strike during thunderstorms) may damage your electronic equipment and cause personal injury or death to persons touching the exposed metal connectors of the antenna cable. When installing, disconnecting or replacing one of the cabling components, you must ensure at all times that each exposed metal connectors of the antenna cabling system are grounded locally during the work. Do not install this antenna where there is any possibility of contact with high-voltage arc-over from power cables or service drops to buildings. The antenna, supporting mast or tower must not be close to any power lines during installation, removal or in the event of part of the system should accidentally fail. Apply a Danger label to a plainly visible area of the antenna support structure. Do not climb rooftops in wet or windy conditions, during a thunderstorm or when the area at which the equipment is to be installed is covered with ice or snow. Do not touch antennas, surge arrestors and antenna cables during a thunderstorm. The antenna installation location must be at a safe distance from power lines or telephone lines. The safe distance should be at least twice the height of the antenna mast plus the height of the antenna. Antennas shall be mounted in such a manner as to minimize the potential for human contact during normal operation. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antenna shall not be less than 1.12 meters during normal operation. The low-loss antenna cable that is to connect the antenna with the surge arrestor must be at least 1 m (3 ft) away from any high voltage or high current cable. Check whether the antenna mast and its guy wires or wall bracket are positioned correctly and secured properly to the roof or walls. Check whether the grounding system for the antenna mast, the Tsunami MP.11a hardware, and the surge arrestor have been installed. The grounding system must comply with the requirements as described in Grounding the Antenna. Always consult a qualified electrician if you are in doubt as to whether the antenna mast, the surge arrestor, and Tsunami MP.11a hardware are properly grounded. The antenna cable between the antenna and the surge arrestor must be grounded at all times. If the cable is disconnected at one end for some reason (for example, to replace the surge arrestor), you must ensure that the exposed metal connector of the cable is grounded locally during the work. About this Book 7 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Chapter 1. Preparing for Installation PLANNING ANTENNA INSTALLATION Plan the day for your outdoor antenna installation carefully. Do not install the antenna in wet or windy conditions, during a thunderstorm, or when the area in which the equipment is to be installed is covered with ice or snow. The grounding system for the antenna mast, Tsunami MP.11 hardware, and surge arrestor should be installed before the cable from the antenna is connected to the surge arrestor. This protects your system against lightning strikes during installation. Familiarize yourself with the antenna and the antenna-specific mounting instructions prior to climbing any roof or ladder. Installing and testing all equipment before beginning the actual rooftop installation helps you determine whether all required equipment and items are available and are functioning properly. To verify the equipment prior to installation, first follow the guidelines described in the documentation that comes with the Tsunami MP.11a. INSTALLATION PROCESS OVERVIEW The installation process can be summarized in the following steps:
1. Verify that the support structure for the antenna has been connected to the grounding system. If this is not the case, you should do so now. 2. Connect the exposed metal connectors of the low-loss antenna cable to the grounding system. 3. Mount the antenna to the support structure, following the guidelines as described for your antenna. 4. Connect the antenna cable to the antenna. 5. Route the antenna cable to the surge arrestor that has been installed indoors. 6. Connect the antenna cable to the surge arrestor. 7. Attach the surge arrestor to the N-type male connector pigtail hanging from the cable opening in the Tsunami MP.11. For the outdoor MP.11, connect the surge arrestor to the external antenna connection of the BSU. 8. Run the Link Test diagnostics of the management tools that come with the Tsunami MP.11 to aim the antenna and verify optimal placement. Note: For the outdoor MP.11, you can use the Antenna Alignment Display utility. See Aligning the Antenna on page 17. 9. Once the antenna is correctly positioned, and you have verified the installation works properly, secure all cables and use weatherproofing tape to seal all outdoor connectors. Note: When you must remove or relocate the antenna, follow the Safety Precautions at the beginning of this chapter and follow the steps listed above in exactly the reverse order. Chapter 1. Preparing for Installation 8 SITE PREREQUISITES Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Review all requirements outlined in this chapter before starting the installation procedure. Prior to climbing on the roof or any other area where you intend to install the outdoor antenna, you are advised to:
Verify that you have arranged all safety measures for outdoor installation or rooftop installation Verify that you have all equipment and tools required to install the outdoor antennas Install and verify proper operation of the equipment INSTALLATION The following items are required on each end of the wireless link:
A Tsunami MP.11 Base Station (outdoor MP.11) or a Tsunami MP.11 Base Station and Subscriber Unit
(indoor MP.11) A low-loss antenna cable to connect the indoor installation to the surge arrestor (optional) A surge arrestor to protect your sensitive Tsunami MP.11 equipment from static discharge and transients A low-loss antenna cable to connect the surge arrestor to the outdoor antenna Female-female converter connector (optional) Two outdoor antennas A grounding system, as described in Grounding the Antenna on page 16. Tsunami MP.11 Hardware The following three types of hardware devices are used for setting up a wireless link with the indoor MP.11:
Tsunami MP.11 Base Station Unit (BSU) Tsunami MP.11 Subscriber Unit (SU) Tsunami MP.11 Residential Subscriber Unit (RSU) For these indoor radios, the antenna cable is connected to the connector pigtail extending from the MP.11a radio. The outdoor MP.11s Subscriber Unit contains an integrated antenna; only the outdoor MP.11 Base Station Unit has an external antenna connection, as shown in the following illustration. Chapter 1. Preparing for Installation 9 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Cable Setup for the Outdoor Antenna The following figure shows an overview of the cable setup for the outdoor antenna. When the MP.11 is not mounted close to where the antenna cable enters the building (where the surge arrestor must be mounted), an additional cable between the MP.11 and the surge arrestor is required, plus a female-female converter connector. If the MP.11 is mounted close to the surge arrestor, the MP.11 can be connected directly to the surge arrestor. connect to N-type male connector pigtail extending from MP.11a unit Figure 1. Cable Setup for Antenna Installation Note: The exception to the rule is the indoor MP.11 RSU when the window antenna is installed in an indoor location. This installation does not require the use of a surge arrestor. The antenna can be connected directly to the MP.11. Indoor MP.11 Hardware Placement The electronics (power supply and radio) are designed for indoor mounting and operation. The ideal location must satisfy the following requirements:
The location provides a connection to a grounding type AC wall outlet (100-240 VAC), using the standard power cord supplied with the unit. (Alternative power can be provided through Power over Ethernet.) The ground of the AC wall outlet must be connected to the same grounding system as the surge arrestor and antenna mast (see Grounding the Antenna on page 16). The location must allow for easy disconnection of the Tsunami MP.11 hardware from the AC wall outlet. The location provides a connection to the network backbone (an Ethernet LAN cable that is connected to a hub, bridge, or directly into a patch panel) The location is as close as possible to the point at which the antenna cable is to enter the building (see Placement of the Surge Arrestor on page 11). The ideal location has a temperature of 055 C and a maximum relative humidity (non-condensing) of 95%. CAUTION! The Tsunami MP.11 hardware, the surge arrestor, and the antenna mast must be connected to the same grounding system. Chapter 1. Preparing for Installation 10 Cable System Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide CAUTION! The location of the indoor Tsunami MP.11 radio and power supply must be indoors at all times to protect the unit from extreme weather conditions, excessive heat and humidity, and to keep the unit free from vibration and dust. The antenna and surge arrestor can be placed outdoors. Prior to mounting the Tsunami MP.11, you are advised to calculate carefully:
The distance between the intended location of your Tsunami MP.11 and the location of the antenna mast The height of the antenna on the mast If the low-loss antenna cable is not long enough to cover this distance you can select either another cable length from the Proxim Systems low-loss cable offering, or another location that satisfies the requirements listed previously to mount your Tsunami MP.11. Because the length of the antenna cable can affect the actual range of your outdoor antenna installation, Proxim recommends selecting another location. WARNING! You must not change the length of the low-loss antenna cable to a length shorter than allowed by the radios certifications. Shortening the cable voids the Proxim Corporation warranty and can conflict with radio certifications or approvals. Installing the Tsunami MP.11 hardware is described in Tsunami MP.11/a Installation and Management manual as well as the Tsunami MP.11/a Quick Install Guide, which come on the Tsunami MP.11 product CD. Surge Arrestor Placement The surge arrestor is an indispensable part of your outdoor antenna installation. It protects your sensitive electronic equipment from transients or electro-static discharges at the antenna. For optimal protection, the surge arrestor must be installed at a location that satisfies the following requirements:
A location as close to the location where the antenna cable will enter the building (see Hardware Placement on page 10). The location allows for easy disconnection of the surge arrestor from the cable connected to the unit. The location provides a connection to the same grounding system as the Tsunami MP.11 hardware and the outdoor antenna mast (as described in Grounding the Antenna on page 16). Antenna Cable Route The antenna cable must be connected from the antenna through the surge arrestor to the pigtail connector of the MP.11 unit or to the external antenna connection of the outdoor MP.11 Base Station. To plan the route of the antenna cable, consider the following:
Does the cable route require drilling through a wall or ceiling?
Do you have a building plan of the desired location showing other cabling routes like electricity, telephone or networking?
Does the type of building materials require special drilling tools?
The cable should not be installed into tight positions, as bending or applying excessive force to the connectors can damage the antenna cable. Always allow the cable to bend naturally around corners. The recommended bend radius is at least 100 mm (4 in) or more for the low-loss cable of 10 mm (0.4 in) and 15 mm (0.6 in) diameter. The cable must be secured along the complete distance between attachment points. No part of the antenna cable should be allowed to hang free. This is particularly important for outdoor cable parts. Chapter 1. Preparing for Installation 11 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide CAUTION!
The antenna cable and cable connectors are not designed to withstand excessive force:
Do not use the connectors as cable grips to pull cable through raceways or conduits. Do not use the cable connector to support the weight of the cable during or after installation. Do not use any tool to tighten the connectors. Always seal the connectors using weatherproofing tape. Avoid any water or moisture entering the cable as that impacts the performance of the wireless link. Prior to sealing the outdoor connectors and permanently securing the cable to the wall with cable ties and wall hooks, you may want to verify whether the installation and all components functions properly. OUTDOOR INSTALLATION The outdoor installation of the link (point-to-point or point-to-multipoint) requires the following:
An antenna A low-loss antenna cable (available in three lengths) Antenna mast or wall bracket for the antenna A grounding system that meets the requirements described in Grounding the Antenna on page 16 Waterproofing of all connections Note: All outdoor cable connectors must be sealed with weatherproofing stretch tape to make the coax connectors permanently waterproof. See Sealing the Cable Connectors on page 16. DANGER!
For your own safety, the antenna mast and the grounding system should be installed only by experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and with the national electrical codes. Read carefully the instructions described in Grounding the Antenna and verify that your installation complies with the appropriate regulations and codes before installing the antenna. Placing the Antenna To achieve maximum performance of your wireless outdoor link, the outdoor antenna must have clear line-of-
sight to the antenna of the other Tsunami MP.11 unit. Although the radio signal can work well without line-of-sight in urban environments, in which the signal is transported by reflection instead of being direct, the best results are achieved in line-of-sight conditions. Line-of-sight can be defined as:
No obstacles in the direct path between the antennas (antenna beam) No obstacles within a defined zone around the antenna beam You should be aware that the shape of an antenna beam is not straight and narrow like a laser beam. The antenna beam, also known as Fresnel2 Zone, is rather bulged in the middle, such as, for example, a rugby ball. The exact shape and width of the Fresnel Zone is determined by the path length and frequency of the radio signal. The width as distance from the direct antenna beam is approximately 6 m (21 ft) in the middle of the wireless link for a distance of 6.5 Km (4 mi) and a frequency of 5.8 GHz. This width also is the required clearance of the antenna beam from obstacles in its path, to avoid loss of radio signal. 2Pronounced as Fray-Nell Chapter 1. Preparing for Installation 12 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide When any significant part of this zone is obstructed, a portion of the radio energy is lost, resulting in reduced performance. Reduced performance also can occur when obstacles close to the antenna beam cause signal reflections or noise that interfere with the radio signal. The following figure shows some typical examples of obstacles that you must avoid for the directional antenna to operate effectively:
a. Neighboring buildings b. Trees or other obstructions c. Power lines For optimal performance, you must ensure that the type and placement of the antennas leave sufficient clearance of the Fresnel Zone at the maximum width of the bulge, which is typically at the mid-point between the antennas. Figure 2. Potential Obstacles for a Directional Antenna To minimize the influence of obstacles, signal interference, or reflections, note the following:
Mount the antenna as high as possible above the ground to allow maximum clearance:
In open areas, ground is the actual surface of the earth. In dense urban areas, ground is to be interpreted as the height of the highest obstacle in the signal path between the two antenna sites. Install the antenna at least 2 m (6 ft) away from all other antennas. Avoid trees in the signal path to avoid signal absorption due to seasonal changes (leaves or ice). Other situations, in which reflections of the radio signal may cause interference, are environments in which large reflecting surfaces exist in parallel or partly perpendicular to the antenna beam. Chapter 1. Preparing for Installation 13 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Environments with large reflective surfaces include:
Mirror-glass buildings Crowded parking lots Water surface or moist earth and moist vegetation Above ground power and telephone lines Note: The use of reflective surfaces can be used to improve a link, especially if the direct line-of-sight is impaired or absent. Weather conditions such as rain or snow usually do not have much impact on the performance of your Tsunami MP.11 product, provided you have sealed all cable connectors with weatherproofing tape. Seasonal influence on signal propagation can occur in the following situations:
A marginal communications quality in late fall (with no leaves on the trees in the signal path) might fail in the summer In winter, a wireless link can fail when the antenna is exposed to ice buildup, or when the antenna elements are covered with snow Radio paths over water or extremely flat ground may require optimization of antenna height at one end. This is due to in-phase or out-of-phase reflections. Adjustment of antenna height by 1 to 3 meters may move the signal from a null to a peak. Long distance links may be obstructed by earth curvature, so the antenna height requirements must not only take the height of obstructions and Fresnel Zone into account, but also earth bulge. The earth bulge is approximately 5 m (16.4 ft) at a link distance of 16 Km (10 mi). In these cases consult your supplier to take appropriate steps to maintain or optimize wireless link performance. Mounting the Antenna As the mounting procedures for the various antennas differ from one another, consult the documentation you received from the antenna manufacturer for mounting procedures. Proxim Corporation offers multiple antennas to set up a wireless link. When mounting multiple antennas on a single mast, use the following methods to minimize the influence of cross-talk interference between the antennas:
Place your antennas as far apart as you can Alternate the mounting of directional antennas for vertical and horizontal polarization There are two frequently used methods to erect an antenna mast:
Tripod Mount The tripod mount is used primarily on peaked and flat roofs. The antenna mast must be secured to the roof using 3 or 4 guy wires equally spaced around the mast. When the height of the antenna mast is more than 3 meters (10 ft), you should use at least three guy wires for each 3-meter (10-foot) section of the mast. Wall (Side) Mount A wall (side) mount allows for mounting an antenna (mast) on the side of a building or on the side of an elevator penthouse. This provides a convenient mounting location when the roof overhang is not excessive or when the location is high enough to provide a clear line-of-sight. Chapter 1. Preparing for Installation 14 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide In most situations mounting an antenna directly to the wall does not let you align the antenna properly with the corresponding antenna at the opposite end of your wireless link. As poor alignment typically results in poor performance, Proxim recommends always mounting the antennas to a mast. An exception to this rule is the wide-angle window antenna that can be mounted on a window or wall facing the nearest Base Station with line of sight. Antenna Mast Requirements To accommodate the antennas, the antenna mast must satisfy the following requirements:
The construction of the mast must consist of sturdy, weatherproof, and non-corrosive material (for example, galvanized or stainless steel construction pipe). Typical diameter of the mast should be between 35 mm (1.4 in) and 41 mm (1.6 in). Depending upon the type of antenna you intend to install, other diameters also may be possible. The height of the antenna mast must be sufficient to allow the antenna to be installed at least 1.5 m (5 ft) above the peak of the roof. If the roof is of metal, the height of the antenna should be at least 3 m (10 ft) above the roof. The mast or wall bracket must be free from any substance that may prevent a good electrical connection with the antenna (for example, paint). Connecting the Antenna Cable Once the antenna is properly installed, you can connect the antenna to the MP.11 by way of the surge arrestor:
1. Connect the antenna cable to the antenna. 2. Secure the antenna cable to the mast so that the cable connectors do not support the full weight of the cable. 3. Connect the opposite end of the antenna cable to the surge arrestor. CAUTION! To avoid damage to the antenna cable and connectors, refrain from using tools to tighten the cable connectors. 4. Prior to securing the cable along its complete length, run the Link Test diagnostics of the management tools that comes with Tsunami MP.11 to analyze wireless performance and optimal placement of the outdoor antenna. Using this tool is described in the documentation that comes with the Tsunami MP.11 and also can be downloaded from the Proxim support website at http://support.proxim.com . 5. If required, adjust the direction of the antenna. 6. Once the installation has been fully tested, tighten the nuts of the antenna to lock the antenna into its position. CAUTION! Avoid over-tightening of the connector, and nuts and screws used to mount the antenna, to prevent damage to your antenna and Tsunami MP.11 hardware. 7. Secure the cable along its complete length with cable ties or electrical tape to relieve strain on the antenna connector properly. No part of the cable should be allowed to hang free. This is especially important for those parts that are routed outside the building. 8. Proceed as described in the next section to weatherproof all outdoor coax connectors. Chapter 1. Preparing for Installation 15 Sealing the Cable Connectors Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Most problems associated with wireless outdoor installations are related to degrading performance due to corrosion of the antenna cable and cable connectors. To avoid this type of problem, you must always seal the cable connectors that are located outdoors using the weatherproofing tape provided. You are advised to seal the connectors only after you have verified optimal alignment of the antennas using the Link Test as described in the documentation that comes with the Tsunami MP.11. Doing so lets you adjust antenna placement and cable routing without removing the tape. To weatherproof the connectors:
1. Prepare the cable and connectors so that they are free from dust, dirt and grease. 2. Attach the tip of the weatherproofing tape to the cable just above the connector. Holding the tape in its position, now stretch the tape and wind it half-overlapped around the cable and connectors to form a void-
free joint. The degree of stretch may vary in different sections of the joint, as long as the overlaps accomplish a void-free application. 3. To protect the weatherproofing stretch tape from the effects of Ultra-Violet (UV) radiation (for example, from direct sunlight), you should protect the joint with two half-overlapped layers of any vinyl plastic electrical tape. Alternatively, you can apply silicone sealer to protect the weatherproofing tape from sunlight, rain and other weather conditions. Grounding the Antenna Direct grounding of the antenna mast, Tsunami MP.11 hardware and surge arrestor is extremely important. Note: A safety grounding system is necessary to protect your Tsunami MP.11 hardware from lightning strikes and the build-up of static electricity. WARNING! The antenna mast, Tsunami MP.11 hardware, and surge arrestor must be connected to the same ground, using an equi-potential bonding conductor. A good electrical connection should be made to one or more ground rods, using at least a 10AWG ground wire and non-corrosive hardware. The grounding system must comply with the National Electrical Code and safety standards that apply in your country. Always check with a qualified electrician if you are in doubt whether your Tsunami MP.11a hardware installation is properly grounded. Chapter 1. Preparing for Installation 16 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Aligning the Antenna For optimal performance of your wireless link, make sure the antennas are properly aligned (facing one another eye-to-eye). Antenna alignment is a process to physically align the antenna of the radio receiver or the transmitter to have the best possible radio link established between them. The antenna alignment process usually is performed during installation and after major repairs. To align the antennas:
Use a pair of binoculars or a map of the area and a compass to point the antennas to one another. Use the Antenna Alignment Display feature (AAD) to display a measurement of signal quality at the CLI and serial ports. You also can use the Link Test option of the management tools that come with the Tsunami MP.11 to analyze the radio link quality. Antenna Alignment Display Feature (Outdoor MP.11 Only) Antenna alignment is a process to physically align the antenna of the radio receiver or the transmitter to have the best possible radio link established between them. The antenna alignment process usually is performed during installation and after major repairs. The outdoor MP.11 has an audible antenna alignment tool that can be activated by plugging in the supplied serial dongle (supplied with every Base Station) or by issuing the CLI command for antenna alignment. The CLI command causes both audible and numerical feedback as the CLI shows the running SNR values twice a second. The output from the beeper for antenna alignment consists of short beeps with a variable interval. The interval changes with the SNR level to assist in correctly aligning the antenna. An increase in signal level is indicated by a shorter interval between beeps; a reduction in signal level results in beeps further apart. To allow for precise antenna alignment, small changes in SNR result in large changes in the beep period. The alignment process averages the SNR, which is represented by an average length beep. When a higher SNR is received, the beep period is made shorter, dependent upon the difference to the average. A lower SNR results in a longer period between beeps. The first five steps are represented by a large change and all following steps are a small change. This acts as if a magnifying glass is centered around the average SNR and the values next to the average are significantly different. Chapter 1. Preparing for Installation 17 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide When the antenna is aimed, the beep can easily be heard if the SNR is rising (shorter period, higher frequency) or falling (longer period). When the position of the antenna has been changed, the SNR averaging settles at the new value and the beeping returns to the average length so the antenna can again be aimed towards rising SNR. Aiming is complete if moving in any direction results in a falling SNR value, which can be heard as longer periods between beeps. Notes:
Antenna alignment for the Base Station is useful only for a point-to-point link. The range of the average SNR must be limited to values from 0 to 48. Anything over 48 is capped at 48. AAD is automatically disabled 30 minutes after it is enabled to remove the load of extra messages on the wireless interface. The default telnet timeout is 900 seconds (15 minutes). If AAD must run for the entire 30 minutes, change the default telnet timeout value greater than 30 minutes (greater than 1800 seconds). This restriction is for telnet connections only and not for the serial interface. The serial interface never times out. Antenna Alignment Commands set aad enable local set aad enable remote set aad enable average set aad disable Enables display of the local SNR. Local SNR is the SNR measured by the receiver at the near end. Enables display of the remote SNR. Remote SNR is the SNR as measured by the receiver at the far end. Enables display of the average SNR. The average SNR is the average of the local and remote SNR. Disables Antenna Alignment Display (Ctrl-C also disables AAD). Link Test You also can use the Link Test option of the management tools that come with the Tsunami MP.11 to analyze the radio link quality. The Link Test option lets you display the radio signal strength in relation to the noise in the signal path. If required, you can interactively optimize the antenna alignment with the Link Test, by making small modifications in the antenna orientation. The AudioTune tool can be used to read out loud the Link Test values, allowing direct feedback when aligning the antenna. Run the Link Test diagnostics of the management tools that come with the Tsunami MP.11 with the Signal and Noise fields selected. You can download AudioTune from http://www.computron-usa.com/wireless_utilities.htm. Alternatively, consult a professional Antenna Installation Service to optimize the antenna alignment. Antenna Polarization Tsunami outdoor antennas are standard mounted for vertical polarization. In some cases, you might consider mounting the antenna for horizontal polarization. For example, to minimize the influence of cross-talk between antennas when:
You plan to mount multiple directional antennas to the same mast. Your wireless link receives interference from a vertically polarized neighboring installation. Mounting for horizontal polarization is not supported for omni-directional grid antennas. Chapter 1. Preparing for Installation 18 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Note: For optimal wireless link performance, you must always verify that the antenna polarization on both ends of the wireless link is the same. Consult the corresponding instruction appendixes for changing the antenna polarization. Antenna Cable Routing The antenna cable must be routed and fixed in such a way that installation technicians have a clear passage area. All connectors that are located outdoors must have a weatherproof seal. You are advised to seal connectors only after you have completed the final radio tests. BEFORE CLIMBING THE ROOF... Before you start the installation, check whether you have all the required components to set up an outdoor wireless link. For each side of a wireless outdoor wireless link you need:
One or two low-loss antenna cables A female-female converter N-connector in case you want to use two antenna cables Tools and material to mount the antenna Tape or wraps to attach the antenna cable, for example to the mast Grounding material such as cable and connector If an item is missing or damaged during shipment, inform your supplier. Chapter 1. Preparing for Installation 19 Chapter 2. Determining Range and Clearance Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide When you read about wireless outdoor products, you often encounter the terms output power of the radio and gain of the antenna equipment as measures for the strength of the transmitted signal. Output power of radio equipment often depends upon maximum limits defined by local radio regulations;
consequently, output power is, by definition, not the way to enhance wireless performance. High gain antennas are larger in size than low gain antennas, and are characterized by a narrow focus of the antenna beam. These two characteristics make it more difficult to aim the antennas and adjust antenna alignment to optimize the performance of the wireless point-to-point link. The Tsunami outdoor solution is based upon the following principles:
Output power and antenna gain that comply with the maximum limits defined by local governing bodies concerning radio transmissions. Enhanced radio sensitivity for optimal receive quality of radio signals transmitted by remote antennas. DETERMINING THE OUTDOOR RANGE The range of your outdoor antenna installation is closely related to a number of different factors. To let you determine the range of the Tsunami MP.11 antenna system in your situation, we have defined the following formula:
Range = Maximum Range x Cable Factor x Clearance Factor where:
Maximum Range Identifies the theoretical maximum that could be achieved under optimal circumstances using the available Tsunami MP.11 products according to their specifications and in compliance with local radio regulations. This value can be read from Table 1 on page 22 or Table 2 on page 23, according to the country in which the antenna system is to be installed. Identifies a correction value (in percentage) that compensates for additional cable losses related to the type of cables used at both ends of the wireless link. The Cable Factor value can be read from Table 4 on page 26. Identifies a correction value (in percentage) that should be used in case the signal path of your wireless link does not provide the minimum clearance as listed in the Maximum Range table. The Clearance Factor can be read from Figure 6 on page 28. Cable Factor Clearance Factor Note: You also can use a calculation sheet provided by Proxim to generate an estimate of link distance and reliability. An example of using this formula is described in Examples on page 31. This formula should be used only as a rule-of-thumb to assess the possible range that could be achieved in your situation, or to select the type and height of the antenna installations. Always perform on-site measurements to validate the results from the range calculation. To perform these measurements, you can use the Link Test option of the management tools that come with the Tsunami MP.11 product. Chapter 2. Determining Range and Clearance 20 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Maximum Range The maximum range of your Tsunami MP.11 system is based upon:
The type of outdoor antenna equipment The data speed of the wireless link The clearance of the signal path (see Clearance Factor on page 27) The values in this section are based upon calculations that assume optimal radio conditions. They do not represent a guarantee that the same maximum distance can be achieved at your location. Differences in performance figures can result from:
Polarization mismatch of the antennas Sources of interference or unexpected reflections in the signal path that affect the communications quality Incorrect alignment of antennas (see Aligning the Antenna on page 17)
(see Antenna Placement on page 12) Severe weather conditions such as heavy rain or snow fall, or strong winds Seasonal influences such as leaves on trees, or icing on the antennas The length of the antenna cable also has an impact on the maximum range that can be achieved with the antenna combination (see Cable Factor on page 26). Depending upon local radio regulations in a number of countries that limit the maximum output power, Proxim Corporation offers different outdoor antenna products in the various countries around the world. Therefore, you must consult the table that matches the radio regulations as they apply in your country:
Table 1 on page 22 and Table 2 on page 23 for the USA and Canada and any other country that adheres to the radio regulations as defined by the US Federal Communications Commission (FCC). Table 3 on page 24 for all European countries, Japan, and any other country that adheres to the radio regulations as defined by the European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) and MPT. Table 5 on page 29 and Table 6 on page 30 show the ranges in case of obstruction, where only 10 meters
(33 feet) of clearance is available in the path of the link. Chapter 2. Determining Range and Clearance 21 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide The following tables show calculated ranges with a link budget of 10 dB (fading margin) and unlimited clearance. The clearance is the average antenna height; it also incorporates earth bulge. Lower link budget results in longer links, but less reliable communication. On very short links, the link budget can be lower than 10 dB, while at longer links more fading occurs and a high fading margin is needed. Antenna Antenna Speed Mbps 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna*
14 dBi Directional Antenna 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna Range Clearance Range Clearance Range Clearance 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna 14 dBi Directional Antenna 12 dBi Directional Window Antenna 1 2 5.5 11 1 2 5.5 11 1 2 5.5 11 112 km 70 mi 79 km 49 mi 50 km 31 mi 28 km 17 mi 35 km 22 mi 25 km 16 mi 16 km 9.8 mi 8.9 km 5.5 mi 29 km 18 mi 21 km 13 mi 13 km 8.2 mi 7.4 km 4.6 mi 285 m 936 ft 157 m 515 ft 76 m 250 ft 36 m 118 ft 47 m 156 ft 32 m 104 ft 20 m 67 ft 13 m 43 ft 38 m 124 ft 26 m 86 ft 17 m 57 ft 12 m 38 ft 35 km 22 mi 25 km 16 mi 16 km 9.8 mi 8.9 km 5.5 mi 11 km 7.0 mi 7.9 km 4.9 mi 5.0 km 3.1 mi 2.8 km 1.8 mi 9.3 km 5.8 mi 6.6 km 4.1 mi 4.2 km 2.6 mi 2.3 km 1.5 mi 47 m 156 ft 32 m 104 ft 20 m 67 ft 13 m 43 ft 15 m 51 ft 12 m 40 ft 9.2 m 30 ft 6.7 m 22 ft 14 m 44 ft 11 m 35 ft 8.2 m 27 ft 6.0 m 20 ft 28 km 17 mi 20 km 12 mi 13 km 7.8 mi 7.1 km 4.4 mi 8.9 km 5.5 mi 6.3 km 3.9 mi 4.0 km 2.5 mi 2.2 km 1.4 mi 7.4 km 4.6 mi 5.2 km 3.3 mi 3.3 km 2.1 mi 1.9 km 1.2 mi 36 m 118 ft 25 m 82 ft 17 m 55 ft 11 m 37 ft 13 m 43 ft 10 m 34 ft 8.0 m 26 ft 5.9 m 19 ft 12 m 38 ft 9.4 m 31 ft 7.3 m 24 ft 5.3 m 18 ft
*The maximum range for the 24 dBi Grid antennas is a calculated value. Maximum ranges were only tested up to 110 km. Values in this table are based upon the use of normal power Tsunami MP.11 and 6m (20 ft) low-loss antenna cables with a diameter of 10 mm (0.4 in) on both ends of the antenna link, except the Window Antenna which is connected by the attached 2m (6 ft) cable. Table 1. Maximum Outdoor Range for FCC Products, Part 1 Chapter 2. Determining Range and Clearance 22 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Antenna Antenna Speed Mbps 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna 14 dBi Directional Antenna 12 dBi Directional Window Antenna 1 2 5.5 11 1 2 5.5 11 1 2 5.5 11 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna Range 22 km 14 mi 16 km 9.8 mi 10 km 6.2 mi 5.6 km 3.5 mi 7.1 km 4.4 mi 5.0 km 3.1 mi 3.2 km 2.0 mi 1.8 km 1.1 mi 5.9 km 3.6 mi 4.2 km 2.6 mi 2.6 km 1.6 mi 1.5 km 0.9 mi Clearance 28 m 92 ft 20 m 67 ft 14 m 46 ft 9.8 m 32 ft 11 m 37 ft 9.1 m 30 ft 7.1 m 23 ft 5.2 m 17 ft 10 m 33 ft 8.2 m 27 ft 6.4 m 21 ft 4.7 m 16 ft Range 17 km 11 mi 12 km 7.5 mi 7.7 km 4.8 mi 4.3 km 2.7 mi 5.4 km 3.4 mi 3.8 km 2.4 mi 2.4 km 1.5 mi 1.4 km 0.8 mi 4.5 km 2.8 mi 3.2 km 2.0 mi 2.0 km 1.3 mi 1.1 km 0.7 mi Clearance 22 m 71 ft 16 m 54 ft 12 m 40 ft 8.4 m 28 ft 9.6 m 31 ft 7.9 m 26 ft 6.3 m 20 ft 4.6 m 15 ft 8.6 m 28.3 ft 7.1 m 23.3 ft 5.6 m 18.3 ft 4.1 m 13.6 ft Values in this table are based upon the use of normal power Tsunami MP.11 and 6m (20 ft) low-loss antenna cables with a diameter of 10 mm (0.4 in) on both ends of the antenna link, except the Window Antenna which is connected by the attached 2m (6 ft) cable. Table 2. Maximum Outdoor Range for FCC Products, Part 2 Chapter 2. Determining Range and Clearance 23 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Clearance Clearance 14 dBi Directional Antenna1 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna1 Antenna Speed Mbps 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna1 Clearance Range 4.0 km 2.5 mi 2.8 km 1.7 mi 1.8 km 1.1 mi 1.0 km 0.6 mi 3.3 km 2.1 mi 2.3 km 1.5 mi 1.5 km 0.9 mi 0.8 km 0.5 mi 8.0 m 26.3 ft 6.6 m 21.8 ft 5.2 m 17.1 ft 3.9 m 12.7 ft 7.3 m 23.8 ft 6.0 m 19.8 ft 4.7 m 15.6 ft 3.5 m 11.6 ft 1 2 1 11 5.5 14 dBi Directional Antenna 12 dBi Directional Window Antenna 6.1 m 20.1 ft 5.1 m 16.8 ft 4.0 m 13.3 ft 3.0 m 9.9 ft 5.6 m 18.3 ft 4.7 m 15.3 ft 3.7 m 12.1 ft 2.8 m 9.0 ft 1Values in this table are based upon the use of low power Tsunami MP.11 and 6m (20 ft) low-loss antenna cables with a diameter of 10 mm (0.4 in) on both ends of the antenna link, except the Window Antenna which is connected by the attached 2m (6 ft) cable. 2Values in the table for the 7 dBi omni antenna are limited by the use of the low power Tsunami MP.11 at the side of the directional antenna. The 6m
(20 ft) low-loss antenna cables with a diameter of 10 mm (0.4 in) are used on both ends of the antenna link, except with the Window Antenna which is connected by the attached 2m (6 ft) cable. 9.1 m 30.0 ft 7.5 m 24.7 ft 5.9 m 19.3 ft 4.4 m 14.3 ft 8.2 m 27.0 ft 6.8 m 22.3 ft 5.3 m 17.5 ft 4.0 m 13.1 ft 7.1 m 23.2 ft 5.9 m 19.3 ft 4.6 m 15.2 ft 3.5 m 11.3 ft 6.4 m 21.0 ft 5.3 m 17.5 ft 4.2 m 13.8 ft 3.2 m 10.3 ft 5.5 11 2 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna2 Clearance Range 2.4 km 1.5 mi 1.7 km 1.1 mi 1.1 km 0.7 mi 0.6 km 0.4 mi 2.0 km 1.3 mi 1.4 km 0.9 mi 0.9 km 0.6 mi 0.5 km 0.3 mi Range 3.2 km 2.0 mi 2.2 km 1.4 mi 1.4 km 0.9 mi 0.8 km 0.5 mi 2.6 km 1.6 mi 1.9 km 1.2 mi 1.2 km 0.7 mi 0.7 km 0.4 mi Range 5.0 km 3.1 mi 3.5 km 2.2 mi 2.2 km 1.4 mi 1.3 km 0.8 mi 4.2 km 2.6 mi 2.9 km 1.8 mi 1.9 km 1.2 mi 1.0 km 0.6 mi Table 3. Maximum Range for ETSI/FR/JP Products DISTANCE ASSUMPTIONS AND EXPECTATIONS Indoor Tsunami MP.11a Assumptions Point-to-multipoint configuration using USA regulations for L and U bands, ETSI regulations for M bands Clear line-of-sight with no unusual multipath Sector antenna (17 dBi, 60) at Base Station with 20 feet LMR-600 cable Three-foot parabolic dish (31.4 dBi) at Subscriber Unit with 20-foot LMR-600 cable With a fade margin minimum of 10 dB to 2 miles, and 0.2 dB additional fade margin for every 0.1 miles, to 15 dB, availability is greater than 99.99%. Expectations 5.25 5.35 GHz 5.47 5.725 GHz 5.725 5.850 MHz 0.9 miles at peak performance (36 Mbps mode) Up to 2.8 miles maximum (6 Mbps mode) 0.85 miles at peak performance (36 Mbps mode) Up to 2.65 miles maximum (6 Mbps mode) 4.0 miles at peak performance (36 Mbps mode) Up to 11.2 miles maximum (6 Mbps mode) Chapter 2. Determining Range and Clearance 24 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Outdoor Tsunami MP.11a Assumptions Point-to-multipoint configuration using USA regulations for L and U bands, ETSI regulations for M bands Clear line-of-sight with no unusual multipath Sector antenna (17 dBi, 60) at Base Station with short 1 dB jumper cable Standard integrated antenna for Subscriber Unit With a fade margin minimum of 10 dB to 2 miles, and 0.2 dB additional fade margin for every 0.1 miles, to 15 dB, availability is greater than 99.99%. Expectations 5.25 5.35 GHz 5.47 5.725 GHz 5.725 5.850 MHz MP.11 Assumptions 0.5 miles at peak performance (36 Mbps mode) Up to 1.7 miles maximum (6 Mbps mode) 0.4 miles at peak performance (36 Mbps mode) Up to 1.6 miles maximum (6 Mbps mode) 2.8 miles at peak performance (36 Mbps mode) Up to 7.6 miles maximum (6 Mbps mode) Point-to-multipoint configuration using USA regulations for L and U bands, ETSI regulations for M bands Clear line-of-sight with no unusual multipath Sector antenna (17 dBi, 60) at Base Station with 20-foot LMR-600 cable Three-foot parabolic dish (31.4 dBi) at Subscriber Unit with 20-foot LMR-600 cable for USA 14 dBi panel antenna at Subscriber Unit with 20-foot LMR-600 cable for ETSI With a fade margin minimum of 10 dB to 2 miles, and 0.2 dB additional fade margin for every 0.1 miles, to 15 dB, availability is greater than 99.99%. Expectations 6.8 miles at peak performance (11 Mbps) for FCC 0.9 miles at peak performance (11 Mbps) for ETSI Up to 1.73 miles maximum (1 Mbps) for FCC Up to 3 miles maximum (1 Mbps) for ETSI Chapter 2. Determining Range and Clearance 25 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide DATA SPEED OF THE WIRELESS LINK By default, the family of Tsunami MP.11 products transmits at the highest available transmit rate. Because data transmissions at lower speeds can travel greater distances than transmissions at the highest transmit rate, the system lets you choose a lower data rate to increase the maximum range. For information about customizing the transmit rate of your system, consult the Tsunami MP.11/a Installation and Management manual. To assist you in determining the appropriate tuning settings, we have listed the range values that apply to the various transmit rates in Tables 1, 2, and 3. CABLE FACTOR The range value calculations listed in Table 1 on page 22 and Table 2 on page 23 were based upon antenna installations in which both antennas were connected to a 6 m (20 ft) cable. If this is the case in your situation, the Cable Factor for your installation is 100%. If you are using different cables, you must determine the Cable Factor from Table 4 below to calculate the probable range for your installation. One side of link Other side of link Cable Factor 6 m (20 ft) / 10 mm (0.4 in) 6 m (20 ft) / 10 mm (0.4 in) 100%
6 m (20 ft) / 5 mm (0.2 in) 15 m (50 ft) 22 m (75 ft) 6 m (20 ft) / 5 mm (0.2 in) 6 m (20 ft) / 5 mm (0.2 in) 15 m (50 ft) 22 m (75 ft) 15 m (50 ft) 22 m (75 ft) 15 m (50 ft) 22 m (75 ft) 22 m (75 ft) Table 4. Cable Factor 81%
81%
67%
66%
66%
54%
66%
54%
45%
Note: When Table 4 is used for countries that adhere to the ETSI regulations, note that the maximum ranges as listed in Table 3 do not always use cable factor 100%. This is due to local radio regulations and legislation that do not allow the use of the 6 m (20 ft)/10 mm (0.4 in) cables in ETSI countries France and Japan. The 6 m (20 ft) cables with a diameter of 5 mm (0.2 in) can be used with all antenna types. The cable loss of these cables equals the value of the 15 m (50 ft) cables. Use of the 6 m (20 ft) cables with a diameter of 10 mm (0.4 in) depends upon local radio regulations. Chapter 2. Determining Range and Clearance 26 CLEARANCE FACTOR Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide For optimal performance of your outdoor wireless link, the signal path between the two Base Unit and Subscriber Unit must provide sufficient clearance. Note: An outdoor wireless link that lacks sufficient clearance can suffer from poor performance, which is typically perceived as slow network response times. Although your Tsunami MP.11 equipment automatically retransmits every lost data frame due to an out-of-range situation or frame collision, the larger the number of retransmissions, the lower the throughput efficiency of your wireless link. This section explains how to determine the clearance that applies in your environment and (if applicable) the effect of insufficient clearance on the range of your outdoor wireless link. In Chapter 1. Preparing for Installation on page 8, we described the shape of the antenna beam as being bulged in the middle. Figure 3. Fresnel Zone If any significant part of this bulged zone is obstructed, a portion of the radio energy is lost, which can affect the performance of your wireless link in terms of maximum range and transmit rate. In Figure 3, you see two variables that determine the shape of the antenna beam, also referred to as Fresnel Zone:
a. The distance between the antennas b. The clearance required for optimal performance, where clearance should be interpreted as:
Vertical clearance above the ground and the highest buildings or objects in the signal path Horizontal clearance from neighboring buildings and objects in the signal path. For optimal range and throughput performance, you must ensure that your antenna installation provides maximum clearance in both horizontal and vertical direction. The minimum clearance for the various antenna combinations and distances is listed in the gray-shaded columns of Tables 1 and 2, where clearance should be interpreted as follows:
In open areas without obstacles in the signal path, clearance is measured as height above the surface of the earth. For example, if the antenna is mounted on the roof, this height includes the height of the building plus the height of the mast above the rooftop. Chapter 2. Determining Range and Clearance 27 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide In areas with obstacles in the signal path between the two antennas, clearance should be measured as height above the highest obstacle in the signal path. In dense urban areas, the clearance should be measured as height above the highest rooftop or any other obstacles in the signal path between the two antennas. Looking at the minimum clearance requirements as identified in Table 1 on page 22 and Table 2 on page 23, it may be that local authorities, the proprietor of the premises, or other reasons may prevent you from setting up an antenna mast that lets you meet the listed clearance requirement. In such situations, you may be unable to achieve a full line-of-sight clearance. At the same time, however, you may not even need full clearance, when the distance that your wireless outdoor installation must cover is less than the listed maximum range. To determine the effect of insufficient signal path clearance, you must determine the Clearance Factor as described below, and calculate its effect on the range for your antenna installation using the formula described in Determining the Outdoor Range on page 20. If the clearance for your antenna installation is equal to or better than the minimum clearance requirement identified in Tables 1, 2, and 3, the Clearance Factor for your installation is 100%. If your actual clearance is less than the minimum clearance identified in Tables 1, 2, and 3, you should use the diagram depicted in the following figure to determine the actual range that applies in your situation. Figure 4. Clearance Factor Diagram Note: Use the Clearance Factor diagram as a rule-of-thumb for estimating the probable range in case the clearance requirements are not fully met. In real life, using FCC-approved products, it is almost impossible to achieve the level of clearance for maximum range. For your convenience, we have included Table 5 on page 29 and Table 6 on page 30 to provide an example of conditions in which the more typical clearance is 10 m (33 ft). Chapter 2. Determining Range and Clearance 28 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Antenna Antenna Speed Mbps 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna 14 dBi Directional Antenna 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna Range Clearance Range Clearance Range Clearance 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna 14 dBi Directional Antenna 12 dBi Directional Window Antenna 1 2 5.5 11 1 2 5.5 11 1 2 5.5 11 26.2 km 16.3 mi 24.5 km 15.2 mi 21.8 km 13.5 mi 19.4 km 12.0 mi 19.0 km 11.8 mi 16.9 km 10.5 mi 14.4 km 8.9 mi 12.8 km 8.0 mi 17.3 km 10.7 mi 15.4 km 9.6 mi 13.1 km 8.1 mi 11.2 km 7.0 mi 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 19.0 km 11.8 mi 16.9 km 10.5 mi 14.4 km 8.9 mi 12.8 km 8.0 mi 12.0 km 7.5 mi 10.2 km 6.3 mi 8.7 km 5.4 mi 7.1 km 4.4 mi 10.9 km 6.8 mi 9.3 km 5.8 mi 7.6 km 4.7 mi 6.1 km 3.8 mi 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 17.3 km 10.7 mi 15.4 km 9.6 mi 13.1 km 8.1 mi 11.2 km 7.0 mi 10.9 km 6.8 mi 9.3 km 5.8 mi 7.6 km 4.7 mi 6.1 km 3.8 mi 10.9 km 6.8 mi 8.2 km 5.1 mi 6.7 km 4.2 mi 5.4 km 3.3 mi 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 9.5 m 31 ft Table 5. FCC Outdoor Range with 10 m 933 ft) Clearance, Part 1 Chapter 2. Determining Range and Clearance 29 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Antenna Antenna Speed Mbps 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna 14 dBi Directional Antenna 12 dBi Directional Antenna 1 2 5.5 11 1 2 5.5 11 1 2 5.5 11 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna Range 15.8 km 9.8 mi 14.1 km 8.8 mi 12.0 km 7.5 mi 10.2 km 6.3 mi 9.5 km 5.9 mi 8.1 km 5.0 mi 6.6 km 4.1 mi 5.5 km 3.4 mi km mi km mi km mi km mi Clearance 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft Range 14.1 km 8.8 mi 12.0 km 7.5 mi 10.2 km 6.3 mi 8.7 km 5.4 mi 8.1 km 5.0 mi 6.6 km 4.1 mi 5.5 km 3.4 mi 4.0 km 2.5 mi km mi km mi km mi km mi Clearance 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft Table 6. FCC Outdoor Range with 10 m 933 ft) Clearance, Part 2 Chapter 2. Determining Range and Clearance 30 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide EXAMPLES In the following sections, you find some examples of range and clearance calculations for point-to-point links and for a point-to-multipoint network. Point-to-Point Links Suppose you are installing a wireless point-to-point link between a Base Unit and a Subscriber Unit, where:
Both sites have been equipped with a 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna, connected via 6 m (20 ft)/10 mm antenna cables. The distance between site a and site b is 25 km (15.3 mi). The site is located in the US, which allows the use of FCC approved equipment. Figure 5. Calculating Point-to-Point Range Looking at Table 1, we learn that a high speed link between two 24 dBi Directional Grid Antennas may cover a maximum distance of 85 km (52 mi), provided that the signal path clearance is 180 m (590 ft) or better. The probable range for this example can be calculated using the introduced formula:
Range = Maximum Range x Cable Factor x Clearance Factor Calculating the Clearance Affect on Range In the example depicted in Figure 5, we see a set of trees in the signal path. Suppose that the clearance (c) between these trees and the signal path is only be 45 m (148 ft). Using a calculator, we can easily determine that this 45 m (148 ft) is about 25% of the required 180 m (590 ft) clearance for maximum range. Looking at the Clearance Factor Diagram, we can see that 25% actual clearance equals a Clearance Factor of 32%. If we apply this Clearance Factor to the range calculation formula, your probable range would become:
Range = 85 km (52 mi) x 32% x 100% = 27.2 km (16.6 mi) This might satisfy your requirements for high-speed data transmissions between the two units. However, this range is very close to the required range of 25 km. The margin should be higher to deal with bad weather conditions. Chapter 2. Determining Range and Clearance 31 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide If we base the calculation on transmissions at medium speed, your range calculation would look as follows:
Looking at Table 1, we learn that a medium speed link between two 24 dBi directional parabolic grid antennas may cover a maximum distance of 120 km (74 mi), provided the signal path clearance is 320 m
(1050 ft). As mentioned above however, our actual clearance is only 45 m (148 ft); 14% of the required 320 m (1050 ft). Range = 120 km (74 mi) x 25% x 100% = 30 km (18.6 mi) This result indicates that you have a better margin and can set the transmit rate of your system to medium speed for reliable wireless communications. Optionally, you can run Link Test to determine whether the high-speed option might provide reliable wireless links as well. Calculating the Cable Affect on Range We presumed that the antennas were connected by 6 m (20 ft) cables with a diameter of 10 mm (0.4 in) at both sites. If we replaced this cable at building b with a longer 22 m (75 ft) cable, we must look at the Cable Factor effect of this longer cable. Table 4 tells us that this new cabling combination would result in a Cable Factor of 67%. If we apply this Cable Factor to the range calculation formula again, the probable range would become:
Range = 120 km (74 mi) x 25% x 67% = 20.1 km (12.5 mi) This result indicates that the effect of this cable can prevent your wireless link from operating at both high and medium speed. In such situations you are advised to:
Relocate the unit to a location that lets you use a shorter cable length. Increase the height of the antenna on the mast, or install taller antenna masts, to increase the signal path clearance. Trade-off data speed versus range and recalculate the ranges that could be achieved at lower transmit rates. Alternatively, you can perform on-site diagnostic measurements to validate the results of this calculation. Consult the Tsunami MP.11/a Installation and Management manual for information about using the Link Test feature to perform on-site diagnostic measurements. Chapter 2. Determining Range and Clearance 32 Point-to-Multipoint Network Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Suppose you are installing a wireless point-to-multipoint network between one Base Unit and two Subscriber Units, as shown in the following figure, where:
The Base Unit in building c is connected to a 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Unit Antenna The two remote sites a and b have been equipped with a 14 dBi Directional Antenna All sites have been connected via 15 m (50 ft) antenna cables The site is located in the Europe, which requires you to use ETSI approved equipment3. Figure 6. Calculating Point-to-Multipoint Range For this type of outdoor antenna installation, you must determine the range for each link individually; that is, the range from building c to building a, and from building c to building b. Note:
In this example we demonstrate only the calculation for the link between building a and c; however, as different clearance factors may apply for each of these links, you are advised to calculate the actual range for each link individually when designing a real outdoor wireless link. In this example we assume that:
The antenna installation is to be installed in a dense urban area, where the distance between building a and building c is 0.5 km (0.3 mi). The actual clearance is 3 m (9.9 ft), being the height of the antennas on the mast. The probable range for this example can be calculated using the introduced formula:
Range = Maximum Range x Cable Factor x Clearance Factor Looking at Table 3, we learn that a high-speed link between a 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Unit Antenna and a 14 dBi Directional Antenna may cover a maximum distance of 1.4 km (0.9 mi), provided the signal path clearance is 5.6 m (18 ft) or better. Using a calculator, we can easily determine that the actual clearance of 3 m (9.9 ft) is about 75% of the required 5.6 m (18 ft), which equals a Clearance Factor of 70% (see Figure 5). The maximum range calculation in Table 2 was based on the use of:
6 m (20 ft) cables with a diameter of 5 mm (0.2 in) for the site with the 14 dBi Directional Antenna 6 m (20 ft) cables with a diameter of 10 mm (0.4 in) for the 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Unit Antenna. 3In France you may only use equipment based on the FR channel-set. Chapter 2. Determining Range and Clearance 33 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide In other words, the Cable Factor for the maximum range calculation, already represents a value of 81%. However, because the site as depicted in Figure 3 actually is using two 15 m (50 ft) cables, Table 3 identifies the Cable Factor as being 66%. Your actual Cable Factor is 66% Cable Factor divided by the maximum range cable factor: 66% 81% = 81%. If we import all this information into the range calculation formula, your probable range for high-speed transmissions would become:
Range = 1.4 km (0.9 mi) x 70% x (66% 81%) = 0.8 km (0.5 mi) For campus type environments, this range is probably sufficient to connect multiple buildings; however, if you must cover a larger distance, you can either:
Relocate the unit to a location that lets you use a shorter cable length. Increase the height of the antenna on the mast or install taller antenna masts to increase the signal path clearance. Trade-off data speed versus range and recalculate the ranges that could be achieved at lower transmit rates. Alternatively, you may decide to perform on-site diagnostic measurements to validate the results of this calculation. Consult the documentation that comes with the Tsunami MP.11 for information about using the Link Test feature to perform on-site diagnostic measurements. Chapter 2. Determining Range and Clearance 34 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Chapter 3. Antenna Cabling System SELECTING THE CORRECT CABLES To comply with local radio regulations, Proxim Corporation offers two types of Base and Subscriber unit that can be used to connect to an outdoor antenna installation: A 15 dBm Transmit power system and an 8 dBm Transmit power system The low-loss antenna cables are also available in various lengths and diameters:
6 m (15 ft) with a diameter of 5 mm (0.2 in) (The cable-loss of this cable equals the loss of the 15 m (50 ft) cable.) 6 m (15 ft) with a diameter of 10 mm (0.4 in) 15 m (50 ft) with a diameter of 10 mm (0.4 in) 22 m (75 ft) with a diameter of 10 mm (0.4 in) When you order the Tsunami MP.11 antenna equipment, make sure that you order cables that comply with the regulations that apply in your country. In case of doubt, consult the Proxim Corporation Sales office for more information. ETSI Regulated Countries The 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna is not allowed in ETSI countries, such as France. All other antennas and all channels 1...13 are allowed in ETSI countries, with some exceptions. Check the regulatory information to find the allowed channels in a specific region. FCC Regulated Countries Antenna 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna 14 dBi Directional Antenna 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna*
Antenna Cable Type 6 m (20 ft) 5 mm (0.2 in) 6 m (20 ft) 10 mm (0.4 in) 15 m (50 ft) 10 mm (0.4 in) 25 m (75 ft) 10 mm (0.4 in) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
* consult the following table for restrictions on channel selection Table 7. Certified Cable and Antenna Combinations FCC Chapter 3. Antenna Cabling System 35 Antenna 7dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna 14 dBi Directional Antenna 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Frequency Channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 10 Yes 11 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Table 8. Certified Channel and Antenna Combinations FCC Japanese Regulated Country The use of a Directional Antenna is not allowed in channel 14 in Japan. REGULATORY INFORMATION The Tsunami outdoor antenna solution must be installed and used in strict accordance with the instructions as described in this Tsunami Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide. Note: Radio approvals for the Tsunami outdoor antenna solution are valid only when using the exact combination of outdoor antenna cabling components and antennas as listed in this Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide. Using other combinations of parts and components in outdoor antenna solutions voids the radio type approval and may be in violation of local radio regulations. Proxim Corporation and its authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from failing to comply with these guidelines. Chapter 3. Antenna Cabling System 36 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide SELECTING THE CORRECT CONNECTOR TYPE All cabling components of the Tsunami outdoor antenna system come with standard-N type connectors as depicted in the following table. Cabling Component Standard-N Cabling Systems a Pigtail attached to MP.11 1 Proprietary connector 2 Stand-N male b Surge arrestor c Low-loss cable d Outdoor antenna Reverse polarity-N female on both ends Reverse Polarity-N male on both ends Reverse polarity-N female Table 9. Standard N-Type Connector Diagram Note that the gender of the connector is not determined by the connectors thread, but by its center pin; a solid center pin = male, a hollow pin = female. Note: Previously marketed Tsunami outdoor antenna systems in FCC regulated countries (such as the USA and Canada) were shipped with a different cabling system, identified by reverse polarity-N connectors
(depicted in the following table). Cabling Component Reverse Polarity-N Cabling Systems a Pigtail attached to MP.11 1 Proprietary connector 2 Reverse polarity-N male b Surge arrestor c Low-loss cable d Outdoor antenna Reverse polarity-N female on both ends Reverse Polarity-N male on both ends Reverse polarity-N female Table 10. Reverse Polarity-N Cabling Diagram Chapter 3. Antenna Cabling System 37 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Note that the gender of the connector is not determined by the connectors thread, but by its center pin; a solid center pin = male, a hollow pin = female. DANGER!
Outdoor antennas and antenna cables are electrical conductors. Transients or electrostatic discharges that may occur at the antenna (for example a lightning strike during thunderstorms) may damage your electronic equipment and cause personal injury or death to persons touching the exposed metal connectors of the antenna cable. To avoid damage and personal injury, the entire antenna cabling system must be grounded at all times. When installing, disconnecting, or replacing one of the cabling components, ensure at all times that each exposed antenna cabling system metal connector is grounded locally during the work. For example when mounting or replacing the surge arrestor:
1. First connect each of the connectors of the low-loss antenna cables to the grounding system. 2. Next connect the cable connector to the grounding system. 3. Finally connect the surge arrestor to the grounding system. Before you proceed, verify that each of the items is properly grounded and that the ground is not interrupted when disconnecting one of the antenna system components. Check with a qualified electrician if you are in doubt whether the surge arrestor and cable connectors are properly grounded. Only after you have verified that each of the items is properly grounded, replace the surge arrestor and disconnect the cables from the grounding system in exactly the reverse order of the previous steps. Chapter 3. Antenna Cabling System 38 OUTDOOR CABLING COMPONENTS Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide To connect your Tsunami MP.11 hardware to an outdoor antenna installation, the following cabling components are required:
Surge arrestor Low-loss antenna cables One of the outdoor antennas described Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas on page 41. When purchasing new Tsunami MP.11 products, each of these components is equipped with standard N-type connectors. When ordering separate components, for example as a spare part or replacement to previously purchased Tsunami outdoor antenna equipment, carefully read the note on the following page to ensure that you order components with an N-type connector that matches the other parts of your outdoor antenna cabling system. Surge Arrestor The surge arrestor (sometimes referred to as a lightning protector) can protect your sensitive outdoor router equipment from high-voltage surges caused by discharges and transients at the antenna. Figure 7. Surge Arrestor To mount the surge arrestor:
1. Determine a suitable location for the bracket (item b) as described in Chapter 1. Preparing for Installation. 2. Use the screws (item c) to attach the bracket to the wall. 3. Apply a ring-terminal to the ground wire. Use the bolt, lock-washer, and nut (item d) to connect the ground wire (item e) to the mounting bracket. Chapter 3. Antenna Cabling System 39 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide 4. The ring-terminal and ground wire are not included, but must be installed by a certified electrician familiar with national electricity and safety codes, according to the instructions described in Grounding the Antenna on page 16. 5. Insert the surge arrestor (item a) into the bracket as depicted in the preceding figure. 6. Use the hex-nut (item f) to secure the surge arrestor in its position. Ensure that the surge arrestor is properly connected to the grounding system. CAUTION!
To avoid damage to electronic equipment and your Tsunami MP.11 equipment always apply the surge arrestor between the outdoor antenna installation and the Tsunami MP.11 hardware or other computing device that is connected to the outdoor antennas. See Surge Protector on page 71 for surge protector specifications. Low-Loss Antenna Cable The low-loss antenna cable is available in three standard lengths:
6 m (20 ft) 15 m (50 ft) 22 m (75 ft) To ensure that you order the right cable length, determine the distance between the intended locations of the Tsunami MP.11 hardware and outdoor antenna carefully. See LMR 600 Cable on page 73 for cable specifications. Chapter 3. Antenna Cabling System 40 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas TYPE OF OUTDOOR ANTENNA EQUIPMENT As described previously, Proxim Corporation offers different types of outdoor antennas and cable lengths for your network design. The directional antennas provide maximum range, but due to their narrow beamwidth, these antennas require precise antenna alignment to achieve optimal performance. The higher the antenna gain, the more precise the alignment should be. Directional antennas are typically used to connect:
A Base Unit and a Subscriber Unit in a point-to-point link A Subscriber Unit in a point-to-multipoint network The omni-directional antennas have, by nature, an omni-directional azimuth pattern that makes them easy to install. There is also a gain beamwidth relation for omni-antennas: The higher the gain of the omni-antenna, the narrower the vertical beamwidth. In a hilly terrain, a 7dBi omni-directional antenna can be a better solution than the 10 dBi omni-directional antenna. The 12 dBi wide-angle antenna is a good Base Station antenna for hilly terrain. It combines a wide opening angle with relatively high gain. The mounting brackets allow tilting of the antenna. This antenna also is used when the amount of traffic in a cell is too high for a single Base Station with an omni-directional antenna. The wide-angle antenna lets you divide the cell into three sectors so that a Base Station can service each sector. Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 41 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide 14 DBI DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA General Description 14 dBi Directional Antenna is a high-gain Tsunami antenna for the 2.4 GHz frequency band. This antenna is typically used in combination with a Subscriber Unit. The 14 dBi Directional Antenna consists of a totally enclosed 16 element Yagi antenna that has been designed for point-to-point communications. It has a typical VSWR of 1.5:1 and is less than 2:1 over the entire frequency band. The gain is 14 dBi and the half-power beamwidth is 30 degrees. This antenna is normally mounted on a mast and is vertically polarized. Contents of the Antenna Box One encapsulated antenna Metal backing plate for the antenna 2 U-bolts, with 2 bolt heads (for mast mounting) 4 flat washers, and 4 nuts (to attach the antenna to the U-bolts or screws) Mounting the Directional Antenna You can mount the Tsunami 14 dBi Directional Antenna to a mast or a flat vertical surface, such as a wall. In most cases, mounting the antenna to a mast allows for more flexibility in adjusting the height and direction of the antenna to aim it at the opposite end of the wireless link. DANGER! When selecting an antenna location, ensure that the general precautions are met to avoid possible contact with electrical power lines. See the National Electrical Code for proper grounding of the antenna mast Mounting to a Mast To mount the antenna to a mast proceed as follows:
1. Verify if you have all the items listed below:
The Tsunami 2.4 GHz antenna The 2 U-bolts and bolt heads provided The 4 flat washers and 4 nuts provided A socket wrench to tighten the nuts 2. Note the arrows on the mounting plate; mount the antenna with the arrows pointing up. 3. Attach the antenna to the mast as depicted in the following figure, using the U-bolts and bolt heads, the Metal Backing Plate and nuts. CAUTION! Always place flat washers between heads (or nuts) and the plastic mounting plate. Avoid over-tightening the nuts and screws to prevent damage to the mounting plate. Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 42 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Figure 8. Mounting 14 dBi Antenna to a Mast Mounting on a Flat Surface For mounting the antenna to a flat vertical surface, you must provide a smooth surface for the antenna mount. On wall surfaces such as brick, block or stucco, use an intermediate surface such as a plywood board or metal plate between the wall and antenna. The intermediate surface must be of sufficient strength to prevent distortion of the antenna base when the mounting hardware is tightened. To mount the antenna proceed as follows:
1. Verify whether you have all the following items:
The 2.4 GHz antenna
(optional) an intermediate plate 4 plugs and screws 4 flat washers An electric drill A screwdriver to tighten the screws 2. Note the arrows on the mounting plate; mount the antenna with the arrows pointing up. 3. Attach the antenna using the intermediate plate, metal backing plate and flat washers. CAUTION! Always use flat washers between the screws and the plastic mounting plate. Avoid over-
tightening nuts and screws to prevent damage to the mounting plate. Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 43 Technical Specifications Mechanical Size Mounting method Connector1 Cable Type Color Electrical Frequency Range VSWR Nominal Impedance Gain Front-to-back ratio Half-Power Beamwidth Elevation Plane (vertical) Azimuth Plane (horizontal) Polarization Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide 44.7 cm (18 in) Vertical or horizontal mast with an outside diameter between 28 mm (1.102 in) and 41 mm (1.625 in) using U-bolts. Wall using plugs and screws Standard N (female) RG58A/U, 50 ohms low-loss coaxial White 2.4 GHz Less than 2:1, 1.5:1 nominal 50 ohms 14 dBi Greater than 20 dB 30.8 degrees 31.4 degrees Linear vertical (standard mounting) Horizontal (when mounted differently; see Mounting the Directional Antenna on page 42). Antenna Environment Operating temperature Wind/survival 1See also Selecting the Correct Connector Type on page 37. 2At least 100 km/h (62 mph) with 1.25 cm (0.5 in) ice.
-40 degrees C (-40 degrees F) to +60 degrees C (+140 degrees F) At least 200 km/h (124 mph)2 Table 11. Specifications 14 dBi Directional Antenna Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 44 Pattern Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Figure 9. Azimuth Plane (Horizontal), 14 dBi Directional Antenna Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 45 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Figure 10. Elevation Plane (Vertical), 14 dBi Directional Antenna Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 46 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide 7 DBI OMNI-DIRECTIONAL BASE UNIT ANTENNA General Description The Tsunami 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Unit Antenna is a broadband antenna for the 2.4 GHz frequency band featuring an omni-directional pattern with a nominal gain of 7 dBi. The pole-type antenna is enclosed in a weatherproof protective covering (radome). This vertically polarized antenna can be mounted to an antenna mast with an outside diameter of up to 65 mm (2.5 in). For detailed specifications see the table in this appendix. DANGER! When selecting an antenna location, ensure that the general precautions are met to avoid possible contact with electrical power lines. See the National Electrical Code for proper grounding of the antenna mast Mounting the Omni-directional Antenna You can mount the 7 dBi antenna to a mast only. This antenna uses vertical polarization, which is the most common type of polarization for omni-directional antennas. Mounting to a Mast To mount the antenna to a mast proceed as follows:
1. Verify that you have all the items listed below:
The 7 dBi Pole Antenna The O-shaped metal bracket The U-bolt, nuts and lock washers A small wrench to tighten the nuts 2. Position the bracket (item d in the following figure) to the top of the antenna mast (item b). 3. Place the U-bolt (item c) around the antenna mast, and slide its ends through the corresponding holes of the bracket. 4. Use the lock-washers (item e) and nuts (item f) to secure the bracket to the mast. Use a wrench to tighten the nuts. 5. Next, feed the antenna cable of the 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Unit Antenna (item a) through the hole of the mounting bracket. 6. As shown in the following figure, slide the antenna down until its metal base is enclosed by the mounting bracket. Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 47 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide 7. Use a wrench to tighten the bracket bolt (item g) to fix the antenna into its position. Figure 11. Mounting the 7 dBi Antenna to a Mast CAUTION! Avoid over-tightening the hose-clip nut to avoid damage to the clip and your antenna. 43.2 cm (17 in) Clamps to vertical mast with outside diameter between 35 mm (1.4 in) and 65 mm (2.55 in) Standard N (female) Technical Specifications Mechanical Size Mounting method Connector1 Electrical Frequency Range VSWR Nominal Impedance Gain Polarization Antenna Environment Operating temperature Wind/survival 1See also Selecting the Correct Connector Type on page 37. 2At least 100 km/h (62 mph) with 1.25 cm (0.5 in) ice. 2.4 GHz Less than 2:1 nominal 50 ohms y dBi Linear vertical
-40 degrees C (-40 degrees F) to +60 degrees C (+140 degrees F) At least 200 km/h (124 mph)2 Table 12. Specifications 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Unit Antenna Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 48 Pattern Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Figure 12. Azimuth Plane (Horizontal), 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Unit Antenna Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 49 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Figure 13. Elevation Plane (Vertical), 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Unit Antenna Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 50 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide 10 DBI OMNI-DIRECTIONAL BASE UNIT ANTENNA General Description The Tsunami 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Unit Antenna is a broadband antenna for the 2.4 GHz frequency band featuring an omni-directional pattern with a nominal gain of 10 dBi. This antenna is typically used in combination with a Base Unit. The pole-type antenna is enclosed in a weatherproof protective covering (radome). This vertically polarized antenna can be mounted to an antenna mast with an outside diameter of up to 51 mm (2.0 in). For detailed specifications see the table in this appendix. DANGER! When selecting an antenna location, ensure that the general precautions are met to avoid possible contact with electrical power lines. See the National Electrical Code for proper grounding of the antenna mast Mounting Instructions 1. Attach the ferrule of the antenna to the mounting bracket with two U-bolts as shown in the following figure. 2. Next use the remaining two U-bolts to attach the mounting bracket to the mast. Tighten nuts to 9 Nm (7 ft-
lbs). Figure 14. Mounting the 10 dBi Antenna Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 51 Technical Specifications Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Mechanical Size Mounting Method Connector1 Cable Type Length Color Electrical Frequency Range VSWR Nominal Impedance Gain Polarization Antenna Environment Operating Temperature 91.4 cm (36 in) Clamps to vertical mast with outside diameter between 35 mm (1.4 in) and 51 mm (2.0 in) Standard N (female) RG-303, 50 ohms low-loss coaxial 25 cm (10 in) Tan 2.4 GHz Less than 2:1 nominal 50 ohms 20 dBi Linear vertical Wind/survival (mph) 1See also Selecting the Correct Connector Type on page 37. 2At least 200 km/h (124 mph) with 1.25 cm (0.5 in) ice.
-40 degrees C (-40 degrees F) to +60 degrees C (+140 degrees F) At least 240 km/h (150 mph)2 Table 13. Specifications 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Unit Antenna Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 52 Pattern Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Figure 15. Azimuth Plane (Horizontal), 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Unit Antenna Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 53 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Figure 16. Elevation Plane (Vertical), 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Unit Antenna Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 54 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide 12 DBI DIRECTIONAL WIDE ANGLE ANTENNA General Description The Tsunami 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna is for the 2.4 GHz frequency band is a perfect match between the features of the:
Directional antennas Omni-directional antennas Typically used in combination with a Base Unit, this antenna can be mounted to an antenna mast with an outside diameter of up to 51 mm (2.0 in). Mounting Instructions DANGER! When selecting an antenna location, ensure that the general precautions are met to avoid possible contact with electrical power lines. See the National Electrical Code for proper grounding of the antenna mast. 1. Attach the U-bolts, tube mounting bracket, upper mounting bracket, and lower mounting bracket to the mast and spaced as shown in the following figure. Figure 17. Mounting the 12 dBi Wide Angle Antenna 2. Assemble the angle adjustment brackets to the upper mounting bracket with 1/2 inch bolts, lock washers, flat washers and nuts. 3. Next assemble the angle adjustment brackets and lower mounting brackets to the antenna base plate with 1/2 inch bolts, lock washers, and nuts. This adjustment is for 0 degree mounting. To adjust from 0 to -20 degrees, loosen the hardware at both ends of the angle adjustment bracket and slide it in the slot to the preferred angle. 4. Tighten hardware securely. The U-bolts should be tightened to 9 Nm (7 ft-lbs). Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 55 Technical Specifications Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Mechanical Size (LxWxD) Mounting Method Connector1 Electrical Frequency Range VSWR Nominal Impedance Gain 181 x 53.7 x 76 cm (21.1 x 7.1 x 3.0 in) Clamps to vertical mast with outside diameter between 35 mm (1.4 in) and 51 mm (2.0 in) Standard N (female) 2.4 GHz Less than 2:1 nominal 50 ohms 12 dBi Linear vertical Polarization Half-Power Beamwidth (at vertical polarization) Elevation Plane (vertical) Azimuth Plane (horizontal) Antenna Environment 13 degrees 125 degrees Operating Temperature Wind/survival (mph) 1See also Selecting the Correct Connector Type on page 37. 2At least 100 km/h (62 mph) with 1.25 cm (0.5 in) ice.
-40 degrees C (-40 degrees F) to +60 degrees C (+140 degrees F) At least 200 km/h (124 mph)2 Table 14. Specifications 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 56 Pattern Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Figure 18. Azimuth Plane (Horizontal), 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 57 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Figure 19. Elevation Plane (Vertical), 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 58 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide 24 DBI DIRECTIONAL PARABOLIC GRID ANTENNA General Description The Tsunami 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna is a broadband antenna for the 2.4 GHz frequency band. The grid-type antenna allows either horizontal or vertical mounting on an antenna mast with an outside diameter of up to 51 mm (2 in). This antenna typically is used in combination with a Subscriber Unit. Note: The 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna is not allowed in countries that adhere to the ETSI radio regulations (also France). In countries that adhere to the FCC regulations, use of this antenna is allowed only when operated with specific radio channels that can be set on the Tsunami MP.11. Kit Contents The 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna comes in two boxes with the following contents Feed Box:
1 Feed assembly 1 Sub-reflector 1 #6 x 1/2 inch stainless screw 2 Stainless 1/4 x 20 hex nuts 2 Stainless lock washers 2 Stainless carriage bolts Reflector Box:
2 Reflector halves 2 Stainless U-bolts 2 Mast clamps 1 Mounting L shaped bracket 4 Keps nuts (4) #8-32 machine screws 6 Stainless 1/4 x 20 hex nuts 6 Stainless lock washers 2 Stainless carriage bolts 1 Stainless flat plate washer Note: Prior to installation, or climbing the roof, verify if all parts and components are included. If any part is missing or appears to be damaged, consult your authorized Proxim Tsunami reseller. Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 59 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Assembling the Antenna 1. Assemble the two reflector halves inserting the four #8-32 machine screws through the front. Secure with the keps nuts on the back. Note: Loosely tighten all hardware until completely assembled and then tighten securely. Figure 20. Assemble the Reflector 2. Place the sub-reflector on the front of the feed and secure with the #6 x 1/2 inch stainless screw. 3. Determine the polarity of the antenna (see the following figure). Horizontal polarity, (the reflector ribs and the sub reflector at the front end of the antenna are aligned horizontally). Vertical polarity: (the reflector ribs and the sub reflector at the front end of the antenna are aligned vertically). Figure 21. Determine Polarization Polarity of the antenna must always be the same as the polarity of the antenna on the opposite side of the link!
4. Place the L bracket on the back of the antenna. 5. Insert two carriage bolts from the front to attach. Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 60 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Figure 22. Attach Mounting Bracket 6. Secure on the back with the lock washers and nuts. 7. Recheck the dipole feed assembly for the proper polarity. 8. Attach the feed on the front with 2 carriage bolts. Secure on the back with the lock washers and nuts. Mounting the Antenna DANGER!
Installation of antenna near power lines is dangerous! Before you proceed, make sure you have read and understood the safety precautions. 1. Before climbing the roof, make sure you have:
The assembled antenna. The U-bolts and mast clamps to mount the grid antenna to the mast. 2. Determine the desired alignment of the antenna:
For horizontal alignment you need both U-bolts and the 4 lock washers and nuts. For tilted alignment, you use only a single U-bolt and two lock washers and nuts. This mounting method lets you mount the antenna with an elevation in 10 degrees increments. CAUTION! Tilted alignment is not suitable for environments where the antenna is subject to high wind conditions. 3. Place the U-bolt(s) around the mast as depicted in the previous figure. 4. Slide the mast clamps over the U-bolts. 5. Slide the L bracket over the U-bolts and fasten the grid antenna to the U-bolts using the lock washers and nuts. Note: For tilted elevation mounting, use the flat plate washer on the adjustable tilt slot to mount and secure the antenna to the desired elevation angle. Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 61 Technical Specifications Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Mechanical Size (HxWxD) Mounting method Cable Type Cable Length Cable Color Connector1 Electrical Frequency Range VSWR Nominal Impedance Gain Polarization 61.0x91.4x38.1 cm (24x36x15 in) Clamps to vertical mast with outside diameter between 26 mm (1.102 in) and 51 mm (2.0 in) RG-8A/U, 50 ohms low-loss coax 60 cm (24 in) Black Standard N (female) 2.4 GHz Less than 2:1 nominal 50 ohms 24 dBi Linear vertical for standard mounting Horizontal when mounted differently (see Mounting the Antenna on page 61) 10 degrees 6.5 degrees Half-Power Beamwidth (at vertical polarization) Elevation Plane (vertical) Azimuth Plane (horizontal) Antenna Environment Operating Temperature Wind/survival (mph) 1See also Selecting the Correct Connector Type on page 37. 2At least 100 km/h (62 mph) with 1.25 cm (0.5 in) ice.
-40 degrees C (-40 degrees F) to +60 degrees C (+140 degrees F) At least 200 km/h (124 mph)2 Table 15. Specifications 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 62 Horizontal Pattern Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Figure 23. Azimuth Plane (Horizontal), 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 63 Vertical Pattern Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Figure 24. Elevation Plane (Vertical), 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 64 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide 5 DBI OMNI-DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA General Description The Tsunami 5 dBi Omni-Directional Antenna is designed for use in rugged environments. The antenna operates in the frequency range from 2400 to 1500 MHz. It is supplied with a special proprietary FCC plug and a low-loss cable. This antenna uses vertical polarization, which is the most common type of polarization for omni-directional antennas. Figure 25. 5 dBi Omni-Directional Antenna Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 65 Technical Specifications Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide 50 ohms low-loss cable 2.5 m (8 ft.) White 24 cm (9.5 in) Through a 19 mm (0.75 in) M-type hole using a mounting plate. Standard N female1 snap-on with 100% captive pin Mechanical Size Mounting Method Connector Cable Type Length Color Electrical Frequency Range VSWR Nominal Impedance Gain Polarization Antenna Environment
-40 degrees C (-40 degrees F) to +60 degrees C (+140 degrees F) Operating Temperature At least 200 km/h (124 mph)2 Wind/survival 1See also Selecting the Correct Connector Type on page 37. 2At least 100 km/h (62 mph) with 1.25 cm (0.5 in) ice. 2.4 GHz Less than 2:1 nominal 50 ohms 5 dBi Linear vertical Table 16. Specifications 5 dBi Omni-Directional Antenna Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 66 Pattern Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Figure 26. Azimuth Plane (Horizontal), 5 dBi Omni-Directional Antenna Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 67 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Figure 27. Elevation Plane (Vertical), 5 dBi Omni-Directional Antenna Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 68 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide HIGH GAIN PANEL DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA FOR 2.4 GHZ General Description The 12 dBi window antenna is a high-gain antenna for the 2.4 GHz frequency band. This antenna is typically used in combination with a Subscriber Unit. Mounting Instructions Package contents:
ANT24-1200 Antenna Extension Cable (3m) Mounting Kit Quick Installation Guide Wall Mount for Outdoor/Indoor Application A. Insert the plastic wall plug (2) into the wall B. Insert the screw (3) into the plastic wall plug through the antenna mounting hole and tighten Window Suction Mount for Indoor Application A. Insert the window suction cup through the antenna mounting hole. B. Turn the suction cup one quarter to lock it into position. C. Press the window suction cup onto the window glass. 1. Antenna body 2. plastic conical anchor 3. screw 4. window suction cup Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 69 Coverage Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Note: The bulged side of the antenna must point to the Base Station. Hardware Specifications Electrical Specification Frequency range Gain VSWR Polarization HPBW / horizontal HPBW / vertical Front to back ratio Downtilt Power handling Impedance Connector Cable Cable loss
*Exclusive of cable loss 2400 MHz 2700 MHz 12 dBi 2.0 : 1 Max. Linear, vertical 84 degrees 23 degrees 18 dB 0 degrees 20 W (cw) 50 Ohms N-Jack ULA-168; 200 cm 1.3 dB Pattern Environmental & Mechanical Characteristics Survival wind speed Temperature Humidity Lightning Protection Radome color Radome material Weight Dimensions 180 km/hr
-40 C to +80 C 95% @ 25 C DC ground white ABS, UV resistant 0.6 kgw 330 x 93 x 21 mm Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 70 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide SURGE PROTECTOR Electrical Specifications Part number Frequency range VSWR Insertion loss Impedance DC breakdown voltage Impulse breakdown voltage Insulation resistance Maximum withstand current Connector Connector type 5054-SURGE DC~ 5.875 GHz 1.25 : 1 Max.@ DC~4 GHz 1.45 : 1 Max.@ 4~5.875 GHz 0.5 dB Min.@ DC~5.875 GHz 50 90 V +/- 15%
1000 V 10000 M 5 KA N-Female to N-Female Mechanical and Environmental Specifications Size Weight Temperature range Salt Spray 61 x 27.5 x 23 mm 105 gw
-40~ +90 C MIL-STD-202 method 101D Mechanical Layout Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 71 VSWR and Insertion Loss Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 72 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide LMR 600 CABLE 50 FT Electrical Specifications Part number Frequency range Insertion loss Impedance Connector Connector type 5054-LMR600-50 DC~ 5.875 GHz 4.5 dB Max@ DC~5.875 GHz 50 N-Male to N-Male Mechanical and Environmental Specifications Size of carton Cable length For more detailed specifications, see Times Microwave LMR-600 specification. 115 x 375 x 375 mm 50 ft Mechanical Layout Unit: mm Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 73 VSWR and Insertion Loss Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide 2 1.9 1.8 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3 1.2 1.1 1 0
-0.5
-1
-1.5
-2
-2.5
-3
-3.5
-4
-4.5
-5 VSWR
VSWR #1:1:
#1:
VSWR #2:
#2:
0 1 2 3 Frequency (GHz) 4 5 6 Insertion Loss (S21) S21 0 1 2 3 Frequency (GHz) 4 5 6 Attenuation 50 ft Times LMR-600 Typical Attenuation Attenuation (dB) Frequency (MHz) 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 1.00 1.49 1.93 2.29 2.61 2.92 3.21 3.45 3.76 4.04 4.22 4.61 Chapter 4. Recommended Antennas 74 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide Support and Warranty TECHNICAL SUPPORT If you encounter problems when installing or using this product, consult the Proxim website:
http://support.Proxim.com/ for:
The latest software, user documentation and product updates The Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Alternatively, contact your local authorized Tsunami MP.11 reseller for Technical Support. Help us to help you by completing the problem report form and include it with your e-mail or fax when contacting Technical Support. You can find the problem report form (report.txt) on the CD-ROM, and on the support pages of the Proxim website. Addresses of authorized Tsunami MP.11 resellers are listed in the Contact & Ordering section of the Proxim website. WARRANTY AND REPAIR If it appears that your unit needs a repair or replacement, return the unit to your Dealer or Distributor in its original packaging. When returning a defective product for Warranty, always include the following documents:
The Warranty Repair card (last page of this appendix) A copy of the invoice or proof of purchase Problem Report Form Proxim Corporation extends a limited warranty from date of purchase of:
Twelve (12) months for the Tsunami MP.11 hardware Twelve (12) months for the media on which the software is furnished and the reproduction of the software on the media. Upon proof-of-purchase Proxim Corporation shall, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective item at no cost to the buyer. Defective items shall be returned to the dealer or distributor:
Freight prepaid. Accompanied by a copy of proof-of-purchase. Accompanied by a filled out Warranty and Repair card. This warranty is contingent upon proper use in the application for which the products are intended and does not cover products which have been modified without the sellers approval or which have been subjected to unusual physical or electrical demands or damaged in any way. This Warranty constitutes the sole and exclusive remedy of any buyer or sellers equipment and the sole and exclusive liability of Proxim Corporation in connection with the products and is in lieu of all other warranties, express, implied or statutory, including, but not limited to, any implied warranty of merchantability of fitness for a particular use and all other obligations or liabilities of Proxim Corporation. In no event is Proxim Corporation or any other party or person to be liable to you or anyone else for any damages, including lost profits, lost savings or other incidental or consequential damages, or inability to use the software provided on the software media even if Proxim Corporation or the other party person has been advised of the possibility of such damages. Support and Warranty 75 Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide TO BE FILLED OUT BY USER:
Product Description____________________________________________________________________ COMCODE (Product ID)________________________________________________________________ Serial Number________________________________________________________________________ Invoice Date (mm/dd/yyyy):______________________________________________________________ Name:______________________________________________________________________________ Title________________________________________________________________________________ Company ___________________________________________________________________________ Address ____________________________________________________________________________ City/State/Zip Code ___________________________________________________________________ Country ____________________________________________________________________________ Telephone __________________________________________________________________________ Fax ________________________________________________________________________________ TO BE FILLED OUT BY THE DEALER OR DISTRIBUTOR Dealer Name ________________________________________________________________________ City/State/Zip Code ___________________________________________________________________ Country ____________________________________________________________________________ Telephone __________________________________________________________________________ Fax _______________________________________________________________________________ Warranty (Yes / No) __________________________________________________________________ Comment __________________________________________________________________________ Return Approval Reference ____________________________________________________________ Reported Problem Problem Description Support and Warranty 76
1 2 3 4 5 | Regulatory Flyer | Users Manual | 385.35 KiB | September 05 2007 |
Visit http://support.proxim.com for the latest safety and regulatory compliance information for this product. IMPORTANT!
Tsunami MP.11 Models 5054, 2454-R, 5054-R, and 5054-LR Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information
(May 2007) Safety and Regulatory Information Copyright 2007 Proxim Wireless Corporation. All rights reserved. Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents: 5,231,634; 5,875,179;
6,006,090; 5,809,060; 6,075,812; 5,077,753. This users guide and the software described in it are copyrighted with all rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form by any means without the written permission of Proxim Wireless Corporation. Trademarks Tsunami, Proxim, and the Proxim logo are trademarks of Proxim Wireless Corporation. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners. Tsunami MP.11 5054, 2454-R, 5054-R, and 5054-LR Safety and Regulatory Guide P/N 73081 May 2007 2 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Safety and Regulatory Information Visit http://support.proxim.com for the latest safety and regulatory compliance information for this product. IMPORTANT!
Please read this document before installing and using your product, and save these instructions. Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information This document contains important safety and regulatory compliance information for the following products:
Product Family Base Station SKUs Subscriber Unit SKUs Tsunami MP.11 Outdoor and Indoor Wireless Point-to-Multipoint System Model No. MP.11(-R) 2411-BSU-AU 2411-BSU-BR 2411-BSU-EU 2411-BSU-JP 2411-BSU-UK 2411-BSU-US 5054-BSU-AU 5054-BSU-BR 5054-BSU-CN 5054-BSU-EU 5054-BSU-SK 5054-BSU-UK 5054-BSU-US(-WORLD) 2454-BSUR-AU 2454-BSUR-BR 2454-BSUR-CN 2454-BSUR-EU 2454-BSUR-SK 2454-BSUR-UK 2454-BSUR-US(-WORLD) 5054-BSUR-AU 5054-BSUR-BR 5054-BSUR-CN 5054-BSUR-EU 5054-BSUR-SK 5054-BSUR-UK 5054-BSUR-US(-WORLD) 2411-SU-AU 2411-SU-BR 2411-SU-EU 2411-SU-JP 2411-SU-UK 2411-SU-US 5054-SU-AU 5054-SU-BR 5054-SU-CN 5054-SU-EU 5054-SU-SK 5054-SU-UK 5054-SU-US(-WORLD) 2454-SUA-AU 2454-SUA-BR 2454-SUA-CN 2454-SUA-EU 2454-SUA-SK 2454-SUA-UK 2454-SUA-US(-WORLD) 2454-SUR-AU 2454-SUR-BR 2454-SUR-CN 2454-SUR-EU 2454-SUR-SK 2454-SUR-UK 2454-SUR-US(-WORLD) 5054-BSUR-LR-US 5054-SUR-LR-US 5054-SUA-AU 5054-SUA-BR 5054-SUA-CN 5054-SUA-EU 5054-SUA-SK 5054-SUA-UK 5054-SUA-US(-WORLD) 5054-SUR-AU 5054-SUR-BR 5054-SUR-CN 5054-SUR-EU 5054-SUR-SK 5054-SUR-UK 5054-SUR-US(-WORLD) 3 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Safety and Regulatory Information Please see the following sections for more information:
Safety Information (USA, Canada, & European Union) Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Modifications Warnings Information for Professional Installers Regulatory Compliance Certifications Summary 4 Safety Information (USA, Canada, & European Union) Safety and Regulatory Information Safety Information (USA, Canada, & European Union) These products have been evaluated to, and comply with, the U.S. and Canadian (Bi National) Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment, including Electrical Business Equipment, CANCSA C22.2, No. 60950-00 * UL 60950 3rd edition and IEC60950:1999, the Standard for the Safety of Information Technology Equipment. All products are intended to be installed, used, and maintained by experienced telecommunications personnel only. When using this device, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock, and injury to persons, including the following:
WARNING: These units are intended for installation in accordance with Articles 110-18, 110-26, and 110-27, 725, 800, and 810 of the United States National Electric Code ANSINFPA 70, and per the applicable Articles in the Canadian National Electric Code. Operate and install these products as described in this manual. Equipment must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation provided. Installation of these products in the end use must conform to local regulations and codes. Products are to be used with and powered by only the power injector provided. A 15-amp circuit breaker is required at the power source. WARNING: This equipment is intended to be grounded. A 10 AWG earthing conductor at a minimum is to be used for this purpose. Do not connect or disconnect the power cable to the equipment when the power injector is plugged into an AC power outlet. Servicing of these products should be performed only by trained personnel. Do not disassemble. By opening or removing any covers, you may expose yourself to hazardous energy parts. Incorrect reassembly of these products can cause a malfunction and/or electric shock when the units are subsequently used. No user serviceable parts; all repairs and service must be handled by a qualified service center. Do not insert any objects of any shape or size inside these products while powered on. Object may contact hazardous energy parts that could result in a risk of fire or personal injury. Do not remove or alter the Marking label provided on these products. To avoid the risk of electric shock from lightning, do not use these products during an electrical storm. When using these products with an external antenna, see the installation documentation provided with the antenna system. 5 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Safety and Regulatory Information Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance These products operate at the following frequencies in compliance with Part 15 of the FCC rules:
Model 2454-R: 2.4 GHz Model 5054, 5054-R, 5054-LR: 5.25 GHz - 5.35 GHz and 5.75 - 5.85 GHz Model 5054-R only: 5.47-5.725GHz Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. To comply with the FCC radio frequency exposure requirements, the following antenna installation and device operating configurations must be satisfied:
Product models using external antennas require professional installation. The antennas used for professional installation must be fixed-mounted on indoor/outdoor permanent structures with a separation distance from all persons of at least 46 cm (approximately 18 inches) for 2454-R models and 112 cm (approximately 44 inches) for 5054-R/-LR models. Model 5054 must be used indoors only and must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm (8 inches) from all persons. Antennas must not be co-located and must not operate in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications to this device that are not expressly approved by the manufacturer may void the users authority to operate the equipment. The correction of interference caused by unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user. The manufacturer and its authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from failing to comply with these guidelines. Warnings Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy; and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Connect the equipment to an AC outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help In some situations or environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the organization. These situations may, for example, include the use of wireless equipment on board airplanes, or in any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies on the use of wireless equipment in a specific organization or environment
(such as airports), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use this device prior to turning on the equipment. 6 Information for Professional Installers Safety and Regulatory Information Information for Professional Installers All products must be professionally installed, and the transmit power of the system must be adjusted by the professional installers to ensure that the system EIRP is in compliance with the limit specified by the regulatory authority of the country of application. See the following sections for more information:
Adjusting Tx Output Power Antenna Types and Maximum Gain Adjusting Tx Output Power NOTE: When the system is set to transmit at the maximum power, professional installers must ensure that the maximum EIRP limit is not exceeded. To achieve this, they may have to add attenuation between the device and the antenna when a high gain antenna is used. Use the following formula in combination with the table of EIRP limits in US and EU countries to calculate system transmit power (based on EIRP limits) of these countries:
Tx Power (dBm) = EIRP Limit (dBm) + FL (dB) G (dB) where:
Tx Power = Output power measured at the end of the required coax adaptor cable EIRP Limit = EIRP limits specified below FL = Coax loss (including loss of connectors) between the end of the white coax adaptor cable and the antenna G = Antenna Gain Transmit output power can be reduced by using the Transmit Power Control (TPC) field on the Configure > Interfaces
> Wireless screen. Refer to the Installation and Management Guide for more information. Band EIRP Limit (dBm) 2.4 - 2.4835 GHz (Point-to-Multipoint) 2.4 - 2.4835 GHz (Point-to-Point) USA and Canada 36 When G < 6: 36 When G 6, use the following equation:
20 20 EU 4.9 GHz*
5.15 - 5.25 GHz 5.25 - 5.35 GHz 5.47 - 5.725 GHz 5.725 - 5.850 GHz (Point-to-Multipoint) 5.725 - 5.850 GHz (Point-to-Point) 36 -
G 6
3 10 MHz channel: 26 20 MHz channel: 29 23 30 30 36 No limit NA 23 23 30 14 14 7 Information for Professional Installers Safety and Regulatory Information Antenna Types and Maximum Gain Professional installers should select only the antenna types listed in the following table, with gain not exceeding the listed maximum gain for each type. Frequency Band Antenna Type Maximum Gain (dBi) 2.4 GHz 5 GHz Omni Panel Yagi Parabolic Omni Panel Sector Parabolic 10 17 14 24 10 28.2 17 33.4 8 Regulatory Compliance Certifications Summary Safety and Regulatory Information Regulatory Compliance Certifications Summary Model 5054, 5054-R, and 2454-R Country Australia & New Zealand Brazil Canada China European Union Japan Mexico Philippines Safety - CB Report South Korea Taiwan USA Certification/Reference No. N11394 ANATEL Cert. No.:0267-05-1641 IC Cert. No.: 1856A-MP11RABG Safety: UL File No.: E243498 CMII ID: 2005AJ0190 CE 1313!
Radio Cert. Nos.: 003NY04140 0000 COFETEL Cert. Nos.:
RCPPR2405-077, TCPPR5005-040 Radio Cert. Nos.:
ESD-05021571, ESD-0502158C CB Lic. No.: US/8788/UL Radio Cert. No.: R-LARN-05-0042 DGT Cert. No: ETC094LPD0074 FCC ID: HZB-MP11R-ABG Safety: UL File No.: E243498 Model 5054-R-LR Country Canada USA Certification/Reference No. IC Cert. No.: 1856A-5054LR FCC ID: HZB-5054-LR 9
1 2 3 4 5 | Users Manual Part I | Users Manual | 1.69 MiB |
Part Number 68568r1 Tsunami MP.11 and MP.11a Version 2.1 Installation and Management Outdoor: BSU Indoor Outdoor: SU COPYRIGHT 2004 Proxim Corporation, Sunnyvale, CA. All rights reserved. Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents: 5,231,634; 5,875,179; 6,006,090; 5,809,060; 6,075,812; 5,077,753. This manual and the software described herein are copyrighted with all rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form by any means without the written permission of Proxim Corporation. TRADEMARKS Tsunami, Proxim, and the Proxim logo are trademarks of Proxim Corporation. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners. FCC COMPLIANCE This document provides regulatory information for the following wireless outdoor products:
Tsunami MP.11 2411 BSU, Tsunami MP.11 2411 SU, Tsunami MP.11 2411 RSU Tsunami 2411 QuickBridge 11 Tsunami MP.11a BSU, Tsunami MP.11a SU, Tsunami MP.11a RSU Tsunami MP.11/a Ruggedized BSU, Tsunami MP.11/a Ruggedized SU This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device must be professionally installed. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Proxim Corporation could void the your authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), you are encouraged to attempt to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. This device must be professionally installed. Antennas used for the MP.11a product must be fix-mounted on permanent structures with a separation distance of at least 1.12 meters from all persons during normal operation. Notices 2 MP.11 and MP.11a Installation and Management Contents Copyright..............................................................................................................................................................2 Trademarks ..........................................................................................................................................................2 FCC COMPLIANCE .............................................................................................................................................2 CHAPTER 1. OVERVIEW.........................................................................................................................................5 In This Release ....................................................................................................................................................6 Wireless Network Topologies...............................................................................................................................6 Active Ethernet.....................................................................................................................................................7 Identifying Network Topology and Equipment .....................................................................................................8 Finding a Suitable Location..................................................................................................................................8 CHAPTER 2. INSTALLATION..................................................................................................................................9 Installing the Indoor MP.11/a ...............................................................................................................................9 Installing the Outdoor MP.11/a...........................................................................................................................16 Installing Documentation and Software .............................................................................................................21 Aligning the Antenna ..........................................................................................................................................21 CHAPTER 3. MANAGEMENT OVERVIEW............................................................................................................23 MP.11/a IP Address ...........................................................................................................................................23 Web Interface Overview.....................................................................................................................................25 MP.11a Country Options....................................................................................................................................27 Command Line Interface Overview....................................................................................................................29 CHAPTER 4. BASIC MANAGEMENT....................................................................................................................32 Rebooting and Resetting....................................................................................................................................33 General Settings.................................................................................................................................................34 Monitoring Settings ............................................................................................................................................39 Security Settings ................................................................................................................................................41 Upgrading the MP.11/a ......................................................................................................................................42 Downgrading the MP.11/a..................................................................................................................................42 CHAPTER 5. WEB INTERFACE ............................................................................................................................43 Status .................................................................................................................................................................43 Configure............................................................................................................................................................45 Additional Interface Information .........................................................................................................................82 Monitor ...............................................................................................................................................................84 Commands.........................................................................................................................................................91 CHAPTER 6. COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ........................................................................................................94 Boot Loader CLI .................................................................................................................................................94 CLI Terminology.................................................................................................................................................95 Navigation and Special Keys .............................................................................................................................96 Commands.........................................................................................................................................................96 CLI Basic Management Commands ................................................................................................................102 Show and Set Parameters ...............................................................................................................................103 Show and Set Parameter Examples ................................................................................................................114 Tables...............................................................................................................................................................114 Country Code Table .........................................................................................................................................119 CHAPTER 7. PROCEDURES...............................................................................................................................122 TFTP Server Setup ..........................................................................................................................................122 Web Interface Image File Download................................................................................................................123 Configuration Backup.......................................................................................................................................123 Configuration Restore ......................................................................................................................................124 Soft Reset to Factory Default...........................................................................................................................124 Hard Reset to Factory Default..........................................................................................................................125 Forced Reload..................................................................................................................................................125 Image File Download with the Bootloader .......................................................................................................126 APPENDIX A. SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................................128 MP.11/a Hardware ...........................................................................................................................................128 Ruggedized MP.11/a........................................................................................................................................128 Broadband Subscriber Antenna.......................................................................................................................129 Contents 3 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Radio Specifications.........................................................................................................................................130 APPENDIX B. TROUBLESHOOTING..................................................................................................................132 MP.11/a Connectivity Issues............................................................................................................................132 Setup and Configuration Issues.......................................................................................................................134 APPENDIX C. SUPPORT AND CONTACTS .......................................................................................................136 GLOSSARY............................................................................................................................................................137 Contents 4 MP.11 and MP.11a Installation and Management Chapter 1. Overview The Tsunami MP.11 and MP.11a are flexible wireless outdoor routers that let you design solutions for point-to-
point links and point-to-multipoint networks. The Tsunami MP.11 and MP.11a are product families comprising several products (such as the MP.11 2411 Base Station and the MP.11 2411 Residential Subscriber Unit). For simplification:
All products that are part of the MP.11 Product Family are referred to as MP.11. All products that are part of the MP.11a Product Family are referred to as MP.11a. MP.11/a is used in this book when referring to both the Tsunami MP.11 and MP.11a product families. Some of the key features of the MP.11/a are:
The use of a highly optimized protocol for outdoor situations Routing and bridging capability Asymmetric bandwidth management Management through a Web Interface, a Command Line Interface (CLI), or Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) A ruggedized version that can be placed outside, close to the antenna, to significantly improve range and ease of installation Before installing and using the MP.11/a, Proxim recommends you review the following chapters of this manual:
Chapter 1 Overview (this chapter) Provides an overview of the content of this manual as well as wireless network topologies and combinations that can be built with the MP.11/a. Chapter 2 Installation on page 9 Provides detailed installation instructions for the MP.11/a. Chapter 3 Management Overview on page 23 Explains how to access the MP.11/a for configuration and maintenance. Chapter 4 Basic Management on page 32 Explains the most common settings used to manage the MP.11/a. Chapter 5 Web Interface on page 43 Depicts the Web Interface in a hierarchical manner, so you can easily find details about each item. Chapter 6 Command Line Interface on page 94 An alternative to the Web Interface. This chapter tells you how to obtain help about commands and how to handle strings, tables, and so on. The remaining chapters contain supplementary information you may not need immediately. If you are already familiar with this type of product, you can use the Quick Install Guide to install the MP.11/a. Chapter 1. Overview 5 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide IN THIS RELEASE Ruggedized, outdoor version of Tsunami MP.11/a Antenna alignment tool with audio support Reporting and logging of internal unit temperature Transmit Power Control support enhanced:
Tsunami MP.11 Version 2.0 Full (-0 dB) Half (-3 dB) Quarter (-6 dB) Eighth (-9 dB) Minimum (-10 dB) Tsunami MP.11 Version 2.1
-0 dB
-3 dB
-6 dB
-9 dB
-12 dB
-15 dB
-18 dB (minimum TPC level) WIRELESS NETWORK TOPOLOGIES You can use the MP.11/a to set up the following types of topologies:
Point-to-Point Link (below) Point-to-Multipoint Network (on page 7) A station is a radio set up as either a Base Station, a Subscriber Unit, or a Residential Subscriber Unit. A Base station can, depending upon its configuration, connect to one or more Subscriber Units. A Subscriber Unit, however, can connect only to one Base station. A link between two locations always consists of a Base and a Subscriber Unit. Point-to-Point Link With a Base and a Subscriber Unit (or a QuickBridge 11 kit), it is easy to set up a wireless point-to-point link as depicted in the following figure. Base Station Unit Subscriber Unit A point-to-point link lets you set up a connection between two locations as an alternative to:
Leased lines in building-to-building connections Wired Ethernet backbones between wireless access points in difficult-to-wire environments Chapter 1. Overview 6 Point-to-Multipoint Network MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide If you want to connect more than two buildings, you can set up a single point-to-multipoint network with a single Base station and multiple Subscriber Units, as depicted in the following figure. Up to 250 Subscriber Units (SUs) can be connected to a Base Station. If a Base Station already has 250 SUs or RSUs, a new SU cannot be connected to the Base. In this figure, the system is designed as follows:
The central building B is equipped with a Base Station, connected to either an omni-directional, or a wide angle antenna. The two other buildings A and C are both equipped with a Subscriber Unit connected to a directional antenna. ACTIVE ETHERNET The MP.11/a is equipped with an 802.3a/f-compliant Active Ethernet module. Active Ethernet delivers both data and power to the radio over a single Ethernet cable. If you use Active Ethernet, there is no difference in operation; the only difference is the power source. The ruggedized (or outdoor) unit has only an Active Ethernet connection with an integrated power injector. The Active Ethernet integrated module receives 48 VDC over a standard Cat 5 Ethernet cable. Maximum power supplied to an MP.11 is 11 Watts; maximum power supplied to an MP.11a is 36 Watts. The units typically draw less than 7.5 Watts. For the indoor MP.11/a:
You must have an Active Ethernet hub (also known as a power injector) connected to the network to use Active Ethernet,. The Active Ethernet hub is not a repeater and does not amplify the Ethernet data signal. The cable length between the Active Ethernet hub and the radio should not exceed 100 meters
(approximately 325 feet). If connected to an Active Ethernet hub and an AC power supply simultaneously, the radio draws power from Active Ethernet. Chapter 1. Overview 7 IDENTIFYING NETWORK TOPOLOGY AND EQUIPMENT MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide The MP.11/a can be used in various network topologies and combinations. The required equipment depends upon the wireless network topology you want to build. Make sure all required equipment is available before installing the MP.11/a. The ruggedized MP.11/a is designed for outdoor placement. You can connect the MP.11/a to an outdoor antenna installation with an optional antenna kit. See the appropriate Antenna Installation Guide for details. WARNING!
If you want to connect the MP.11/a to an outdoor antenna system, consult the appropriate manufacturers documentation for additional regulatory information, safety instructions, and installation requirements. FINDING A SUITABLE LOCATION To make optimal use of the MP.11/a, you must find a suitable location for the hardware. The radio range of the MP.11/a largely depends upon the position of the antenna. Proxim recommends you do a site survey, observing the following requirements, before mounting the MP.11/a hardware. The location must allow easy disconnection of the unit from the power outlet if necessary. The unit must not be covered and the air must be able to flow freely around the unit. The unit must be kept away from vibration, excessive heat, and humidity, and kept free from dust. The installation must conform to local regulations at all times. Note: The Tsunami MP.11/a Configure System window provides a selectable Country field that automatically provides the allowed bandwidth and frequencies for the selected country as well as, where applicable, Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) and Transmit Power Control (TPC). European installers should not add an antenna or an amplifier until the MP.11a Country is selected and the unit is rebooted. The output power level of the final channel selected by DFS scan can be found in the Event Log (see Event Log on page 44). Chapter 1. Overview 8 MP.11 and MP.11a Installation and Management Chapter 2. Installation This chapter describes the steps required to install and mount the MP.11/a, such as:
Installing the Indoor MP.11/a below Installing the Ruggedized MP.11/a on page 16 Installing Documentation and Software on page 21 Note: The installation does not cover the mounting and connection of antennas. See the applicable Antenna Installation Guide (MP.11 or MP.11a). If you are already familiar with this type of product, you can use the Quick Install Guide for streamlined installation procedures. INSTALLING THE INDOOR MP.11/a The indoor MP.11/a supports two power methodsan AC power outlet and Active Ethernet. The power supply accepts an input AC voltage in the range of 100-240 VAC. The following installation procedure provides instructions for attaching both the power and Ethernet connectors. In situations without an external antenna (for example, during a desk tryout), the antenna cable is not required. For your own safety, use only the power cord supplied with the unit. The metal case of the MP.11/a must be grounded through the ground connection that is provided on the metal case. The antenna grounding, the surge arrestor, and the MP.11/a housing must be bonded together and grounded in one location to avoid ground current loops. WARNING!
The Indoor MP.11/a Product Package Each indoor MP.11/a comes with the following:
One metal base for ceiling or desktop mounting (includes two screws) Mounting hardware Four 3.5 mm x 40 mm screws Four 6 mm x 35 mm plugs One power supply One Tsunami MP.11/a Installation CD-ROM containing:
Software Installation Package (starts automatically when CD is inserted in CD-ROM drive; can be started by double-clicking SETUP.EXE). Online Help Documentation (Quick Install Guide, Installation and Management manual, Antenna Installation Guides) ScanTool (a utility with which you can obtain or set the IP address of the MP.11/a for access; see ScanTool for more information). TFTP Server (which lets you transfer files across the network). Note: All software CD-ROMs that come with your Tsunami products include a readme.txt or readme.html file. This file contains information about the software version and drivers. You are advised to print and read the readme file prior to installing your Tsunami products, as it may contain additional information that was not available when this document was printed. Chapter 2. Installation 9 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Indoor Installation Procedure To install the indoor MP.11/a:
1. Unpack the unit and accessories from the shipping box. The MP.11/a kit contains the following items:
Shown in picture:
1 Tsunami MP.11/a unit 2 Mounting stand 3 Documentation and software CD-ROM 4 Wall mounting hardware 5 Power supply with power cord 2. The shipment also includes the Tsunami MP.11/a Quick Install Guide. If you intend to install the unit free-standing, or if you intend to mount it to the ceiling, use a Phillips screwdriver to attach the metal base to the underside of the unit. The metal base and screws are provided
(see Mounting the Indoor MP.11/a on page 12 for more information). 3. Unlock the units cable cover. To release the cable cover, press down on the cable cover lock located in the front center of the unit. Chapter 3. Management Overview 10 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide 4. Remove the cable cover. 5. Remove the front cover from the unit (the side with the LED indicators, shown in the figure on left); then remove the back cover (figure on right). 6. Connect the grounding wire to the MP.11/a using the Faston plug on the metal case, next to the power plug. 7. Connect one end of an Ethernet cable (not supplied) to the Ethernet port. The other end of the cable should not be connected to another device until after installation is complete. Use a straight-through Ethernet cable if you intend to connect the MP.11/a to a hub, switch, patch panel, or Active Ethernet power injector. Use a cross-over Ethernet cable if you intend to connect the MP.11/a to a single computer. 8. If you are not using Active Ethernet, or you want to connect the MP.11/a to Active Ethernet and AC power simultaneously, attach the AC power cable to the MP.11/as power port. To disconnect the power cable, slide back the black plastic fitting and gently pull the cable from the connector. Chapter 3. Management Overview 11 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide 9. Connect the free end of the Ethernet cable to a hub, switch, patch panel, Active Ethernet power injector, or an Ethernet port on a computer. 10. If using AC power, connect the power cord to a power source (such as a wall outlet) to turn on the unit. 11. Place the unit in the final installation location (see Mounting the Indoor MP.11/a below for details). 12. Replace the back cover, front cover, and cable cover. Be careful to avoid trapping the antenna, power, and Ethernet cables when replacing the cable cover. Attaching a Kensington Security Lock (Optional) If so desired, you can attach a Kensington lock to secure the cable cover into place. This protects the unit from unauthorized tampering. The MP.11/a enclosure includes a Kensington Security Slot for use with a Kensington locking mechanism. When properly installed, a Kensington lock can prevent unauthorized personnel from stealing the MP.11/a. In addition, the Kensington lock secures the cable cover in place, which prevents tampering with the Ethernet and power cables. The Kensington Security Slot is shown in the following figures (the figure on the left shows the slot with the cable cover attached; the figure on the right shows the slot with the cable cover removed). For information about Kensington security solutions, go to http://www.kensington.com . Mounting the Indoor MP.11/a The following are the mounting options for the MP.11/a:
Desktop Mount Wall Mount Ceiling Mount Desktop Mounting This procedure consists of attaching the metal base to the MP.11/a unit. See Indoor Installation Procedure on page 10. Wall Mounting Follow these steps to mount the MP.11/a on a wall:
1. 2. Identify the location at which you intend to mount the unit. If the MP.11/as power supply is plugged in, unplug it, 3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the metal base from the underside of the MP.11/a (if you have not already done so). Chapter 3. Management Overview 12 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide 4. Press down on the cable cover lock to release the cable cover . 5. Remove the cable cover from the unit. 6. Remove the front and back covers from the unit. 7. Place the back cover on the mounting location and mark the center of the three mounting holes. 8. Remove the cover from the wall and drill a hole at each of the locations you marked. Each hole should be 9. wide enough to hold a mounting plug (6 mm x 35 mm). Insert a plug into each hole.
(Four 6 mm x 35 mm plugs are provided; you need to use only three of these for wall mounting.) 10. Insert a screw into each of the mounting holes molded into the back cover.
(Four 3.5 mm x 40 mm pan-head screws are provided; you need to use only three of these for wall mounting.) 11. Insert the screws into the wall plugs; use a screwdriver to tighten the screws and attach the back cover to the wall. 12. Attach Ethernet and power cables to the MP.11/a unit, as necessary. 13. Snap the unit into the back cover, replace the front cover, and replace the cable cover. 14. Turn on the MP.11/a (see Switching On the Indoor MP.11/a on page 14). Chapter 3. Management Overview 13 Ceiling Mounting MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Follow these steps to mount the MP.11/a to a ceiling:
1. 2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to attach the metal base to the underside of the MP.11/a, if you have not already If the MP.11/as power supply is plugged in, unplug it. done so. See Indoor Installation Procedure on page 10 for an illustration. 3. Feed a mounting screw through each of the four rubber feet. The MP.11/a comes with four 3.5 mm x 40 mm pan-head screws. 4. Remove the screws from the rubber feet. 5. Turn the MP.11/a upside down and position the base against the ceiling where you want to mount the unit. 6. Mark the center of the four mounting holes in the rubber feet. 7. Set the MP.11/a aside and drill a hole at each of the locations you marked above. Each hole should be wide enough to hold a mounting plug (6 mm x 35 mm). Insert a plug into each hole. The MP.11/a comes with four 6 mm x 35 mm plugs. Insert the screws into the holes you made previously in the rubber feet. 8. 9. 10. Insert the screws into the mounting plugs. Use a screwdriver to tighten the screws and attach the MP.11/as metal base to the ceiling. Switching On the Indoor MP.11/a The MP.11/a can be powered by a power supply (just plug the power cord of the power supply into an AC power outlet), or by Active Ethernet (connect an Active Ethernet splitter to the Ethernet cabling). When the power is switched on, the MP.11/a performs startup diagnostics. When startup is completed, the LEDs show the operational state of the MP.11/a (see the following figure). Power Ethernet Link Wireless Link The following table shows the status of the LEDs when the MP.11/a is operational (the fourth LED is only used during Dynamic Frequency Selection on a Base Station; flashing green indicates scanning). Chapter 3. Management Overview 14 Power OFF GREEN AMBER RED Ethernet Link OFF GREEN BLINKING GREEN AMBER BLINKING AMBER RED Wireless Link OFF GREEN BLINKING GREEN MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Power is not present or is malfunctioning. Power is present; the unit is operational. The unit is initializing after reboot (less than two minutes); it cannot get a dynamic IP address or is in Forced Reload state when Ethernet LED also is amber.*
A fatal error in the unit. Not connected. Connected at 10 Mbps. Data is being sent. Connected at 100 Mbps, in Forced Reload state when Power LED also is amber*, or the unit is initializing after reboot (less than two minutes). Data is being sent. An error in data transfer. Wireless interface is up properly but no wireless link established. Immediately after connecting a wireless link. Data is being sent or the wireless interface is initializing after reboot (less than two minutes). There is a fatal error on the wireless interface. RED
* See Forced Reload on page 125. Continue with Installing Documentation and Software on page 21. Chapter 3. Management Overview 15 INSTALLING THE OUTDOOR MP.11/a MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide The outdoor MP.11/a radio contains a state-of-the-art wireless access point, high gain performance flat panel antenna, and Power-over-Ethernet (the sole means of power for the outdoor MP.11/a). For further protection, the Power-over-Ethernet connection has a built-in surge arrestor. The installation procedure on page 17 provides instructions for attaching the Ethernet connector. An antenna cable is required only when you use an optional external antenna. To ensure proper grounding, use the hole on the back of each radio and the provided grounding screws to attach a ground wire to each radio. Use proper wire grounding techniques in accordance with your local electrical codes. You also can mount the radios on tall, multi-section poles with guide wires. For these types of installations, you should consult professionals with experience. WARNING The Outdoor MP.11/a Product Package Each outdoor MP.11/a comes with the following, as well as a printed copy of the Tsunami MP.11/a Quick Install Guide. 1. One MP.11/a Ruggedized Radio with integrated antenna (SU) or with an external antenna connection
(BSU) 2. Mounting hardware to attach to radio for mounting 3. Hardware for pole mounting 4. Hardware for wall mounting 5. One RJ11 to DB9 connector for serial connection 6. One Tsunami MP.11/a Version 2.1 Installation CD containing:
Documentation ScanTool FTP Server Installation Package 7. Power Brick and cord Notes:
All software CD-ROMs that come with your Tsunami products include a readme.txt or readme.html file. This file contains information about the software version and drivers. You are advised to print and read the readme file prior to installing your Tsunami products, as it may contain additional information that was not available when this document was printed. Cables are not provided with the MP.11/a. Chapter 3. Management Overview 16 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Outdoor MP.11/a Installation Procedure Before mounting the MP.11/a, note the MAC address and the serial number of the unit along with the name of the site at which the unit was installed. Keep this information in a safe place. The MAC address is required to add the Subscriber Unit to a Base Station database; the serial number is required to obtain support from Proxim. The outdoor MP.11/a is designed to directly mount to a pole. Using the supplied brackets and hardware, you can mount the radio to a 1-1/4 inch to 3-inch pole (outside diameter). Using just one of the pole mounting brackets, you can mount the radio to a wall or other flat surface. To install the outdoor MP.11/a:
1. Unpack the unit and accessories from the shipping box. 2. Attach a Cat5e cable (not provided) to the Power-over-Ethernet port on the back of the radio (see the following figure). 3. Screw mounting piece (A) to the back of the radio unit with screws and washers (B) as shown:
A B There is an arrow on the back of the radio that indicates the direction to mount for vertical polarization. Mount the radio with the following portion of the bracket in the position circled in the following figure for vertical alignment. Chapter 3. Management Overview 17 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide For horizontal alignment, mount the radio as shown below:
4. Attach bracket connector (C) to mounting piece (A) with the screw provided, as shown below. This extension piece gives the radio more possible tilt, letting you more accurately adjust for elevation. 5. Attach bracket connector (C) to bracket (E) with the nut and screw provided. 6. To mount to a pole, insert screws through bracket F and fasten around pole to bracket E and secure. Chapter 3. Management Overview 18 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide To wall-mount the outdoor MP.11/a, mount bracket (E) to wall using 4 screws provided, as shown:
Switching On the Outdoor MP.11/a You can power on the outdoor MP.11/a by connecting the Active Ethernet splitter to the Ethernet cabling. When the power is switched on, the MP.11/a performs startup diagnostics. When startup is complete, the LEDs show the operational state of the MP.11/a (see the following figure). LEDsPower / Ethernet and Wireless Connections Power & Ethernet Link GREEN BLINKING GREEN Power is on, the radio is up, and the Ethernet link is also up.. Power is on, the radio is coming up and the Ethernet is down. GREEN BLINKING GREEN RF (Wireless) Link A wireless link has been established.. A wireless link is being established.. Recommended Power and Ethernet Cable Function Type Impedance Recommended cables Maximum Distance Connector type, radio end Connector type, power & Ethernet adapter end Recommended Cable Power (DC) and Ethernet connection Cat 5e, UV shielded 100 ohms 4 UTP, 24 AWG, UL rated 330 feet / 100 meters RJ-45 female, weatherized using weatherproof connector 8-pin DIN male connector with solder cup/cover or crimp pins to power & Ethernet adapter Chapter 3. Management Overview 19 Serial Connection MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide The serial connection is made with an RJ-11 to DB-9 connector (also referred to as a dongle). Connect the RJ-11 end to the radio and connect the serial (DB-9) end to your PC to assist you in aligning the antenna and to issue CLI commands. External Antenna Connection The integrated antenna is supported on Subscriber Units only; the Base Station has an external antenna connector and no integrated antenna. For more information about external antennas, see the Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide and Tsunami MP.11a Antenna Installation Guide. Note: The window antenna documented in the antenna installation guides does not apply to the outdoor MP.11/a. Continue with Installing Documentation and Software. Chapter 3. Management Overview 20 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide INSTALLING DOCUMENTATION AND SOFTWARE The MP.11/a also comes with documentation and software on a CD-ROM. To install the documentation and software on a computer or network:
1. Place the CD-ROM in a CD-ROM drive. The installer normally starts automatically. You can also start the installer manually by running the setup.exe program in the root directory of the CD-ROM. 2. Click the Install Help and Software button and perform the necessary steps. The CD-ROM contains the following documentation and software:
Online help This is the help for the Web Interface. It is stored on your computer or network so it is always available. Documentation Documentation also is available in an electronic (PDF) form, including the Tsunami MP.11/a Installation and Management Guide, Tsunami MP.11/a Antenna Installation Guide, and Tsunami MP.11/a Quick Install Guide. ScanTool The ScanTool program is a utility with which you can obtain or set the IP address of the MP.11/a for management access. See Setting the IP Address Manually on page 24 for details. TFTP Server The TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) server lets you transfer files across the network. You can download configuration and license files, as well as image files for embedded software upgrades, and you can upload files from the MP.11/a for backup. Here downloading means transferring files to the MP.11/a and uploading means transferring files in the opposite direction. ALIGNING THE ANTENNA Antenna alignment is a process to physically align the antenna of the radio receiver or the transmitter to have the best possible radio link established between them. The antenna alignment process usually is performed during installation and after major repairs. The outdoor MP.11/a has an audible antenna alignment tool that can be activated by plugging in the supplied serial dongle (supplied with every Base Station) or by issuing the CLI command for antenna alignment. The CLI command causes both audible and numerical feedback as the CLI shows the running SNR values twice a second. The output from the beeper for antenna alignment consists of short beeps with a variable interval. The interval changes with the SNR level to assist in correctly aligning the antenna. An increase in signal level is indicated by a shorter interval between beeps; a reduction in signal level results in beeps further apart. To allow for precise antenna alignment, small changes in SNR result in large changes in the beep period. The alignment process averages the SNR, which is represented by an average length beep. When a higher SNR is received, the beep period is made shorter, dependent upon the difference to the average. A lower SNR results in a longer period between beeps. The first five steps are represented by a large change and all following steps are a small change. This acts as if a magnifying glass is centered around the average SNR and the values next to the average are significantly different. Chapter 3. Management Overview 21 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide When the antenna is aimed, the beep can easily be heard if the SNR is rising (shorter period, higher frequency) or falling (longer period). When the position of the antenna has been changed, the SNR averaging settles at the new value and the beeping returns to the average length so the antenna can again be aimed towards rising SNR. Aiming is complete if moving in any direction results in a falling SNR value, which can be heard as longer periods between beeps. Notes:
Antenna alignment for the Base Station is useful only for a point-to-point link. The range of the average SNR must be limited to values from 0 to 48. Anything over 48 is capped at 48. AAD is automatically disabled 30 minutes after it is enabled to remove the load of extra messages on the wireless interface. The default telnet timeout is 900 seconds (15 minutes). If AAD must run for the entire 30 minutes, change the default telnet timeout value greater than 30 minutes (greater than 1800 seconds). This restriction is for telnet connections only and not for the serial interface. The serial interface never times out. Antenna Alignment Commands set aad enable local Enables display of the local SNR. Local SNR is the SNR measured by the receiver at the near end. set aad enable remote Enables display of the remote SNR. Remote SNR is the SNR as measured by the receiver at the far end. set aad enable average Enables display of the average SNR. The average SNR is the average of the local and remote SNR. set aad disable Disables Antenna Alignment Display (Ctrl-C also disables AAD). Chapter 3. Management Overview 22 MP.11 and MP.11a Installation and Management Chapter 3. Management Overview This chapter describes how to gain access to the MP.11/a for configuration and management. Three interfaces are provided for viewing or changing the MP.11/as settings:
Web Interface The Web Interface is a graphical interface based upon Web pages from a built-in Web server. Command Line Interface The Command Line Interface (CLI) is a text-based interface using typed commands. SNMP You also can use the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) to configure and manage the MP.11/a. See SNMP on page 60 for setup procedures. Connecting to the MP.11/a requires a direct physical connection with an Ethernet cross-over cable, a serial RS-
232C cable, or a connection through the network. For the serial connection, you can use only the CLI to configure and manage the MP.11/a. The other connections allow the use of the Web Interface, SNMP, and the CLI. These other connections require the IP address of the MP.11/a before you can use the Web Interface, SNMP, or the CLI. See MP.11/a IP Address below for more information. You can also manage the MP.11/a without an IP address by accessing the MP.11/a through the serial port with a terminal program such as HyperTerminal (see HyperTerminal Connection Properties on page 31). MP.11/a IP ADDRESS Because each network is different, an IP address suitable for your network must be assigned to the MP.11/a. You must have the IP address of the MP.11/a to configure and manage it through its Web Interface, SNMP, or the CLI. You can manage other basic parameters can be managed as well. ScanTool is included on the documentation and software CD-ROM to assist you in determining and changing the MP.11/as IP address. The MP.11/a can use either a static or dynamic IP address. Static IP address The MP.11/a uses the IP address you have set manually. Dynamic IP address The MP.11/a receives its IP address from a DHCP server when it is switched on or rebooted. The MP.11/a either obtains its IP address automatically through DHCP or it must be set manually. With ScanTool, you can find out the current IP address of the MP.11/a and, if necessary, change it so that is appropriate for your network. The MP.11/a is shipped with the static IP address 10.0.0.1 configured. Chapter 2. Installation 23 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Setting the IP Address If you want to set the IP address:
1. Run ScanTool on a computer connected to the same LAN subnet as the MP.11/a, or directly connected to the MP.11/a with a cross-over Ethernet cable. ScanTool scans the subnet for MP.11/a units and displays the units it finds in the main window. The following figure shows an example of the main window. If necessary, click Rescan to re-scan the subnet and update the display. 2. Select the MP.11/a for which you want to set the IP address and click Change. The Change dialog window is displayed, as shown in the following window. 3. To set the IP address manually, ensure that Static is selected as the IP Address Type and fill in the IP Address and Subnet Mask suitable for the LAN subnet to which the MP.11/a is connected. To set the IP address dynamically, ensure that Dynamic is selected as the IP Address Type and fill In the IP Address and Subnet Mask suitable for the LAN subnet to which the MP.11/a is connected. 4. Enter the Read/Write Password (the default value is public) and click OK to confirm your changes. The respective MP.11/a reboots to make the changes effective. Chapter 3. Management Overview 24 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Note: The asterisks displayed when you enter the password are a set number that does not necessarily equal the number of characters in the actual password string. This is intended for added security. WEB INTERFACE OVERVIEW The Web Interface provides a graphical user interface through which you can easily configure and manage the MP.11/a. This section describes only how to access the Web Interface; the Web Interface itself described in Chapter 4. Basic Management on page 32 and Chapter 5. Web Interface on page 43. To use the Web Interface, you need only the IP address of the MP.11/a. (See MP.11/a IP Address on page 23 for details.) Note:
If the connection is slow or you are not able to connect, use the Internet Explorer Tools option to ensure you are not using a proxy server for the connection with your Web browser. To access the MP.11/a with a Web browser, start your Web browser and enter the IP address of the MP.11/a. The Web address should appear as http://<ip address> (for example, http://10.0.0.1). A window such as the following is displayed. Do not fill in the User Name, enter only the password and click OK. The default password is public. Note: The asterisks displayed when you enter the password are a set number that does not necessarily equal the number of characters in the actual password string, which is intended for added security. The System Status window of the Web Interface is displayed. Chapter 3. Management Overview 25 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide You now have access to the MP.11/a Web Interface. To view or change basic system information, click the Configure button on the left side of the Web interface window, then click the System tab. Chapter 3. Management Overview 26 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide MP.11a COUNTRY OPTIONS Selecting a Country The Tsunami MP.11/a Configure System window provides a selectable Country field that automatically provides the allowed bandwidth and frequencies for the selected country as well as, where applicable, Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) and Transmit Power Control (TPC). MP.11/a kits sold in the United States are pre-configured to scan and display only the outdoor frequencies permitted by the FCC. No other Country selections, channels, or frequencies may be configured. MP.11/a kits sold outside of the United States and Canada support the selection of a Country by the professional installer. Click the Configure button and the System tab; then select the appropriate country for your regulatory domain from the Country drop-down box. Continue configuring settings as desired; then click the Commands button and the Reboot tab to save and activate the settings. Alternatively, if you want to save the configuration settings to the flash memory but not activate the settings, use the save config CLI command. The Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) and Transmit Power Control (TPC) features are enabled automatically when you choose a country with a regulatory domain that requires them. The Country selection pre-selects and displays only the allowed frequencies for the selected country. Dynamic Frequency Selection A country selection with DFS enabled causes the MP.11a Base Station to come up in scan mode. It scans the available frequencies and channels to avoid radar and select a channel with the strongest signal. Note: Scanning is performed only on the frequencies allowed in the regulatory domain of the country selected, when it is required for radar detection and avoidance. The MP.11a Subscriber Unit also comes up in scan mode to scan all available frequencies to find a Base Station with which it can register. Scanning may take several minutes. Scanning is indicated by a flashing green LED
(the fourth LED in the case of the Base Station; the Wireless LED for an SU). When the link is established, the fourth LED on the BSU goes off. The third LED on the SU continues flashing until it establishes a WORP link. After establishing a WORP link, the LED stops flashing and continues to glow green. See Dynamic Frequency Selection on page 82 for more information. Transmit Power Control Transmit Power is a manual configuration selection to reduce the output power in the radio. The output power level for the operating frequency can be found in the Event Log of the MP.11a embedded software. By default, the Tsunami MP.11a lets you transmit at the maximum output power for the country or regulatory domain and frequency selected. However, with Transmit Power Control (TPC), you can adjust the output power of the unit to a lower level in order to reduce interference from neighboring devices or to use a higher gain antenna without violating the maximum radiated output power allowed for your country. Also, most countries in the ETSI regulatory domain require the transmit power to be set to a 6 dB lower value than the maximum allowed EIRP when link quality permits. You can see your radios current output power for the selected frequency in the event log. Chapter 3. Management Overview 27 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide The event log shows the selected power for all data rates, so you must look up the relevant data rate to determine the actual power level. For example, the event log shows:
0 00:00:08INFO- Final Power 6 Mb 20 dBm, MaxRD 30 dBm, MaxEdge 31 dBm, -TPC Scale 0 dBm Ant Red 0 dBm*
0 00:00:09INFO- 20 dBm | 20 dBm | 20 dBm | 20 dBm | 20dBm | 19 dBm This shows that the output power is set at 20 dBm for the data rate 6, 9, 12, 18, or 24 Mbps or at 19 dBm when the selected data rate is 36 Mbps. The first line shows that 6 Mbps is selected, so the transmit power is 20 dBm. Note: This feature only lets you decrease your output power; it does not let you increase your output power beyond the maximum allowed defaults for your frequency and country. See Configure: 1) System on page 45 to configure Country, Dynamic Frequency Selection, and Transmit Power Control. Chapter 3. Management Overview 28 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide COMMAND LINE INTERFACE OVERVIEW The Command Line Interface (CLI) is a text-based interface with which you can configure and manage the MP.11/a by entering commands. This section describes only how to access the CLI; the interface itself is described in Chapter 6. Command Line Interface on page 94. The CLI can be used as an alternative to the Web Interface. You can, for example, quickly change the settings of the MP.11/a by running commands in a batch. The CLI is accessible through the:
Ethernet port connected through the network or with a cross-over Ethernet cable between the computer and the MP.11/a Serial port of the MP.11/a Ethernet Port To use the CLI through the Ethernet port, you must have a telnet program and the IP address of the MP.11/a. On most computers, the telnet program is called telnet. See MP.11/a IP Address on page 23 for details. To access the MP.11/a through Ethernet:
1. From the Windows Start menu, select Run; enter cmd and click OK. 2. Enter telnet followed by the IP address, as shown in the following sample DOS command window. 3. You are prompted for your password:
Please enter password:
4. Enter the password (the default password is public). You can now use the CLI. Chapter 3. Management Overview 29 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Serial Port You can also use the CLI through the serial port of the MP.11/a with a terminal program such as HyperTerminal. You can use this method for cases in which other access methods cannot be used, or when the IP address of the MP.11/a cannot be set or retrieved. Also see Hard Reset to Factory Default on page 125. To use the CLI through the serial port of the MP.11/a the following items are required:
A serial cable with a male and a female DB-9 connector. The serial cable must have a minimum of the following connections:
Female Connector Male Connector Pin 2 ---------------- Pin 2 Pin 3 ---------------- Pin 3 Pin 5 ---------------- Pin 5 An ASCII terminal program, such as HyperTerminal. Proxim recommends you switch off the MP.11/a and the computer before connecting or disconnecting the serial cable. Note: For the outdoor MP.11/a, you can connect to the serial port by connecting the included RJ-11 to DB-9 connector from the radio (RJ-11 connection) to your computers serial port (DB-9 connection). To access the MP.11/a through the serial port:
1. Start your terminal program. 2. Set the following connection properties; then connect:
COM port (For example, COM1 or COM2, to which the MP.11/a serial port is connected.) Bits per second 9600 Data bits 8 Stop bits 1 Flow control none Parity none Line ends carriage return with line feed 3. Press the RESET button on the indoor MP.11/a unit. For the outdoor MP.11/a unit, disconnect and reconnect power. The terminal program displays Power On Self Test (POST) messages. After approximately 90 seconds it displays:
Please enter password:
4. Enter the password. The default password is public. You can now use the CLI. Chapter 3. Management Overview 30 HyperTerminal Connection Properties MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide The serial connection properties can be found in HyperTerminal as follows:
1. Start HyperTerminal and select Properties from the File menu. 2. In the Connect using: drop-down list, select Direct to Com1 (depending upon the COM port you use) and click Configure; a window such as the following is displayed. 3. Make the necessary changes and click OK. 4. From the Hyperterminal Properties window, click the Settings tab; then click ASCII Setup; a window such as the following is displayed. 5. Ensure that Send line ends with line feeds is selected and click OK. 6. Click OK again to exit the Properties window. HyperTerminal is now correctly configured. Chapter 3. Management Overview 31 MP.11 and MP.11a Installation and Management Chapter 4. Basic Management This chapter describes the initial setup of the MP.11/a, which lets you configure and monitor the basic features of the MP.11/a. In most cases, configuring these basic features is sufficient. A full overview of the Web Interface is provided in Chapter 5. Web Interface on page 43; Glossary on page 137 provides a brief explanation of the terms used. For CLI commands you can use for basic management, see Command Line Interface on page 94. The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
Rebooting and Resetting on page 33 General Settings on page 34 Monitoring Settings on page 39 Security Settings on page 41 Upgrading the MP.11/a on page 42 To use the Web Interface for configuration and management, you must access the MP.11/a. With ScanTool you can determine the units current IP address. Then enter http://<ip address> in your Web browser. See Chapter 3. Management Overview on page 23 for details. The Web Interface consists of Web page buttons and tabs. A tab can also contain sub-tabs. The following figure shows the convention used to guide you to the correct tab or sub-tab. The Web Interface also provides online help, which is stored on your computer (see Installing Documentation and Software on page 21 for details). Chapter 2. Installation 32 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide REBOOTING AND RESETTING All configuration changes require a restart unless otherwise stated. New features explicitly state whether a reboot is required or not. You can restart the MP.11/a I any one of the methods described in the following sub-sections. Most changes you make become effective only when the MP.11/a is rebooted. A reboot stores configuration information in non-volatile memory and then restarts the MP.11/a with the new values (see Soft Reset to Factory Default on page 34). In some cases, the MP.11/a reminds you that a reboot is required for a change to take effect. You need not reboot immediately; you can reboot after you have made all your changes. Note: Saving of the MP.11/a configuration occurs only during a controlled reboot or by specifically issuing the CLI Save command. If you make changes to settings without a controlled reboot (command) and you have not issued the Save command, a power outage would wipe out all changes since the last reboot. For example, entering static routes takes effect immediately; however, the routes are not saved until the unit has gone through a controlled reboot. Proxim strongly recommends saving your settings immediately when you finish making changes. Rebooting When you reboot, the changes you have made become effective and the MP.11/a is restarted. The changes are saved automatically in non-volatile memory before the actual reboot takes place. To reboot, click the Commands button, then the Reboot tab. Click the Reboot button. The MP.11/a restarts the embedded software. During reboot, you are redirected to a page showing a countdown timer, and you are redirected to the Status page after the timer counts down to 0 (zero). The CLI is disconnected during reboot. This means that a new telnet session must be started. Resetting Hardware If the MP.11/a does not respond for some reason and you are not able to reboot, you can restart by means of a hardware reset. This restarts the MP.11/a hardware and embedded software. The last saved configuration is used. Any changes that you have made since then are lost. To reset the hardware, press and release the RESET button on the indoor MP.11/a unit with, for example, a pencil. The following figure depicts the indoor MP.11/a. Use the reset command (see Reset Command on page 93 to reset the outdoor MP.11/a unit. Chapter 5. Web Interface 33 Soft Reset to Factory Default MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide If necessary, you can reset the MP.11/a to the factory default settings. This must be done only when you are experiencing problems. Resetting to the default settings requires you to again configure the MP.11/a. To reset to factory default settings:
1. Click the Commands button, then the Reset tab. 2. Click the Reset to Factory Default button. The device configuration parameter values are reset to their factory default values. If you do not have access to the MP.11/a, you can use the procedure described in Hard Reset to Factory Default on page 125 as an alternative. GENERAL SETTINGS System Status To view the current system status, click the Status button. The Status window is the first page you see when you log in. See System Status on page 43 for more information. Chapter 5. Web Interface 34 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide System Configuration The System Configuration page lets you change the MP.11/as system name, location name, and so on (see the following System Configuration window). These details help distinguish this MP.11/a from other routers, and let you know whom to contact in case of problems. To go to this page, click the Configure button and the System tab. See Configure 1) System on page 45 for more information. Chapter 5. Web Interface 35 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide IP Configuration The IP Configuration window lets you change the MP.11/a IP parameters. These settings differ when the MP.11/a is in Routing mode. To go to this page, click the Configure button, the Network tab, then the IP Configuration sub-tab. See IP Configuration on page 47 for more information. Chapter 5. Web Interface 36 Interface Configuration MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide The Interfaces configuration pages let you change the MP.11/a Ethernet and wireless parameters. The Wireless tab is displayed by default when you click the Interfaces tab. Wireless To configure the wireless interface, click the Configure button followed by the Interfaces tab; then click the Wireless sub-tab. For Base Station units, the wireless interface can be placed in either WORP Base or WORP Satellite mode
(selected from the Interface Type drop-down box). Subscriber units can be placed only in WORP Satellite mode.
(See Wireless Outdoor Router Protocol on page 83 for more information.) The wireless interface settings differ per mode. For more information, see Wireless on page 55. Chapter 5. Web Interface 37 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Ethernet Port To configure the Ethernet interface, click the Configure button, the Interfaces tab, and the Ethernet sub-tab. You can set the Configuration parameter from this tab. Select from the following settings for the type of Ethernet transmission. 10 Mbit/s half-duplex 10 Mbit/s full-duplex 10 Mbit/s auto-duplex 100 Mbit/s half-duplex 100 Mbit/s full-duplex autospeed-half-duplex autospeed-auto-duplex Half-duplex means that only one side can transmit at a time. Full-duplex lets both sides transmit. Auto-duplex selects the best transmission mode for the given configuration. The recommended setting is auto-speed-auto-duplex. See Ethernet on page 59 for more information. Chapter 5. Web Interface 38 MONITORING SETTINGS MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide The MP.11/a offers various facilities to monitor its operation and interfaces. Only the most significant monitoring categories are mentioned here. Wireless To monitor the wireless interfaces, click the Monitor button and the Wireless tab. This tab lets you monitor the general performance of the radio and the performance of the WORP Base or WORP subscriber interfaces. To monitor the WORP registration/performance details, click the Monitor button, the Wireless tab, and the Worp sub-tab. Chapter 5. Web Interface 39 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Interfaces To monitor transmission details, click the Monitor button and the Interfaces tab. The Interfaces tab provides detailed information about the MAC-layer performance of the MP.11/a interface. Chapter 5. Web Interface 40 SECURITY SETTINGS MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide To prevent misuse, the MP.11/a provides wireless data encryption and password-protected access. Be sure to set the encryption parameters and change the default passwords. Encryption You can protect the wireless data link by using encryption. Encryption keys can be 5 (64-bit), 13 (WEP 128-bit), or 16 (AES 128-bit) characters in length. Both ends of the wireless data link must use the same parameter values. Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) encryption is supported on the MP.11a only. To set the encryption parameters, click the Configure button, the Security tab, and the Encryption sub-tab. You can set the following encryption parameters:
Encryption Option This parameter enables either WEP or AES encryption. Encryption Key 1 4 These WEP encryption keys require an alphanumeric string. The length of the string determines the key length. Correct string lengths are 5 or 13 alphanumeric characters, or 10 or 26 hexadecimal digits. Encrypt Data Transmissions Using This parameter determines which encryption key is used. Chapter 5. Web Interface 41 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Passwords Access to the MP.11/a is protected with passwords. The default password is public. For better security it is recommended to change the default passwords to a value (6-32 characters) known only to you. All passwords for the Telnet, HTTP (Web Interface), and SNMP interfaces are configured through the Configure
Management Passwords tab. Note: The asterisks displayed when you enter a password are a set number that does not necessarily equal the number of characters in the actual password string, which is intended for added security. Changing the Telnet Password To change the telnet password, click the Configure button and the Management tab. Enter the new password in the Telnet (CLI) Password field; repeat it in the Confirm field and click OK. Changing the Web Interface Password To change the password of the Web Interface, click the Configure button and the Management tab. Enter the new password in the HTTP (web) Password field; repeat it in the Confirm field and click OK. Changing the SNMP Password You can set a read and a read-and-write password for SNMP. The password used during login determines the type of access. You can change these passwords as follows:
1. Click the Configure button and the Management tab. 2. Enter the new password in the SNMP Read Community Password field or the SNMP Read/Wire Community field. 3. Repeat the new password in the Confirm field. 4. Click OK when you are done. UPGRADING THE MP.11/a The MP.11/a is equipped with embedded software that can be updated when new versions are released. Updating the embedded software is described in Image File Download on page 123. A TFTP server is provided on the Tsunami MP.11/a Documentation and Software CD-ROM; the server is required to transfer the downloaded file to the MP.11/a. Notes:
Only radios with Version 2.0 installed can be upgraded to Version 2.1. Upon upgrade from Version 2.0 to Version 2.1, the DFS scan can take up to 240 seconds. To access all resolved problems in our solution database, or to search by product, category, keywords, or phrases, go to http://support.proxim.com/. You can also find links to drivers, documentation, and downloads at this link. DOWNGRADING THE MP.11/a Use the Downgrade command to downgrade to the specified version release number. The Downgrade command currently is supported only by Tsunami MP.11/a Version 2.0.1. See Downgrade Command for more information. Chapter 5. Web Interface 42 MP.11 and MP.11a Installation and Management Chapter 5. Web Interface This section covers the Web Interface of the MP.11/a. The interface is described hierarchically according to these buttons, which appear on the left side of the Web page:
Status below Configure on page 45 Monitor on page 84 Commands on page 91 Help and Exit buttons also appear; click the Help button to access MP.11/a online help; click the Exit button to exit the application. For an introduction to the basics of MP.11/a management, see Chapter 4. Basic Management on page 32. STATUS When you click the Status button, System Status is displayed automatically. The other tab under Status is the Event Log tab. System Status The Status tab showing the system status is displayed automatically when you log into the Web Interface. It also is the default window displayed when you click the Status button on the left side of the window. The Status tab shows the System Status and the System Traps. Chapter 2. Installation 43 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide System Status In this section, the basic system status is shown, including the version number of the embedded software. Systems Traps This section shows the status of system traps. System traps occur when the MP.11/a encounters irregularities. Deleting system traps has no effect on the operation of the MP.11/a. System traps also are sent to an SNMP manager station (if so configured). Event Log Click the Status button and the Event Log tab to view the contents of your Event Log. The Event Log keeps track of events that occur during the operation of the Tsunami MP.11/a. The Event Log displays messages that may not be captured by System Traps, such as the Transmit Power for the Frequency Channel selected. Chapter 5. Web Interface 44 CONFIGURE MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Use the Configure section to change the settings of the MP.11/a. There are 10 tabs in this section. Note: The Intra-Cell Blocking tab is available for Base Stations in Bridge mode only. The NAT tab is available for SUs in Routing mode only. Interfaces on page 55 1. System below 2. Network on page 47 3. 4. SNMP on page 60 5. RIP on page 61 6. Management on page 64 7. Security on page 67 8. Filtering on page 70 9. 10. NAT (Network Address Translation) on page 79 Intra-Cell Blocking on page 75 1) System The System configuration page lets you change the MP.11/as System Name, Location, and so on. These details help you to distinguish the MP.11/a from other routers and let you know whom to contact in case you experience problems. Click the Configure button and the System tab; the following window is displayed. In this window, you can view or change the basic system information. Mode of Operation sets the MP.11 as bridge (layer 2) or as router (layer 3). Chapter 5. Web Interface 45 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide You can enter the following details:
System Name This is the system name for easy identification of the MP.11/a Base Station or SU. Use the system name of a Base Station to configure the Base Station System Name parameter on an SU if you want the SU to register only with this Base Station. If the Base Station System Name is left blank on the SU, it can register with any Base Station that has a matching Network Name and Network Secret. Country (Tsunami MP.11a units only) The Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) and Transmit Power Control (TPC) features are enabled automatically when you choose a country with a regulatory domain that requires them. The Country selection pre-selects and displays only the allowed frequencies for the selected country. Click the Configure button, the Interfaces tab, and the Wireless sub-tab to see the channel/frequency list. Note: MP.11a radios sold in the United States are pre-configured to scan and display only the outdoor frequencies permitted by the FCC. No other Country selections, channels, or frequencies can be configured. MP.11a radios sold outside of the United States and Canada support the selection of a Country by the professional installer. Support for the 5.25 5.35 GHz and 5.725 5.825 GHz frequency bands is provided with a single country selection, UNITED STATES (US), which does not provide DFS capability in these frequency bands. For a non US-only device, the default country selected is United Kingdom (GB). Notes: (1) The channel center frequencies are not regulated; only the band edge frequencies are regulated.
(2) If, before upgrade, US was selected as a country for a non US-Only device (which is an incorrect configuration), the country is changed automatically to United Kingdom upon upgrade. See Dynamic Frequency Selection on page 82 and Transmit Power Control on page 57 for more information. See Country Code Table on page 119 for a list of country codes. Location This field can be used to describe the location of the MP.11a, for example Main Lobby. Contact Name, Contact Email, and Contact Phone In these fields, you can enter the details of the person to contact. Mode of Operation This field lets you choose one of two operating modes: Bridge mode or Routing mode. Temperature Logging Interval This field lets you configure the temperature logging interval (in 5-minute intervals). See Monitor: 12) Temperature Log on page 89 for more information. The static fields on this window are described as follows:
ObjectID This field shows the OID of the product name in the MIB. Ethernet MAC Address The MAC address of the Ethernet interface of the device. Descriptor Shows the product name and firmware build version. Up Time How long the device has been up and running since the last reboot. Chapter 5. Web Interface 46 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide 2) Network IP Configuration The IP Configuration window lets you change the MP.11/a IP parameters. These settings differ when the MP.11/a is in Routing mode. Click the Configure button, the Network tab, and the IP Configuration sub-tab to view and configure local IP address information. See Setting the IP Address Manually on page 24 for more information. If the device is configured in Bridge mode, you can set the IP Address Assignment Type parameter:
Select Static if you want to assign a static IP address to the MP.11. Select Dynamic to have the device run in DHCP client mode, which gets an IP address automatically from a DHCP server over the network. If you do not have a DHCP server or if you want to manually configure the IP settings, set this parameter to Static. When the MP.11/a is in Bridge mode, only one IP address is required. This IP address also can be changed with ScanTool (see Setting the IP Address Manually on page 24). In Routing mode, both Ethernet and Wireless interfaces require an IP address. You can set the remaining parameters only when the IP Address Assignment Type is set to Static. IP Address The static IP address of the MP.11/a (default IP address is 10.0.0.1). Subnet Mask The mask of the subnet to which the MP.11/a is connected (the default subnet mask is 255.0.0.0). Default Router IP Address The IP address of the default gateway. Default TTL The default time-to-live value. Chapter 5. Web Interface 47 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Spanning Tree The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) can be used to create redundant networks (hot standby) and to prevent loops. If enabled, Spanning Tree prevents loops by disabling redundant links; if a link fails, it can automatically enable a backup link. Click Edit Table Entries to make changes; enter your changes and click OK. Chapter 5. Web Interface 48 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide IP Routes (Routing Mode only) Click the Configure button, the Network tab and the IP Routes sub-tab to configure IP routes. You cannot configure IP Routes in Bridge mode. In Routing mode, the Add Table Entries and Edit/Delete Table Entries buttons are enabled. Click the Add button to add entries; a window such as the following is displayed:
Enter the route information and click Add. The IP Address and Subnet Mask combination is validated for a proper combination. Click the Edit/Delete Table Entries button to make changes to or delete existing entries. Chapter 5. Web Interface 49 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Edit the route information and click OK. The IP address and subnet mask combination is validated for a proper combination. Roaming Roaming is the procedure with which an SU terminates the session with the current Base Station and starts the registration procedure with another Base Station. Roaming provides MAC level connectivity to the SU that roams from one Base Station to another. Proxim does not guarantee that upper layer protocol sessions will survive. Click the Configure button, the Network tab and the Roaming sub-tab to configure Roaming. Enable or disable the Roaming feature in the Roaming Status drop-down box. The default value is disabled. To configure the remaining Roaming parameters, use the CLI. Note: To enable roaming, you must enable Roaming Status on both the Base Station and the SU. Chapter 5. Web Interface 50 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide The Roaming feature lets the SU monitor local SNR and data rate for all frames received from the current Base Station. As long as the average local SNR for the current Base Station is greater than the slow scanning threshold, and the number of retransmitted frames is greater than the slow scanning threshold given in percentage, the SU does not scan other channels for a better Base Station. The slow scanning procedure starts when the average local SNR for the current Base Station is less than or equal to the slow scanning threshold and the number of retransmitted frames is greater than the slow scanning threshold given in percentage. During the slow scanning procedure the SU scans the whole list of channels while maintaining the current session uninterrupted. Fast Scanning is the scanning procedure performed under emergency conditions, when the average local SNR for the current Base Station is very low, below the fast scanning threshold, and the number of retransmitted frames is greater than the fast scanning retransmission threshold give in %, so that the current session should terminate as soon as possible. During this procedure, the SU scans other channels as fast as possible. Roaming can only occur if the slow scanning or fast scanning procedure is started, under the following conditions:
1. If the roaming is started from the slow-scanning procedure (when the slow scanning procedure has completed scanning all of the channels), the SU selects the Base Station with the best SNR value on all available channels. The SU roams to the best Base Station only if the SNR value for the current Base Station is still below the slow scanning SNR threshold, and best Base Station offers a better SNR value for at least roaming threshold than the current Base Station. During roaming, the SU first ends the current session and starts the registration procedure with the best Base Station. 2. If the roaming is started from the fast-scanning procedure (emergency conditions), the SU selects the first Base Station that offers better SNR than the current Base Station, and starts a new registration procedure with the better Base Station without ending the current session. The current Base Station automatically ends the session with the SU that roamed to another Base Station after 30 seconds. Chapter 5. Web Interface 51 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide DHCP Server Click the Configure button, the Network tab, and the DHCP Server sub-tab to enable the MP.11/a DHCP Server. When enabled, the DHCP server allows allocation of IP addresses to hosts on the Ethernet side of the SU or BSU. Specifically, the DHCP Server feature lets the SU or BSU respond to DHCP requests from Ethernet hosts with the following information:
Host IP address Gateway IP address Subnet Mask DNS Primary Server IP address DNS Secondary Server IP address DHCP Server Status Verify that DHCP Relay Agent is disabled. After you have made at least one entry in the DHCP server IP Pool Table, enable DHCP Server by selecting Enable from the DHCP Server Status pull-down menu. Note: There must be at least one entry in the DHCP server IP Pool Table to enable DHCP server. Also DHCP server cannot be enabled if DHCP Relay Agent is enabled. Subnet Mask The MP11/a supplies this subnet mask in its DHCP response to a DHCP request from an Ethernet host. Indicates the IP subnet mask assigned to hosts on the Ethernet side using DHCP. Chapter 5. Web Interface 52 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Gateway IP Address The MP11/a supplies this gateway IP address in the DHCP response. Indicates the IP address of a router assigned as the default gateway for hosts on the Ethernet side. Primary DNS IP Address The MP11/a supplies this primary DNS IP address in the DHCP response. Indicates the IP address of the primary DNS server that hosts on the Ethernet side uses to resolve Internet host names to IP addresses Secondary DNS IP Address The MP11/a supplies this secondary DNS IP address in the DHCP response. Number of IP Pool Table Entries The number of IP pool table entries is a read-only field that indicates the total number of entries in the DHCP server IP Pool Table. See DHCP Server IP Pool Table below. DHCP Server IP Pool Table You can configure up to 20 entries in the IP Pool Table. An IP address can be added if the entrys network ID is the same as the network ID of the device. To add an entry click Add Table Entries. Enter the following parameters and click Add. Note: After adding entries, you must reboot the unit before the values take effect. Start IP Address Indicates the starting IP address that is used for assigning address to hosts on the Ethernet side in the configured subnet. End IP Address Indicates the ending IP address that is used for assigning address to hosts on the Ethernet side in the configured subnet. Default Lease Time Specifies the default lease time for IP addresses in the address pool. The value is 3600-86400 seconds. Max Lease Time The maximum lease time for IP addresses in the address pool. The value is 3600-86400 seconds. Comment The comment field is a descriptive field of up to 255 characters. Chapter 5. Web Interface 53 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide DHCP Relay Agent (Routing mode only) Click the Configure button, the Network tab, and the DHCP RA sub-tab to enable the MP.11/a DHCP Relay Agent. When enabled, the DHCP relay agent forwards DHCP requests to the set DHCP server. Note that DHCP Relay Agent parameters are configurable only in Routing mode. To add entries to the table of DHCP Relay Agents, click Add Table Entries; the following window is displayed. Enter the Server IP Address and any optional comments; click Add. To edit or delete entries in the table, click Edit/Delete Table Entries; make your changes and click OK. Chapter 5. Web Interface 54 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide 3) Interfaces Wireless To configure the wireless interface, click the Configure button followed by the Interfaces tab; then click the Wireless sub-tab. For Base Station units, the wireless interface can be placed in either WORP Base or WORP Satellite mode
(selected from the Interface Type drop-down box). SUs can be placed only in WORP Satellite mode. (See Wireless Outdoor Router Protocol on page 83 for more information.) The wireless interface settings differ per mode. The following is an example of a WORP Base Mode Non-US window:
Note: Turbo mode is available only in WORP Satellite Mode in the United States. The list of parameters to configure for registration of the SU on a Base Station are:
Network Name Base Station System Name (when used) Channel Frequency Encryption (when used) Network Secret Note: Encryption can impact performance with lower throughput. Chapter 5. Web Interface 55 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide You can change the following parameters:
Interface Type The interface type can be Worp Satellite or Worp Base. *See Wireless Outdoor Router Protocol on page 83.) Base Station System Name The name found on the system page of the Base Station to which this SU is connecting. This parameter can be used as an added security measure, and when there are multiple Base Stations in the network and you want an SU to register with only one when it may actually have adequate signal strength for either. If the Base Station System Name is left blank on the SU, it can register with any Base Station with a matching Network Name and Network Secret. Network Name A Network Name is name given to a network so that multiple networks can reuse the same frequency without problems. An SU can only register to a base if it has the same Network Name. The Network Name is one of the parameters that allow a Subscriber Unit to register on a Base Station. The Base Station System Name and Frequency Channel also are parameters to guide the SU to the proper Base Station on the network, but they provide no security. Basic security is provided through encryption, as it causes none of the messages to be sent in the clear. Further security is provided by mutual authentication of the Base Station and Subscriber Unit using the Network Secret. Dynamic Data Rate Selection (DDRS) Status (Tsunami MP.11/a only) The WORP Dynamic Data Rate Selection (DDRS) lets the Base Station and SUs monitor the remote average signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) and to adjust the data rate to an optimal value (to provide best possible throughput) according to the current communication conditions during run-time. Each frame received in the WORP protocol reports the signal and noise level in dBm at which the sender received the previous frame from the receiver, and provides the values to calculate the signal to noise ratio
(SNR) in dB. SNR is calculated then averaged:
SNR [dB] = signal level [dBm] noise level [dBm]
This information lets the sender adjust the transmission data rate to the optimal level to provide the best possible throughput. When you enable or disable WORP DDRS on the Base Station, the Base Station sends an announcement to SUs and the SUs enable or disable WORP DDRS automatically. Note: DDRS threshold values must be configured in the Base Station and SUs separately. Both the Base Station and the SU monitors the remote SNR. The Base Station monitors and calculates the average remote SNR for each SU that is registered. An SU monitors and calculates the average remote SNR for the Base Station. The DDRS Status is configurable only for the WORP Base Mode. For WORP Base Mode, select the DDRS Status Enable or Disable from the drop-down box provided. For the WORP Satellite Mode, DDRS Status is read-only parameter and its value is based upon the WORP Base to which this SU is associated. WORP DDRS is not supported in Turbo Mode. Chapter 5. Web Interface 56 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Transmit Power Control By default, the Tsunami MP.11a lets you transmit at the maximum output power for the country or regulatory domain and frequency selected. However, with Transmit Power Control (TPC), you can adjust the output power of the unit to a lower level in order to reduce interference from neighboring devices or to use a higher gain antenna without violating the maximum radiated output power allowed for your country. Also, most countries in the ETSI regulatory domain require the transmit power to be set to a 6 dB lower value than the maximum allowed EIRP when link quality permits. You can see your units current output power for the selected frequency in the event log. The event log shows the selected power for all data rates, so you must look up the proper data rate to determine the actual power level. For example, the event log shows:
0 00:00:08INFO- Final Power 6 Mb 20 dBm, MaxRD 30 dBm, MaxEdge 31 dBm, -TPC Scale 0 dBm Ant Red 0 dBm*
0 00:00:09INFO- 20 dBm | 20 dBm | 20 dBm | 20 dBm | 20dBm | 19 dBm | 17 dBm | 14 dBm |
The above shows that the output power is set at 20 dBm for the data rate 6, 9, 12, 18, or 24 Mbps or at 19 dBm when the selected data rate is 36 Mbps. The first line shows that 6 Mbps is selected, so the transmit power is 20 dBm. Note: This feature only lets you decrease your output power; it does not let you increase your output power beyond the maximum allowed defaults for your frequency and country. Select one of the following options and click OK at the bottom of the window. Your original output power is adjusted relative to the value selected. The new setting takes effect immediately without rebooting:
-0 dB
-3 dB
-6 dB
-9 dB
-12 dB
-15 dB
-18 dB (minimum TPC level) Enable Turbo Mode (MP.11a ONLY) Check this box to enable Turbo Mode. Turbo Mode currently is supported only in the United States. Turbo Mode utilizes two adjacent channels for wireless data transfer. If DDRS is enabled, turbo mode cannot be enabled. The reverse is also true. Channel Spacing Set channel spacing to 20 MHz. (The channel spacing shows 40 MHz when turbo mode is in effect.) Frequency Channel The frequency channel the MP.11 (802.11b) uses for communicating with remotes. This frequency channel can be set in the range 1 to 11 for the USA and Canada, or 1 to 13 for Europe, or 1 to 14 for Japan (see Radio Specifications on page 130). For the MP.11a (802.11a), when DFS is enabled for the selected country, the Frequency Channel field appears as follows:
Frequency Channel DFS, Auto selected 5.47 5.7 GHz
. You can monitor the DFS scan, if enabled, by refreshing the Web page. Chapter 5. Web Interface 57 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide The channels and frequencies scanned when DFS is enabled are listed in the following table. Frequency 5.47 5.70 GHz 5.25 5.35 GHz Channels 100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 120, 124, 128, 132, 136, 140 56, 60, 64 36 Mbps 17.4 6-24 Mbps 17.4 For countries in which DFS is not enabled, the Frequency Channel list displays only the channels and frequencies allowed for the selected country. See Dynamic Frequency Selection on page 82 for more information. Multicast Rate The rate at which data is to be transferred. This drop down box is unavailable when DDRS is enabled. The default data rate for the MP.11 is 11 Mbps; the default data rate for the MP.11a is 36 Mbps. The SU must never be set to a lower data rate than the Base Station because timeouts will occur at the Base Station and communication will fail. Selections for Data Rate are as shown in the following table. Date Rate 6 Mbps 9 Mbps 12 Mbps 18 Mbps 24 Mbps 36 Mbps Date Rate, Turbo Enabled 12 Mbps 18 Mbps 24 Mbps 36 Mbps Antenna (Subscriber Units only) Antenna displays the proper antenna port, Internal or External, for the wireless interface. Antenna Gain (Base Station units only) You can modify the sensitivity of the radio card when detecting radar signals in accordance with ETSI and FCC Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) requirements. Given the radar detection threshold is fixed by ETSI and the FCC and that a variety of antennas with different gains may be attached to the MP.11/a, you must adjust this threshold to account for higher than expected antenna gains and avoid false radar detection events. This can result in the units constantly changing frequency channels. You can configure the threshold for radar detection at the radio card to compensate for increased external antenna gains. The Antenna Gain value ranges from 0 to 35. The default value is 0. Satellite Density The Satellite Density setting is a valuable feature for achieving maximum bandwidth in a wireless network. It influences the receive sensitivity of the radio interface. Selections are Large, Medium, Small, Mini, and Micro. See Satellite Density on page 83 for more information. Registration Timeout This is the registration process time-out of an SU on a Base Station. Default is 5 seconds. Network Secret A network secret is a secret password given to all nodes of a network. An SU can only register to a Base Station if it has the same Network Secret. The Network Secret is sent encrypted and can be used as a security option. Chapter 5. Web Interface 58 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Input / Output Bandwidth Limit These parameters limit the data traffic received on the wireless interface and transmitted to the wireless interface, respectively. Selections are in steps of 64 Kbps from 64 to 108,032 kbps. Ethernet You can set the desired speed and transmission mode from this tab. The recommended setting is auto-speed-auto-duplex. To set the Ethernet speed, duplex mode, and input and output bandwidth limits, click the Configure button, the Interfaces tab, and the Ethernet sub-tab. You can set the Configuration parameter. Select from these settings for the type of Ethernet transmission
(Configuration drop-down box):
Half-duplex means that only one side can transmit at a time. Full-duplex lets both sides transmit. Auto-duplex selects the best transmission mode for the given configuration. Chapter 5. Web Interface 59 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide 4) SNMP Click the Configure button and the SNMP tab to enable or disable trap groups, and to configure the SNMP management stations to which the MP11/a sends system traps. Trap Groups You can enable or disable different types of traps in the system. By default, all traps are enabled. Trap Host Table This table shows the SNMP management stations to which the MP.11/a sends system traps. Click the Add Table Entries button to add entries to the Trap Host Table. Chapter 5. Web Interface 60 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Click the Edit/Delete Table Entries button to make changes to or delete existing entries. 5) RIP Routing Internet Protocol (RIP) is a dynamic routing protocol you can use to help automatically propagate routing table information between routers. The Tsunami MP.11/a can be configured as RIPv1, RIPv2, RIPv1 Compatible, or a combination of all three versions, while operating in Routing mode. In general, the Tsunami MP.11/a RIP module is based upon RFC 1389. Note: RIP does not work when Network Address Translation (NAT) is enabled. Note the following:
There is no option to turn off receiving RIP advertisements. Once the unit is in Routing mode, it receives RIP updates when there is another RIP-enabled device advertising on your network. Although it receives and processes these updates, it does not further propagate these updates unless configured to advertise RIP. The ability to enable or disable default route propagation is not user configurable. Once initialized, the Tsunami MP.11/a uses its static default route and does not advertise this route in RIP updates. If another router on your network is configured to advertise its default route, this route overwrites the static default route configured on the Tsunami MP.11/a. The Tsunami MP.11/a then also propagates the new dynamic default route throughout the network. Be aware that, once a dynamic default route is learned, it behaves just as any other dynamic route learned through RIP. This means if the device sending the default route stops sending RIP updates, the default route times out and the unit has no default route to the network. Workarounds for this condition include rebooting or re-
entering a static default route. In general, the best approach is to disable the propagation of default routes on the other routers in your network unless you understand the risks. Chapter 5. Web Interface 61 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide The following table describes the properties and features of each version of RIP supported in the Tsunami MP.11/a. Properties and Features of Supported RIP Versions RIPv2 RIPv1 Compatible Multicast Authentication Classless routing (VLSM) Distance-vector protocol Metric-Hops Maximum Distance 15 IGP Broadcast Authentication Classless routing (VLSM) Distance-vector protocol Metric-Hops Maximum Distance 15 IGP RIPv1 Broadcast No Authentication Class routing Distance-vector protocol Metric-Hops Maximum Distance 15 IGP RIP Example metric 1 172.16.0.1 172.16.0.20 metric 1 10.0.0.1 metric 1 10.0.0.2 metric 2 metric 2 10.0.0.3 In the following example, assume that both the BSU and the SUs all are configured in Routing mode with RIP enabled to send and receive on both the Ethernet and Wireless interfaces. The network converges through updates until each unit has the following routing table:
BSU 0.0.0.0 172.16.0.0 10.0.0.0 100.0.0.0 200.0.0.0 SU1 0.0.0.0 10.0.0.0 100.0.0.0 172.16.0.0 200.0.0.0 SU2 0.0.0.0 10.0.0.0 200.0.0.0 172.16.0.0 100.0.0.0 metric 1 metric 1 metric 1 metric 2 metric 2 10.0.0.1 10.0.0.2 100.0.0.1 10.0.0.1 10.0.0.2 10.0.0.1 10.0.0.3 200.0.0.1 10.0.0.1 10.0.0.2 metric 1 metric 1 metric 1 metric 2 metric 2 Chapter 5. Web Interface 62 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide RIP Notes Ensure that routers on the same physical network are configured to use the same version of RIP. Routing updates occur every 30 seconds. It may take up to 3 minutes for a route that has gone down to timeout in a routing table. RIP is limited to networks with 15 or fewer hops. Chapter 5. Web Interface 63 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide 6) Management When you click the Management button, Passwords is displayed automatically. The other tab under Management is the Services tab. Passwords The Password tab lets you configure the SNMP, Telnet, and HTTP (Web Interface) passwords. SNMP Read Community Password The password for read access to the MP.11/a using SNMP. Enter a password in both the Password field and the Confirm field. The default password is public. SNMP Read/Write Community Password The password for read and write access to the MP.11/a using SNMP. Enter a password in both the Password field and the Confirm field. The default password is public. Telnet (CLI) Password The password for the CLI interface (via serial or Telnet). Enter a password in both the Password field and the Confirm field. The default password is public. HTTP (Web) Password The password for the Web browser HTTP interface. Enter a password in both the Password field and the Confirm field. The default password is public. Chapter 5. Web Interface 64 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Services The Services tab lets you configure the SNMP, Telnet, and HTTP (Web Interface) parameters. Changes to these parameters require a reboot to take effect. SNMP Configuration Settings SNMP Interface Bitmask:
Configure the interface or interfaces (Ethernet, Wireless, All Interfaces) from which you will manage the MP.11/a using SNMP. You also can select Disabled to prevent a user from accessing the MP.11/a through SNMP. HTTP Configuration Settings HTTP Interface Bitmap Configure the interface or interfaces (Ethernet, Wireless, All Interfaces) from which you will manage the MP.11/a through the Web interface. For example, to allow Web configuration through the Ethernet network only, set HTTP Interface Bitmask to Ethernet. You can also select Disabled to prevent a user from accessing the MP.11/a from the Web interface. HTTP Port Configure the HTTP port from which you will manage the MP.11/a through the Web interface. By default, the HTTP port is 80. Chapter 5. Web Interface 65
1 2 3 4 5 | Users Manual Part II | Users Manual | 1.62 MiB |
Telnet Configuration Settings MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Note: To use HyperTerminal for CLI access, make sure to check Send line ends with line feeds in the ASCII Setup window (click Properties from the HyperTerminal window; select Setup, then ASCII Setup. See HyperTerminal Connection Properties on page 31 for more information). Telnet Interface Bitmask Select the interface (Ethernet, Wireless, All Interfaces) from which you can manage the MP.11/a through telnet. This parameter can also be used to disable telnet management. Telnet Port Number The default port number for Telnet applications is 23. However, you can use this field if you want to change the Telnet port for security reasons (but your Telnet application also must support the new port number you select). Telnet Login Timeout (seconds) Enter the number of seconds the system is to wait for a login attempt. The MP.11/a terminates the session when it times out. The range is 1 to 300 seconds; the default is 30 seconds. Telnet Session Timeout (seconds) Enter the number of seconds the system is to wait during a session while there is no activity. The MP.11/a ends the session upon timeout. The range is 1 to 36000 seconds; the default is 900 seconds. Serial Configuration Settings The serial port interface on the MP.11/a is enabled at all times. See Serial Port on page 30 for information on how to access the CLI interface through the serial port. You can configure and view following parameters:
Serial Baud Rate Select the serial port speed (bits per second). Choose between 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600;
the default Baud Rate is 9600. Serial Flow Control Select either None (default) or Xon/Xoff (software controlled) data flow control. To avoid potential problems when communicating with the MP.11/a through the serial port, Proxim recommends that you leave the Flow Control setting at None (the default value). Serial Data Bits This is a read-only field and displays the number of data bits used in serial communication (8 data bits by default). Serial Parity This is a read-only field and displays the number of parity bits used in serial communication (no parity bits by default). Serial Stop Bits This is a read-only field that displays the number of stop bits used in serial communication (1 stop bit by default). The serial port bit configuration is commonly referred to as 8N1. Chapter 5. Web Interface 66 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide 7) Security MAC Authentication Click the Configure button, the Security tab, and the MAC Auth sub-tab to build a list of authorized wireless stations that can register at the MP.11/a and access the network. MAC authentication is available only for Base Station units. This feature is supported on the wireless interface and only wireless MAC addresses should be entered in the list. For example, build a list of the wireless MAC addresses on the Base Station for the authorized SUs. To add table entries, click the Add Table Entries button; a window such as the following is displayed:
Enter the MAC address and any comment, then click Add. To edit or delete table entries, click the Edit/Delete Table Entries button; make your corrections in the window displayed and click OK. Chapter 5. Web Interface 67 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide RADIUS Authentication Click the Configure button, the Security tab, and the Radius Auth sub-tab to set the IP address of the RADIUS server containing the central list of MAC addresses that are allowed to access the network. RADIUS authentication is available only for Base Station units. In large networks with multiple MP.11/a devices, you can maintain a list of MAC addresses on a centralized location using a RADIUS authentication server that grants or denies access. If you use this kind of authentication, you must specify at least the primary RADIUS server. The backup RADIUS server is optional. Chapter 5. Web Interface 68 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Encryption You can protect the wireless data link by using encryption. Encryption keys can be 5 (64-bit), 13 (WEP 128-bit), or 16 (AES 128-bit) characters in length. Both ends of the wireless data link must use the same parameter values. Note: Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) encryption is supported on the MP.11a only. Click the Configure button, the Security tab, and the Encryption sub-tab to set encryption keys for the data transmitted and received by the MP.11/a. Note that all devices in one network must use the same encryption parameters to communicate to each other. Chapter 5. Web Interface 69 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide 8) Filtering Click the Configure button and the Filtering tab to configure packet filtering. Packet filtering can be used to control and optimize network performance. Filtering sub-tabs are as follows:
Ethernet Protocol The Ethernet Protocol filter blocks or forwards packets based upon the Ethernet protocols they support. Click the Configure button, the Filtering tab, and the Ethernet Protocol sub-tab to enable or disable certain protocols in the table. Entries can be selected from a drop-down box. To add an entry to the table, click Add Table Entries, select the protocol name from the drop-down box and click the Add button. To edit or delete table entries, click Edit/Delete Table Entries, make your changes or deletions, and click OK. Ethernet Protocol Filtering Blocks or forwards packets based upon the Ethernet protocols they support:
Ethernet: Packets are examined at the Ethernet interface. Wireless: Packets are examined at the Wireless interface. All Interfaces: Packets are examined at both interfaces. Disabled: The filter is not used. Filter Operation Type Passthru: Only the enabled Ethernet protocols listed in the Filter table pass through the bridge. Block: the Bridge blocks enabled Ethernet protocols listed in the Filter table. Chapter 5. Web Interface 70 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Static MAC Pair Filtering The Static MAC Address filter optimizes the performance of a wireless (and wired) network. Click the Configure button, the Filtering tab, and the Static MAC sub-tab to access the Static MAC Address filter. The filter is an advanced feature that lets you limit the data traffic between two specific devices (or between groups of devices based upon MAC addresses) through the wireless interface of the MP.11/a. For example, if you have a server on your network with which you do not want wireless clients to communicate, you can set up a static MAC filter to block traffic between these devices. The Static MAC Filter Table performs bi-directional filtering. However, note that this is an advanced filter and it may be easier to control wireless traffic through other filter options, such as Protocol Filtering. To add the entries to Filter table, click the Add Table Entries button. After entering the data, click the Add button. The entry is enabled automatically when saved. To edit an entry, click Edit. To disable or remove an entry, click Edit and change the Status field from Enable to Disable or Delete. Wired MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the device on the Ethernet network that you want to prevent from communicating with a device on the wireless network. Wired Mask Enter the appropriate bit mask to specify the range of MAC addresses to which this filter is to apply. To specify only the single MAC address you entered in the Wired MAC Address field, enter 00:00:00:00:00:00
(all zeroes). Chapter 5. Web Interface 71 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Wireless MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the wireless device that you want to prevent from communicating with a device on the wired network. Wireless Mask Enter the appropriate bit mask to specify the range of MAC addresses to which this filter is to apply. To specify only the single MAC address you entered in the Wireless MAC Address field, enter 00:00:00:00:00:00
(all zeroes). Comment Enter related information. Status The Status field can show Enable, Disable, or Delete. Storm Threshold Click the Configure button, the Filtering tab, and the Storm Threshold sub-tab to use threshold limits to prevent broadcast/multicast overload. Storm Threshold is an advanced Bridge setup option that you can use to protect the network against data overload by specifying:
A maximum number of frames per second as received from a single network device (identified by its MAC address). An absolute maximum number of messages per port. The Storm Threshold parameters let you specify a set of thresholds for each port of the MP.11/a, identifying separate values for the number of broadcast messages per second and multicast messages per second. When the number of frames for a port or identified station exceeds the maximum value per second, the MP.11/a ignores all subsequent messages issued by the particular network device, or ignores all messages of that type. Per Address Threshold Enter the maximum allowed number of packets per second. Ethernet Threshold Enter the maximum allowed number of packets per second. Wireless Threshold Enter the maximum allowed number of packets per second. Chapter 5. Web Interface 72 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Broadcast Protocol Filtering Click the Configure button, the Filtering tab, and the Broadcast Protocol sub-tab to deny specific IP broadcast, IPX broadcast, and multicast traffic. Click the Edit Table Entries button to display an editable window such as the following. You can configure whether this traffic must be blocked for Ethernet to wireless, wireless to Ethernet, or both. Chapter 5. Web Interface 73 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide IP Access Table Entries in this table show which wireless stations are allowed to use SNMP, HTTP, and telnet management interfaces. To add an entry, click the Add Table Entries button, specify the IP address and mask of the wireless stations to which you want to grant access, and click Add. To edit or delete table entries, click the Edit/Delete Table Entries button, make your changes, and click OK. For example, 172.17.23.0/255.255.255.0 allows access from all wireless stations with an IP address in the 172.17.23.xxx range. Ensure that the wireless station you use is the first entry in the table. Chapter 5. Web Interface 74 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide 9) Intra-Cell Blocking (Base Station only) The Intra-Cell Blocking feature lets traffic be blocked between two SUs registered to the same Base Station. There are two potential reasons to isolate traffic among wireless subscribers:
To provide better security to the subscribers by isolating the traffic from one subscriber to another in a public space. To block unwanted traffic between subscribers to prevent this traffic from using bandwidth. You can form groups of SUs at the Base Station, which define the filtering criteria. All data to or from SUs belonging to the same group are bridged. All other data from SUs that do not belong to a particular group are automatically forwarded through the Ethernet interface of the Base Station. If an SU does not belong to any group, the Base Station discards the data. You can also configure a Security Gateway to block traffic between SUs connected to different BSUs. All packets destined for SUs not connected to the same Base Station are forwarded to the Security Gateway MAC address
(configured in the Security Gateway tab). When you change the device from Bridge to Routing mode, Intra-Cell Blocking stops working with or without a reboot. When you change the device from Routing to Bridge mode, Intra-Cell Blocking starts working with or without a reboot. Group Table Tab The Group Table tab lets you enable the Intra-Cell Blocking feature and to configure Intra-Cell Blocking Groups. Intra-Cell Blocking Status Enables or disables the Intra-Cell Blocking feature. Group Table Entries in this table show the Intra-Cell Blocking filter groups that have been configured. When Intra-Cell Blocking is enabled, the Base Station Unit discards all packets coming from one SU to another SU, if both SUs do not belong to the same filter group. Chapter 5. Web Interface 75 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Click the Add Table Entries button to add groups. Enter the group name, and click Add. The group is assigned an Index and appears in the Group Table. Up to 16 groups can be configured per Base Station. You can enable, disable or delete an existing filter group by using the Edit/Delete Table Entries button. After you have configured the groups, click the MAC Table tab to assign specific MAC addresses to an Intra-Cell Blocking Group. Chapter 5. Web Interface 76 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide MAC Table Tab After configuring the Intra-Cell Blocking Groups on the Group Table tab, use the MAC Table tab to assign specific MAC addresses to an Intra-Cell Blocking Group. Click the Add Table Entries button. Enter the MAC address of the SU. Select Enable from the drop-down menu for the Group Index Click Add. The MAC address is assigned to the groups. Additions to the MAC Table take effect immediately after clicking the Add button. You can enable, disable, delete, or reassign the groups for a MAC address by using the Edit/Delete Table Entries button. Note: A maximum of 250 MAC addresses can be added among all filter groups. Chapter 5. Web Interface 77 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Security Gateway Tab You can configure a Security Gateway to block traffic between SUs connected to different Base Stations. Verify that Intra-Cell Blocking has been enabled on the Group Table tab before configuring the Security Gateway. Security Gateway Status Enables or disables packet forwarding to the external Security Gateway. Security Gateway MAC Address Lets you configure the MAC address of the external Security Gateway. Group Rules The following rules apply to Intra-Cell Blocking Groups:
One SU can be assigned to more than one group. An SU that has not been assigned to any group cannot communicate to any other SU connected to the same or different Base Station Unit. Example of Intra-Cell Blocking Groups Four Intra-Cell Blocking Groups have been configured on one Base Station Unit. SUs 1 through 6 are registered to Base Station Unit 1. SUs 7 through 9 are registered to Base Station Unit 2. Group 1 SU 1 SU 4 SU 5 Intra-Cell Blocking Group Example Group 3 Group 2 SU 2 SU 3 SU 8 SU 6 SU 1 SU 3 Group 4 SU 8 SU 9 SU 2 In this example, SU 1 belongs to two groups, Group 1 and Group 3. Therefore, packets from SU 1 destined to SU 4, SU 5, SU 6, and SU 3 are not blocked. However, SU 9 belongs to group 4 only and packets from SU 9 are blocked unless sent to SU 8 or SU 2. Chapter 5. Web Interface 78 10) NAT (Network Address Translation) MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide The NAT (Network Address Translation) feature lets hosts on the Ethernet side of the SU transparently access the public network through the Base Station. All hosts in the private network can have simultaneous access to the public network. Note: The NAT tab is available for SUs in Routing mode only. The SU supports NAPT (Network Address Port Translation) where all private IP addresses are mapped to a single public IP address, and does not support Basic NAT (where private IP addresses are mapped to a pool of public IP addresses). Both dynamic mapping (allowing private hosts to access hosts in the public network) and static mapping
(allowing public hosts to access hosts in the private network) are supported. In dynamic mapping, the SU maps the private IP addresses and its transport identifiers to transport identifiers of a single Public IP address as they originate sessions to the public network. This is used only for outbound access. Static mapping is used to provide inbound access. The SU maps a private IP address and its local port to a fixed public port of the global IP address. This is used to provide inbound access to a local server for hosts in the public network. Static port mapping allows only one server of a particular type. Up to 1000 ports (500 UDP and 500 TCP) are supported. NAT Status Enables or disables the NAT feature. NAT can be enabled only for SUs in Routing mode. The default is disabled. Note: Changes to NAT parameters including the NAT Static Port Mapping Table require a reboot to take effect. NAT Static Bind Status Enables or disables the NAT Static Bind status (static mapping) to allow public hosts to access hosts in a private network. The default is disabled. Public IP Address The NAT Public IP address is the wireless interface IP address. Chapter 5. Web Interface 79 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide NAT Feature Interactions When NAT is enabled, the DHCP Relay Agent feature is not supported (DHCP Relay Agent must be disabled before NAT is enabled) and RIP updates are not sent or received. DHCP Server Interaction You can configure a DHCP server to allocate IP addresses to hosts on the Ethernet side of the SU/Base Station
(see DHCP Server). NAT Static Port Mapping Table Adding entries to the NAT Static Mapping Table lets the configured hosts in a private address realm on the Ethernet side of the SU access hosts in the public network using Network Address Port Translation (NAPT). Up to 1000 entries can be configured (500 UDP ports and 500 TCP ports). To add an entry:
1. Click the Add Table Entries button. 2. Enter the Local IP Address of the host on the Ethernet side of the SU. 3. Select the Port Type: TCP, UDP, or Both. 4. Enter the Start Port and End Port Supported Session Protocols The NAT feature supports the following session protocols for both inbound and outbound access with the required support, applications, and limitations given in the following table. Certain Internet applications require an Application Level Gateway (ALG) to provide the required transparency for an application running on a host in a private network to connect to its counterpart running on a host in the public network. An ALG may interact with NAT to set up state information, use NAT state information, modify application specific payload and perform the tasks necessary to get the application running across address realms. No more than one server of a particular type is supported within the private network behind the SU. Chapter 5. Web Interface 80 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Supported Session Protocols Protocol Support Applications Limitations ICMP FTP H.323 HTTP TFTP Telnet CUSeeMe IMAP PNM POP3 SMTP RTSP ICQ IRC MSN Messenger Net2Phone IP Multicast Stream works Quake ICMP ALG FTP ALG H.323 ALG Port mapping for inbound connection. Port mapping for inbound connection. Port mapping for inbound connection. Port mapping for inbound and outbound connection. Port mapping for inbound connection. Port mapping for inbound connection. Port mapping for inbound connection. Port mapping for inbound connection. Port mapping for inbound connection. Port mapping for inbound connection. Port mapping for inbound connection. Port mapping for inbound and outbound connection. Port mapping for inbound and outbound connection. Pass Through Port mapping for inbound connection. Port mapping for inbound connection. Ping File transfer Multimedia conferencing Web browser File transfer Remote login Video conferencing Mail One user is allowed for video conferencing Streaming media with Real Player E-mail E-mail Streaming audio/video with Quick Time and Real Player Chat and file transfer Chat and file transfer Conference and Share files with Net meeting Voice communication Multicasting Streaming video Games Mails with IP addresses of MTAs or using IP addresses in place of FQDN are not supported (requires SMTP ALG). Each host using ICQ needs to be mapped for different ports. Each host using IRC needs to be mapped for different ports. Only one user is allowed for net meeting. When a Quake server is configured within the private network behind a SU, the SU cannot provide information about that server on the public network. Also, certain Quake servers do not let multiple users log in using the same IP address, in which case only one Quake user is allowed. These VPN protocols are supported with their corresponding ALGs: IPsec, PPTP, L2TP. Chapter 5. Web Interface 81 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide ADDITIONAL INTERFACE INFORMATION Dynamic Frequency Selection (Tsunami MP.11a only) With Tsunami MP.11a units, Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) is enabled automatically based upon the country you select. You can tell DFS is in use because the frequency selection drop-down box on the Interfaces page is grayed out (click the Configure button and the Interfaces tab); it displays only the DFS-selected frequency. You cannot select a preferred frequency or band in which to operate. DFS scans all available frequencies in all available bands to select the operating frequency automatically. To comply with your countrys regulations, change the DFS selection to specify your country. You can do this by logging into the unit, clicking the Configure button and selecting the System tab. There is a drop-down box labeled Country with all available countries from which to select. Choose your country, configure the unit as required, and reboot for the settings to take effect. Note: Because DFS must scan for radar and interference on multiple channels, you must allow a sufficient amount of time for the units to start up. This is considerably longer than when the unit is not using DFS. Startup time is usually within two to three minutes if no radar is detected. If radar is detected, the unit may reboot multiple times before it becomes fully operational and can take much longer to start. This is expected behavior. DFS Requirement Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) is required in FCC and ETSI countries; it is enabled automatically when you select a country with a regulatory domain that requires DFS. DFS is required for two purposes. 1. Radar avoidance both at startup and while operational. To meet these requirements, the Tsunami MP.11a BSU scans available frequencies at startup for the presence of a radar signal on all available frequencies; it does not use any frequency in which radar signals are detected. Once fully operational on a frequency, the BSU actively monitors the occupied frequency for radar interference. If radar interference is detected, the BSU logs a message and reboots to find a new frequency free of interference. Understand that radar detection is performed only by the BSU and not by the SU. When an SU is set to a country in which DFS is used, it scans all available channels upon startup looking for a BSU that best matches its connection criteria (such as Base Station System Name, Network Name, and Shared Secret). The SU connects to the BSU automatically on whatever frequency the BSU has selected. Because of this procedure, it is best to set up the BSU and have it fully operational before installing the SU, although this is not required. If a BSU reboots because of radar interference, the SU loses its WORP link. The SU waits 30 seconds, and if it finds that the WORP link is down, it rescans the available frequencies for an active BSU. 2. Guarantee the efficient use of available frequencies by all devices in a certain area. To meet this requirement, the BSU scans each available frequency upon startup and selects a frequency based upon the least amount of noise and interference detected. This lets multiple devices operate in the same area with limited interference. This procedure is done only at startup; if another non-radar device comes up on the same frequency, the BSU does not detect this or reboot because of it. It is expected that other devices using these frequencies also are in compliance with country regulations, so this should not happen. Chapter 5. Web Interface 82 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Wireless Outdoor Router Protocol The Wireless Outdoor Router Protocol (WORP) is a polling algorithm designed for wireless outdoor networks. WORP takes care of the performance degradation incurred by the so-called hidden-node problem, which can occur when standards-based 802.11b wireless LAN technology is used for outdoor building-to-building connectivity. In this situation, when multiple radios send an RTS, if another radio is transmitting, it corrupts all data being sent, degrading overall performance. The WORP polling algorithm ensures that these collisions cannot occur, which increases the performance of the overall network significantly. WORP dynamically adapts to the number of SUs that are active on the network and the amount of data they have queued to send. Satellite Density The Satellite Density setting is a valuable feature for achieving maximum bandwidth in a wireless network. It influences the receive sensitivity of the radio interface. This feature improves operation in environments with a high noise level. Reducing the sensitivity of the radio enables unwanted noise to be filtered out. (It disappears under the threshold.) You can configure the Satellite Density to be Large, Medium, Small, Mini, or Micro. The default value for this setting is Large. The smaller settings are appropriate for high noise environments; a setting of Large would be for a low noise environment. A long distance link may have difficulty maintaining a connection with a small density setting because the wanted signal can disappear under the threshold. Consider both noise level and distance between the peers in a link when configuring this setting. The threshold should be chosen higher than the noise level, but sufficiently below the signal level. A safe value is 10 dB below the present signal strength. If the Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) is not sufficient, you may need to set a lower data rate or use antennas with higher gain to increase the margin between wanted and unwanted signals. In a point-to-multipoint configuration, the Base Station should have a density setting suitable for all of its registered SUs, especially the ones with the lowest signal levels (longest links). Take care when configuring a remote interface; check the available signal level first, using Remote Link Test. When the remote interface accidentally is set at too small a value and communication is lost, it cannot be reconfigured remotely and a local action is required to bring the communication back. Therefore, the best place to experiment with the level is at the unit that can be managed without going through the link; if the link is lost, the setting can be adjusted to the correct level to bring the link back. Warning!
To set the Satellite Density, click the Configure button, then the Interfaces tab and the Wireless sub-tab. Make your density selection from the drop-down menu. This setting requires a reboot of the unit. Sensitivity threshold settings related to the density settings for the MP.11a (802.11a) are:
Satellite Density Receive Sensitivity Threshold Defer Threshold Large
-95 dBm
-62 dBm Medium
-86 dBm
-62 dBm Small Mini Micro
-78 dBm
-70 dBm
-62 dBm
-52 dBm
-42 dBm
-36 dBm Sensitivity threshold settings related to the density settings for the MP.11 (802.11b) are:
Satellite Density Receive Sensitivity Threshold Large Medium Small Mini Micro
-99 dBm
-90 dBm
-85 dBm
-72 dBm
-66 dBm Chapter 5. Web Interface 83 MONITOR MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Use this section of the interface to obtain detailed information about the settings and performance of the MP.11/a. There are 12 tabs in the Monitor section. The Radius tab is available on Base Stations only. 1) Wireless General Click the Monitor button and the General tab to monitor the general performance of the wireless interface. WORP Click the Monitor button, the Wireless tab, and the WORP tab to monitor the performance of the WORP Base or WORP SU interfaces. Chapter 5. Web Interface 84 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide The Registration Last Reason field indicates either a successful registration (a value of 1) or it indicates the reason why the last registration failed. Possible values for the Registration Last Reason field are as follows:
1 = Successful registration 2 = Maximum number of SUs reached 3 = Authentication failure 4 = Roaming 5 = No response from SU within the Registration Timeout Period 6 = Low Signal Quality 2) ICMP Click the Monitor button and the ICMP tab to view the number of ICMP messages send and received by the MP.11/a. It includes ping, route, and host unreachable messages. 3) Per Station Click the Monitor button and the Per Station tab to view Station Statistics. On the SU, the Per Station page shows statistics of the BSU to which the SU is registered. On the BSU, it shows statistics of all the SUs connected to the BSU. The pages statistics refresh every 4 seconds. Chapter 5. Web Interface 85 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide 4) Features Click the Monitor button and the Features tab to view the following information:
Note: A Base Station shows how many WORP SUs it can support; the Subscriber Unit and Residential Subscriber Unit shows how many Ethernet hosts they support on their Ethernet port as the Max Users on Satellite parameter. 5) Link Test Click the Monitor button and the Link Test tab to find out which wireless stations are in range and to check their link quality. Note: Link Test requires Internet Explorer version 6.0 or later. Earlier versions do not support Link Test. Link Test for the MP.11a reports a single Receive Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value; the higher the number, the better the signal. Explore from a BSU displays all its registered SUs. Explore from an SU or RSU displays only the BSU with which it is registered. All stations displayed after Explore come up Disabled. Select a station by changing Disabled to Start and click the Link Test button. You can change multiple stations to Start, but only the last station in the list is displayed as the remote partner when you click the Link Test button. See the following figure:
For the MP.11a ( 802.11a), the Link Test provides the following information. The MP.11 ( 802.11b) Link Test also displays information about noise.) Chapter 5. Web Interface 86 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Link Test stops when you close the Link Test page. 6) Interfaces Click the Monitor button and the Interfaces tab to view detailed information about the IP-layer performance of the MP.11/a interfaces. There are two sub-tabs: Wireless and Ethernet. The following figure shows the Wireless interface; the same information is provided for the Ethernet interface on the Ethernet sub-tab. Chapter 5. Web Interface 87 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide 7) IP ARP Table Click the Monitor button and the IP ARP Table tab to view the mapping of the IP and MAC addresses of all radios registered at the MP.11/a. This information is based upon the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP). 8) IP Routes Click the Monitor button and the IP Routes tab to view all active IP routes of the MP.11/a. These can be either static or dynamic (obtained through RIP). This tab is available only in Routing mode, and you can add routes only when in Routing mode. 9) Learn Table Click the Monitor button and the Learn Table tab to view all MAC addresses the MP.11/a has detected on an interface. The Learn Table displays information relating to network bridging. It reports the MAC address for each node that the device has learned is on the network and the interface on which the node was detected. There can be up to 10,000 entries in the Learn Table. This tab is only available in Bridge mode. 10) RIP Click the Monitor button and the RIP tab to view Routing Internet Protocol data for the Ethernet and Wireless interfaces. Chapter 5. Web Interface 88 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide 11) Radius Click the Monitor button and the Radius tab to view information about the traffic exchanged with a RADIUS server. 12) Temperature Log (BSU Only) The feature for reporting and logging internal unit temperature observes and reports the internal temperature of the unit. Temperature is logged and an SNMP trap sent when the temperature crosses the limit of -30C to 60C. You can select a recording interval from one to sixty minutes, in 5-minute increments on the Configure: System tab. A log file holds the recorded data. The log can hold at least 576 entries (two days with the refresh time of 5 minutes). For further analysis, the log can be exported to a text file with a new line feed as a line separator. The Temperature Log contains two sub-tabs. The Current Temperature tab indicates the units current temperature. The current temperature value is refreshed every 4 seconds. Chapter 5. Web Interface 89 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide The Log tab keeps track of the temperature recorded at the end of each configured logging interval. You can reset or refresh the log using the Reset and Refresh buttons. Chapter 5. Web Interface 90 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide COMMANDS This section describes the commands that you can perform with the Web Interface. The following tabs are in the Commands section: Download, Upload, Downgrade, Reboot, Reset, and Help Link. 1) Download Click the Commands button and the Download tab to download image, configuration, and license files to the MP.11/a. Server IP address Enter the TFTP Server IP address. (Double-click the TFTP server icon on your desktop and locate the IP address assigned to the TFTP server.) File Name Enter the name of the file to be downloaded. File Type Config, image, BspBl, or license. File Operation Download or Download and Reboot. Chapter 5. Web Interface 91 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide 2) Upload Click the Commands button and the Upload tab to upload a configuration file from the MP.11/a. Enter Server IP Address, File Name, select a Filetype, and click OK. Filetype can be configured as Templog, Eventlog, or Config. 3) Downgrade Click the Commands button and the Downgrade tab to downgrade to a previous MP.11/a release. Downgrade currently is supported only to release 2.0.1. Once you enter this command, the device is downgraded to release version 2.0.1 and is automatically rebooted. Note: The Downgrade command applies only to the outdoor MP.11/a. 4) Reboot Click the Commands button and the Reboot tab to restart the embedded software of the MP.11/a. Configuration changes are saved and the MP.11/a is reset. CAUTION: Rebooting the unit causes all users currently connected to lose their connection to the network until the MP.11/a has completed the restart process and resumed operation. Chapter 5. Web Interface 92 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide 5) Reset Click the Commands button and the Reset tab to restore the configuration of the MP.11/a to the factory default values. You can also reset the MP.11/a from the RESET button located on the side of the unit. Because this resets the MP.11/as current IP address, a new IP address must be assigned. CAUTION: Resetting the MP.11/a to its factory default configuration permanently overwrites all changes made to the unit. The MP.11/a reboots automatically after this command has been issued. 6) Help Link Click the Commands button and the Help Link tab to set the location of the help files of the Web Interface. Upon installation, the help files are installed in the C:\Program Files\Proxim\Tsunami MP11\Help\ folder. If you want to place these files on a shared drive, copy the Help folder to the new location and specify the new path in the Help Link box. Chapter 5. Web Interface 93 MP.11 and MP.11a Installation and Management Chapter 6. Command Line Interface The Command Line Interface (CLI) provides a text-based interface with which you can configure and manage the MP.11/a using commands. You can enter these commands or submit them in the form of a script to allow batch processing. Accessing the CLI is discussed in Command Line Interface Overview on page 29. Administrators use the CLI to control MP.11/a operation and monitor network statistics. The MP.11/a supports two types of CLIthe Boot Loader CLI and the normal CLI. The Boot Loader CLI provides a limited command set and is used when the current Image is bad or missing. BOOT LOADER CLI The Boot Loader CLI is a minimal subset of the normal CLI used to perform initial configuration of the MP.11/a. The Boot Loader is started when the MP.11/a is switched on or reset, and is responsible for starting the embedded software. The Boot Loader CLI is available when the MP.11/a embedded software is not running. This interface is accessible only through the serial interface if the MP.11/a does not contain a software image or a download image command over TFTP has failed. The Boot Loader CLI lets you configure the initial setup parameters as well as download a software image to the device. The following commands are supported by the Boot Loader CLI:
Set for configuration of initial device parameters Show to view the devices configuration parameters Help to provide additional information about all commands supported by the Boot Loader CLI Reboot to reboot the device The parameters supported by the Boot Loader CLI for viewing and modifying are:
System name Gateway IP address TFTP Server IP address IP address assignment type IP address IP mask Image Filename (including the file extension) Chapter 2. Installation 94 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide CLI TERMINOLOGY Configuration Files Database files containing the current configuration information. Configuration items include the IP address and other network-specific values. Configuration files can be downloaded to the MP.11/a or uploaded for backup or troubleshooting. Download versus Upload Downloads transfer files to the MP.11/a; uploads transfer files from the MP.11/a. The TFTP server performs file transfers in both directions. Group A logical collection of network parameter information. For example, the System Group is comprised of several related parameters. Groups also can contain tables. All items for a given group can be displayed with a show <Group> CLI command. Image File The MP.11/a software executed from RAM. To update an MP.11/a, you typically download a new image file. Parameter A fundamental network value that can be displayed and may be changeable. For example, the MP.11/a must have a unique IP address and the wireless interface must be assigned an SSID. Change parameters with the CLI set command and view them with the CLI show command. Table Tables hold parameters for several related items. For example, you can add several potential managers to the SNMP table. All items for a given table can be displayed with a show <table> CLI command. TFTP Refers to the TFTP Server, used for file transfers. Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 95 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide NAVIGATION AND SPECIAL KEYS The CLI supports these navigation and special key functions to move the cursor along the prompt line:
Key Combination Delete or Backspace CtrlA CtrlE CtrlF CtrlB CtrlD CtrlU CtrlP CtrlN Tab
Description Delete previous character Move cursor to beginning of line Move cursor to end of line Move cursor forward one character Move cursor back one character Delete the character the cursor is on Delete all text to the left of the cursor Go to the previous line in the history buffer Go to the next line in the history buffer Complete the command line List available commands COMMANDS The commands listed in the following table are described in more detail in the following subsections. Command
done download downgrade exit help history log passwd quit reboot save search set show templog upload Action Lists commands Disconnects and closes the current CLI session Transfer files from the TFTP server to the MP.11/a Downgrade to a previous MP.11/a release Disconnects and closes the current CLI session View command specifics or control-key sequences you can use to navigate Lists commands previously entered Manage the event log file maintained by the MP.11a Change the password used to access the CLI Disconnects and closes the current CLI session Signal the MP.11/a to reboot after a specified number of seconds Save the current MP.11/a configuration to flash memory Display the parameter entries in a specified table Change parameter values View parameter and statistical values View the temperature log Transfer files from the MP.11/a to the TFTP server Also see Show and Set Parameters on page 103 and Table Parameters on page 114. Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 96
? (Question Mark) MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide You can show CLI help by entering help at the command prompt. The CLI also provides context-specific help. For help in a specific situation, enter ?. You can get help as follows:
display the command list display commands that start with specified letters display parameters for set and show commands display prompts for successive parameters s?
The more letters you enter, the fewer the results returned. Enter one or more letters, then ? with no space between letters and ?
download ?
Lets you see every possible parameter for the set or show commands Enter the command, a space, then ?
download ?
download 169.254.128.133 ?
download 169.254.128.133 image.bin ?
download 169.254.128.133 image.bin image Enter the command, a space, and then ?. Then, when the parameter prompt appears, enter the parameter value. The parameter is changed and a new CLI line is echoed with the new value. After entering one parameter you can add another ? to the new CLI line to see the next parameter prompt, and so on until you have entered all the required parameters. Note that the Boot Loader CLI does not have command help. Done Command The quit, done, and exit commands are used to disconnect and close the current CLI session. Downgrade Command The downgrade command lets you downgrade to a previous MP.11/a release. Downgrade currently is supported only to release 2.0.1 (rel201). Enter Rel201 or rel201 as the Release Number. Once you enter this command, the device is downgraded to release version 2.0.1 and is automatically rebooted. Note: The Downgrade command applies only to the outdoor MP.11/a. downgrade <TFTPIPAddress> <TFTP filename> <filetype (image)> <Release Number>
The filetype must be image. Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 97 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Download Command The download command is used to transfer files from the TFTP server to the MP.11/a. Executing download in combination with the asterisk character (*) makes use of the previously set TFTP parameters. Executing download without parameters displays command help and usage information. To transfer a file from the TFTP server to the MP.11/a:
download <tftpserveraddress> <path and filename> <filetype>
where <filetype> can be one of these four values:
config - Configuration file, the current settings of the MP.11/a image - Image file, embedded software for the MP.11/a bootloader - Boot software license - License file To issue repeated operations, use the asterisk (*) character in place of the options: download *
Previously used optional values for the download command is stored in TFTP parameters that you can view and change. See the TFTP parameter table for details. Exit Command The quit, done, and exit commands are used to disconnect and close the current CLI session. Help Command Use the help command to view the specifics of certain commands or to view control-key sequences you can use to navigate the command line. To display how to navigate the command line using special keys:
help The following represents part of the displayed output:
Special keys supported:
Arrow Keys DEL, BS Ctrl-A Ctrl-E Ctrl-F Ctrl-B Ctrl-D Ctrl-U, X Ctrl-K Ctrl-W Ctrl-T Ctrl-P Ctrl-N Tab
For a description and example of the specified command, enter:
help <command name> or <command name> help
.... delete previous character
.... go to beginning of line
.... go to end of line
.... go forward one character
.... go backward one character
.... delete current character
. . delete to beginning of line
.... delete to end of line
..... delete previous word
..... transpose previous character
.... go to previous line in history buffer
.... go to next line in history buffer
.... will attempt command completion
.... will provide command listing Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 98 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide History Command Use the history command to show this list of commands. Commands entered in the current session are stored in a Command History Buffer. To avoid re-entering long command statements, use the keyboard up arrow () and down arrow ( ) keys to recall previous statements from the Command History Buffer. When the desired statement reappears, press the Enter key to execute, or you can edit the statement before executing it. history Log Command Use the log command to manage the event log file maintained by the MP.11/a. To append a user-specified string to the event log, enter:
log addstring <anyString>
To append a user-specified string multiple times to the event log, enter:
log addmany <numMsgs> <anyString>
To reset the event log, enter the following. Note that this generates an event log message stating that the log has been reset intentionally. log reset To display the contents of the entire event log, enter:
log dump To display the current number of log entries:
log count To display the log entry corresponding to the specified number, enter:
log display <msgNum>
The first log entry is numbered 0. If no parameter is supplied, the entire event log is displayed. Passwd Command Use the passwd command to change the password used to access the CLI. passwd <old password> <new password> <new password>
Enter the new password twice to ensure no mistake was made when specifying the new password. If you forget the CLI password, there is no way to retrieve it from the MP.11/a and the CLI cannot be accessed. In this case, the MP.11/a must be reset to factory defaults. The default password for the CLI is public. Quit Command The quit, done, and exit commands are used to disconnect and close the current CLI session. Reboot Command Use the reboot command to signal the MP.11/a to reboot after a specified number of seconds. reboot <number of seconds>
The <number of seconds> parameter must be positive. Specify a value of 0 (zero) for an immediate reboot. Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 99 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Save Command Use the save command to save the current configuration of the MP.11/a to flash memory. save config Search Command Use the search command to list the parameters supported by the specified table. This list corresponds to the table information displayed in the HTTP interface. search <table name>
See Table Parameters on page 114 for details. Set Command The set command lets you change parameter values. You can set a single parameter value, or you can set a group of parameters or a table with parameters. If a parameter requires more than one value, the values must be separated by spaces. For example, to set the MP.11/a IP address parameter:
set ipaddrtype static set ipaddr 1 ipaddress 10.0.0.12 Some parameter values change only when the MP.11/a is rebooted. In these cases, the CLI warns you that a reboot is required for the change to take effect. See Show and Set Parameters on page 103 for a list of parameters that can be used with the set command. Show Command The show command lets you view parameter and statistical values. You can view a single parameter, a group of parameters, or a table with parameters. (A table consists of rows with similar parameters.) To see a definition and syntax example, enter only show. To see a list of available parameters, enter a question mark after show (example show ?). To view the current values of all system parameters: show system See Show and Set Parameters on page 103 for a list of parameters that can be used with the show command. Templog Command The templog command is used to display the temperature log for the radio. The temperature log is a file in flash memory that holds the temperature data. templog dump templog reset upload <target ip> <filename> templog Displays the temperature log Resets the temperature log Export the log to a text file for further analysis Maximum number of entries in the log is 576 (2 days with the refresh time of 5 minutes). The log is exportable to a text file for further analysis. The range of the internal unit temperature (IUT) is from -30 C to 60 C The range of the recording interval of IUT is from 1 to 60 minutes, configurable in 5-minute increments (1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60) Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 100 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Note: For the outdoor MP.11/a, if a walk operation is performed on the MIB variable oriTempLogTableEntry using SNMP V2 default settings, log entries are repeated about 10 times (as the maximum repetitions in SNMP V2 is 10). Set the maximum repetitions value to 1 or uncheck the Use Get Bulk option for all entries to be displayed without any repetitions in the MIB browser. Upload Command The upload command is used to transfer files from the MP.11/a to the TFTP server. To upload a file from the MP.11/a to the TFTP server:
upload <tftpserveraddress> <path and filename> <filetype>
where <filetype> can be one of these four values:
config - Configuration file, the current settings of the MP.11/a templog Temperature log eventlog Event log To issue repeated operations, use the asterisk (*) character in place of the options:
upload *
Previously used optional values for the upload command is stored in TFTP parameters that you can view and change. See the TFTP parameter table for details. Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 101 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide CLI BASIC MANAGEMENT COMMANDS You may want to set up the following basic configuration parameters immediately when you receive the MP.11/a. Task Set System Name, Location, and Contact information Shows the type of hardware being used Set IP address for the MP.11/a Set default gateway Configure Wireless Interface Configure Ethernet Interface Set Encryption for the Wireless interface Set Telnet Password Set Web Interface Password Set SNMP Password Download an MP.11/a configuration file from your TFTP server Backup your MP.11/a configuration file Reboot Reset to Factory Defaults Commands show system set sysname <name>
set sysloc <location>
set sysctname <contact name>
set sysctemail <contact email>
set sysctphone <contact phone>
set syscountrycode <country code>
show syshwtype hardwaretype set ipaddrtype <static | dynamic>
set ipaddr 1 ipaddress <ip address>
set ipaddr 1 ipsubmask <subnet mask>
For example:
set ipaddr 1 ipaddress <ip address> ipsubmask <subnet mask>
set ipgw <gateway address>
set wif 3 channel 10 set wif 3 netname <network name>
For more Wireless Interface parameters, see Wireless Interface Parameters on page 112 show ethernet set Ethernet 1 etherspeed <autospeedauto | autospeedhalf |
100auto | 100full | 100 half | 10full | 10half>
show wifsec set wifsec 3 encryptoption <wep|aes|none>
set wifsec 3 encryptkey1 <key 1>
set wifsec 3 encryptallowdeny <enable | disable>
show telnet set telifbitmask <0-15>
set tellogintout <login timeout>
set telport <port number>
set telsessiontout <inactivity timeout>
show http set httpifbitmask <0-15>
set httppasswd <password>
set httpport <port number>
show snmp (displays the read password, read/write password, IP Access Table entries, and SNMP Interface Bitmask) set snmprpasswd <read password>
set snmprwpasswd <read/write password>
set snmpifbitmask <0-15>
Download <ipaddr> <tftpfilename> <tftpfiletype>
show tftp (to ensure the entries are correct) download *
reboot 0 upload <ipaddr> <tftpfilename> <tftpfilename>
show tftp (to ensure the entries are correct) upload *
reboot [<number of seconds>]
set sysresettodefaults 1 Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 102 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide SHOW AND SET PARAMETERS The following table details the non-table parameters available to be viewed and set within the MP.11/a CLI. R = Read-only W = Write-only RW = Read-Write Antenna Alignment Display Parameters Antenna Alignment Display (AAD) provides a measurement of signal quality in an easy-to-interpret manner (a numeric printed signal value at the CLI and serial ports). The SNR is displayed numerically on the CLI or serial port by two decimal characters representing a number from 00 to 99. On the serial port, AAD is enabled by default after booting. To start the display, you must enable AAD and a WORP link must be established between the Base Station and SU. aad RW set aad enable local Enables display of the local SNR. Local SNR is the SNR measured by the receiver at the near end. set aad enable remote Enables display of the remote SNR. Remote SNR is the SNR as measured by the receiver at the far end. set aad enable average Enables display of the average SNR. The average SNR is the average of the local and remote SNR. set aad disable Disables Antenna Alignment Display. Also, ctrl-c disables AAD. AAD is automatically disabled 30 minutes after it is enabled to remove the load of extra messages on the wireless interface. The default telnet timeout is 900 seconds (15 minutes). In this case, AAD auto stops in 15 minutes. If AAD is required to run for the full 30 minutes, change the default telnet timeout to a value greater than 30 minutes (greater than 1800 seconds). This restriction is for telnet connections only and not for the serial interface. The serial interface never times out. broadcastflttbl Broadcast Filtering Parameters RW R R RW RW index protoname direction status Broadcast Filter Table Index Protocol name Filtering Direction [1=ethernet to wireless, 2=wireless to ethernet, 3=both]
Status of table entry [1=enable, 2=disable]
DHCP Relay Parameters dhcprelay dhcprelaystatus dhcprelayipaddr dhcprelaycmt DHCP Relay Group R RW RW RW Comment DHCP Server IP address DHCP Relay Status [1=enable, 2=disable]
Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 103 DHCP Server Parameters dhcp dhcpstatus dhcpgw dhcpsubnetmask dhcppridnsipaddr dhcpsecdnsipaddr dhcpippooltbl index startipaddr endipaddr defaultleasetime maxleasetime comment status Ethernet Parameters ethernet index etherspeed RW R RW etherflt etherflttbl Ethernet Filtering Parameters R RW R RW RW RW RW RW etherfltoptype etherfltifbitmask index proto cmt status MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide DHCP Server Group R RW DHCP Server Status. [1=enable, 2=disable]. RW DHCP Server Gateway IP address. R DHCP Server Gateway Subnet Mask. RW DHCP Server Primary DNS IP address. RW DHCP Server Secondary DNS IP address. RW DHCP Server IP Pool Table R RW Start IP address in the form xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. RW End IP address in the form xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. RW Default lease time. 3600-86400. RW Maximum lease time. 3600-86400. RW Comment. 1-255 characters. RW Status of table entry. [1=enable, 2=disable, 3 = delete, 4 = create]
Index Ethernet Configuration Table Index Speed [1=10M Half Duplex 2=10M Full Duplex 3=10M Auto Duplex 4=100M Half Duplex, 5=100M Full Duplex 6=Auto Speed Half Duplex 7=Auto Speed Auto Duplex]
Ethernet Filtering Group Ethernet Filter Table Index Ethernet Filtering Protocol Comment {1-255 characters]
Status of table entry {1=enable, 2=disable]
Operation type [1=allow, 2=deny]
Interface bitmask Feature Parameter featuretbl R Table of supported features on current image file HTTP (WEB BROWSER) Parameters http httpport httppasswd httpifbitmask httphelplink R RW W RW RW HTTP Group HTTP port HTTP password HTTP interface bitmask Help link Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 104 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Internal Unit Temperature Parameters R RW internalunittemp iutlogginginterval Intra-Cell Blocking Parameters Internal unit temperature IUT logging interval Limitations:
Telnet Server supports only 32 arguments; therefore, any command comprising greater than 32 arguments results in an error. When sh intra is used to show commands relating to Intra-cell blocking, some of the commands displayed are too long to be shown with clear boundaries when all the commands are shown on the CLI. intracellblockingstatus intracellgrptbl index grpname grpstatus intracellmactbl index mac grpid1 (to grpid16) macstatus intracellsecuritygwstatus intracellsecuritygwmac Inventory Management Parameters sysinvmgmt sysinvmgmtcmpiftbl sysinvmgmtcmptbl IP ARP Parameters parp parpstatus IP ARP Filtering Parameters IPARP iparpfltipaddr iparpfltstatus iparpfltsubmask Index Enable or disable Intra-Cell blocking. Intra-Cell Group Table. Defines the filter groups. RW RW R RW Name of the Intra-Cell group, 1-255 characters. RW Status of table entry [1=enable, 2=disable, 3=delete]. RW Intra-Cell MAC Address Table. Enables or disables a MAC address and assigns it to a specific filter group. Index R RW MAC Address of the SU. RW Status of group entry [1=active, 2=inactive, 3=delete]. RW Status of table entry [1=enable, 2=disable, 3=delete]
Default is enable. Enable or disable packet forwarding to an external Security Gateway. RW RW MAC address of the Security Gateway. R R R R RW Inventory Management Group Inventory Interface Table Inventory Component Table Proxy ARP Group Proxy ARP status [1=enable, 2=disable]
IP address IP ARP Group R RW RW Status [1=enable, 2=disable]
RW Subnet mask Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 105 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide MAC Access Control Table Parameters macacl macacltbl index macaddr cmt status macaclstatus macacloptype R RW R RW RW RW RW RW MAC Access Control Group MAC Access Control Table Index MAC address Comment of 1-255 characters. Status of table entry [1=enable, 2=disable, 3=delete]
Status [1=enable, 2=disable]
Operation type [1=allow, 2=deny]
Miscellaneous Parameters queries routechg R R RIP v2 Global Queries RIP v2 Global Route Changes Network Address Translation Parameters R nat RW natstatus natstaticbindstatus RW RW natstaticporttbl R RW RW RW RW RW index localipaddr porttype startport endport status Network Parameters NAT Group Status of NAT [1=enable, 2=disable]. Default is disable. Status of NAT Static [1=enable, 2=disable]. Default is disable. NAT Static Port Bind Table Index Local IP address in the form xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. Port type. [1=TCP, 2=UDP, 3 = both]
Local port number. 1-65535. Public port number. 1-65535. Status of table entry [1=enable, 2=disable, 3 = delete, 4 = create]
network ip ipaddr index ipaddress ipsubmask ipaddrtype ipgw ipttl iproutes ipaddr metric routtype ipsubmask ipgw R R RW R RW RW RW RW RW RW R RW RW RW RW Network Group IP Group (same as Network Group) IP Address Table Index [1=Ethernet, 2=loopback, 3=wireless]
IP address Subnet mask Address type [1=static, 2=dynamic]
Default Router IP address Default time-to-live IP Route Table (Routing mode only) IP address Routing metric Route Type Subnet Mask Gateway IP address Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 106 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Example: This command changes the first entry in the IP Address table:
set ipaddr 1 ipaddress 150.80.0.1 ipsubmask 255.255.255.0 R RW R RW RW RW W RW RW R R RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW Radius Parameters radius radiustbl index status ipaddr port ssecret responsetm maxretx type radcliinvsvraddr radauthlifetm radmacacctrl RIP Interface Parameters ripifcfg authtype authkey txmode rxmode defmetric Roaming Parameters roaming roamstatus slowscanthreshold fastscanthreshold roamthreshold slowscanpercentthreshold RADIUS Group RADIUS Authentication Server Table Index RADIUS Server Status [1=enable, 2=disable]
IP address Authentication port Shared Secret Response Time [1-4 seconds]
Maximum retransmissions [1-10]
Server type Client Invalid Server Address Authentication Lifetime MAC Access Control RIP Interface Configuration Table Authentication Type [1 = No Authentication,2 = Simple Password]
Authentication Key Transmission Mode [1 = Do Not Send, 2 = RIP v1, 3 = RIP1 compatible, 4 = RIP v2 Receiving Mode [1 = RIP v1, 2 = RIP v2, 3 = RIP v1 or v2]
Default Metric Roaming Group R RW Status of Roaming [1=enable, 2=disable]. Default value is disable. RW Slow Scan Threshold. 0-50 dB in 1dB increments. Default value is 12dB. RW This parameter is configurable only on the SU and RSU. Fast Scan Threshold. 0-50 dB in 1dB increments. Default value is 6 dB. This parameter is configurable only on the SU and RSU. RW Roaming Threshold. 0-50 dB in 1dB increments. Default value is 3 dB. This parameter is configurable only on the SU and RSU. RW Slow Scan Percent Threshold. Used to manage retransmission calculation. Default is 2 percent. Fast Scan Percent Threshold. Used to manage retransmission calculation. Default is 10 percent. fastscanpercentthreshold RW Roaming with DDRS Enabled There are two multicast rates to be configured when DDRS is enabled:
Default DDRS Data Rate (ddrsdefdatarate): The data rate at which the Base Station starts communication. This parameter is configurable; the factory default is 6 Mbps. Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 107 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Maximum DDRS Data Rate (ddrsmaxdatarate): The maximum data rate at which the device can operate (the default is 36 Mbps) When an SU roams from Base Station 1 to Base Station 2, the data rate at which it connects to Base Station 2 is the default data rate. If this remains at the factory default of 6Mbps, there can be issues with the application if it requires more then 6 Mbps (for example multiple video streams). Applications requiring a higher data rate could experience a slight data loss during the roaming process while DDRS selects a higher rate (based upon link conditions). When the applications re-transmit at a possibly slower rate, the WORP protocol initially services the data at 6 Mbps and increases the data rate to the "Maximum DDRS Data Rate" one step at a time. Because the applications are not being serviced at the best possible rate, they further slow down the rate of data send. The DDRS algorithm requires data traffic (a minimum of 128 frames) to raise the rate to a higher value. Although roaming occurs successfully, the previous scenario causes applications to drop their sessions; hence session persistence is not maintained. Note: You must know the data rate required for the applications running and you must ensure (during network deployment) that the ranges and RF links can support the necessary data rate. You also must set the default DDRS rate at the capacity necessary for the application so that it connects to the next base station at the required capacity if roaming occurs. Set the Default DDRS Data Rate to a greater value
(24 or 36 Mbps, for example) for applications requiring session persistence when roaming occurs. Security Parameters security secconfig secenckeylentbl index enckeylen Serial Parameters serial serbaudrate serdatabits serparity serstopbits serflowctrl R RW RW R RW R RW RW RW RW RW Security Configuration Group Security configuration Encryption Key Length Table Index Encryption Key Length Serial Group Baud rate [1=2400, 2=4800, 3=9600, 4-19200, 5=38400, 6=57600]
Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control [1=xonxoff, 2=none]
Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 108 SNMP Parameters MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide snmp snmpipsccesstbl index ipaddr submask if cmt status index ipaddr passwd cmt status snmptraphosttbl R RW R RW RW RW RW RW RW R RW W RW RW W W RW SNMP Group SNMP IP Access Table Index IP address Subnet mask Interface [1=Ethernet, 2=PC Card A]
Comment of 1-255 characters. Status of table entry [1=enable, 2=disable, 3=delete]
SNMP Trap Host Table Index IP address Password Comment of 1-255 characters. Status of table entry [1=enable, 2=disable, 3=delete]
Read password Read/write password SNMP Interface Bitmask (0-15) snmprpasswd snmprwpasswd snmpifbitmask SNMP Example: This command adds and enables a new entry to the SNMP IP Access Table with IP address 10.0.0.2, subnet mask 255.255.255.0 on an Ethernet interface. set snmpipaccesstbl 0 ipaddr 10.0.0.2 submask 255.255.255.0 if 1 status 1 Spanning Tree Parameters stp stptbl index priority pathcost status stpstatus stppriority stpmaxage stpbridgehellotime stpfwddelay R RW R RW RW RW RW RW RW W RW Spanning Tree Group Spanning Tree Table Index Bridge priority Path cost Status of table entry [1=enable, 2=disable]
Spanning Tree status [1=enable, 2=disable]
Bridge priority Maximum age Hello time Forward delay Static Mac Address Filter Parameters staticmactbl index wiredmacaddr wiredmask wirelessmacaddr wirelessmask cmt status RW R RW RW RW RW RW RW Static MAC Address Filter Table Index Static MAC address on wired network Static MAC address mask on wired network Static MAC address on wireless network Static MAC address on wireless network Comment [1-255 characters]
Status of table entry [1=enable, 2=disable]
Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 109 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Statistic Parameters statarptbl statbridgetbl statif statradius statripglobal statripif staticmp R R R R R R R ARP Table Bridge Learn Table Interface Statistics RADIUS Authentication Statistics RIP Global Statistics RIP Interface Statistics ICMP Statistics stmthres stmbrdthres stmmultithres stmthrestbl Storm Threshold Parameters R RW RW RW R RW RW index bcast multrate Storm Threshold Group Broadcast Address Threshold [4-250]
Multicast Address Threshold [4-250]
Storm Threshold Table Index Broadcast Address Threshold [4-250]
Multicast address threshold [4-250]
System Parameters system sysname sysmode sysloc syscountrycode sysctname sysctemail sysctphone sysdescr sysoid sysservices sysuptime sysflashbckint sysflashupdate sysresettodefaults Telnet Parameters System group R RW Name RW Mode [1=bridge, 2=router]
RW Location RW System country code [US]
RW Contact name RW Contact email RW Contact phone R R R R RW Flash backup interval (seconds) RW Flash update [1=write flash]
RW Resets to factory defaults. [1=reset and immediate reboot]
Example: This command sets the MP.11/a to Routing mode:
set sysmode 2 Description Services Up time OID Telnet Group telnet telifbitmask telport tellogintout telsessiontout Example: To change the login timeout and the session timeout: set tellogintout 200 telsessiontout 1800 Telnet session timeout (seconds) Telnet login timeout (seconds) R RW RW RW RW Telnet interface bitmap Telnet port Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 110 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide TFTP Parameters tftp tftpfilename tftpfiletype tftpipaddr R RW RW RW TFTP Group TFTP file name TFTP file type TFTP Server IP address Wireless Interface Security Parameters Index Encryption key 1 Wireless Interface Security Table RW R RW W W W W RW Encryption option [1=none, 2=wep, 3=rcFour128, 4=aes]
wifsec index encryptoption encryptkey1 encryptkey2 encryptkey3 encryptkey4 encryptkeytx While setting the key to encrypt data, the index to key name mapping is: (0-key1), (1-key2), (2-key3), and (3-key4). Example: To set the encryption option to aes, set a new string for key2, and set it as the key used for encryption:
set wifsec 3 encryptoption 4 encryptkey2 abcdefghi encryptkeytx 1 Currently used key [0-3=Keys 1-4, respectively]
Encryption key 2 Encryption key 3 Encryption key 4 WORP Parameters worp worpcfg index mode netname basename maxsatellites multrate regtimeout retries ssecret R RW R RW RW RW RW RW RW RW W WORP Group WORP Interface Configuration Index Mode [1=disabled, 2=ap, 3=base, 4=satellite]
Network Name Base Station Name Maximum number of satellites allowed Multicast rate Registration Time Out (seconds) [1-10]
Number of times data is retransmitted [1-10]
Shared Secret Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 111 Wireless Interface Parameters MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide wif index autochannel channel RW Wireless Interface Group R RW RW Index [3]
Auto channel select status [1=enable, 2=disable]
Frequency channel: US [149, 153, 157, 161, 165]
Example: set wif 3 channel 149 Closed system [1=enable, 2=disable]
RW closedsys RW dtimperiod RW interrobust R ldbalance R macaddr RW mcast medres RW meddendistrib R multrate RW RW netname R opermode R phytype R preambletype R protmech R regdomain RW satdensity suppchannels R suppdatarates R tpcmode RW RW turbomode RW txrate wifrxbwlimit RW RW wiftxbwlimit DTIM period Interference Robustness [1=enable, 2=disable]
Load balancing [1=enable, 2=disable]
MAC address Multicast rate (megabits per second) RTS/CTS Medium Reservation Medium Density Distribution [1=enable, 2=disable]
Multicast rate (megabits per second) [1=1, 2=2, 3=5.5, 4=11, 5=6, 6=9, 7=12, 8=18, 9=24, 10=36, 11=48, 12=54, 13=72, 14=96, 15=108]. For Turbo mode, 96 and 108 are not supported; for Normal mode, 48 and 54 are not supported. Network name Operational mode Physical layer type Preamble type Protection mechanism status Regulatory Domain List Satellite density (1=large, 2= medium, 3=small, 4=mini, 5=micro]
Supported channels Supported data rates TPC mode [1=half, 2=quarter, 3=eighth, 4=min, 5=full]
Turbo mode [1=enable, 2=disable] (Turbo mode can be enabled only for US.) Transmit rate [0=auto fallback, 1-255=(<value>/2) megabits per second]
Incoming bandwidth limit Outgoing bandwidth limit Example: To disable closed system and enable turbo mode: set wif 3 closedsys 2 turbomode 1 Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 112 WORP DDRS Parameters ddrs ddrsstatus ddrsdefdatarate ddrsmaxdatarate ddrsrateupavgsnrthr ddrsrateupreqsnrthr ddrsratedownreqsnrthr ddrsminreqsnr11an ddrsminreqsnr11an6mbps ddrsminreqsnr11an9mbps ddrsminreqsnr11an12mbps ddrsminreqsnr11an18mbps ddrsminreqsnr11an24mbps ddrsminreqsnr11an36mbps MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide WORP DDRS Group R RW Status of WORP DDRS [1=enable, 2=disable]. This variable is only used on the Base Station; the SU ignores this variable. Default value is disabled. The default data rate. This value can be configured only on the Base Station and not the SU. Possible values are: 802.11a, normal mode: 6 Mbps, 9 Mbps, 12 Mbps, 18 Mbps, 24 Mbps, 36 Mbps. The maximum data rate that can be dynamically set by DDRS. Possible values are:
802.11a, normal mode: 6 Mbps, 9 Mbps, 12 Mbps, 18 Mbps, 24 Mbps, 36 Mbps. The average SNR threshold in the calculation for data rate increase. Default value is 4 dB. The required SNR threshold in the calculation for data rate increase. Default value is 6 dB. The required SNR threshold in the calculation for data rate reduction. Default value is 3 dB. RW RW RW RW RW RW Minimum SNR Required for 802.11a in Normal Mode 6 Mbps 6 dB, 9 Mbps 7 dB, 2 Mbps 9 dB 18 Mbps 11 dB, 24 Mbps 14 dB, 36 Mbps 18 dB RW Minimum required SNR for data rate of 6 Mbps on 802.11a radio, normal mode. Configurable limits: 1-50. RW Minimum required SNR for data rate of 9 Mbps on 802.11a radio, normal mode. Configurable limits: 1-50. RW Minimum required SNR for data rate of 12 Mbps on 802.11a radio, normal mode. Configurable limits: 1-50. RW Minimum required SNR for data rate of 18 Mbps on 802.11a radio, normal mode. Configurable limits: 1-50. RW Minimum required SNR for data rate of 24 Mbps on 802.11a radio, normal mode. Configurable limits: 1-50. RW Minimum required SNR for data rate of 36 Mbps on 802.11a radio, normal mode. Configurable limits: 1-50. Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 113 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide SHOW AND SET PARAMETER EXAMPLES Show and Set Parameter Examples Syntax:
set <parameter name> <parameter value>
Example:
set ipaddr 10.0.0.12 Syntax:
set <table name> <table index> <element 1> <value 1> <element n> <value n>
Example:
set mgmtipaccesstbl 0 ipaddr 10.0.0.10 ipmask 255.255.0.0 Examples:
set mgmtipaccesstbl 1 ipaddr 10.0.0.11 set mgmtipaccesstbl 1 ipaddr 10.0.0.12 ipmask 255.255.255.248 cmt First Row Syntax:
show <group name>
Example:
show network Syntax:
show <parameter name> show <table name>
Examples:
show ipaddr show mgmtipaccesstbl Syntax:
set <Table> index status <enable, disable, delete>
set <Table> index status <1=enable, 2=disable, 3=delete>
Examples:
set mgmtipaccesstbl 2 status enable set mgmtipaccesstbl 2 status disable set mgmtipaccesstbl 2 status delete set mgmtipaccesstbl 2 status 2 Set the IP address parameter Create a table row or entry Modify a table entry or row Show the group parameters Show individual and table parameters Enable, disable, or delete a table entry or row TABLES In some cases, parameters are stored in tables whose rows contain similar parameters. Command arguments involving tables have the following syntax:
<table name> <row> <parameter 1 name> <value 1> <parameter n name> <value n>
Every table parameter supported in the MP.11/a CLI and an example of a row entry for that table are listed in the following table. Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 114 Table Parameters MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide broadcastflttbl index protoname direction status dhcprelaytbl index dhcprlyipaddr dhcprlycmt dhcprelaystatus dhcpserverippooltable index startipaddr endipaddr defaultleasetime maxleasetime comment status etherflttbl index proto cmt status macacltbl index macaddr cmt status intracellgrptbl index grpname grpid1
(to grpid16) intracellmactbl R index RW mac RW grptbl status RW macstatus natstaticportbindtable R index localipaddr RW RW porttype RW startport endport RW R RW RW RW R RW RW RW R RW RW Index Protocol Name R R RW Filtering direction [1=Ethernet-to-wireless, 2=wireless, 3=both]
RW Status of table entry [1=enable, 2=disable]
Index R RW DHCP Server Address RW Comment RW Status of table entry [1=enable, 2=disable, 3=delete]
Index R RW Start IP address in the form xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. RW End IP address in the form xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. RW Default lease time. 3600-86400. RW Maximum lease time. 3600-86400. RW Comment. 1-255 characters. RW Status of table entry. [1=enable, 2=disable, 3=delete, 4=create]
Index Ethernet filtering protocol Comment [1-255 characters]
Status of table entry [1=enable, 2=disable, 3=delete]
Index MAC Address Comment [1-255 characters]
Status of table entry [1=enable, 2=disable, 3=delete]
Index Name of the Intra-Cell group, 1-255 characters. Status of table entry [1=enable, 2=disable, 3=delete]
Index MAC Address of the SU. Status of group entry [1=active, 2=inactive, 3=delete]. Status of table entry [1=enable, 2=disable, 3=delete]. Default is enable. Index Local IP address in the form xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. Port type. [1=TCP, 2=UDP, 3 = both]
Local port number. 1-65535. Public port number. 1-65535. Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 115 status radiustbl index status ipaddr port secret responsetm maxretx type secenckeylentbl index enckeylen snmpipaccesstbl index ipaddr submask if cmt status snmptraphosttbl index ipaddr passwd cmt status staticmactbl index wiredmacaddr wiredmask wirelessmacaddr wirelessmask cmt status stmthrestbl index bcast mcast sptbl index priority pathcost status RW R RW RW RW W RW RW R R RW R RW RW RW RW RW R RW W RW RW R RW RW RW RW RW RW R RW RW R RW RW RW MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Status of table entry [1=enable, 2=disable, 3 = delete, 4 = create]
Index Status of table entry [1=enable, 2=disable]
Server IP address Authentication Port Shared Secret Response time [1-4 seconds]
Maximum retransmissions [1-10]
Service type Index Encryption Key Length Index IP address Subnet mask Interface [1=Ethernet, 2=PC card A]
Comment [1-255 characters]
Status of table entry [1=enable, 2=disable, 3=delete]
Index IP address Password Comment [1-255 characters]
Status of table entry [1=enable, 2=disable, 3=delete]
Index Static MAC address on Ethernet (wired) network Static MAC address mask on wired network Static MAC address on wireless network Static MAC address mask on wireless network Comment [1-255 characters]
Status of table entry [1=enable, 2=disable]
Index Broadcast address threshold [4-250]
Multicast address threshold [4-250]
Index Priority Path cost Status of table entry [1=enable, 2=disable]
Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 116 Entering Strings MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide To enter a string with spaces, use single or double quotes. For example, there is no need for quotes in the following command because the string contains no spaces:
set sysname Lobby The following string, however, requires quotes because of the space between the words Front and Lobby. set sysname Front Lobby Viewing Table Contents You can view the contents of a table as follows:
show <table name>
Example: This command displays all parameter values of the SNMP IP access table (snmpipaccesstbl). show snmpipaccesstbl Creating a Table Row You can create a table row as follows:
set <table name> 0 <parameter 1 name> <value 1> <parameter n name> <value n>
When you create a table row, you must use 0 as row index. Only the mandatory parameters are required. Optional parameters automatically receive the default value unless a value is given. Example:
set snmpipaccesstbl 0 ipaddr 10.0.0.10 submask 255.255.0.0 This command adds a row to the SNMP IP access table (snmpipaccesstbl) with the IP address (ipaddr) and subnet mask (submask) parameters, which are respectively assigned 10.0.0.10 and 255.255.0.0. Modifying a Table Entry If you want to change a table entry, you must indicate the index of the table row and the parameter that must be modified. Example:
set snmpipaccesstbl 1 ipaddr 10.0.0.11 This command changes the IP address (ipaddr) at row index 1 of the SNMP IP access table
(snmpipaccesstbl) into 10.0.0.11. Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 117 Modifying Several Table Entries MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide You can also modify several table entries at once by indicating the index of the table row and the parameters that must be modified. With the search command, you can see which parameters are in the table. Example:
set snmpipaccesstbl 1 ipaddr 10.0.0.12 submask 255.255.255.248 cmt First Row Enabling, Disabling, or Deleting a Table Row You can also enable, disable, or delete a row in a table. The syntax of this command is:
<table name> <row> <enable/disable/delete>, or
<table name> <row> status <1/2/3>
Example 1: The following command enables the row at index 2 of the SNMP IP access table
(snmpipaccesstbl). set snmpipaccesstbl 2 enable Example 2: The following command disables the row at index 2 of the SNMP IP access table
(snmpipaccesstbl). The status codes have the following meaning: 1 is enable, 2 is disable, 3 is delete. set snmpipaccesstbl 2 status 2 Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 118 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide COUNTRY CODE TABLE Index 0 32 36 40 56 84 68 96 100 124 From the CLI and MIB browser, the country code must be set using the string code, not the numeric code. Example: To set Taiwan as the country:
set syscountrycode tw Country No Country Albania (not supported for 11a) Argentina Armenia Australia Austria (not supported for 11a) Azerbaijan Bahrain (not supported for 11a) Belarus (not supported for 11a) Belgium (not supported for 11a) Belize Bolivia Brazil (not supported for 11a) Brunei Darussalam Bulgaria Canada Chile (not supported for 11a) China Colombia Costa Rica (not supported for 11a) Croatia (not supported for 11a) Cyprus Czech Republic (not supported for 11a) Denmark Dominican Republic Ecuador (not supported for 11a) Egypt (not supported for 11a) Estonia Finland France (not supported for 11a) Georgia Code na al ar am au at az bh by be bz bo br bn bg ca cl cn co cr hr cy cz dk do ec eg ee fi fr ge 191 196 203 208 214 233 246 250 268 156 170 Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 119 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Country Germany Greece (not supported for 11a) Guatemala Hong Kong Hungary (not supported for 11a) Iceland India Indonesia Iran Ireland Ireland 5.8 GHz Israel Italy Japan Japan2 Jordan (not supported for 11a) North Korea Korea Republic Korea Republic 2 Kuwait (not supported for 11a) Latvia (not supported for 11a) Lebanon (not supported for 11a) Liechtenstein Lithuania Luxembourg Macau Macedonia (not supported for 11a) Malaysia (not supported for 11a) Mexico Monacco Morocco (not supported for 11a) Netherlands New Zealand Norway Oman (not supported for 11a) Index 276 320 344 348 352 364 372 380 392 393 408 410 411 440 442 484 492 528 554 578 Code de gr gt hk hu is In id ir ie i1 IL it jp jr j0 kp kr kR kw lv lb li lt lu mo mk my mx mc ma nl nz no om Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 120 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Country Pakistan (not supported for 11a) Panama Peru (not supported for 11a) Philippines Poland Portugal Puerto Rico Qatar (not supported for 11a) Romania (not supported for 11a) Russia (not supported for 11a) Saudi Arabia (not supported for 11a) Singapore Slovak Republic (not supported for 11a) Slovenia South Africa Spain Sweden Switzerland (not supported for 11a) Syria (not supported for 11a) Taiwan Thailand Turkey (not supported for 11a) United Kingdom United Kingdom 5.8 GHz United States Uruguay Venezuela Vietnam (not supported for 11a) Index Code 591 608 616 620 630 702 703 705 710 752 756 158 764 792 826 840 858 862 pk pa pe ph pl pt pr qa ro ru sa sg sk si za es se ch sy tw th tr gb g1 us uy ve vn Chapter 6. Command Line Interface 121 MP.11 and MP.11a Installation and Management Chapter 7. Procedures This chapter contains a set of procedures, as described in the following table:
Procedure Description TFTP Server Setup Prepares the TFTP server for transferring files to and from the MP.11/a. This procedure is used by the other procedures that transfer files. Image File Download Upgrades the embedded software. Configuration Backup Saves the configuration of the MP.11/a. Configuration Restore Restores a previous configuration through configuration file download. Soft Reset to Factory Default Resets the MP.11/a to the factory default settings through the Web or Command Line Interface. Hard Reset to Factory Default In some cases, it may be necessary to revert to the factory default settings (for example, if you cannot access the MP.11/a or you lost the password for the Web Interface. Force Reload Completely resets the MP.11/a and erases the embedded software. Use this procedure only as a last resort if the MP.11/a does not boot and the Hard Reset to Factory Default procedure did not help. If you perform a Forced Reload, you must download a new image file as described in Image File Download with the Boot Loader. Image File Download with the Boot Loader If the MP.11/a does not contain embedded software, or the embedded software is corrupt, you can use this procedure to download a new image file. TFTP SERVER SETUP To download or upload a file, you must connect to the computer with the TFTP server through the MP.11/as Ethernet port. This can be any computer in the network or a computer connected to the MP.11/a with a cross-over Ethernet cable. For information about installing the TFTP server, see Installing Documentation and Software on page 19. Ensure that the upload or download directory is correctly set, the required file is present in the directory, and the TFTP server is running. The TFTP server must be running only during file upload and download. You can check the connectivity between the MP.11/a and the TFTP server by pinging the MP.11/a from the computer that hosts the TFTP server. The ping program should show replies from the MP.11/a. Chapter 2. Installation 122 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide WEB INTERFACE IMAGE FILE DOWNLOAD In some cases, it may be necessary to upgrade the embedded software of the MP.11/a by downloading an image file. To download an image file through the Web Interface:
1. Set up the TFTP server as described in TFTP Server Setup on page 122. 2. Access the MP.11/a as described in Web Interface Overview on page 25. 3. Click the Commands button and the Download tab. 4. Fill in the following details:
Server IP Address <IP address TFTP server>
File Name <image file name>
File Type Image File Operation Download 5. Click OK to start the file transfer. The MP.11/a downloads the image file. The TFTP server program should show download activity after a few seconds. When the download is complete, the MP.11/a is ready to start the embedded software upon reboot. CONFIGURATION BACKUP You can back up the MP.11/a configuration by uploading the configuration file. You can use this file to restore the configuration or to configure another MP.11/a (see Configuration Restore on page 124). To upload a configuration file through the Web Interface:
1. Set up the TFTP server as described in TFTP Server Setup on page 122. 2. Access the MP.11/a as described in Web Interface Overview on page 25. 3. Click the Commands button and the Upload tab. 4. Fill in the following details:
Server IP Address <IP address TFTP server>
File Name <configuration file name>
File Type Config File Operation Upload 5. Click OK to start the file transfer. The MP.11/a uploads the configuration file. The TFTP server program should show upload activity after a few seconds. When the upload is complete, the configuration is backed up. Chapter 7. Procedures 123 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide CONFIGURATION RESTORE You can restore the configuration of the MP.11/a by downloading a configuration file. The configuration file contains the configuration information of an MP.11/a. To download a configuration file through the Web Interface:
1. Set up the TFTP server as described in TFTP Server Setup on page 122. 2. Access the MP.11/a as described in Web Interface Overview on page 25. 3. Click the Commands button and the Download tab. 4. Fill in the following details:
Server IP Address <IP address TFTP server>
File Name <configuration file name>
File Type Config File Operation Download 5. Click OK to start the file transfer. The MP.11/a downloads the configuration file. The TFTP server program should show download activity after a few seconds. When the download is complete and the system rebooted, the configuration is restored. SOFT RESET TO FACTORY DEFAULT If necessary, you can reset the MP.11/a to the factory default settings. Resetting to default settings means that you must configure the MP.11/a anew. To reset to factory default settings using the Web Interface:
1. Click the Commands button and the Reset tab. 2. Click the Reset to Factory Default button. The device configuration parameter values are reset to their factory default values. If you do not have access to the MP.11/a, you can use the procedure described in Hard Reset to Factory Default on page 125 as an alternative. Chapter 7. Procedures 124 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide HARD RESET TO FACTORY DEFAULT Indoor MP.11/a If you cannot access the unit or you have lost its password, you can reset the MP.11/a to the factory default settings. Resetting to default settings means you must configure the MP.11/a anew. To reset to factory default settings, press and hold the RELOAD button on the MP.11/a unit for about 10 seconds. The MP.11/a reboots and restores the factory default settings. To access the MP.11/a see Chapter 3. Management Overview on page 23. Outdoor MP.11/a To reset to factory default settings, use an object such as a paper clip to press and hold the Reset button located on the side of the power brick. FORCED RELOAD With Forced Reload, you reset the MP.11/a to the factory default settings and erase the embedded software. Use this procedure only as last resort if the MP.11/a does not boot and the Reset to Factory Defaults procedure did not help. If you perform a Forced Reload, you must download a new image file with the Boot Loader (see Image File Download with the Boot Loader below). Caution! The following procedure erases the embedded software of the MP.11/a. This software image must be reloaded through an Ethernet connection with a TFTP server. The image filename to be downloaded can be configured with either ScanTool through the Ethernet interface or with the Boot Loader CLI through the serial port to make the MP.11/a functional again. To do a forced reload:
1. Press the RESET button on the MP.11/a unit; the MP.11/a resets and the LEDs flash. 2. Immediately press and hold the RELOAD button on the MP.11/a unit for about 20 seconds. Now image and configuration are deleted from the unit. 3. Follow the procedure Image File Download with the Boot Loader to download an image file. Chapter 7. Procedures 125 IMAGE FILE DOWNLOAD WITH THE BOOTLOADER MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide The following procedures download an image file to the MP.11/a after the embedded software has been erased with Forced Reload or when the embedded software cannot be started by the Boot Loader. A new image file can be downloaded to the MP.11/a with ScanTool or the Command Line Interface through the MP.11/a serial port. In both cases, the file is transferred through Ethernet with TFTP. Because the CLI serial port option requires a serial RS-232C cable, Proxim recommends the ScanTool option. Download with ScanTool To download an image file with the ScanTool:
1. Set up the TFTP server as described in TFTP Server Setup on page 122. 2. Run ScanTool on a computer that is connected to the same LAN subnet as the MP.11/a. ScanTool scans the subnet for MP.11/a units and displays the found units in the main window. If in Forced Reload, ScanTool does not find the device until the MP.11/a bootloader times out, and the Power LED turns RED and the Ethernet LED goes OFF. Click Rescan to re-scan the subnet and update the display. 3. Select the MP.11/a to which you want to download an image file and click Change. 4. Ensure that IP Address Type Static is selected and fill in the following details:
IP Address and Subnet Mask of the MP.11/a. Password TFTP Server IP Address and, if necessary, the Gateway IP Address of the TFTP server. Image File Name of the file with the new image. 5. Click OK to start the file transfer. The MP.11/a downloads the image file. The TFTP server program should show download activity after a few seconds. When the download is complete, the LED pattern should return to Forced Reload state. the MP.11/a is ready to start the embedded software. 6. Press and release the Reset button. It may take several seconds to cycle through the Forced Reload LED pattern and through the initialization LED sequence. After a Forced Reload procedure, the MP.11/a returns to factory default settings and must be reconfigured. ScanTool can be used to set the system name and IP address. To access the MP.11/a see Chapter 3. Management Overview on page 23. Chapter 7. Procedures 126 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Download with CLI To use the CLI through the serial port of the MP.11/a you need a serial RS-232C cable with a male and a female DB-9 connector, and an ASCII terminal program such as HyperTerminal. Proxim recommends you switch off the MP.11/a and the computer before connecting or disconnecting the serial RS-232C cable. To download an image file:
1. Set up the TFTP server as described in TFTP Server Setup on page 122. 2. Start the terminal program (such as HyperTerminal), set the following connection properties, and then connect:
COM port Bits per second Data bits Stop bits Flow control Parity
(for example COM1 or COM2, to which the MP.11 serial port is connected) 9600 8 1 None None 3. Press the RESET button on the MP.11/a unit; the terminal program displays Power On Self Test (POST) messages. 4. When the Sending Traps to SNMP manager periodically message is displayed after about 30 seconds, press the ENTER key. 5. The command prompt is displayed; enter the following commands:
set ipaddr <IP address MP.11>
set ipsubmask <subnet mask>
set ipaddrtype static set tftpipaddr <IP address TFTP server>
set tftpfilename <image file name>
set ipgw <gateway IP address>
reboot For example:
set ipaddr 10.0.0.12 set ipsubmask 255.255.255.0 set ipaddrtype static set tftpipaddr 10.0.0.20 set tftpfilename image.bin set ipgw 10.0.0.30 reboot The MP.11/a reboots and downloads the image file. The TFTP server program should show download activity after a few seconds. When the download is complete, the MP.11/a is ready for configuration. To access the MP.11/a see Chapter 3. Management Overview on page 23. Note that the IP configuration in normal operation differs from the IP configuration of the Boot Loader. Chapter 7. Procedures 127 MP.11 and MP.11a Installation and Management Appendix A. Specifications MP.11/A HARDWARE Physical Specifications (without metal base) Dimensions (h x w x l) Weight Electrical Specifications Using the Power Adapter 3.5 x 17 x 21.5 cm (1.5 x 6.75 x 8.5 in.) 0.68 kg (1.5 lb.) 100 to 240 VAC (50-60 Hz) @ 0.4 A 12 VDC 10 Watts (maximum) Voltage (Input) Voltage (Output) Power Consumption Using Active Ethernet Input Voltage Output Current Power Consumption Environmental Specifications 42 to 60 VDC 200mA at 48V 10 Watts Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity 0 to 55 C ambient temperature (without plastic cabinet) 95% maximum (non-condensing)
-20 to +75 C ambient temperature 95% maximum (non-condensing) Interfaces Ethernet Serial port Active Ethernet Wireless RUGGEDIZED MP.11/A 10/100 Base-TX, RJ-45 female socket Standard RS-232C interface with DB-9, female connector Category 5, foiled, twisted pair cables must be used to ensure compliance with FCC Part 15, subpart B, Class B requirements. Standard 802.3af pin assignments. Mini PC Card Operating Temperature
-30 to +60 C Wind and Water 125 mph winds, watertight (ETSI IP 64) Weight External Interfaces Under 29 lbs N-connector for external antenna PoE or power and Ethernet cable Serial port for antenna alignment, diagnostics, and management Integrated Antenna on SU products, 23 dBi (5 GHz) or 16 dBi (2.4 GHz) Audio antenna alignment Chapter 2. Installation 128 BROADBAND SUBSCRIBER ANTENNA MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Mars 5 GHz Broadband Antenna provides a cost-effective solution for large-scale WLL, WLAN, H-LAN, ISM, UNII, and Point-to-Multipoint applications. Additional features include:
Minimum gain of 23 dBi over the entire frequency range Lightweight and durable construction DC grounded for lightning protection to meet local electrical building codes. Specifications Electrical Frequency range GAIN, min. VSWR, max. Polarization 3 dB Beamwidth Az./El. typ. Cross Polarization, min. Power Handling Input Impedance Front-to-back ratio, min. 5.15 5.875 GHz 23 dBi 1.5:1 Linear Vertical 10.5 24 dB 10 Watts 50 Ohms 35 dB Mechanical and Environmental 305 x 305 x 15mm (DIAMOND shape) Aluminum Polypropylene, UV-protected
-40 C up to +75 C N-Type Standard Compliance ETSI EN 302 085 V1.1.2 (2001-2002) Range 1, TS 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Dimensions (LxWxD) Base Plate Radome Temperature Input/RF Interface Appendix A. Specifications 129 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide RADIO SPECIFICATIONS 802.11b Channel Allocations The following table shows MP.11 (802.11b) channel allocations that vary from country to country. Values listed in bold indicate default channels and frequencies. Channel ID FCC/World (GHz) ETSI (GHz) France (GHz) Japan (GHz) 1 2 3 (default in most countries) 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 (default in France) 12 13 14 80211.a Channel Allocations 2.412 2.417 2.422 2.427 2.432 2.437 2.442 2.447 2.452 2.457 2.462
2.412 2.417 2.422 2.427 2.432 2.437 2.442 2.447 2.452 2.457 2.462 2.467 2.472
2.457 2.462 2.467 2.472 2.412 2.417 2.422 2.427 2.432 2.437 2.442 2.447 2.452 2.457 2.462 2.467 2.472 2.484 The following table shows MP.11a (802.11a) channel allocations that vary from country to country. Values listed in bold indicate default channels and frequencies. Channel ID 56 60 64 100 104 108 112 116 120 124 128 132 136 140 149 153 157 161 165 FCC 5.280 5.300 5.320 5.500 5.520 5.540 5.560 5.580 5.600 5.620 5.640 5.660 5.680 5.700 5.745 5.765 5.785 5.805 5.825 ETSI 5.500 5.520 5.540 5.560 5.580 5.600 5.620 5.640 5.660 5.680 5.700 Turbo channel ID 1, 5.290 The MP.11a firmware limits the upper limit of this channel to be below 12.13 dBm for release in the United States and Canada. Appendix A. Specifications 130 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Channel ID Turbo Mode Channels FCC 5.290*
5.300 5.760 5.800 1 2 3 4 Frequency Bands in the FCC Regulatory Domain 20 MHz Channelization The set of valid operating channels, channel center frequencies, and DFS requirement for different bands in the FCC regulatory domain is provided in the following table. 20 MHz Channelization Band (GHz) Operating Channel Numbers Center Frequencies
(MHz) DFS Capability U-NII Middle Band 5.25 5.35 GHz U-NII Upper Band 5.725 5.825 GHz 56 60 64 149 153 157 161 165 Required Not Required 5280 5300 5320 5745 5765 5785 5805 5825 Regulatory Domain FCC Appendix A. Specifications 131 MP.11 and MP.11a Installation and Management Appendix B. Troubleshooting This chapter helps you to isolate and solve problems with your MP.11/a. In the event this chapter does not provide a solution, or the solution does not solve your problem, check our support website at http://support.proxim.com/
Before you start troubleshooting, it is important that you have checked the details in the product documentation. For details about RADIUS, TFTP, terminal and telnet programs, and Web browsers, refer to their appropriate documentation. The following sections can help to solve your problem:
LED Indicators below MP.11/a Connectivity Issues below Setup and Configuration Issues on page 134 In some cases, rebooting the MP.11/a clears the problem. If nothing else helps, consider a Soft Reset to Factory Defaults (on page 34) or a Forced Reload (on page 125). The Forced Reload option requires you to download a new image file to the MP.11/a. MP.11/a CONNECTIVITY ISSUES The issues described in this section relate to the connections of the MP.11/a. MP.11/a Does Not Boot The MP.11/a shows no activity (the power LED is off). 1. Ensure that the power supply is properly working and correctly connected. 2. Ensure that all cables are correctly connected. 3. Check the power source. 4. If you are using an Active Ethernet splitter, ensure that the voltage is correct. Serial Link Does Not Work The MP.11/a cannot be reached through the serial port. 1. Check the cable connection between the MP.11/a and the computer. 2. Ensure that the correct COM port is used. 3. Start the terminal program; set the following connection properties (also see HyperTerminal Connection Properties on page 31), and then connect. COM port Bits per second Data bits Stop bits Flow control Parity Line ends For example, COM1 or COM2, to which the MP.11 serial port is connected 9600 0 1 None None Carriage return with line feed 4. Ensure that the MP.11/a and the computer use the same serial port configuration parameters. 5. Press the RESET button on the MP.11/a unit. The terminal program displays Power On Self Tests (POST) messages and displays the following after approximately 90 seconds:
Please enter password:
Chapter 2. Installation 132 HyperTerminal Connection Problems MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide The serial connection properties can be found in HyperTerminal as follows:
1. Start HyperTerminal and select Properties from the File menu. 2. Select Direct to Com 1 in the Connect using: drop-down list (depending upon the COM port you use); then click Configure. A window such as the following is displayed:
3. Make the necessary changes and click OK. 4. Click the Settings tab and then ASCII Setup. A window similar to the following is displayed:
5. Ensure that Send line ends with line feeds is selected and click OK twice. HyperTerminal is now correctly configured. Ethernet Link does not work First check the Ethernet LED;
GREEN BLINKING GREEN Power is on, the radio is up, and the Ethernet link is also up.. Power is on, the radio is coming up and the Ethernet is down. Verify pass-through versus cross-over cable. Appendix B. Troubleshooting 133 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Cannot use the Web Interface:
1. Open a command prompt window and enter ping <ip address MP.11> (for example ping 10.0.0.1). If the MP.11/a does not respond, make sure that you have the correct IP address. If the MP.11/a responds, the Ethernet connection is working properly, continue with this procedure. 2. Ensure that you are using one of the following Web browsers:
Microsoft Internet Explorer version 5.0 or later (Version 6.0 or later recommended) Netscape version 6.0 or later. 3. Ensure that you are not using a proxy server for the connection with your Web browser. 4. Ensure that you have not exceeded the maximum number of Web Interface or CLI sessions. 5. Double-check the physical network connections. Use a well-known unit to ensure the network connection is properly functioning. 6. Perform network infrastructure troubleshooting (check switches, routers, and so on). SETUP AND CONFIGURATION ISSUES The following issues relate to setup and configuration problems. Lost the MP.11/a Password If you lost your password, you must reset the MP.11/a to the default settings. See Hard Reset to Factory Default on page 125. The default password is public. If you record your password, keep it in a safe place. The MP.11/a Responds Slowly If the MP.11/a takes a long time to become available, it could mean that:
No DHCP server is available. The IP address of the MP.11/a is already in use. Verify that the IP address is assigned only to the MP.11/a. Do this by switching off the MP.11/a and then pinging the IP address. If there is a response to the ping, another device in the network is using the same IP address. If the MP.11/a uses a static IP address, switching to DHCP mode could remedy this problem. Also see Setting the IP Address on page 24. There is too much network traffic. Web Interface Does Not Work If you cannot connect to the MP.11/a Web server through the network:
1. Connect a computer to the serial port of the MP.11/a and check the HTTP status. The HTTP status can restrict HTTP access at different interfaces. For more information, see Serial Port on page 30. 2. Open a command prompt window and enter:
ping <ip address MP.11> (for example ping 10.0.0.1) If the MP.11/a does not respond, ensure that you have the correct IP address. If the MP.11/a responds, the Ethernet connection is working properly, continue with this procedure. Appendix B. Troubleshooting 134 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide 3. Ensure that you are using one of the following Web browsers:
Microsoft Internet Explorer version 5.0 or later (Version 6.0 or later recommended) Netscape version 6.0 or later 4. Ensure that you are not using a proxy server for the connection with your Web browser. 5. Ensure that you have not exceeded the maximum number of Web Interface sessions. Command Line Interface Does Not Work If you cannot connect to the MP.11/a through the network:
1. Connect a computer to the serial port of the MP.11/a and check the SNMP table. The SNMP table can restrict telnet or HTTP access. For more information, see Serial Port on page 30. 2. Open a command prompt window and enter: ping <ip address MP.11>
(for example ping 10.0.0.1). If the MP.11/a does not respond, ensure that you have the correct IP address. If the MP.11/a responds, the Ethernet connection is working properly; continue with this procedure. 3. Ensure that you have not exceeded the maximum number of CLI sessions. TFTP Server Does Not Work With TFTP, you can transfer files to and from the MP.11/a. Also see TFTP Server Setup on page 122. If a TFTP server is not properly configured and running, you cannot upload and download files. The TFTP server:
Can be situated either local or remote Must have a valid IP address Must be set for send and receive without time-out Must be running only during file upload and download If the TFTP server does not upload or download files, it could mean:
The TFTP server is not running The IP address of the TFTP server is invalid The upload or download directory is not correctly set The file name is not correct Online Help Is Not Available Online help is not available 1. Make sure that the Help files are installed on your computer or server. Also see Installing Documentation and Software on page 21. 2. Verify whether the path of the help files in the Web Interface refers to the correct directory. See Help on page 93. Changes Do Not Take Effect Changes made in the Web Interface do not take effect:
1. Restart your Web browser. Log into the MP.11/a again and make changes. Reboot the MP.11/a when prompted to do so. 2. Wait until the reboot is completed before accessing the MP.11/a again. Appendix B. Troubleshooting 135 MP.11 and MP.11a Installation and Management Appendix C. Support and Contacts If you are having a problem using a Proxim WAN product and cannot resolve it with the information in the product documentation, gather the following information and contact Proxim Technical Support:
What kind of network are you using?
What were you doing when the error occurred?
What error message did you see?
Can you reproduce the problem?
Be sure to obtain an RMA number before sending any equipment to Proxim for repair. To receive E-mail technical support, be sure to include the serial number of the product(s) in question. The serial number should be on the product and conform to the following format: ##UT######## or ##R7########. We are unable to respond to your inquiry without this information. USA & Canada Customers Call Technical Support: WAN Toll Free 866-674-6626 or 408-542-5390 Hours: 6:00 AM to 5:00 PM M-F Pacific Time LAN Toll Free 866-674-6626 Hours: 24x7 International Customers Call Technical Support:
WAN 408-542-5390 Hours: 6:00 AM to 5:00 PM M-F Pacific Time LAN 408-542-5390 Hours: 24x7 Search Knowledgebase:
http://support.proxim.com/
Latest software and documentation: http://support.proxim.com/
Appendix C. Support and Contacts 136 MP.11 and MP.11a Installation and Management Glossary Address Realm An address realm is a network domain in which the network addresses are uniquely assigned to entities such that datagrams can be routed to them. Application Level Gateway (ALG) An Application Level Gateway is an application-specific translation agent that provides the required transparency for an application running on a host in a private network to connect to its counterpart running on a host in the public network. The NAT feature requires an ALG to support certain applications. ARP The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is intended to find the MAC address belonging to an IP address. Authentication method The process the MP.11/a uses to decide whether a station that wants to register is allowed or not. IEEE 802.11 specifies two forms of authentication: open system and shared key; WORP only supports shared key because of security constraints. Authentication server Shared Secret This is a kind of password shared between the MP.11/a and the RADIUS authentication server. This password is used to encrypt important data exchanged between the MP.11/a and the RADIUS server Authentication server authentication port This is a UDP port number (default is 1812), which is used to connect to the authentication server for obtaining authentication information. Auto-Negotiation A signaling method that lets each node define its operational mode and detect the operational mode of the adjacent node. Auto-negotiation can be used in dual-
function 10/100 Mbps Ethernet adapters. The process happens out-of-band with no loss of network throughput. Backbone The central part of a network; the backbone network connects all remote and sub networks to each other and to the central infrastructure (such as the mail server, Internet gateway, and so on). Base If an interface is running in Outdoor mode (WORP), it is either a base or a subscriber interface. A base interface controls the communication on the channel and is located in the central part of the network cell. Multiple SUs can connect to one base; two bases cannot communicate with each other. Broadcast Storm A broadcast storm is a large series of broadcast packets
(most often caused by wrong network configuration) that severely impact the network performance. Client IP Address Pool This a pool of IP addresses from which the MP.11/a can assign IP addresses to clients, which perform a DHCP Request. Configuration Files A configuration file contains the MP.11/a configuration details. Configuration items include among others the IP address and other network-specific values. Configuration files may be uploaded to a TFTP server for backup and downloaded into the MP.11/a for restoring the configuration. DHCP Relay Agent A feature of the MP.11/a that intercepts DHCP requests from clients and forwards them to a DHCP server. For the client, the DHCP Relay Agent of the MP.11/a functions like a DHCP server. This enables DHCP requests to pass router boundaries; for example, it is not required to have a DHCP server on every IP subnet. Domain Name Server (DNS) A domain name server is an Internet service that translates domain names into IP addresses. For example, www.ietf.org is translated into 4.17.168.6. Download Downloading a file means copying a file from a remote server to a device or host. In case of the MP.11/a downloading means transferring a file from a TFTP server to the MP.11/a. Downstream Downstream means a data stream from the central part of the network to the end user. See also upstream. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a method to dynamically assign IP addresses. If DHCP is enabled, the device or computer broadcasts a request that is answered by a DHCP Server. Encryption Encryption is a means of coding data with a key before sending it across a network. The same key must be used to decode the information at the receiver. This way prevents unauthorized access to the data that is send across the network. Ethernet Ethernet is the most widely installed Local Area Network
(LAN) technology. The MP.11/a supports both 10 and 100 Mbps and half and full duplex. Gateway A gateway is network device that connects multiple (IP) networks to each other. A gateway can perform protocol conversion. Glossary 137 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Group A group is logical collection of network parameters. For example, the System Group is composed of several parameters and tables giving system information of the MP.11/a. All items for a group are grouped under one tab of the Web Interface and start with the same prefix for the command line interface. HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) is the protocol to transport Web pages. When you access the Internet with your browser, the HTTP protocol is used for data transport
(http://www.Tsunamiwireless.com). When you access the MP.11/a using the Web Interface, HTTP is used to transport the information. ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) is used by computers and devices to report errors encountered during processing packets, and to perform other IP-layer functions, such as diagnostics (ping). Image The image is the binary executable of the embedded MP.11/a software. To update the MP.11/a you must download a new image file. IP Address A unique numerical address of a computer attached to the Internet or Intranet. An IP (Internet Protocol) address consists of a network part and part for a host (computer) number. An IP address is represented by four numbers in the range 0 - 255 separated by dots: for example 10.0.10.1 and 172.21.43.214. See also subnet mask. LAN A Local Area Network (LAN) is a network of limited size to which computers and devices can connect so that they can communicate with each other. License file A license file is used to enable certain features of the MP.11/a. The MP.11/a already has a license file when it is shipped. When more features become available, you can purchase a license file and download it to the MP.11/a to enable these additional features. MAC Media Access Control. MAC Address A MAC (Media Access Control) address is a globally unique network device address, which is hardware bound. It used to identify a network device in a LAN. A MAC address is represented by six two-digit hexadecimal numbers (0 - 9 and A - F) separated by colons: for example 00:02:2D:47:1F:71 and 00:D0:AB:00:01:AC. Management Information Block (MIB) A Management Information Block (MIB) is a formal description of a set of network objects that can be managed with the Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP). A MIB can be loaded by a management application so that it knows the MP.11/a specific objects. Media Independent Interface (MII) A standard interface between the MAC layer and any of the three physical layers (100 Base-TX, 100 Base-T4, and 100 Base-FX) for Fast Ethernet, similar to the AUI interface for traditional Ethernet. Network Address Translation Network Address Translation is a method by which IP addresses are mapped from one address realm to another, providing transparent routing to end hosts. Network Mask See subnet mask. Parameter A parameter is fundamental value that can be displayed and changed. For example, the MP.11/a must have a unique IP address and the PC Cards must know which channels to use. You can view and change parameters with the Web Interface, command line interface and SNMP. Password The MP.11/a is password protected. To access the MP.11/a you need to enter a password before you can view or change its settings. The default password is public. Ping Ping is a basic Internet program that lets you verify if a particular computer or device with a certain IP address is reachable. If the computer or device receives the ping packet, it responds which gives the ping program the opportunity to display the round-trip time. Remote A remote is a base or a subscriber interface. For a base interface, the number of remotes is the number of SUs registered; for a subscriber interface, there is only one remote, which is the base. RIP Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is used between routers to update routing information so that a router automatically knows which port to use for a certain destination IP address. Router Routers forward packets from one network to another based on routing information. A router uses a dynamic routing protocol like RIP or static routes to base its forwarding decision on. ScanTool A computer program that can be used to retrieve or set the IP address of a locally connected MP.11/a. Glossary 138 MP.11 and MP.11/a Quick Install Guide Trap A trap is used within SNMP to report an unexpected or unallowable condition. Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) is a lightweight protocol for transferring files that is like a simple form of File Transfer Protocol (FTP). A TFTP client is implemented on the MP.11/a; using the upload and download commands, the MP.11/a can respectively copy a file to or from a TFTP server. TFTP server software is provided on the MP.11/a CD-ROM. Upload Uploading a file means copying a file from a network device to a remote server. In case of the MP.11/a uploading means transferring a file from the MP.11/a to a TFTP server. See also download. Upstream Upstream means a data stream from the end users to the central part of the network. See also downstream. UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair WEP The Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) algorithm is the standard encryption method used to protect wireless communication from eavesdropping. WORP The Wireless Outdoor Router Protocol (WORP) was designed to optimize long distance links and multipoint networks with Hidden Node effect to eliminate collisions and loss of bandwidth. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) A protocol used for the communication between a network management application and the devices it is managing. The network management application is called the SNMP manager; the devices it manages have implemented SNMP agents. Not only the MP.11/a but also almost every network device contains a SNMP agent. The manageable objects of a device are arranged in a Management Information Base, also called MIB. The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) allows managers and agents to communicate for accessing these objects. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) can be used to create redundant networks (hot standby) and to prevent loops. If enabled, spanning tree prevents loops by disabling redundant links; if a link fails, it can automatically enable a backup link. STP Shielded Twisted Pair Subnet Mask A subnet mask is a bit mask that defines which part of an IP address is used for the network part and which part for a host (computer) number. A subnet mask is like an IP address represented by four numbers in the range 0 - 255 separated by dots. When the IP address 172.17.23.14 has a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0, the network part is 172.17.23 of the host number is 14. See also IP address. Subscriber Unit If an interface is running in outdoor mode (WORP), it is either a base or a subscriber interface. Subscriber interface behavior is controlled by the base to which it is registered. SUs are located in the remote locations of a network cell. Multiple SUs can connect to one base; two SUs cannot communicate with each other. See also WORP and base. Table Tables hold parameters for several related items. For example, you can add several potential managers to the SNMP IP access table. Tables can be displayed using with the Web Interface, command line interface and SNMP. Topology Topology is the physical layout of network components
(cable, stations, gateways, hubs, and so on). Transparent Routing Transparent routing refers to routing a datagram between disparate address realms, by modifying address contents in the IP header to be valid in the address realm into which the datagram is routed. Glossary 139
1 2 3 4 5 | manual 1 | Users Manual | 1.73 MiB | September 05 2007 |
Tsunami MP.11-R Installation and Management Guide Model 2454-R Model 5054-R Model 5054-R-LR Model 4954-R Model 954-R Version 4.0.0 MP.11-R Installation and Management Before installing and using this product, see the Safety and Regulatory Compliance Guide located on the product CD. IMPORTANT!
Copyright 2007 Proxim Wireless Corporation, San Jose, CA. All rights reserved. Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents: 5,231,634;
5,875,179; 6,006,090; 5,809,060; 6,075,812; 5,077,753. This manual and the software described herein are copyrighted with all rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form by any means without the written permission of Proxim Wireless Corporation. Trademarks Tsunami, Proxim, and the Proxim logo are trademarks of Proxim Wireless Corporation. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners. Tsunami MP.11-R Installation and Management Guide P/N 73328 May 2007 2 MP.11-R Installation and Management Contents 1 Introduction. 10 Products Covered in this Guide . 10 About This Book . 10 Reference Manual . 11 Wireless Network Topologies . 12 Point-to-Point Link . 12 Point-to-Multipoint Network . 12 Management and Monitoring Capabilities . 13 Web Interface . 13 Command Line Interface . 13 SNMP Management . 13 2 Installation and Initialization . 15 Hardware Overview . 16 Power-over-Ethernet . 16 Serial Connection . 16 External Antenna Connection. 17 Product Package . 18 Hardware Installation . 20 Step 1: Choose a Location . 22 Step 2: Unpack Shipping Box . 22 Step 3: Assemble the Cable . 23 Step 4: Determine Proper Mounting Orientation. 24 Step 5: Assemble Mounting Hardware . 25 Step 6: Mount the Unit . 26 Step 7: Plug in the Cables . 27 Step 8: Power on the Unit. 28 Step 9: View LEDs . 28 Step 10: Align the Antenna. 29 Step 11: Tighten the Cables . 31 Step 12: Weatherproof the Connectors . 32 Step 13: Install Documentation and Software. 33 Initialization . 34 ScanTool. 34 Setting the IP Address with ScanTool. 34 Logging in to the Web Interface . 36 3 System Overview . 37 Changing Basic Configuration Information . 37 Country and Related Settings. 37 3 MP.11-R Installation and Management Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS). 38 Transmit Power Control . 39 SU Registration . 41 Dynamic Data Rate Selection (DDRS) . 42 Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) . 43 Quality of Service (QoS) . 44 Concepts and Definitions . 44 4 Basic Management . 48 Navigation . 48 Rebooting and Resetting . 49 Rebooting. 49 Resetting Hardware . 49 Soft Reset to Factory Default . 49 General Configuration Settings . 51 Monitoring Settings . 52 Security Settings . 53 Encryption . 53 Passwords . 53 Default Settings . 54 Upgrading the Unit . 56 5 System Status. 57 Status . 57 System Status . 57 Systems Traps . 57 Event Log . 58 6 Configuration . 59 System Parameters . 59 Bridge and Routing Modes. 61 Network Parameters . 64 IP Configuration . 64 Roaming. 65 DHCP Server . 68 Spanning Tree (Bridge Mode Only) . 70 IP Routes (Routing Mode only) . 71 DHCP Relay Agent (Routing Mode Only) . 73 Interface Parameters . 75 Wireless Interface . 75 Ethernet . 86 4 MP.11-R Installation and Management SNMP Parameters . 87 Trap Host Table . 87 RIP Parameters (Routing Mode Only) . 89 RIP Example . 90 RIP Notes. 90 Management Parameters . 91 Passwords . 91 Services . 91 Security Parameters . 94 MAC Authentication (BSU Only) . 94 Encryption . 95 RADIUS Authentication (BSU Only). 95 Filtering Parameters . 97 Overview . 97 Ethernet Protocol . 98 Static MAC Address Filtering . 99 Storm Threshold. 102 Broadcast Protocol Filtering . 102 IP Access Table Filtering . 103 Intra-Cell Blocking (BSU Only; Bridge Mode Only) . 105 Overview . 105 Intra-Cell Blocking Group Table . 105 MAC Table . 107 Security Gateway. 108 VLAN Parameters (BSU Only; Bridge Mode Only) . 109 Overview . 109 BSU VLAN Configuration . 111 SU VLAN Configuration . 113 QoS (Quality of Service) Parameters (BSU Only) . 115 QoS PIR Configuration. 115 QoS SFC Configuration . 116 QoS Class Configuration . 118 QoS SU Configuration . 122 NAT (SU Only; Routing Mode Only) . 124 NAT Static Port Mapping Table . 124 Supported Session Protocols. 125 7 Monitoring . 127 Wireless . 128 General Performance. 128 WORP Interface Performance . 128 5 MP.11-R Installation and Management ICMP . 130 Per Station . 131 Features . 132 Link Test . 133 Interfaces . 134 IP ARP Table . 135 IP Routes . 136 Learn Table . 137 RIP . 138 RADIUS . 139 QoS . 140 Temperature . 141 8 Commands . 142 Download . 142 Upload . 143 Reboot . 144 Reset . 145 Help Link . 146 9 Procedures . 147 TFTP Server Setup . 148 Web Interface Image File Download . 149 Configuration Backup . 150 Configuration Restore . 151 Soft Reset to Factory Default . 152 Hard Reset to Factory Default . 153 Forced Reload . 154 Image File Download with the Bootloader . 155 Download with ScanTool . 155 Download with CLI . 155 10 Troubleshooting . 157 Connectivity Issues . 157 Unit Does Not Boot . 157 Serial Link Does Not Work . 157 HyperTerminal Connection Problems. 158 Ethernet Link Does Not Work. 158 Cannot Use the Web Interface. 158 6 MP.11-R Installation and Management Communication Issues . 159 Two Units Are Unable to Communicate Wirelessly . 159 Setup and Configuration Issues . 160 Lost Password . 160 The Unit Responds Slowly . 160 Web Interface Does Not Work . 160 Command Line Interface Does Not Work . 160 TFTP Server Does Not Work . 160 Online Help Is Not Available . 161 Changes Do Not Take Effect . 161 VLAN Operation Issues . 162 Link Problems . 163 General Check . 163 Statistics Check . 163 Analyzing the Spectrum . 164 A Country Codes and Channels . 165 2.4 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country . 165 5 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country . 170 4.9 GHz Channels/Frequencies . 187 B Technical Specifications . 188 Part Numbers . 189 Radio Units. 189 Accessories . 193 194 Regulatory Approvals and Frequency Ranges . 195 Model 2454-R Regulatory Approval and Frequency Ranges. 195 Model 5054-R Regulatory Approval and Frequency Ranges. 197 Model 5054-R-LR Regulatory Approval and Frequency Ranges. 198 Model 4954-R Regulatory Approval and Frequency Ranges. 198 Integrated Antenna Specifications . 198 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 16-dBi Antenna. 198 Model 5054-R/5054-R-LR Subscriber Unit with Integrated 23-dBi Antenna . 199 4954-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 21-dBi Antenna . 199 OFDM Modulation Rates . 200 Wireless Protocol . 200 Interfaces . 200 Receive Sensitivity . 200 Model 2454-R. 200 Model 5054-R. 200 7 MP.11-R Installation and Management Model 5054-R-LR. 201 Model 4954-R. 201 Maximum Throughput . 201 Model 2454-R. 201 Model 5054-R/5054-R-LR . 202 Model 4954-R. 202 Latency . 203 Transmit Power Settings . 203 Model 2454-R. 203 Model 5054-R. 203 Model 5054-R-LR. 203 Model 4954-R. 204 Range Information . 204 Model 2454-R. 204 Model 5054-R. 204 Model 5054-R-LR. 204 Model 4954-R. 204 Hardware Specifications . 204 Software Features . 205 Management . 205 LEDs . 206 Power Requirements . 206 Physical and Environmental Specifications . 206 MTBF and Warranty . 207 C Lightning Protection . 208 D Technical Services and Support . 209 Obtaining Technical Services and Support . 209 Support Options . 210 Proxim eService Web Site Support . 210 Telephone Support. 210 ServPak Support . 210 E Statement of Warranty . 211 Warranty Coverage . 211 Repair or Replacement . 211 Limitations of Warranty. 211 Support Procedures . 211 Other Information . 212 Search Knowledgebase . 212 8 Ask a Question or Open an Issue . 212 Other Adapter Cards . 212 MP.11-R Installation and Management 9 Introduction MP.11-R Installation and Management 1 The Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R, 5054-R, and 4954-R Base Station and Subscriber Units (BSUs and SUs) are flexible wireless outdoor routers that let you design solutions for point-to-point links and point-to-multipoint networks. The 2454-R, 5054-R, and 4954-R are part of the Tsunami MP.11 product family, which is comprised of several additional products, including:
The 5054 Base Station (BSU), the 5054 Subscriber Unit (SU), and the 5012-SUI Subscriber Unit for indoor installation. 5012-SUR Subscriber Unit for outdoor installation Some of the key features of the MP.11 product family are:
The use of a highly optimized protocol for outdoor applications Routing and bridging capability Asymmetric bandwidth management Management through a Web Interface, a Command Line Interface (CLI), or Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) Software and configuration upgrade through file transfer (TFTP) Outdoor placement, close to the antenna, for significantly improved range and ease of installation Optional integrated antenna VLAN support Products Covered in this Guide This User Guide details functionality of the following products. Collectively, these products are referenced as MP.11-R. Product Tsunami MP.11 2454-R Tsunami MP.11 5054-R Tsunami MP.11 4954-R Tsunami MP.11 954-R Description Wireless outdoor Base Station and/or subscriber unit operating in the 2.4 GHz band. Wireless outdoor Base Station and/or subscriber unit operating in the 5 GHz band. Wireless outdoor Base Station and/or subscriber unit operating in the 4.9 GHz Public Safety band. Wireless outdoor Base Station and/or subsciber unit operating in the 900 MHz band. NOTE: Unless otherwise noted, screen captures in this User Guide are from the 5054-R. About This Book Before installing and using the unit, Proxim recommends you review the following chapters of this manual:
Chapter 1 Introduction (this chapter): Provides an overview of the content of this manual as well as wireless network topologies and combinations that can be built with the unit. Chapter 2 Installation and Initialization: Provides detailed installation instructions and explains how to access the unit for configuration and maintenance. Chapter 3 System Overview: Provides a high-level overview of configuration processes and features. Chapter 4 Basic Management: Explains the most common settings used to manage the unit. Chapter 5 System Status: Depicts the Web Interfaces Status options, including System Status and Event Logs. 10 Introduction About This Book MP.11-R Installation and Management Chapter 6 Configuration: Depicts the Web Interfaces Configure options in a hierarchical manner, so you can easily find details about each item. Chapter 7 Monitoring: Depicts the Web Interfaces Monitor options in a hierarchical manner, so you can easily find details about each item Chapter 8 Commands: Depicts the Web Interfaces Commands options in a hierarchical manner, so you can easily find details about each item Chapter 9 Procedures: Provides a set of procedures, including TFTP Server Setup, Configuration Backup, Restore, and Download, Forced Reload, and Reset to Factory Defaults. Chapter 10 Troubleshooting: Helps you to isolate and solve problems with your radio unit. The appendixes contain supplementary information you may not need immediately, including Country Code Tables and Technical Support information. NOTE: If you are already familiar with this type of product, you can use the Quick Install Guide to install the unit. Reference Manual As a companion to the Installation and Management manual, the Tsunami MP.11/QB.11 Reference Manual provides the following supplemental information:
Command Line Interface: Documents the text-based configuration utilitys keyboard commands and parameters. Event Log Error Messages: Documents the error messages that you may see in your Event Log. Alarm Traps: Documents the alarm traps that can be set. Microsoft Windows IAS Radius Server Configuration: Provides information to assist you in setting up the IAS Radius Server. Addition of Units to a Routed Network: Describes how to add more units to your routed network. Glossary: Describes terms used in the Tsunami MP.11 documentation and in the wireless industry. 11 Introduction Wireless Network Topologies Wireless Network Topologies MP.11-R Installation and Management The unit can be used in various network topologies and combinations. The required equipment depends upon the wireless network topology you want to build. Make sure all required equipment is available before installing the unit. The unit is designed for outdoor placement. One model of the SU is equipped with an integrated antenna. For all other models, you can connect the unit to an outdoor antenna. See the Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide for details. WARNING: To connect the unit to an outdoor antenna, consult the appropriate manufacturers documentation for additional regulatory information, safety instructions, and installation requirements. You can set up the following types of topologies:
Point-to-Point Link Point-to-Multipoint Network Each unit is set up as either a Base Station Unit (BSU) or a Subscriber Unit (SU). A link between two locations always consists of a BSU and an SU. A BSU can, depending upon its configuration, connect to one or more SUs. An SU, however, can connect only to one BSU. Point-to-Point Link With a BSU and an SU, it is easy to set up a wireless point-to-point link as depicted in the following figure. A point-to-point link lets you set up a connection between two locations as an alternative to:
Leased lines in building-to-building connections Wired Ethernet backbones between wireless access points in difficult-to-wire environments Point-to-Multipoint Network If you want to connect more than two buildings, you can set up a single point-to-multipoint network with a single BSU and multiple SUs, as depicted in the following figure. 12 Introduction Management and Monitoring Capabilities MP.11-R Installation and Management Up to 250 SUs can be connected to a BSU. If a BSU already has 250 SU, a new SU cannot be connected to the BSU. In this figure, the system is designed as follows:
The central building B is equipped with a BSU, connected to either an omni-directional, or a wide angle antenna. The two other buildings A and C are both equipped with an SU connected to a directional antenna. Management and Monitoring Capabilities There are several management and monitoring interfaces available to the network administrator to configure and manage the unit:
Web Interface Command Line Interface SNMP Management Web Interface The Web interface (HTTP) provides easy access to configuration settings and network statistics from any computer on the network. You can access the Web interface over your network, over the Internet, or with a crossover Ethernet cable connected directly to your computers Ethernet port. See Logging in to the Web Interface. Command Line Interface The Command Line Interface (CLI) is a text-based configuration utility that supports a set of keyboard commands and parameters to configure and manage the unit. You enter command statements, composed of CLI commands and their associated parameters. You can issue commands from the keyboard for real-time control or from scripts that automate configuration. See the Tsunami MP.11/QB.11 Reference Manual for more information about the Command Line Interface. SNMP Management In addition to the Web interface and the CLI, you also can manage and configure your unit using the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). Note that this requires an SNMP manager program (sometimes called MIB browser) or a Network Manager program using SNMP, such as HP OpenView or Castelrocks SNMPc. The units support several Management Information Base (MIB) files that describe the parameters that can be viewed and configured using SNMP:
mib802.mib orinoco.mib 13 Introduction Management and Monitoring Capabilities MP.11-R Installation and Management rfc1213.mib rfc1493.mib rfc1643.mib Proxim provides these MIB files on the CD included with your unit. You must compile one or more of these MIB files into your SNMP programs database before you can manage your unit using SNMP. See the documentation that came with your SNMP manager for instructions about how to compile MIBs. NOTE: When you update the software in the unit, you must also update the MIBs to the same release. Because the parameters in the MIB may have changed, you will not otherwise have full control over the features in the new release. The enterprise MIB (orinoco.mib) defines the read and read/write objects you can view or configure using SNMP. These objects correspond to most of the settings and statistics that are available with the other management interfaces. See the enterprise MIB for more information; the MIB can be opened with any text editor, such as Microsoft Word, Notepad, and WordPad. See SNMP Parameters. IMPORTANT!
Using a serial connection, you can access the unit through a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal. (See HyperTerminal Connection Properties in the Tsunami MP.11/QB.11 Reference Manual.) For all other modes of connection, you will need the IP address of the unit in order to use the Web Interface, SNMP, or the CLI. See Setting the IP Address with ScanTool for more information. The remainder of this User Guide discusses installing the unit and managing it using the Web interface only. For information on managing the unit via the CLI, see the Tsunami MP.11/QB.11 Reference Manual. IMPORTANT!
14 Installation and Initialization MP.11-R Installation and Management 2 This chapter describes the steps required to install and mount the unit, and to align the antenna. An antenna cable is required only when you use the external antenna option. Note that the unit must have either the integrated antenna or must be connected to an external antenna for its operation. The installation procedure does not include the mounting and connection of antennas. See the Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide for this information. If you are already familiar with this type of product, you can use the Quick Install Guide for streamlined installation procedures. See the following sections:
Hardware Overview Product Package Hardware Installation Step 1: Choose a Location Step 2: Unpack Shipping Box Step 3: Assemble the Cable Step 4: Determine Proper Mounting Orientation Step 5: Assemble Mounting Hardware Step 6: Mount the Unit Step 7: Plug in the Cables Step 8: Power on the Unit Step 9: View LEDs Step 10: Align the Antenna Step 11: Tighten the Cables Step 12: Weatherproof the Connectors Step 13: Install Documentation and Software Initialization ScanTool Setting the IP Address with ScanTool Logging in to the Web Interface 15 Installation and Initialization Hardware Overview Hardware Overview MP.11-R Installation and Management The unit contains a state-of-the-art wireless radio, an optional high-gain performance flat-panel antenna, and Power-
over-Ethernet (the sole means of power for the unit). For further protection, the unit has internal, built-in surge protection. Power-over-Ethernet The unit is equipped with a Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) module. Using PoE, you can provide electricity and wired connectivity to the unit over a single Category 5 cable. Although the power injector that is supplied with the unit is 802.3af-compatible, standard 802.3af-compliant power modules will not properly power the units. Always use the supplied power injector. The PoE integrated module provides 48 VDC over a standard Cat5 Ethernet cable. Maximum power supplied to the unit is 20 Watts (when the unit is heating or cooling); the units typically draw less than 7.5 Watts. The unit only accepts power on the extra pairs, not on the data pairs according the configuration for midshipman power injection, see the IEEE 802.3af standard. Between 0 and 55 Celsius internal temperature, the unit does not need to regulate its temperature, so the power draw is generally lower in this temperature range. When the internal temperature gets close to the limits, the unit starts to heat/
cool itself and the power draw increases. Powering while cold triggers a special self-heat mode where the unit is inoperable until the temperature is above 0 deg Celsius. This is signaled by a solid red LED on the Ethernet connector. Once the internal temperature is above 0 degrees Celsius, the unit boots normally. Function Type Impedance Recommended cables Maximum Distance Connector type, unit end Connector type, power & Ethernet adapter end Recommended Cable Power (DC) and Ethernet connection Cat5, UV-shielded and outdoor-rated 100 ohms 4 UTP, 24 AWG, UL rated 330 feet / 100 meters RJ45 female, weatherized using weatherproof connector RJ45 Serial Connection The serial connection is made with an RJ11 to DB9 connector (also referred to as a dongle). Connect the RJ11 end to the unit and connect the serial (DB9) end to your PC to assist you in aligning the antenna and to issue CLI commands. See the following figure:
16 MP.11-R Installation and Management Installation and Initialization Hardware Overview The connections are as follows:
RJ11 D-Shell 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 NC 2 4 NC 1 + 3 + 5 6 NC NC NC External Antenna Connection One model of the SU has an integrated antenna; all other models have an external antenna connector (N-type) and no integrated antenna. For more information about external antennas, see the Antenna Installation Guide. 17 Installation and Initialization Product Package Product Package MP.11-R Installation and Management Each shipment includes the items in the following table. Verify that you have received all parts of the shipment. NOTE: Unless noted in this table, cables are not supplied with the unit. BS / SS with external antenna connector RJ45 to DB9 serial connector
(supplied with BS only) (1 ea.) Installation CD and Quick Installation Guide Power Injector and Cord Cable Termination Kit Kit includes the following:
b c d e a b a. RJ45 connectors (2) b. Sealing caps (2) c. Sealing nut d. Lock nut e. Grounding screws 18 Installation and Initialization Product Package MP.11-R Installation and Management Mounting Kit Kit includes the following:
a b c a. Mounting clamp for wall/pole b. Extension arm c. Mounting plate to enclosure d. Mounting clamp for pole mounting d Mounting Hardware Rubber Tape Strip The following mounting hardware, included with the mounting kit:
Quantity Description 6 ea. Plain washer #5/16 2 ea. Hex Cap Screw NC 5/16-18 x 35 2 ea. 4 ea. 4 ea. 2 ea. 4 ea. Nut NC 5/16-18 Helical Spring Lock Washer #1/4 Helical Spring Lock Washer #1/16 Hex Cap Screw NC 5/16-18 x 80 68764, Screw, Machine, Pan, Philips, 1/4"-20, 5/8"L 19 Installation and Initialization Hardware Installation Hardware Installation MP.11-R Installation and Management This section describes the steps required to install and mount the unit, and to align the antenna. The installation procedure does not include the mounting and connection of antennas. See the documentation that accompanies the antenna and the Tsunami MP.11 Antenna Installation Guide for this information. IMPORTANT:
Before installing and using this product, see Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information on the product CD. IMPORTANT:
All units must be installed by a suitably trained professional installation technician or by a qualified installation service. WARNING:
To ensure proper grounding, use the hole at the bottom point on the back of each unit and the provided grounding screws to attach a ground wire of at least 10 AWG stranded to each unit. Use proper wire grounding techniques in accordance with local electric codes. NOTE:
The Configure System window provides a selectable Country field that automatically provides the allowed bandwidth and frequencies for the selected country as well as, where applicable, Dynamic Frequency Selection
(DFS) and Transmit Power Control (TPC). Non-US installers should not add an antenna system until the Country is selected, the unit is rebooted, and the proper power level is configured. The output power level of the final channel selected by DFS scan can be found in the Event Log. Be sure to read the Release Notes file on the product CD as it contains software version and driver information that may not have been available when this document was produced. Equipment is to be used with, and powered by, the power injector provided or by a power injector that meets these requirements:
UL-Listed/ITE (NWGQ) Limited Power Source Output per UL/IEC 60950 CE-marked Approved for Power-over-Ethernet Rated output, 48 Vdc/0.42 A Pinout follows 802.3af standard for mid-span devices See the following sections for installation instructions:
Step 1: Choose a Location Step 2: Unpack Shipping Box Step 3: Assemble the Cable 20 MP.11-R Installation and Management Installation and Initialization Hardware Installation Step 4: Determine Proper Mounting Orientation Step 5: Assemble Mounting Hardware Step 6: Mount the Unit Step 7: Plug in the Cables Step 8: Power on the Unit Step 9: View LEDs Step 10: Align the Antenna Step 11: Tighten the Cables Step 12: Weatherproof the Connectors Step 13: Install Documentation and Software 21 Installation and Initialization Hardware Installation Step 1: Choose a Location MP.11-R Installation and Management To make optimal use of the unit, you must find a suitable location for the hardware. The range of the radio unit largely depends upon the position of the antenna. Proxim recommends you do a site survey, observing the following requirements, before mounting the hardware. The location must allow easy disconnection of power to the radio if necessary. Air must be able to flow freely around the hardware. The radio unit must be kept away from vibration and excessive heat. The installation must conform to local regulations at all times. The units are designed to directly mount to a pole. Using the supplied brackets and hardware, you can mount them to a 1.25 inch to 4.5-inch pole (outside diameter). Using just one of the pole mounting brackets, you can mount the units to a wall or other flat surface. CAUTION: Proxim recommends the use of a lightning arrestor at the building ingress point. You can purchase the Proxim Lightning Protector; see the documentation that comes with the unit for more information and installation instructions. Step 2: Unpack Shipping Box 1. Unpack the unit and accessories from the shipping box. 2. Note the Ethernet and MAC addresses of the unit, as well as the serial number; these addresses may be used when configuring the unit. NOTE: The serial number is required to obtain support from Proxim. Keep this information in a safe place. 22 Installation and Initialization Hardware Installation Step 3: Assemble the Cable MP.11-R Installation and Management You will be attaching an outdoor-rated 24 AWG CAT5 cable (diameter.114 to .250 inches/2.9 to 6.4 mm) (not provided) to the Power-over-Ethernet port on the back of the unit and waterproofing the assembly later in the installation procedure. First, you must construct the cable and assemble the waterproofing cable covers as described in the following steps. Proxim greatly simplifies this assembly process by offering pre-assembled CAT5 cable kits in 25m, 50m, and 75m lengths
(part numbers 69819, 69820, and 69821, respectively). 1. Slide the sealing nut (A) over the bare end of the CAT5 cable. 2. Slide the lock nut (B) over the bare end of the CAT5 cable. 3. Slide the sealing cap (C) over the bare end of the CAT5 cable. Make sure the red rubber gasket is inside the cap. 4. Apply two wraps of 0.5 wide Teflon tape (not supplied with unit) around the threads of the lock nut (B) that will go inside the sealing cap. 5. Thread the lock nut (B) onto the sealing cap (C), and hand tighten. 6. Terminate the RJ45 connectors (D) to both ends of the CAT5 cable; test for proper wiring (cable should be a straight-
through cable). D C B Apply Teflon tape here A NOTE:
The cable must feed through all parts of the weatherproof cap before the RJ45 is crimped on the outdoor Ethernet cable. The cable between the power injector and the unit must be a straight-through Ethernet cable (without crossover). Due to variance in CAT5 cable diameter, termination techniques of the installer, and the application of proper tightness of the connectors, it is strongly recommended that all cable connectors are secured by external weatherproofing. This process will be described in Step 12: Weatherproof the Connectors. 23 Installation and Initialization Hardware Installation Step 4: Determine Proper Mounting Orientation MP.11-R Installation and Management 1. Locate the arrow on the back of the unit and determine your desired mounting orientation. For vertical polarization using the integrated antenna, the arrow should be pointing up (perpendicular to the ground). For horizontal polarization using the integrated antenna, the arrow should be horizontal (parallel to the ground). Vertical Polarization Horizontal Polarization 24 Installation and Initialization Hardware Installation Step 5: Assemble Mounting Hardware MP.11-R Installation and Management 1. Attach the mounting plate (A) using the provided screws and washers (Torque 9 N.m/75 in-lbs), such that the units antenna will be vertically or horizontally polarized when mounted. A Torque 9 N.m/75 in-lbs 2. Attach the extension arm (B) to mounting piece (A) with the screw, nut, and washers provided, as shown below. The extension arm gives the unit more possible tilt, letting you adjust for azimuth or elevation over a larger angle. A B 3. Attach the mounting bracket (C) to extension arm (B) with the screw, nut, and washers provided. C B 4. Tighten assembly (Torque 15 N.m/130 in-lbs). Torque 15 N.m/130 in-lbs 25 Installation and Initialization Hardware Installation MP.11-R Installation and Management The following figure shows the full assembly attached to the unit:
Step 6: Mount the Unit 1. To pole-mount, insert screws through bracket F and fasten around the pole to bracket E and secure (Torque 11 N.m/
100 in-lbs). F F F E Torque 11 N.m/100 in-lbs 2 screws 2. To wall-mount the unit, mount bracket E to a wall using 4 screws (not provided), as shown:
26 Installation and Initialization Hardware Installation Step 7: Plug in the Cables 1. Plug one end of the CAT5 cable (A) into the RJ45 jack of the unit (B). MP.11-R Installation and Management A B 2. Connect the free end of the CAT5 cable to the Data and Power Out port on the power injector. 3. To connect the unit through a hub or a switch to a PC, connect a straight-through Ethernet cable between the network interface card in the PC and the hub, and between the hub and the RJ45 Data In port on the PoE adapter. To connect the unit directly to a PC, connect a cross-over Ethernet cable between the network interface card in the PC and the RJ45 Data In port on the power injector. 27 Installation and Initialization Hardware Installation Step 8: Power on the Unit MP.11-R Installation and Management Once you have connected the power injector to the Ethernet cabling and plugged the power injector cord into an AC outlet, the unit is powered on. There is no ON/OFF switch on the unit. To remove power, unplug the AC cord from the AC outlet or disconnect the RJ45 connector from the Data and Power Out port on the power injector. Step 9: View LEDs When the unit is powered on, it performs startup diagnostics. When startup is complete, the LEDs show the units operational state. The LEDs are present at the units Ethernet connector. Ethernet LED RF LED LEDs exhibit the following behavior:
LED State Red Flashing Green Solid Green Radio LED Power is on; unit is self-heating. Wireless link is being established. Wireless link has been established. Power/Ethernet LED Power is on, Ethernet link is down. Power is on, Ethernet link is up. 28 Installation and Initialization Hardware Installation Step 10: Align the Antenna MP.11-R Installation and Management Antenna alignment is the process of physically aligning the antenna of the radio receiver and transmitter to have the best possible link established between them. The antenna alignment process is usually performed during installation and after major repairs. If you are installing external antennas, consult the documentation that accompanies the antenna for installation instructions. Note that you must weatherproof the antenna connectors as described in Step 12: Weatherproof the Connectors. The unit has an audible antenna alignment tool that can be activated by plugging in the supplied serial dongle (supplied with the BSU) or by issuing the CLI command for antenna alignment. The CLI command causes both audible and numerical feedback as the CLI shows the running Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) values twice a second. The output from the beeper for antenna alignment consists of short beeps with a variable interval. The interval changes with the SNR level to assist in correctly aligning the antenna. An increase in signal level is indicated by a shorter interval between beeps; a reduction in signal level results in beeps longer apart. To allow for precise antenna alignment, small changes in SNR result in large changes in the beep period. The alignment process averages the SNR, which is represented by an average length beep. When a higher SNR is received, the beep period is made shorter, dependent upon the difference to the average. A lower SNR results in a longer period between beeps. The first five steps around the average are represented by a large change and all following steps are a small change. This acts as if a magnifying glass is centered around the average SNR and the values next to the average are significantly different. When the antenna is aimed, the beep intuitively represents whether the SNR is rising or falling: the higher the SNR rises, the shorter the period the beep is heard and the higher the frequency of the beep. After the position of the antenna has been changed, SNR averaging settles at the new value and the beeping returns to the average length so the antenna can again be aimed for rising SNR. Aiming is complete if moving in any direction results in a falling SNR value (which can be heard as longer periods between beeps). NOTES:
Antenna alignment for the Base Station is useful only for a point-to-point link. The range of the average SNR has been limited to values from 5 to 43; therefore, anything over 43 always results in a short period between beeps and values below 5 always have a long period. 29 Installation and Initialization Hardware Installation MP.11-R Installation and Management The Antenna Alignment Display (AAD) CLI command is disabled automatically 30 minutes after it is enabled to remove the load of extra messages on the wireless interface. The default telnet timeout is 900 seconds (15 minutes). If AAD must run for the entire 30 minutes, change the default telnet timeout value to a value greater than 30 minutes (greater than 1800 seconds). This restriction is for telnet connections only and not for the serial interface. The serial interface never times out; however, the AAD command does still time out. Antenna Alignment Commands near end. set aad enable local: Enables display of the local SNR. Local SNR is the SNR measured by the receiver at the set aad enable remote: Enables display of the remote SNR. Remote SNR is the SNR as measured by the set aad enable average: Enables display of the average SNR. The average SNR is the average of the local and set aad disable: Disables Antenna Alignment Display (Ctrl-C also disables AAD). receiver at the far end. remote SNR. 30 Installation and Initialization Hardware Installation Step 11: Tighten the Cables MP.11-R Installation and Management 1. Apply two wraps of Teflon tape around the threads of the units RJ45 jack (A) in a clockwise direction. 2. Make sure that the red rubber gasket is still seated in the sealing cap of the sealing cap/lock nut assembly (B);
3. Slide the sealing cap/lock nut assembly (B) over the RJ45 jack (A) and thread onto enclosure. Hand tighten first, then use a pipe wrench or similar tool to tighten one more quarter turn. CAUTION: Do not over-tighten!
4. Tighten the lock nut (C) (Torque 4 N.m/35 in-lbs). 5. Thread the sealing nut (D) onto the sealing cap/lock nut assembly (B) and tighten (Torque 3 N.m/25 in-lbs). CAUTION: The lock nut (C) on the sealing cap/lock nut assembly (B) must be fully tightened over the RJ45 connector before the sealing nut (D) is fully tightened. Otherwise, the Ethernet cable may twist and damage. B D C A (Apply Teflon tape here) Torque 4 N.m/35 in-lbs Torque 3 N.m/25 in-lbs 31 Installation and Initialization Hardware Installation Step 12: Weatherproof the Connectors MP.11-R Installation and Management After you have fully assembled and tightened the cable, use the provided self-fusing, rubber-based tape strip and electrical tape (not provided; Proxim recommends Scotch Super 33+ Vinyl Electrical Tape) to seal the connection, as follows. 1. Remove the film liner from the rubber-based tape strip, and stretch the tape until it is approximately half of its original width. This activates the self-fusing action of the tape, which will set up over time to create a single, waterproof mass. 2. Stretch and wrap the tape around the connector tightly, starting below the connector cap and against the unit and wrapping in a clockwise direction. Wrap the tape once around the base of the connector cap (A). Continue to wrap the tape spirally around the connector in a clockwise direction, maintaining a 50% width overlap (B). Continue wrapping the tape spirally upward (C) until the tape extends onto the cable and you have used the entire length of tape. Seal the tape tightly against the connector and the cable (D). NOTE: Be sure to wrap the tape in a clockwise direction; wrapping the tape in a counterclockwise direction may loosen up the connector. A B C D Start below connector cap Continue onto cable 3. In the same manner as described in Step 2 above, apply a layer of black electrical tape (not provided) over the rubber-
based tape for further protection. Make sure the electrical tape also extends beyond the rubber-based tape to seal it. 4. Repeat the weatherproofing procedure for other connectors as appropriate. 32 Installation and Initialization Hardware Installation Step 13: Install Documentation and Software MP.11-R Installation and Management To install the documentation and software on a computer or network:
1. Place the CD in a CD-ROM drive. The installer normally starts automatically. (If the installation program does not start automatically, click setup.exe on the installation CD.) 2. Click the Install Software and Documentation button and follow the instructions displayed on the installer windows. The following documentation and software products are installed:
Available from Start > All Programs > Tsunami > MP.11 [Model Name]:
Documentation (in Docs subdirectory):
Installation and Management Guide Quick Installation Guide Reference Manual Safety and Regulatory Guide Recommended Antenna Guide Antenna Installation Guide Scan Tool (in Scan Tool subdirectory) TFTP Server (in TFTP Server subdirectory) Online Help NOTE: All of these items are also available from C:\Program Files\Tsunami\MP.11 [Model Name]. Available from C:\Program Files\Tsunami\MP.11 [Model Name]:
Documentation (in Docs folder): See list above Help files (in Help folder; click on index.htm to access) TFTP Server and Scan Tool program (in Extras folder) MIBs (in MIBs folder) 33 Installation and Initialization Initialization Initialization MP.11-R Installation and Management Connecting to the unit requires either:
A direct physical connection with an Ethernet cross-over cable or with a serial RS232C cable A network connection Connecting with a serial connection, allows you to configure and manage the unit with the CLI. Connecting with the other connections allows you to use of the Web Interface and SNMP in addition to the CLI. Using a serial connection, you can access the unit through a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal. (See HyperTerminal Connection Properties in the Tsunami MP.11/QB.11 Reference Manual.) For all other modes of connection, you will need the IP address of the unit in order to use the Web Interface, SNMP, or the CLI. Because each network is different, an IP address suitable for your network must be assigned to the unit. You must know this IP address to configure and manage the unit through its Web Interface, SNMP, or the CLI. The unit can use either a static or dynamic IP address. The unit either obtains its IP address automatically through DHCP (dynamic IP address) or it must be set manually (static IP address). ScanTool With ScanTool (a software utility that is included on the product installation CD), you can find out the current IP address of the unit and, if necessary, change it so that is appropriate for your network. The units are shipped with the static IP address 10.0.0.1 configured. ScanTool lets you find the IP address of a Tsunami MP.11-R product by referencing the MAC address in a Scan List, or to assign an IP address if the correct one has not been assigned. The tool automatically detects the units installed on your network segment, regardless of IP address, and lets you configure each units IP settings. In addition, you can use ScanTool to download new software to a unit that does not have a valid software image installed. Setting the IP Address with ScanTool To discover and set/change the IP address of the unit:
1. Run ScanTool on a computer connected to the same LAN subnet as the unit, or a computer directly connected to the unit with a cross-over Ethernet cable. Double-click the ScanTool icon on the Windows desktop to launch the program. If the icon is not on your desktop, click Start > All Programs > Tsunami > MP.11 [Model Name]> Scan Tool. ScanTool scans the subnet for MP.11-R units and displays a list of the units it finds in the Scan List window (shown below). If necessary, click Rescan to re-scan the subnet and update the display. You can assign a new IP address to one unit, even if more than one unit has the same (default) IP address 10.0.0.1, but the new IP address must be unique to allow use of the management interfaces. 2. Select the unit for which you want to set the IP address and click Change. The Change dialog window is displayed, as shown below. 34 Installation and Initialization Initialization MP.11-R Installation and Management 3. To set the IP address manually, ensure that Static is selected as the IP Address Type and fill in the IP Address and Subnet Mask suitable for the LAN subnet to which the unit is connected. To set the IP address dynamically, ensure that Dynamic is selected as the IP Address Type. The unit will request its IP address from a DHCP server on your network. 4. Enter the Read/Write Password (the default value is public) and click OK to confirm your changes. The respective unit reboots to make the changes effective. 35 Installation and Initialization Logging in to the Web Interface Logging in to the Web Interface MP.11-R Installation and Management The Web Interface provides a graphical user interface through which you can easily configure and manage the unit. This section describes only how to access the Web Interface. To use the Web Interface, you need only the IP address of the unit. (See Setting the IP Address with ScanTool for details). NOTE: If the connection is slow or you are not able to connect, use the Internet Explorer Tools option to ensure you are not using a proxy server for the connection with your Web browser. To access the unit with a Web browser, start your Web browser and enter the IP address of the unit. The Web address must appear as http://<ip address> (for example, http://10.0.0.1). A window such as the following is displayed. Do not fill in the User Name, enter only the password and click OK. The default password is public. The System Status window is displayed. To find out more about the information presented in this window, see the Status chapter. You now have access to the units Web Interface. The remainder of this manual describes configuring and monitoring the unit using this interface. 36 System Overview MP.11-R Installation and Management 3 This chapter provides an overview of the system. See the following sections:
Changing Basic Configuration Information Country and Related Settings Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) Transmit Power Control SU Registration Dynamic Data Rate Selection (DDRS) Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) Quality of Service (QoS) Concepts and Definitions Changing Basic Configuration Information To view or change basic system information, click the Configure button on the left side of the Web interface window, then click the System tab. See System Parameters for detailed information about the fields and selections in this window. NOTE: System Name by default contains the actual model number. The following screenshot is for information only. Country and Related Settings The units Configure System window provides a selectable Country field that automatically provides the allowed bandwidth and frequencies for the selected country. Units sold only in the United States are pre-configured to scan and display only the outdoor frequencies permitted by the FCC. No other Country can be configured. Units sold outside of the United States support the selection of a Country by the professional installer. 37 System Overview Changing Basic Configuration Information MP.11-R Installation and Management NOTE: Non-US installers should not add an antenna system until the Country is selected, the unit is rebooted, and the proper power level is configured. The output power level of the final channel selected by DFS scan can be found in the Event Log. The Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) feature is enabled automatically when you choose a country with a regulatory domain that requires it. The Transmit Power Control (TPC) feature is always available. Click Configure > System; then select the appropriate country for your regulatory domain from the Country drop-down box. Continue configuring settings as desired; then click Commands > Reboot to save and activate the settings. Alternatively, if you want to save the configuration settings to the flash memory but not activate the settings, use the save config CLI command. Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) NOTE: Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) only applies to the Tsunami MP.11 5054-R. The Tsunami MP.11-R supports Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) for FCC, IC, and ETSI regulatory domains per FCC Part 15 Rules for U-NII devices, IC RSS-210, and ETSI EN 301-893 and 302-502 regulations, respectively. These rules and regulations require that 802.11a devices use DFS to prevent interference with radar systems and other devices that already occupy the 5 GHz band. During boot-up, the unit scans the available frequency and selects a channel that is quiet and free of radar interference. If the unit subsequently detects radar interference on its channel, it rescans to find a better channel. Upon finding a new channel, the unit waits 60 seconds to detect radar interference; if it finds no interference, it commences normal operation.
(In Canada, if radar was previously detected on the selected channel, the unit waits 600 seconds before commencing normal operation if the selected channel frequency is in the 5600 - 5650 MHz range) If you are using the unit in a country and band that require DFS, keep in mind the following:
DFS is not a configurable parameter; it is always enabled and cannot be disabled. You cannot manually select the devices operating channel; you must let the unit select the channel. You may make channels unavailable by manually blacklisting them and preventing those channels being selected, in accordance with local regulations or interference. You can also display the Channel Blacklist Table to view the channels that have been blacklisted by the AP due to radar detection. In compliance with FCC regulations, the unit uses ATPC (Automatic Transmit Power Control) to automatically adapt transmit power when the quality of the link is more than sufficient to maintain a good communication with reduced transmit power. See Transmit Power Control for more information. Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) is enabled automatically based upon the country and band you select. You can tell DFS is in use because the frequency selection field displays only the DFS-selected frequency. DFS scans all available frequencies, starting with the DFS preferred channel (when configured) and skipping blacklisted channels, to select the operating frequency automatically. A country selection with DFS enabled causes the Base Station to come up in scan mode. It scans the available frequencies and channels to avoid radar and selects a channel with the least interference. NOTE: Scanning is performed only on the frequencies allowed in the regulatory domain of the country selected when it is required for radar detection and avoidance. The SU also comes up in scan mode to scan all available frequencies to find a BSU with which it can register. Scanning may take several minutes. After establishing a wireless link, the wireless LED stops flashing and continues to shine green. NOTE: Because DFS may need to scan for radar on multiple channels, you must allow a sufficient amount of time for the units to start up. This is considerably longer than when the unit is not using DFS. This is expected behavior. Startup time is within four minutes if no radar is detected, but up to one minute is added for every selected channel that results in radar detection. 38 System Overview Changing Basic Configuration Information MP.11-R Installation and Management DFS is required for three purposes:
1. Radar avoidance both at startup and while operational. To meet these requirements, the BSU scans available frequencies at startup for the presence of a radar signal on all available frequencies. If a radar signal is detected on any DFS enabled channel, the system will blacklist the channel for a period of 30 minutes in accordance with FCC, IC, and ETSI regulations. Once fully operational on a frequency, the BSU actively monitors the occupied frequency for radar interference. If radar interference is detected, the BSU blacklists the channel, logs a message and rescans to find a new frequency free of radar interference. Radar detection is performed only by the BSU and not by the SU. When an SU is set to a country in which DFS is used, it scans all available channels upon startup looking for a BSU that best matches its connection criteria (such as Base Station System Name, Network Name, and Shared Secret). The SU connects to the BSU automatically on whatever frequency the BSU has selected. Because of this procedure, it is best to set up the BSU and have it fully operational before installing the SU, although this is not required. If a BSU rescans because of radar interference, the SU loses its wireless link. The SU waits 30 seconds (when the Mobility feature is enabled, the SU starts scanning for a BSU instantly rather than waiting 30 seconds); if it finds that it could not receive the BSU in this amount of time, it rescans the available frequencies for an active BSU. 2. Guarantee the efficient use of available frequencies by all devices in a certain area. To meet this requirement, the BSU scans each available frequency upon startup and selects a frequency based upon the least amount of noise and interference detected. This lets multiple devices operate in the same area with limited interference. This procedure is done only at startup; if another non-radar device comes up on the same frequency, the BSU does not detect this or rescan because of it. It is expected that other devices using these frequencies also are in compliance with country regulations, so this should not happen. 3. Uniform Channel Spreading. To meet this requirement, the MP.11-R randomly selects operating channel from the channels with least interference. If the DFS Preferred Channel is configured, the unit begins by scanning that channel for radar. If no radar is detected, the unit makes this channel operational. If radar is detected, the unit blacklists that channel and scans other available channels for the one with least interference. This implements the Uniform Channel Spreading requirement by either automatically selecting the channel with least interference or allowing the installer to manually select a channel with least interference from a channel plan. Transmit Power Control Transmit Power Control is a manual configuration selection to reduce the units output power. The maximum output power level for the operating frequency can be found in the event log of the units embedded software. ATPC (Automatic Transmit Power Control) is a feature to automatically adapt transmit power when the quality of the link is more than sufficient to maintain a good communication with reduced transmit power. This feature is required for FCC DFS. It works by monitoring the quality of the link and reducing the output power of the radio by up to 6 dB when good link quality can still be achieved. When link quality reduces, the output power is automatically increased up to the original power level to maintain a good link. For a full discussion of DFS, see Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) abvoe. By default, the unit lets you transmit at the maximum output power that the radio can sustain for data rate and frequency selected. However, with Transmit Power Control (TPC), you can adjust the output power of the unit to a lower level in order to reduce interference to neighboring devices or to use a higher gain antenna without violating the maximum radiated output power allowed for your country. Also, some countries that require DFS also require the transmit power to be set to a 6 dB lower value than the maximum allowed EIRP when link quality permits, as part of the DFS requirements. NOTE: When the system is set to transmit at the maximum power, professional installers must ensure that the maximum EIRP limit is not exceeded. To achieve this, they may have to add attenuation between the device and the antenna when a high gain antenna is used. For 4954-R models: to comply with FCC Part 90 regulations when using an external antenna, a TPC value of -3 dB is required regardless of antenna size, and a larger TPC value may be required to limit the total EIRP to 29 dBm or less. For 4954-R models that have an integrated flat-panel antenna, a TPC of -9 dB must be used to comply with FCC Part 90 regulations. CAUTION: To insure proper operation on 4954-R models, TPC values greater than -9 dB should be avoided. 39 System Overview Changing Basic Configuration Information MP.11-R Installation and Management You can see your units current output power for the selected frequency in the event log. The event log shows the selected power for all data rates, so you must look up the relevant data rate to determine the actual power level. NOTE: This feature only lets you decrease your output power; you cannot increase your output power beyond the maximum the radio allows for your frequency and data rate. See System Parameters to configure Country. See Interface Parameters to configure Transmit Power Control. 40 System Overview SU Registration SU Registration MP.11-R Installation and Management The list of parameters you must configure for registration of the SU on a BSU are:
Network Name Base Station System Name (when used; otherwise, leave blank) Network Secret Encryption (when used) Frequency Channel (when available) See System Parameters to see the description of these fields and to configure them. NOTES:
The frequency channel must be the same for the BSU and the SU in order to register the SU when roaming is not enabled and DFS is not required. Channel Bandwidth and Turbo mode (when available) must be the same for the BSU and SU in order to register the SU. Roaming will automatically select a channel on the SU corresponding to the BSU channel. Roaming is the procedure in which an SU terminates the session with the current BSU and starts the registration procedure with another BSU when it finds the quality of the other BSU to be better. 41 System Overview Dynamic Data Rate Selection (DDRS) Dynamic Data Rate Selection (DDRS) MP.11-R Installation and Management The WORP Dynamic Data Rate Selection (DDRS) lets the BSU and SUs monitor and calculate the remote average signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) and adjust the transmission data rate to an optimal value to provide the best possible throughput according to the current communication conditions and link quality during run-time. Each frame received in the WORP protocol reports the signal and noise level in dBm at which the sender received the previous frame from the receiver, and provides the values to calculate the SNR in dB. SNR is calculated according to this formula then averaged:
SNR [dB] = signal level [dBm] noise level [dBm]
Both the BSU and the SUs monitor the remote SNR. The BSU monitors and calculates the average remote SNR for each SU that is registered. An SU monitors and calculates the average remote SNR for the BSU. DDRS is enabled or disabled on the BSU only. This operation requires the BSU to be rebooted. After rebooting, the BSU sends a multicast announcement to all SUs to begin the registration process. During registration, an SU is informed by the BSU whether DDRS is enabled or disabled and it sets its DDRS status accordingly. There are two DDRS data rates that need to be configured when DDRS is enabled:
Default DDRS Data Rate (ddrsdefdatarate): The data rate at which the BSU starts communication with all SUs to begin the registration process (the default is 6 Mbps). Maximum DDRS Data Rate (ddrsmaxdatarate): The maximum data rate at which the device (BSU or SU) can operate (the default is 54 Mbps). NOTE: The default (BSU only) and maximum (BSU and SU) DDRS data rate values must be configured in the BSU and SUs separately through the CLI or the SNMP interface. See Interface Parameters to configure DDRS. 42 System Overview Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) MP.11-R Installation and Management Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) are logical groupings of network hosts. Defined by software settings, other VLAN members or resources appear (to connected hosts) to be on the same physical segment, no matter where they are attached on the logical LAN or WAN segment. They simplify allowing traffic to flow between hosts and their frequently-
used or restricted resources according to the VLAN configuration. Tsunami MP.11-R units are fully VLAN-ready; however, by default, VLAN support is disabled. Before enabling VLAN support (by assigning a VLAN Management ID), certain network settings should be configured and network resources such as VLAN-aware switches should be available, dependent upon the type of configuration. VLANs are used to conveniently, efficiently, and easily manage your network in the following ways:
Manage VLAN configuration from a single window Define groups Reduce broadcast and multicast traffic to unnecessary destinations Improve network performance and reduce latency Increase security Secure network restricts members to resources on their own VLAN VLAN tagged data is collected and distributed through a units Ethernet interface. The units can communicate across a VLAN-capable switch that analyzes VLAN-tagged packet headers and directs traffic to the appropriate ports when the units are working in their Transparent mode. VLAN features can be managed via:
The BSUs Web interface The Command Line Interface (see Command Line Interface in the Tsunami MP.11/QB.11 Reference Manual) SNMP (see the MIBs provided on the product CD) For more information about VLAN configuration, see VLAN Parameters (BSU Only; Bridge Mode Only). 43 System Overview Quality of Service (QoS) Quality of Service (QoS) MP.11-R Installation and Management The Quality of Service (QoS) feature is based on the 802.16 standard and defines the classes, service flows, and packet identification rules for specific types of traffic. QoS main priority is to guarantee a reliable and adequate transmission quality for all types of traffic under conditions of high congestion and bandwidth over-subscription. Concepts and Definitions The software supports QoS provisioning from the BSU only. You may define different classes of service on a BSU that can then be assigned to the SUs that are associated, or that may get associated, with that BSU. The software provides the ability to create, edit, and delete classes of service that are specified by the following hierarchy of parameters:
Packet Identification Rule (PIR) up to 64 rules, including 17 predefined rules Service Flow class (SFC) up to 32 SFs, including 7 predefined SFCs; up to 8 PIRs may be associated per SFC Priority for each rule within each SF class 0 to 255, with 0 being lowest priority QoS class up to 8 QoS classes, including 4 predefined classes; up to 4 SFCs may be associated per QoS class Packet Identification Rule (PIR) IP ToS (Layer 3 QoS identification) IP Protocol List containing up to 4 IP protocols A Packet Identification Rule is a combination of parameters that specifies what type of traffic is allowed or disallowed. The software allows to create up to 64 different PIRs, including 17 predefined PIRs. It provides the ability to create, edit, and delete PIRs that contain none, one, or more of the following classification fields:
Rule Name 802.1p tag (layer 2 QoS identification) Up to 4 pairs of Source IP address + Mask Up to 4 pairs of Destination IP address + Mask Up to 4 source TCP/UDP port ranges Up to 4 destination TCP/UDP port ranges Up to 4 source MAC addresses Up to 4 destination MAC addresses VLAN ID Ether type (Ethernet protocol identification) A good example is provided by the 17 predefined PIRs. Note that these rules help to identify specific traffic types:
1. All No classification fields, all traffic matches 2. Cisco VoIP UL a. Protocol Source Port Range (16,000-32,000) b. IP Protocol List (17 = UDP) 3. Vonage VoIP UL a. Protocol Source Port Range (8000-8001, 10000-20000) b. IP Protocol List (17 = UDP) 4. Cisco VoIP DL a. Protocol Destination Port Range (16,000-32,000) b. IP Protocol List (17 = UDP) 5. Vonage VoIP DL 44 System Overview Quality of Service (QoS) MP.11-R Installation and Management a. Protocol Destination Port Range (8000-8001, 10000-20000) b. IP Protocol List (17 = UDP) 6. TCP a. IP Protocol List (6) 7. UDP a. IP Protocol List (17) 8. PPPoE Control a. Ethertype (type 1, 0x8863) 9. PPPoE Data a. Ethertype (type 1, 0x8864) 10.IP a. Ethertype (type 1, 0x800) 11.ARP a. Ethertype (type 1, 0x806) 12.Expedited Forwarding a. IP TOS/DSCP (low=0x2D, high=0x2D, mask = 0x3F) 13.Streaming Video (IP/TV) a. IP TOS/DSCP (low=0x0D, high=0x0D, mask = 0x3F) 14.802.1p BE a. Ethernet Priority (low=0, high=0) (this is the equivalent of the User Priority value in the TCI (Tag Control Information) field of a VLAN tag) 15.802.1p Voice a. Ethernet Priority (low=6, high=6) (this is the equivalent of the User Priority value in the TCI (Tag Control Information) field of a VLAN tag) 16.802.1p Video a. Ethernet Priority (low=5, high=5) (this is the equivalent of the User Priority value in the TCI (Tag Control Information) field of a VLAN tag) 17.L2 Broadcast/Multicast a. Ethernet Destination (dest = 0x80000000, mask = 0x80000000) Note that two different VoIP rule names have been defined for each direction of traffic, Uplink (UL) and Downlink (DL),
(index numbers 2 to 5). This has been done to distinguish the proprietary nature of the Cisco VoIP implementation as opposed to the more standard Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) signaling found, for example, in the Vonage-type VoIP service. Service Flow Class (SFC) A Service Flow class defines a set of parameters that determines how a stream of application data that matches a certain classification profile will be handled. The software allows to create up to 32 different SFs, including seven predefined SFs. The software provides the ability to create, edit, and delete SFs that contain the following parameters and values:
Service flow name Scheduling type Best Effort (BE); Real-Time Polling Service (RtPS) Service Flow Direction Downlink (DL: traffic from BSU to SU); Uplink (UL: traffic from SU to BSU) Maximum sustained data rate (or Maximum Information Rate, MIR) specified in units of 1 Kbps from 8 Kbps up to he maximum rate of 108000 Kbps per SU Minimum reserved traffic rate (or Committed Information Rate, CIR) specified in units of 1 Kbps from 0 Kbps up to the maximum rate of 10000 Kbps per SU 45 System Overview Quality of Service (QoS) MP.11-R Installation and Management Maximum Latency specified in increments of 5 ms steps from a minimum of 5 ms up to a maximum of 100 ms Tolerable Jitter specified in increments of 5 ms steps from a minimum of 0 ms up to the Maximum Latency (in ms) Traffic priority zero (0) to seven (7), 0 being the lowest, 7 being the highest Maximum number of data messages in a burst one (1) to four (4), which affects the percentage of the maximum throughput of the system Activation state Active; Inactive Note that traffic priority refers to the prioritization of this specific Service Flow. The software tries to deliver the packets within the specified latency and jitter requirements, relative to the moment of receiving the packets in the unit. For delay-sensitive traffic the jitter must be equal to or less than the latency. A packet is buffered until an interval of time equal to the difference between Latency and Jitter (Latency Jitter) has elapsed. The software will attempt to deliver the packet within a time window starting at (Latency Jitter) until the maximum Latency time is reached. If the SFCs scheduling type is real-time polling (rtPS), and the packet is not delivered by that time, it will be discarded. This can lead to loss of packets without reaching the maximum throughput of the wireless link. For example, when the packets arrive in bursts on the Ethernet interface and the wireless interface is momentarily maxed out, then the packets at the end of the burst may be timed out before they can be sent. Users are able to set up their own traffic characteristics (MIR, CIR, latency, jitter, etc.) per service flow class to meet their unique requirements. A good example is provided by the seven predefined SFCs:
1. UL-Unlimited BE a. Scheduling Type = Best Effort b. Service Flow Direction = Uplink c. d. Maximum Sustained Data Rate = 20 Mbps e. Traffic Priority = 0 Initialization State = Active 2. DL-Unlimited BE (same as UL-Unlimited BE, except Service Flow Direction = Downlink) 3. UL-G711 20 ms VoIP rtPS Initialization State = Active a. Schedule type = Real time Polling b. Service Flow Direction = Uplink c. d. Maximum Sustained Data Rate = 88 Kbps e. Minimum Reserved Traffic Rate = 88 Kbps f. Maximum Latency = 20 milliseconds g. Traffic Priority = 1 4. DL-G711 20 ms VoIP rtPS (same as UL-G711 20ms VoIP rtPS, except Service Flow Direction = Downlink) 5. UL-G729 20 ms VoIP rtPS (same as UL-G711 20ms VoIP rtPS, except Maximum Sustained Data Rate and Maximum Reserved Traffic Rate = 64 Kbps) 6. DL-G729 20 ms VoIP rtPS (same as UL-G729 20ms VoIP rtPS, except Service Flow Direction = Downlink) 7. DL-2Mbps Video Initialization State = Active a. Schedule type = Real time Polling b. Service Flow Direction = Downlink c. d. Maximum Sustained Data Rate = 2 Mbps e. Minimum Reserved Traffic Rate = 2 Mbps f. Maximum Latency = 20 milliseconds g. Traffic Priority = 1 46 System Overview Quality of Service (QoS) MP.11-R Installation and Management Note that two different VoIP Service Flow classes for each direction of traffic have been defined (index numbers 3 to 6) which follow the ITU-T standard nomenclatures: G.711 refers to a type of audio companding and encoding that produces a 64 Kbps bitstream, suitable for all types of audio signals. G.729 is appropriate for voice and VoIP applications, but cannot transport music or fax tones reliably. This type of companding and encoding produces a bitstream between 6.4 and 11.8 Kbps (typically 8 Kbps) according to the quality of voice transport that is desired. QoS Class A QoS class is defined by a set of parameters that includes the PIRs and SFCs that were previously configured. The software allows creating up to eight different QoS classes, including four predefined QoS classes. Up to four SF classes can be associated to each QoS class, and up to eight PIRs can be associated to each SF class. For example, a QoS class called G711 VoIP may include the following SFCs: UL-G711 20 ms VoIP rtPS and DL-G711 20 ms VoIP rtPS. In turn, the SFC named UL-G711 20 ms VoIP rtPS may include the following rules: Cisco VoIP UL and Vonage VoIP UL. The software provides the ability to create, edit, and delete QoS classes that contain the following parameters:
QoS class name Service Flow (SF) class name list per QoS class (up to four SF classes can be associated to each QoS class) Packet Identification Rule (PIR) list per SF class (up to eight PIRs can be associated to each SF class) Priority per rule which defines the order of execution of PIRs during packet identification process. The PIR priority is a number in the range 0-63, with priority 63 being executed first, and priority 0 being executed last. The PIR priority is defined within a QoS class, and can be different for the same PIR in some other QoS class. If all PIRs within one QoS class have the same priority, the order of execution of PIR rules will be defined by the order of definition of SFCs, and by the order of definition of PIRs in each SFC, within that QoS class. A good example of this hierarchy is provided by the four predefined QoS classes:
1. Unlimited Best Effort a. SF class: UL-Unlimited BE PIR: All; PIR Priority: 0 b. SF class: DL-Unlimited BE PIR: All; PIR Priority: 0 2. G711 VoIP a. SF class: UL-G711 20 ms VoIP rtPS PIR: Vonage VoIP UL; PIR Priority: 1 PIR: Cisco VoIP UL; PIR Priority: 1 b. SF class: DL-G711 20 ms VoIP rtPS PIR: Vonage VoIP DL; PIR Priority: 1 PIR: Cisco VoIP DL; PIR Priority: 1 3. G729 VoIP a. SF class: UL-G729 20 ms VoIP rtPS PIR: Vonage VoIP UL; PIR Priority: 1 PIR: Cisco VoIP UL; PIR Priority: 1 b. SF class: DL-G729 20 ms VoIP rtPS PIR: Vonage VoIP DL; PIR Priority: 1 PIR: Cisco VoIP DL; PIR Priority: 1 4. 2Mbps Video a. SF class: DL-2Mbps Video PIR: Streaming Video (IP/TV); PIR Priority: 1 47 Basic Management MP.11-R Installation and Management 4 This chapter describes basic features and functionality of the unit. In most cases, configuring these basic features is sufficient. The Glossary in the Tsunami MP.11/QB.11 Reference Manual provides a brief explanation of the terms used. For CLI commands you can use for basic management, see Command Line Interface in the Tsunami MP.11/QB.11 Reference Manual. The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
Navigation Rebooting and Resetting General Configuration Settings Monitoring Settings Security Settings Default Settings Upgrading the Unit Navigation To use the Web Interface for configuration and management, you must access the unit. With ScanTool you can determine the units current IP address. Then enter http://<ip address> in your Web browser (for example http://
10.0.0.1). See Setting the IP Address with ScanTool for details. NOTE: If you have your Security Internet Options set to High, you may not be able to access the Web interface successfully; a high security setting disables JavaScript, which is required for running Proxims Web browser interface. Adding the radios IP address as a Trusted site should fix this problem. The Web Interface consists of Web page buttons and tabs. A tab can also contain sub-tabs. The following figure shows the convention used to guide you to the correct tab or sub-tab. Click Configure > Interfaces > Wireless:
1 2 3 The Web Interface also provides online help, which is stored on your computer (see Step 13: Install Documentation and Software for details). 48 Basic Management Rebooting and Resetting Rebooting and Resetting MP.11-R Installation and Management All configuration changes require a restart unless otherwise stated. You can restart the unit with the Reboot command;
see Rebooting, below). Most changes you make become effective only when the unit is rebooted. A reboot stores configuration information in non-volatile memory and then restarts the unit with the new values (see Soft Reset to Factory Default). In some cases, the unit reminds you that a reboot is required for a change to take effect. You need not reboot immediately; you can reboot after you have made all your changes. NOTE: Saving of the units configuration occurs only during a controlled reboot or by specifically issuing the CLI Save command. If you make changes to settings without a controlled reboot (command) and you have not issued the Save command, a power outage would wipe out all changes since the last reboot. For example, entering static routes takes effect immediately; however, the routes are not saved until the unit has gone through a controlled reboot. Proxim strongly recommends saving your settings immediately when you finish making changes. Rebooting When you reboot, the changes you have made become effective and the unit is restarted. The changes are saved automatically in non-volatile memory before the actual reboot takes place. To reboot, click Commands > Reboot > Reboot. The unit restarts the embedded software. During reboot, you are redirected to a page showing a countdown timer, and you are redirected to the Status page after the timer counts down to 0 (zero). The CLI is disconnected during reboot. This means that a new telnet session must be started. Resetting Hardware If the unit does not respond for some reason and you are not able to reboot, you can restart by means of a hardware reset. This restarts the hardware and embedded software. The last saved configuration is used. Any changes that you have made since then are lost. To reset the hardware, unplug the units power supply and then reconnect power to the unit. Soft Reset to Factory Default If necessary, you can reset the unit to the factory default settings. This should be done only when you are experiencing problems. Resetting to the default settings requires you to reconfigure the unit. To reset to factory default settings:
1. Click Commands > Reset. 2. Click the Reset to Factory Default button. The device configuration parameter values are reset to their factory default values. 49 Basic Management Rebooting and Resetting MP.11-R Installation and Management If you do not have access to the unit, you can use the procedure described in Hard Reset to Factory Default as an alternative. 50 Basic Management General Configuration Settings General Configuration Settings MP.11-R Installation and Management System Status: The Status tab showing the system status is displayed automatically when you log into the Web interface. It is also the default window displayed when you click the Status button on the left side of the window. See System Status. System Configuration: The System Configuration window lets you change the units country, system name, location name, and so on (see the window to the right). The Country selection is required to enable the correct radio parameters. The other details help distinguish this unit from other routers, and let you know whom to contact in case of problems. See System Parameters for more information. IP Configuration: The IP Configuration window lets you change the units IP parameters. These settings differ between Routing and Bridge mode. See Network Parameters for more information. Interface Configuration: The Interface configuration pages let you change the Ethernet and Wireless parameters. The Wireless tab is displayed by default when you click the Interfaces tab. Ethernet: To configure the Ethernet interface, click Configure > Interfaces > Ethernet. You can set the Configuration parameter from this tab for the type of Ethernet transmission. The recommended setting is auto-speed auto-duplex. See Interface Parameters for more information. Wireless: To configure the wireless interface, click Configure > Interfaces > Wireless. For BSUs, the wireless interface can be placed in either WORP Base or WORP Satellite mode (selected from the Interface Type drop-
down box). SUs can be placed only in WORP Satellite mode. (See Interface Parameters for more information.) VLAN Configuration: To configure BSU VLAN parameters, click the Configure button followed by the VLAN tab; the BSU Table tab is displayed. Click the SUs Table tab to configure SU VLAN parameters. Virtual LAN (VLAN) implementation in the Tsunami MP.11 products lets the BSU and SU be used in a VLAN-aware network and processes IEEE 802.1Q VLAN-tagged packets. Network resources behind the BSU and SU can be assigned to logical groups. See VLAN Parameters (BSU Only; Bridge Mode Only) for more information. 51 Basic Management Monitoring Settings Monitoring Settings MP.11-R Installation and Management The unit offers various facilities to monitor its operation and interfaces. Only the most significant monitoring categories are mentioned here. Wireless: To monitor the wireless interfaces, click Monitor > Wireless. This tab lets you monitor the general performance of the radio and the performance of the WORP Base or WORP Satellite interfaces. Interfaces: To monitor transmission details, click Monitor > Interfaces. The Interfaces tab provides detailed information about the MAC-layer performance of the wireless network and Ethernet interfaces. Per Station: Click Monitor > Per Station to view Station Statistics. On the SU, the Per Station page shows statistics of the BSU to which the SU is registered. On the BSU, it shows statistics of all the SUs connected to the BSU. The pages statistics refresh every 4 seconds. 52 Basic Management Security Settings Security Settings MP.11-R Installation and Management To prevent misuse, the units provide wireless data encryption and password-protected access. Be sure to set the encryption parameters and change the default passwords. In addition to Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), the units support Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) 128-bit encryption. Two types of the AES encryption are available. Previous releases supported only the AEC-OCB; the AES CCM protocol is now also supported. Proxim highly recommends you change the Network Name, Encryption Key, and Shared Secret as soon as possible. To do so, click Configure > Interfaces > Wireless. The encryption key is set using the Security tab. For systems that will use roaming features, the Network Name, Encryption Key, and the Shared Secret should each be the same for all SUs that are allowed to roam as well as for all BSUs to which these SUs are allowed to roam. Encryption You can protect the wireless data link by using encryption. Encryption keys can be 5 (64-bit), 13 (WEP 128-bit), or 16
(AES 128-bit) characters in length. Both ends of the wireless data link must use the same parameter values. In addition to Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), the unit supports Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) 128-bit encryption. To set the encryption parameters, click Configure > Security > Encryption. See Encryption. Passwords Access to the units are protected with passwords. The default password is public. For better security it is recommended to change the default passwords to a value (6-32 characters) known only to you. To change the units HTTP, Telnet, or SNMP passwords, click Configure > Management > Password. See Passwords. 53 Basic Management Default Settings Default Settings MP.11-R Installation and Management Feature 5054-R Model 2454-R 4954-R System Name Mode of Operation Routing IP Address Assignment Type IP Address Subnet Mask Default Router IP Address Default TTL RIPv2 Base Station System Name Network Name Frequency Channel Transmit Power Control Data Rate Registration Timeout Network Secret Turbo Mode Channel Bandwidth Input bandwidth limit
(in Kbps) Output bandwidth limit
(in Kbps) Ethernet Configuration Serial port Baud Rate SNMP Management Interface Telnet Management Interface HTTP Management Interface HTTP Port Telnet Port Telnet Login Timeout Telnet Session Timeout Password Maximum Satellites (per BSU) MAC Authentication Radius Authentication Encryption Static MAC Address Filter Ethernet Protocol Filtering Bridge Disabled Static 10.0.0.1 255.255.255.0 10.0.0.1 64 Enabled when in Routing Mode
<blank>
OR_WORP Channel 20, Frequency 4.900 GHz (FCC Only devices) Bridge Disabled Static 10.0.0.1 255.255.255.0 10.0.0.1 64 Enabled when in Routing Mode
<blank>
OR_WORP Channel 10 (2.412 2.462 GHz) Tsunami MP.11 5054-R Tsunami MP.11 2454-R Tsunami MP.11 4954-R Bridge Disabled Static 10.0.0.1 255.255.255.0 10.0.0.1 64 Enabled when in Routing Mode
<blank>
OR_WORP Channel 149, Frequency 5.745 GHz (FCC Only devices) DFS Enabled (World Mode devices) 0 dB 36 Mbps 5 public Disabled 20 MHz 36032 0 dB 36 Mbps 5 public Not applicable 20 MHz 36032 0 dB 36 Mbps 5 public Not applicable 20 MHz 36032 36032 36032 36032 Auto-Speed Auto-Duplex Auto-Speed Auto-Duplex Auto-Speed Auto-Duplex 9600 Enabled Enabled Enabled 80 23 30 900 public 250 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled / No Entries All Filters Disabled 9600 Enabled Enabled Enabled 80 23 30 900 public 250 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled / No Entries All Filters Disabled 9600 Enabled Enabled Enabled 80 23 30 900 public 250 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled / No Entries All Filters Disabled 54 Basic Management Default Settings Feature 5054-R DFS Priority Frequency Channel Disabled Announcement Period (when 100 ms roaming enabled) Multi-Frame Bursting Storm Threshold Broadcast Protocol Filtering Dynamic Data Rate Selection Roaming NAT Intra-Cell Blocking Antenna Alignment Country Selection DHCP Server DHCP Relay Spanning Tree Protocol Antenna Gain (For DFS Threshold compensation) Satellite Density Temperature Logging Temperature Logging Interval VLAN Mode Access VLAN ID Access VLAN Priority Management VLAN ID Management VLAN Priority VLAN ID in Trunk VLAN Table MP.11-R Installation and Management Model 2454-R N/A 100 ms Enabled Broadcast/Multicast Unlimited All Protocols Allowed Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled US-only device US World device GB Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 4954-R N/A 100 ms Enabled Broadcast/Multicast Unlimited All Protocols Allowed Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled United States (Public Safety) Disabled Disabled Disabled Not applicable Enabled Broadcast/Multicast Unlimited All Protocols Allowed Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled US-only device US World device GB Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 Large Enabled 60 minutes Large Enabled 60 minutes Large Enabled 60 minutes BSU: Transparent Mode SU: Transparent mode when BSU in transparent mode; Trunk mode when BSU in Trunk mode BSU: N/A; SU: 1 BSU: N/A; SU: 0 BSU: -1; SU: -1 BSU: 0; SU: 0 BSU: N/A; SU: 1 55 Basic Management Upgrading the Unit Upgrading the Unit MP.11-R Installation and Management The units are equipped with embedded software that can be updated when new versions are released. Updating the embedded software is described in Web Interface Image File Download. A TFTP server is provided on the Documentation and Software CD; the server is required to transfer the downloaded file to the unit. See TFTP Server Setup. To access all resolved problems in our solution database, or to search by product, category, keywords, or phrases, go to http://support.proxim.com. You can also find links to drivers, documentation, and downloads at this link. 56 System Status MP.11-R Installation and Management 5 This chapter describes viewing system status and event log information from the units Web Interface. Click on the Status button to access system and event log information. See the following sections:
Status Event Log Help and Exit buttons also appear on each page of the Web interface; click the Help button to access online help; click the Exit button to exit the application. For an introduction to the basics of management, see Basic Management. Status The Status tab showing the system status is displayed automatically when you log into the Web Interface. It also is the default window displayed when you click the Status button on the left side of the window. The Status tab shows the System Status and the System Traps. System Status The basic system status is shown in this section, including the version number of the embedded software. Systems Traps The status of system traps is shown in this section. System traps occur when the unit encounters irregularities. Deleting system traps has no effect on the operation of the unit. System traps also are sent to an SNMP manager station (if so configured). See Alarm Traps in the Tsunami MP.11/QB.11 Reference Manual for a list and description of the traps. 57 System Status Event Log Event Log MP.11-R Installation and Management Click Status > Event Log to view the contents of your Event Log. The Event Log keeps track of events that occur during the operation of the unit. The Event Log displays messages that may not be captured by System Traps, such as the Transmit Power for the Frequency Channel selected. See Event Log Error Messages in the Tsunami MP.11/QB.11 Reference Manual for an explanation of messages that can appear in the Event Log. 58
1 2 3 4 5 | manual 2 | Users Manual | 3.24 MiB | September 05 2007 |
Configuration MP.11-R Installation and Management 6 This chapter describes configuring the units settings using the units Web Interface. Click the Configure button to access configuration settings. The following topics are discussed in this section:
System Parameters Network Parameters Interface Parameters SNMP Parameters RIP Parameters (Routing Mode Only) Management Parameters Security Parameters Filtering Parameters Intra-Cell Blocking (BSU Only; Bridge Mode Only) VLAN Parameters (BSU Only; Bridge Mode Only) QoS (Quality of Service) Parameters (BSU Only) NAT (SU Only; Routing Mode Only) Help and Exit buttons also appear on each page of the Web interface; click the Help button to access online help; click the Exit button to exit the application. For an introduction to the basics of management, see Basic Management. System Parameters The System configuration page lets you change the units System Name, Location, Mode of Operation, and so on. These details help you to distinguish the unit from other routers and let you know whom to contact in case you experience problems. Click Configure > System; the following window is displayed. 59 Configuration System Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management You can enter the following details:
System Name: This is the system name for easy identification of the BSU or SU. The System Name field is limited to a length of 32 bytes. Use the system name of a BSU to configure the Base Station System Name parameter on an SU if you want the SU to register only with this BSU. If the Base Station System Name is left blank on the SU, it can register with any Base Station that has a matching Network Name and Network Secret. Country: Upon choosing a country, the Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) and Transmit Power Control (TPC) features are enabled automatically if the selected country has a regulatory domain that requires it. The Country selection pre-selects and displays only the allowed frequencies for the selected country. Click Configure > Interfaces > Wireless to see the channel/frequency list for the selected Country. NOTE: The Country field is not configurable for Model 4954-R. NOTE: Units sold only in the United States are pre-configured to scan and display only the outdoor frequencies permitted by the FCC. No other Country selections, channels, or frequencies can be configured. Units sold outside of the United States support the selection of a Country by the professional installer. If you change the Country, a reboot of the unit is necessary for the upgrade to take place. Dynamic Frequency Selection is not supported in 2.4 GHz operational mode; it is supported on Model 5054-R units only. For a non US-only device, the default country selected is United Kingdom (GB). Note the following:
The channel center frequencies are not regulated; only the band edge frequencies are regulated. If, before upgrade, US was selected as a country for a non US-Only device (which is an incorrect configuration), the country is changed automatically to United Kingdom upon upgrade. See Country Codes and Channels for a list of country codes. Location: This field can be used to describe the location of the unit, for example Main Lobby. Contact Name, Contact Email, and Contact Phone: In these fields, you can enter the details of the person to contact. ObjectID: This field shows the OID of the product name in the MIB. Ethernet MAC Address: The MAC address of the Ethernet interface of the device. Descriptor: Shows the product name and firmware build version. Up Time: The length of time the device has been up and running since the last reboot. 60 Configuration System Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management Mode of Operation: This field sets the unit as bridge (layer 2) or as router (layer 3). See Bridge and Routing Modes for more information. Temperature Logging Interval: This field sets the interval at which unit temperature is logged. Bridge and Routing Modes Bridge Mode A bridge is a product that connects a local area network (LAN) to another local area network that uses the same protocol
(for example, Ethernet). You can envision a bridge as being a device that decides whether a message from you to someone else is going to the local area network in your building or to someone on the local area network in the building across the street. A bridge examines each message on a LAN, passing those known to be within the same LAN, and forwarding those known to be on the other interconnected LAN (or LANs). In bridging networks, computer or node addresses have no specific relationship to location. For this reason, messages are sent out to every address on the network and accepted only by the intended destination node. Bridges learn which addresses are on which network and develop a learning table so that subsequent messages can be forwarded to the correct network. Bridging networks are generally always interconnected LANs since broadcasting every message to all possible destination would flood a larger network with unnecessary traffic. For this reason, router networks such as the Internet use a scheme that assigns addresses to nodes so that a message or packet can be forwarded only in one general direction rather than forwarded in all directions. A bridge works at the data-link (physical) layer of a network, copying a data packet from one network to the next network along the communications path. The default Bridging Mode is Transparent Bridging. This mode works if you do not use source routing in your network. If your network is configured to use source routing, then you should use either Multi-Ring SRTB or Single-Ring SRTB mode. In Multi-Ring SRTB mode, each unit must be configured with the Bridge number, Radio Ring number, and Token Ring number. The Radio Ring number is unique for each Token Ring Access Point and the Bridge number is unique for each Token Ring Access Point on the same Token Ring segment. Alternatively, you may use the Single-Ring SRTB mode. In this mode, only the Token Ring number is required for configuration. Routing Mode Routing mode can be used by customers seeking to segment their outdoor wireless network using routers instead of keeping a transparent or bridged network. By default the unit is configured as a bridge device, which means traffic between different outdoor locations can be seen from any point on the network. By switching to routing mode, your network now is segmented by a layer 3 (IP) device. By using Routing mode, each network behind the BSU and SUs can be considered a separate network with access to each controlled through routing tables. The use of a router on your network also blocks the retransmission of broadcast and multicast packets on your networks, which can help to improve the performance on your outdoor network in larger installations. The use of Routing mode requires more attention to the configuration of the unit and thorough planning of the network topology of your outdoor network. The unit can use Routing mode in any combination of BSU and SUs. For example, you may have the BSU in Routing mode and the SU in Bridge mode, or vice versa. When using Routing mode, pay close attention to the configuration of the default gateway both on your unit and on your PCs and servers. The default gateway controls where packets with unknown destinations (Internet) should be sent. Be sure that each device is configured with the correct default gateway for the next hop router. Usually this is the next router 61 Configuration System Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management on the way to your connection to the Internet. You can configure routes to other networks on your Intranet through the addition of static routes in your routers routing table. Key Reasons to Use Routing Mode One key reason why customers would use Routing mode is to implement virtual private networks (VPNs) or to let nodes behind two different SUs communicate with each other. Many customers do this same thing in Bridging mode by using secondary interfaces on the router at the BSU or virtual interfaces at the BSU in VLAN mode to avoid some of the drawbacks of IP Routing mode. Routing mode prevents the transport of non-IP protocols, which may be desirable for Service Providers. Routing mode is usually more efficient because Ethernet headers are not transported and non-IP traffic is blocked. Benefits of using Routing Mode Enabling RIP makes the unit easier to manage for a Service Provider that uses RIP to dynamically manage routes. RIP is no longer very common for Service Providers or Enterprise customers and an implementation of a more popular routing protocol like OSPF would be desirable. Routing mode saves bandwidth by not transporting non-IP protocols users might have enabled, like NetBEUI or IPX/
SPX, which eliminates the transmission of broadcasts and multicasts. The MAC header is:
Destination MAC: 6 bytes Source MAC: 6 bytes Ethernet Type: 2 bytes If the average packet size is 1000 bytes, the overhead saved is 1.5%; With a frame size of 64 bytes, the overhead saved is 20%; and for frame sizes of 128 bytes, the saving is 10%. Network researches claim that most network traffic consists of frames smaller than 100 bytes. In order to support routers behind the SUs with multiple subnets and prevent routing loops, you want individual routes
(and more than one) per SU. Routing Mode Examples In the first example, both the BSU and the SUs are configured for Routing mode. This example is appropriate for businesses connecting remote offices that have different networks. In example 2, the BSU is in Routing mode and the SUs are in Bridge mode. Notice the PCs behind the SUs must configure their default gateways to point to the BSU, not the SU. 62 Configuration System Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management Notes:
One of the most important details to pay attention to in Routing mode are the units and the PCs default gateways. It is a common mistake to set up the PCs gateway to point to the SU when the SU is in Bridge mode and the BSU is in Routing mode. Always check to make sure the PCs on your network are configured to send their IP traffic to the correct default gateway. Be sure to reboot the unit to permanently save static routes. New routes take effect immediately without a reboot, but are not permanently saved with your configuration until you do reboot the device. An unexpected power outage could cause static routes you entered to disappear when the unit reboots if they have not been saved. You also should save a copy of your units configuration file in case the unit must be reloaded. This saves you from being required to re-enter numerous static routes in a large network. The routing table supports up to 500 static routes. 63 Configuration Network Parameters Network Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management IP Configuration The Network tab contains the following sub-tabs. Note that the availability of some sub-tabs depends on whether the unit is in Bridge or Routing Mode. Roaming DHCP Server Spanning Tree (Bridge Mode Only) DHCP Relay Agent (Routing Mode Only) IP Routes (Routing Mode only) IP Configuration Click Configure > Network > IP Configuration to view and configure local IP address information. Configurable settings differ between Bridge mode and Routing mode. Bridge Mode If the device is configured in Bridge mode, the following screen is displayed:
Configure or view the following parameters:
IP Address Assignment Type:
Select Static if you want to assign a static IP address to the unit. Use this setting if you do not have a DHCP server or if you want to manually configure the IP settings Select Dynamic to have the device run in DHCP client mode, which gets an IP address automatically from a DHCP server over the network. When the unit is in Bridge mode, only one IP address is required. This IP address also can be changed with ScanTool
(see Setting the IP Address with ScanTool). In Routing mode, both Ethernet and Wireless interfaces require an IP address. IP Address: The units static IP address (default IP address is 10.0.0.1). This parameter is configurable only if the IP Address Assignment Type is set to Static. Subnet Mask: The mask of the subnet to which the unit is connected (the default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0). This parameter is configurable only if the IP Address Assignment Type is set to Static. Default Router IP Address: The IP address of the default gateway. This parameter is configurable only if the IP Address Assignment Type is set to Static. Default TTL: The default time-to-live value. 64 Configuration Network Parameters Routing Mode MP.11-R Installation and Management If the device is configured in Routing mode, both Ethernet and Wireless interfaces require an IP address. The following screen is displayed:
IP Address Ethernet Port: The units Ethernet IP address. The default is 10.0.0.1. IP Address Wireless Slot A: The units wireless IP address. The default is 10.0.0.1. Configure or view the following parameters:
Subnet Mask Ethernet Port: The units Ethernet IP address subnet mask.The default is 255.255.255.0. Subnet Mask Wireless Slot A: The units wireless IP address subnet mask. Default Router IP Address: The routers IP address. Default TTL: The default time-to-live value. Management Interface: The interface used to manage the device. Select Ethernet, Wireless, or Auto. Roaming Roaming Overview Roaming is a feature by which an SU terminates the session with the current BSU and starts the registration procedure with another BSU when it finds the quality of the other BSU to be better. Roaming provides MAC level connectivity to the SU that roams from one BSU to another. Roaming takes place across the range of frequencies and channel bandwidths
(5, 10, or 20 MHz, as available) that are available per configuration. The current release offers handoff times of up to a maximum of 80 ms. This is fast enough to allow the SU to seamlessly roam from one BSU to the other therefore supporting session persistence for delay-sensitive applications. The feature also functions as BSU backup in case the current BSU fails or becomes unavailable. The Roaming feature lets the SU monitor local SNR and data rate for all frames received from the current BSU. As long as the average local SNR for the current BSU is greater than the slow scanning threshold, and the number of retransmitted frames is greater than the slow scanning threshold given in percentage, the SU does not scan other channels for a better BSU. The normal scanning procedure starts when the average local SNR for the current BSU is less than or equal to the slow scanning threshold and the number of retransmitted frames is greater than the slow scanning threshold given in percentage. During the normal scanning procedure the SU scans the whole list of active channels while maintaining the current session uninterrupted. 65 Configuration Network Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management Fast scanning is the scanning procedure performed when the average local SNR for the current BSU is very low
(below the fast scanning threshold) and the number of retransmitted frames is greater than the fast scanning retransmission threshold given in%, so that the current session should terminate as soon as possible. During this procedure, the SU scans other active channels as fast as possible. Roaming can only occur if the normal scanning or fast scanning procedure is started under the following conditions:
If the roaming is started from the normal scanning procedure (after the SU scans all the active channels), the SU 1. selects the BSU with the best SNR value on all available channels. The SU roams to the best BSU only if the SNR value for the current BSU is still below the slow scanning SNR threshold, and best BSU offers a better SNR value for at least roaming threshold than the current BSU. The SU starts a new registration procedure with the best BSU without ending the current session. If the roaming is started from the fast scanning procedure, the SU selects the first BSU that offers better SNR than the current BSU, and starts a new registration procedure with the better BSU without ending the current session. 2. Roaming with Dynamic Data Rate Selection (DDRS) Enabled When an SU roams from BSU-1 to BSU-2 and DDRS is enabled, the data rate at which the SU connects to BSU-2 is the default DDRS data rate. If this remains at the factory default of 6 Mbps, there can be issues with the application if it requires more then 6 Mbps (for example multiple video streams). Applications requiring a higher data rate could experience a slight data loss during the roaming process while DDRS selects a higher rate (based upon link conditions). When the applications re-transmit at a possibly slower rate, the WORP protocol initially services the data at 6 Mbps and increases the data rate up to the "Maximum DDRS Data Rate" (ddrsmaxdatarate) one step at a time. Because the applications are not being serviced at the best possible rate, they further slow down the rate of data send. The DDRS algorithm requires data traffic (a minimum of 128 frames) to raise the rate to a higher value. Although roaming occurs successfully, the previous scenario causes applications to drop their sessions; hence session persistence is not maintained. For a discussion on how to configure DDRS, see Dynamic Data Rate Selection (DDRS). NOTE: You must know the data rate required for the applications running and you must ensure (during network deployment) that the ranges and RF links can support the necessary data rate. You also must set the default DDRS data rate at the capacity necessary for the application so that it connects to the next Base Station at the required capacity if roaming occurs. Set the Default DDRS Data Rate (ddrsdefdatarate) to a greater value (24, 36, 48 or 54 Mbps, for example) for applications requiring session persistence when roaming occurs. Roaming Configuration Click Configure > Network > Roaming to configure Roaming. The screen differs depending on whether the unit is configured as a BSU or as an SU. 66 Configuration Network Parameters BSU Roaming Configuration MP.11-R Installation and Management View or set the following parameters:
Enable Roaming Status: Enable or disable the Roaming feature by selecting or de-selecting the checkbox. The default value is disabled (clear). Announcement Period: If you enable roaming, you may set the Announcement Period for a value between 25 to 100 ms. The default is 100 ms. Multi-Frame Bursting: The default value is enabled. Auto Scanning Table: See description below. Auto Scanning Table An SU scans all available channels for a given bandwidth during roaming. In order to reduce the number of channels an SU has to scan and thus decrease the roaming time, a channel priority list that tells the SU what channels to scan is implemented. Each channel in the channel priority list is specified with its corresponding bandwidth and the priority with which it should be scanned, either Active (standard priority), Active High (high priority), or Inactive. An SU will scan all channels indicated as Active during roaming. However, it will scan active channels indicated as High Priority before scanning active channels indicated as standard priority. Channels that are not going to be used in the wireless network should be configured as Inactive so that the SU can skip over those channels during scanning saving this way time. A BSU broadcasts the channel priority list to all valid authenticated SUs in its sector. It re-broadcasts the channel priority list to all SUs every time the list is updated on the BSU. Click Edit Table Entries to make changes; enter your changes and click OK. 67 Configuration Network Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management Note that an SU may roam from one BSU with a bandwidth setting to another BSU with a different bandwidth setting. Since in this case more channels need to be scanned than with only one channel bandwidth setting, it is important that the channel priority list mentioned above is properly used to limit scanning time. When Scanning Across Bandwidth on the SU is enabled (see Interface Parameters), the SU supports bandwidth selection of the communications channel of either 20 MHz, 10 MHz, or 5 MHz, as available. This allows the BSUs in the network to be set to different bandwidths while an SU can still roam from one BSU to the next, because it will not only scan other frequencies (when the signal level or quality are lower than the threshold) but it will also switch to other bandwidths to find a BSU that may be on another bandwidth than its current one. During roaming, the SU will start scanning first the channels on its current bandwidth from the Active channel list provided by the BSU in order to find a BSU to register, since that is the most likely setting for other BSUs in the network. If the SU cannot find an acceptable roaming candidate, it will switch bandwidth and start scanning channels on that corresponding bandwidth from the Active channel list provided by the BSU. The process is repeated until the SU finds an appropriate BSU to register. In the example above, an SU whose current bandwidth is 20 MHz will start scanning all active channels within the bandwidth of 20 MHz. If it cannot find a suitable BSU, it will switch to a 10 MHz bandwidth and start scanning all active channels within that bandwidth, in this case channel 56 first since it is configured as high priority and channel 60 next. No channels will be scanned on the 5 MHz bandwidth since all those channels are configured as inactive. SU Roaming Configuration Enable or disable the Roaming feature in the Roaming Status drop-down box. The default value is disabled. NOTE: To enable roaming, you must enable Roaming Status on both the BSU and the SU. DHCP Server When enabled, the DHCP server allows allocation of IP addresses to hosts on the Ethernet side of the SU or BSU. Specifically, the DHCP Server feature lets the SU or BSU respond to DHCP requests from Ethernet hosts with the following information:
Host IP address Gateway IP address Subnet Mask DNS Primary Server IP address DNS Secondary Server IP Click Configure > Network > DHCP Server to enable the unit on a DHCP Server. 68 Configuration Network Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management The following parameters are configurable:
DHCP Server Status: Verify that DHCP Relay Agent is disabled. After you have made at least one entry in the DHCP server IP Pool Table, enable DHCP Server by selecting Enable from the DHCP Server Status pull-down menu. NOTE: There must be at least one entry in the DHCP server IP Pool Table to enable DHCP server. Also, DHCP server cannot be enabled if DHCP Relay Agent is enabled. Subnet Mask: The unit supplies this subnet mask in its DHCP response to a DHCP request from an Ethernet host. Indicates the IP subnet mask assigned to hosts on the Ethernet side using DHCP. Gateway IP Address: The unit supplies this gateway IP address in the DHCP response. It indicates the IP address of a router assigned as the default gateway for hosts on the Ethernet side. This parameter must be set. Primary DNS IP Address: The unit supplies this primary DNS IP address in the DHCP response. It indicates the IP address of the primary DNS server that hosts on the Ethernet side uses to resolve Internet host names to IP addresses. This parameter must be set. Secondary DNS IP Address: The unit supplies this secondary DNS IP address in the DHCP response. Number of IP Pool Table Entries: The number of IP pool table entries is a read-only field that indicates the total number of entries in the DHCP server IP Pool Table. See Add Entries to the DHCP Server IP Pool Table. Add Entries to the DHCP Server IP Pool Table You can add up to 20 entries in the IP Pool Table. An IP address can be added if the entrys network ID is the same as the network ID of the device. NOTE: After adding entries, you must reboot the unit before the values take effect. 1. To add an entry click Add Table Entries. 69 Configuration Network Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management 2. Enter the following parameters and click Add:
Start IP Address: Indicates the starting IP address that is used for assigning address to hosts on the Ethernet side in the configured subnet. End IP Address: Indicates the ending IP address that is used for assigning address to hosts on the Ethernet side in the configured subnet. Default Lease Time: Specifies the default lease time for IP addresses in the address pool. The value is 3600-
86400 seconds. Max Lease Time: The maximum lease time for IP addresses in the address pool. The value is 3600-86400 seconds. Comment: The comment field is a descriptive field of up to 255 characters. Edit/Delete Entries in the DHCP Server IP Pool Table Entries 1. Click Edit/Delete Table Entries to make changes 2. Enter your changes and click OK. Spanning Tree (Bridge Mode Only) NOTE: The unit must be in Bridge mode to configure Spanning Tree. This protocol is executed between the bridges to detect and logically remove redundant paths from the network. Spanning Tree can be used to prevent link-layer loops (broadcast is forwarded to all port where another device may forward it and, finally, it gets back to this unit; therefore, it is looping). Spanning Tree can also be used to create redundant links and operates by disabling links: hot standby customer is creating a redundant link without routing function. If your network does not support Spanning Tree, be careful to avoid creating network loops between radios. For example, creating a WDS link between two units connected to the same Ethernet network creates a network loop (if spanning tree is disabled). 70 Configuration Network Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management The Spanning Tree configuration options are advanced settings. Proxim recommends that you leave these parameters at their default values unless you are familiar with the Spanning Tree protocol. Click the Spanning Tree tab to change Spanning Tree values. Edit/Disable Entries in the Priority and Path Cost Table 1. Click Edit Table Entries to make changes 2. Enter your changes and click OK. IP Routes (Routing Mode only) NOTE: The unit must be in Routing mode to configure IP Routes. Click Configure > Network > IP Routes to configure. 71 Configuration Network Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management Add IP Routes 1. Click the Add button to add entries; the following screen is displayed. 2. Enter the route information 3. Click Add. The IP Address and Subnet Mask combination is validated for a proper combination. NOTE: When adding a new entry, the IP address of the Route Destination must be in either the Ethernet subnet or in the wireless subnet of the unit. Edit/Delete IP Routes 1. Click the Edit/Delete Table Entries button to make changes to or delete existing entries. 2. Edit the route information 3. Click OK. The IP address and subnet mask combination is validated for a proper combination. 72 Configuration Network Parameters DHCP Relay Agent (Routing Mode Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management NOTE: The unit must be in Routing mode to configure DHCP Relay Agent. Click Configure > Network > DHCP RA to enable the units DHCP Relay Agent. When enabled, the DHCP relay agent forwards DHCP requests to the set DHCP server. There must be at least one entry in the corresponding Server IP Address table in order to enable the DHCP Relay Agent. Note that DHCP Relay Agent parameters are configurable only in Routing mode. It cannot be enabled when NAT or DHCP Server is enabled. Add Entries to the DHCP Relay Agent Table To add entries to the table of DHCP Relay Agents:
1. Click Add Table Entries; the following window is displayed:
2. Enter the Server IP Address and any optional comments; click Add. Edit/Delete Entries in the DHCP Relay Agent Table To edit or delete entries in the table of DHCP Relay Agents:
1. Click Edit/Delete Table Entries the following window is displayed:
73 Configuration Network Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management 2. Enter your changes, and click OK. 74 MP.11-R Installation and Management Configuration Interface Parameters Interface Parameters The Interface tab contains the following sub-tabs. Wireless Interface Base Mode Satellite Mode Ethernet Wireless Interface To configure the wireless interface, click Configure > Interfaces > Wireless. For Base Station units, the wireless interface can be placed in either WORP Base or WORP Satellite mode (selected from the Interface Type drop-down box). SUs can be placed only in WORP Satellite mode. The wireless interface settings depend upon whether the mode is Base or Satellite. The Wireless Outdoor Router Protocol (WORP) is a polling algorithm designed for wireless outdoor networks. WORP takes care of the performance degradation incurred by the so-called hidden-node problem, which can occur when wireless LAN technology is used for outdoor building-to-building connectivity. In this situation, when multiple radios send an RTS, if another radio is transmitting, it corrupts all data being sent, degrading overall performance. The WORP polling algorithm ensures that these collisions cannot occur, which increases the performance of the overall network significantly. WORP dynamically adapts to the number of SUs that are active on the network and the amount of data they have queued to send. 75 Configuration Interface Parameters Base Mode MP.11-R Installation and Management Interface Type: The interface type can be WORP Satellite or WORP Base. The following parameters may be configured or viewed:
MAC Address: The factory-assigned MAC address of the unit. This is a read-only field. Network Name: A Network Name is a name given to a network so that multiple networks can reuse the same frequency without problems. An SU can only register to its base if it has the same Network Name. The Network Name is one of the parameters that allow a Subscriber Unit to register on a Base Station. The Base Station System Name and Frequency Channel also are parameters to guide the SU to the proper BSU on the network, but they provide no security. Basic security is provided through encryption, as it causes none of the messages to be sent in the clear. Further security is provided by mutual authentication of the BSU and SU using the Network Secret. The Network Name can be 2 to 32 characters in length. Operational Mode: This field indicates the operational mode of the unit depending upon the specific Tsunami MP.11. This operational mode cannot be changed as it is based upon a license file.For the 5054, this field shows 11a. Transmit Power Control (TPC): By default, the unit lets you transmit at the maximum output power for the country or regulatory domain and frequency selected. However, with Transmit Power Control (TPC), you can adjust the output power of the unit to a lower level in order to reduce interference to neighboring devices or to use a higher gain antenna without violating the maximum radiated output power allowed for your country. Also, some countries that require DFS also require the transmit power to be set to a 6 dB lower value than the maximum allowed EIRP when link quality permits. You can see your units current output power for the selected frequency in the event log. The event log shows the selected power for all data rates, so you must look up the proper data rate to determine the actual power level. 76 Configuration Interface Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management NOTE: This feature only lets you decrease your output power; it does not let you increase your output power beyond the maximum allowed defaults for your frequency and country. Select one of the following options and click OK at the bottom of the window. Your original output power is adjusted relative to the value selected. The new setting takes effect immediately without rebooting:
TPC Selection (dB) Maximum TX Power (dBm) 0 (default)
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18 (minimum TPC level) 16 13 10 7 4 1 0 NOTE: For 4954-R models: to comply with FCC Part 90 regulations when using an external antenna, a TPC value of
-3 dB is required regardless of antenna size, and a larger TPC value may be required to limit the total EIRP to 29dBm or less. For 4954-R models that have an integrated flat-panel antenna, a TPC of -9 must be used to comply with FCC Part 90 regulations.To insure proper operation, TPC values greater than -9dB should be avoided when operating a 4954-R unit. NOTE: 24 Mbps and lower modulation have maximum +16 dBm TX power, 36 Mbps has maximum +13 dBm TX power, 48 Mbps has maximum +12 dBm TX power, and 54 Mbps has maximum +11 dBm TX power. Because higher modulation has a lower maximum TX power, the total TPC range is smaller at a higher data rate. Because the minimum TX power is equal for all data rates, each TPC selection has constant TX power for all data rates except where the maximum TX power is limited. Actual Transmit Power Control: The configured Transmit Power Control setting. Enable Turbo Mode (US Non-DFS Only; 5054-R only): Check this box to enable Turbo Mode. Turbo Mode is supported only in the United States when DFS is not required, and only for the 5054-R. Enabling turbo mode, in its current implementation, allows the unit to use two adjacent frequency channels to transmit and receive a signal. By enabling turbo mode, the receive sensitivity improves by 4 dB for the 36 Mbps data rate and by 2 dB for the 24 Mbps data rate. NOTE: The additional sensitivity is provided with the impact of using twice as much spectrum and thus increasing the opportunity of interference and decreased ability for system collocation. Generally, Turbo mode is not recommended except when the extra sensitivity is absolutely required. Frequency Channel: The frequency channel indicates the band center frequency the unit uses for communicating with peers. This frequency channel can be set in several ranges, depending upon regulatory domain. Refer to Country Codes and Channels for channelization information. For countries in which DFS is not required, the Frequency Channel list displays only the channels and frequencies allowed for the selected country. In countries and bands in which DFS is required, Frequency Channel is not configurable. Instead the channel is auto-selected by the DFS process. Multicast Rate: The rate at which data is to be transferred. This drop down box is unavailable when DDRS is enabled. The default multicast rate for the unit is 36 Mbps. The SU must never be set to a lower data rate than the BSU because timeouts will occur at the BSU and communication will fail. Selections for multicast rate are shown in the following table:
5 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz 40 MHz (Turbo Mode)
(US Non-DFS Only;
5054-R only) 1.5 3 6 12 77 Configuration Interface Parameters 5 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz MP.11-R Installation and Management 40 MHz (Turbo Mode)
(US Non-DFS Only;
5054-R only) 2.25 3 4.5 6 9 12 13.5 4,5 6 9 12 18 24 27 9 12 18 24 36 48 54 18 24 36 48 72 96 108 Channel Bandwidth: This field is used to change the bandwidth. Values are 5MHz, 10 MHz, or 20 MHz, as well as 40 MHz when Turbo mode is enabled (US non-DFS only; 5054-R only). Change the channel bandwidth of the unit that is remote to you first, and reboot the unit. Then change the channel bandwidth of the unit to which you are directly connected. NOTE: The 5 MHz channel bandwidth is not available when the selected country is UNITED STATES DFS. Antenna Gain You can modify the sensitivity of the radio card when detecting radar signals in accordance with ETSI, FCC, and IC Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) requirements. Given the radar detection threshold is fixed by ETSI, the FCC, and IC and that a variety of antennas with different gains may be attached to the unit, you must adjust this threshold to account for higher than expected antenna gains and avoid false radar detection events. This can result in the units constantly changing frequency channels. You can configure the threshold for radar detection at the radio card to compensate for increased external antenna gains. The Antenna Gain value ranges from 0 to 35. The default value is 0. Configuring this parameter on the 4954-R has no effect. Satellite Density: The Satellite Density setting is a valuable feature for achieving maximum bandwidth in a wireless network. It influences the receive sensitivity of the radio interface and improves operation in environments with a high noise level. Reducing the sensitivity of the unit enables unwanted noise to be filtered out (it disappears under the threshold). You can configure the Satellite Density to be Large, Medium, Small, Mini, or Micro. The default value for this setting is Large. The smaller settings are appropriate for high noise environments; a setting of Large would be for a low noise environment. A long distance link may have difficulty maintaining a connection with a small density setting because the wanted signal can disappear under the threshold. Consider both noise level and distance between the peers in a link when configuring this setting. The threshold should be chosen higher than the noise level, but sufficiently below the signal level. A safe value is 10 dB below the present signal strength. If the Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) is not sufficient, you may need to set a lower data rate or use antennas with higher gain to increase the margin between wanted and unwanted signals. In a point-to-multipoint configuration, the BSU should have a density setting suitable for all of its registered SUs, especially the ones with the lowest signal levels
(longest links). Take care when configuring a remote interface; check the available signal level first, using Remote Link Test. WARNING: When the remote interface accidentally is set at too small a value and communication is lost, it cannot be reconfigured remotely and a local action is required to bring the communication back. Therefore, the best place to experiment with the level is at the unit that can be managed without going through the link; if the link is lost, the setting can be adjusted to the correct level to bring the link back. Sensitivity threshold settings related to the density settings for the unit are:
78 Configuration Interface Parameters Satellite Density Large Medium Small Mini Micro MP.11-R Installation and Management Receive Sensitivity Threshold
-95 dBm
-86 dBm
-78 dBm
-70 dBm
-62 dBm Defer Threshold
-62 dBm
-62 dBm
-52 dBm
-42 dBm
-36 dBm Maximum Satellites: You can specify a maximum value of 250 in this field, because up to 250 SUs can be connected to a BSU. If a BSU already has as many SUs as specified in this field, a new SU cannot connect to the BSU. No-Sleep Mode: No-Sleep Mode was a feature used to control jitter in Tsunami MP.11 products running 2.2.6, and earlier, versions of software. The introduction of QoS and the new WORP resource scheduling mechanism have eliminated the need for No-Sleep Mode. Furthermore, QoS provides better control over jitter and latency-sensitive applications (see QoS (Quality of Service) Parameters (BSU Only) for details on configuration). This field is inactive and makes no difference whether is enabled or disabled. Automatic Multi-Frame Bursting: In order to achieve higher throughput, WORP protocol allows each side (BSU or SU) to send a burst of up to 4 data messages instead of a single data message. The sole criteria for sending a burst is enough traffic to be sent out. This feature is called Multi-Frame Bursting support. Automatic Multi-Frame bursting optimizes multi-burst performance when configuring QoS high-priority Service Flows. Three scenarios may be defined:
No Multi-Frame Burst Support To disable Multi-Frame burst support, click Configure > Network > Roaming, and select Disable on the drop-down box (see BSU Roaming Configuration). In this case, each active SFC is limited to send a single data message. Total throughput available to the remaining best effort traffic is around 76%
of the maximum available throughput. Multi-Frame Burst Support The system will enable Multi-Frame burst for all SFCs, but the maximum number of data messages sent in a burst will be defined by the parameter Number of data messages in a burst for each of the SFCs (see Service Flow Class (SFC)). This scenario is set by clicking Configure > Network > Roaming and enabling Multi-Frame burst on the drop-down box (see BSU Roaming Configuration), and disabling Automatic Multi-Frame Bursting (this parameter). The maximum number of data messages in a burst directly influences the total throughput of the system. Typical values are:
No. of messages in a burst:
% of the maximum throughput:
4 3 2 1 100%
97.6%
92.9%
76.2%
Automatic Multi-Frame Burst Support The system will continuously monitor which of the active SFCs has the highest priority and dynamically enable Multi-Frame burst for the highest priority SFC only, keeping all the lower priority SFCs with Multi-Frame burst disabled. If there are multiple SFCs having the same, highest priority, all of them will have Multi-Frame burst enabled. The maximum number of data messages sent in a burst is defined by the parameter Number of data messages in a burst and it can be different for each SFC (see Service Flow Class
(SFC)). This scenario is set by clicking Configure > Network > Roaming and enabling Multi-Frame burst on the drop-down box (see BSU Roaming Configuration), and enabling Automatic Multi-Frame Bursting (this parameter). In this case, even the lowest priority SFC will have Multi-Frame burst dynamically enabled as long as it is the only SFC in the system that has traffic. By default, configuring even a single high priority SFC with automatic multi-frame bursting enabled will decrease throughput of low priority best-effort traffic to approximately 76% of maximum available throughput, because low priority traffic will have Multi-Frame burst disabled to optimize bandwidth for the high priority traffic. Registration Timeout: This is the registration process time-out of an SU on a BSU. Default is 5 seconds. 79 Configuration Interface Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management Rx Inactivity Timeout: This is the activity time-out of an SU on a BSU. Network Secret: A network secret is a secret password given to all nodes of a network. An SU can only register to a BSU if it has the same Network Secret. The Network Secret is sent encrypted and can be used as a security option. Input / Output Bandwidth Limit: These parameters limit the data traffic received on the wireless interface and transmitted to the wireless interface, respectively. Selections are in steps of 64 Kbps from 64 Kbps to 108,064 Kbps. Dynamic Data Rate Selection (DDRS) Status: Select the DDRS Status Enable or Disable from the drop-down box provided. When you enable or disable DDRS on the BSU, the BSU sends an announcement to the SUs and the SUs enable or disable DDRS automatically. DDRS Default Data Rate: When DDRS is enabled, configure the default data rate. Possible values are (normal mode): 6 Mbps, 9 Mbps, 12 Mbps, 18 Mbps, 24 Mbps, 36 Mbps. DDRS Max Data Rate: When DDRS is enabled, configure the maximum data rate that can be dynamically set by DDRS. Possible values are (normal mode): 6 Mbps, 9 Mbps, 12 Mbps, 18 Mbps, 24 Mbps, 36 Mbps. DDRS Avg SNR Threshold for Data Rate Increase: When DDRS is enabled,???
DDRS Reg SNR Threshold for Data Rate Increase: When DDRS is enabled,???
DDRS Avg SNR Threshold for Data Rate Decrease: When DDRS is enabled,???
DDRS Inc Percent Threshold: When DDRS is enabled,???
DDRS Dec Percent Threshold: When DDRS is enabled,???
Additionally, the BSU screen for countries that require DFS contains the sections described below. 80 Configuration Interface Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management Appears only when selected country requires DFS DFS Preferred Channel: A single DFS preferred frequency channel on the BSU is provided so that when the DFS process starts the BSU will first try the DFS preferred channel before scanning all the other active channels in the DFS channel list. The DFS preferred channel must be selected from those channels indicated as Disable in the DFS channel blacklist list. It is not possible to select the DFS preferred channel from those channels in the DFS channel blacklist list indicated as Enable. Channel Blacklist Table: The DFS channel blacklist table shows all the channels in the current bandwidth and specifies the blacklist status of each channel as one of the following:
Enable: Channels that are made unavailable either for a certain period of time upon detection of a radar signal, or permanently because the operator has configured them as blacklisted. These channels are skipped over during DFS channel selection. Disable: Channels that are to be scanned during DFS. Edit Entries to the Channel Blacklist Table 81 Configuration Interface Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management In accordance with ETSI, IC, and FCC non-occupancy rules, when a radar signal is detected on any active channel, the blacklist status of that channel will change to Enable and the Radar Detected status will change to TRUE (see previous figure). The channel will not be used for a period of 30 minutes after the radar signal has been detected. The elapsed time is also shown in the DFS channel blacklist table. When the elapsed time for a channel in the blacklist is greater than or equal to 30 minutes, the blacklist status of the channel will change to Disable and the Radar Detected and Elapsed Time fields will change accordingly. If an operator knows in advance on which channels a radar signal is likely to exist, those channels can be blacklisted and hence they will be skipped during DFS. Similarly, if the operator knows of channels where a radar signal is unlikely to be detected, those channels can be defined as active and hence they will be scanned during DFS. This makes the whole process more efficient. When you click Edit, the channel blacklist table screen appears. Here you can manually configure each channel as active (Blacklist Status = Disable) or blacklisted (Blacklist Status = Enable). Enter your changes and click OK. To go back, click on the arrow button. 82 Configuration Interface Parameters Satellite Mode MP.11-R Installation and Management The mandatory parameters to configure for registration of the SU on a Base Station are:
Network Name Base Station System Name (when used) Channel Frequency Encryption (when used) Network Secret These and other parameters found on the SUs Interfaces > Wireless page are described below. Interface Type: In Satellite mode, the interface type is WORP Satellite. MAC Address: The factory-assigned MAC address of the unit. This is a read-only field. Base Station System Name: The name found on the system page of the BSU to which this SU is connecting. This parameter can be used as an added security measure, and when there are multiple BSUs in the network and you want an SU to register with only one when it may actually have adequate signal strength for either. The System Name field is limited to a length of 32 bytes. If the Base Station System Name is left blank on the SU, it can register with any BSU with a matching Network Name and Network Secret. Operational Mode: This field indicates the operational mode of the unit, depending upon the specific Tsunami MP.11. This operational mode cannot be changed as it is based upon a license file. Network Name: A Network Name is a name given to a network so that multiple networks can reuse the same frequency without problems. An SU can only register to its base if it has the same Network Name. The Network Name is one of the parameters that allow a Subscriber Unit to register on a Base Station. The Base Station System Name and Frequency Channel also are parameters to guide the SU to the proper BSU on the network, but they provide no security. Basic security is provided through encryption, as it causes none of the messages to be sent in the clear. Further security is provided by mutual authentication of the BSU and SU using the Network Secret. The Network Name can be 2 to 32 characters in length. Dynamic Data Rate Selection (DDRS) Status: For the WORP Satellite Mode, DDRS Status is read-only parameter and its value is based upon the WORP Base to which this SU is associated. 83 Configuration Interface Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management Transmit Power Control (TPC): By default, the 5012/5054-SUI lets you transmit at the maximum output power for the country or regulatory domain and frequency selected. However, with Transmit Power Control (TPC), you can adjust the output power of the unit to a lower level in order to reduce interference to neighboring devices or to use a higher gain antenna without violating the maximum radiated output power allowed for your country. Also, some countries that require DFS also require the transmit power to be set to a 6 dB lower value than the maximum allowed EIRP when link quality permits. You can see your units current output power for the selected frequency in the event log. The event log shows the selected power for all data rates, so you must look up the proper data rate to determine the actual power level. NOTE: This feature only lets you decrease your output power; it does not let you increase your output power beyond the maximum allowed defaults for your frequency and country. Select one of the following options and click OK at the bottom of the window. Your original output power is adjusted relative to the value selected. The new setting takes effect immediately without rebooting:
TPC Selection (dB) Maximum TX Power (dBm) 0 (default)
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18 (minimum TPC level) 16 13 10 7 4 1 0 NOTE: For 4954-R models: to comply with FCC Part 90 regulations when using an external antenna, a TPC value of
-3 dB is required regardless of antenna size, and a larger TPC value may be required to limit the total EIRP to 29dBm or less. For 4954-R models that have an integrated flat-panel antenna, a TPC of -9 dB must be used to comply with FCC Part 90 regulations.To insure proper operation, TPC values greater than -9 dB should be avoided when operating a 4954-R unit. NOTE: 24 Mbps and lower modulation have maximum +16 dBm TX power, 36 Mbps has maximum +13 dBm TX power, 48 Mbps has maximum +12 dBm TX power, and 54 Mbps has maximum +11 dBm TX power. Because higher modulation has a lower maximum TX power, the total TPC range is smaller at a higher data rate. Because the minimum TX power is equal for all data rates, each TPC selection has constant TX power for all data rates except where the maximum TX power is limited. Actual Transmit Power Control: The configured Transmit Power Control setting. Enable Turbo Mode (US Non-DFS Only; 5054-R Only): Check this box to enable Turbo Mode. Turbo Mode is supported only on the 5054-R when DFS is not required, and only in the United States. Enabling turbo mode, in its current implementation, allows the unit to use two adjacent frequency channels to transmit and receive a signal. By enabling turbo mode, the receive sensitivity improves by 4 dB for the 36 Mbps data rate and by 2 dB for the 24 Mbps data rate. NOTE: The additional sensitivity is provided with the impact of using twice as much spectrum and thus increasing the opportunity of interference and decreased ability for system collocation. Generally, Turbo mode is not recommended except when the extra sensitivity is absolutely required. Frequency Channel: The frequency channel indicates the band center frequency the unit uses for communicating with peers. This frequency channel can be set in several ranges, depending upon regulatory domain. Refer to Country Codes and Channels for channelization information. For countries in which DFS is not required, the Frequency Channel list displays only the channels and frequencies allowed for the selected country. For countries in which DFS is required, Frequency Channel is not configurable. Instead the channel is auto-selected by the DFS process. 84 Configuration Interface Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management Scanning Across Bandwidth: Enable this field if you want the SU to scan across the whole range of channel bandwidths (5, 10, or 20 MHz, as available) with or without roaming enabled. Disable this field if you wish the SU to scan only across its configured channel bandwidth. Multicast Rate: The rate at which data is to be transferred. This drop down box is unavailable when DDRS is enabled. The default multicast rate for the unit is 36 Mbps. The SU must never be set to a lower data rate than the BSU because timeouts will occur at the BSU and communication will fail. Selections for multicast rate are shown in the following table:
5 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz 40 MHz (Turbo Mode)
(US Non-DFS Only;
5054-R only) 1.5 2.25 3 4.5 6 9 12 13.5 3 4,5 6 9 12 18 24 27 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 54 12 18 24 36 48 72 96 108 Channel Bandwidth: This field is used to change the bandwidth. Values are 5 MHz, 10 MHz, or 20 MHz, as well as 40 MHz when Turbo mode is enabled. NOTE: The 5 MHz channel bandwidth is not available when the selected country is UNITED STATES DFS. Satellite Density: The Satellite Density setting is a valuable feature for achieving maximum bandwidth in a wireless network. It influences the receive sensitivity of the radio interface and improves operation in environments with a high noise level. Reducing the sensitivity of the unit enables unwanted noise to be filtered out (it disappears under the threshold). You can configure the Satellite Density to be Large, Medium, Small, Mini, or Micro. The default value for this setting is Large. The smaller settings are appropriate for high noise environments; a setting of Large would be for a low noise environment. A long distance link may have difficulty maintaining a connection with a small density setting because the wanted signal can disappear under the threshold. Consider both noise level and distance between the peers in a link when configuring this setting. The threshold should be chosen higher than the noise level, but sufficiently below the signal level. A safe value is 10 dB below the present signal strength. If the Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) is not sufficient, you may need to set a lower data rate or use antennas with higher gain to increase the margin between wanted and unwanted signals. In a point-to-multipoint configuration, the BSU should have a density setting suitable for all of its registered SUs, especially the ones with the lowest signal levels
(longest links). Take care when configuring a remote interface; check the available signal level first, using Remote Link Test. WARNING: When the remote interface accidentally is set at too small a value and communication is lost, it cannot be reconfigured remotely and a local action is required to bring the communication back. Therefore, the best place to experiment with the level is at the unit that can be managed without going through the link; if the link is lost, the setting can be adjusted to the correct level to bring the link back. Sensitivity threshold settings related to the density settings for the unit are:
Satellite Density Receive Sensitivity Threshold Defer Threshold Large
-95 dBm
-62 dBm 85 Configuration Interface Parameters Medium Small Mini Micro
-86 dBm
-78 dBm
-70 dBm
-62 dBm MP.11-R Installation and Management
-62 dBm
-52 dBm
-42 dBm
-36 dBm Registration Timeout: This is the registration process time-out of an SU on a BSU. Default is 5 seconds. Rx Activity Timeout: This is the activity time-out of an SU on a BSU. Default is 0 seconds. Network Secret: A network secret is a secret password given to all nodes of a network. An SU can only register to a BSU if it has the same Network Secret. The Network Secret is sent encrypted and can be used as a security option. Input / Output Bandwidth Limit: These parameters limit the data traffic received on the wireless interface and transmitted to the wireless interface, respectively. Selections are in steps of 64 Kbps from 64 Kbps to 108,064 Kbps. Ethernet To set the Ethernet speed, duplex mode, and input and output bandwidth limits, click Configure > Interfaces > Ethernet. You can set the desired speed and transmission mode by clicking on Configuration. The recommended setting is auto-speed-auto-duplex, but you may select from these settings for the type of Ethernet transmission:
Half-duplex means that only one side can transmit at a time. Full-duplex lets both sides transmit. Auto-duplex selects the best transmission mode available when both sides are set to auto-select. 86 Configuration SNMP Parameters SNMP Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management Click Configure > SNMP to enable or disable trap groups, and to configure the SNMP management stations to which the unit sends system traps. See Trap Groups in the Tsunami MP.11/QB.11 Reference Manual for a list of the system traps. Trap Groups: You can enable or disable different types of traps in the system. By default, all traps are enabled. Trap Host Table: This table shows the SNMP management stations to which the unit sends system traps. Trap Host Table Add Entries to the Trap Host Table Click the Add Table Entries button to add entries to the Trap Host Table. Edit/Delete Entries in the Trap Host Table Click the Edit/Delete Table Entries button to make changes to or delete existing entries. 87 Configuration SNMP Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management 88 Configuration RIP Parameters (Routing Mode Only) RIP Parameters (Routing Mode Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management Routing Internet Protocol (RIP) is a dynamic routing protocol you can use to help automatically propagate routing table information between routers. The unit can be configured as RIPv1, RIPv2, RIPv1 Compatible, or a combination of the three versions while operating in Routing mode. In general, the units RIP module is based upon RFC 1389. NOTE: RIP is configurable only when the unit is in Routing Mode and Network Address Translation (NAT) is disabled. Note the following:
RIPv2 is enabled by default when routing mode is selected. You may turn RIP off by clearing the Enable RIP Interface check box for the Ethernet or the wireless interface. Any RIP advertisements that are received on the designated interface are ignored. All other options on the page are dimmed. If the Enable RIP Interface check box is selected, the unit sends RIP requests and listens for RIP updates coming from RIP-enabled devices advertising on the network. You may configure the Receive field for RIPv1, RIPv2, or a combination of both. Although the unit receives and processes these updates, it does not further propagate these updates unless configured to advertise RIP. Again, you may configure the Advertize field for RIPv1, RIPv2, or a combination of both. The ability to enable or disable default route propagation is not user configurable. Once initialized, the unit uses its static default route and does not advertise this route in RIP updates. If another router on your network is configured to advertise its default route, this route overwrites the static default route configured on the unit. The unit then also propagates the new dynamic default route throughout the network. Be aware that, once a dynamic default route is learned, it behaves just as any other dynamic route learned through RIP. This means if the device sending the default route stops sending RIP updates, the default route times out and the unit has no default route to the network. Workarounds for this condition include rebooting or re-entering a static default route. In general, the best approach is to disable the propagation of default routes on the other routers in your network unless you understand the risks. The following table describes the properties and features of each version of RIP supported. RIPv1 Broadcast No Authentication Class routing Distance-vector protocol Metric-Hops RIPv2 Multicast Authentication Classless routing (VLSM) Distance-vector protocol Metric-Hops RIPv1 Compatible Broadcast Authentication Classless routing (VLSM) Distance-vector protocol Metric-Hops 89 Configuration RIP Parameters (Routing Mode Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management RIPv1 Maximum Distance 15 IGP RIPv2 Maximum Distance 15 IGP RIPv1 Compatible Maximum Distance 15 IGP RIP Example In the following example, assume that both the BSU and the SUs all are configured in Routing mode with RIP enabled to send and receive on both the Ethernet and Wireless interfaces. The network converges through updates until each unit has the following routing table:
RIP Notes Ensure that routers on the same physical network are configured to use the same version of RIP. Routing updates occur every 30 seconds. It may take up to 3 minutes for a route that has gone down to timeout in a routing table. RIP is limited to networks with 15 or fewer hops. 90 Configuration Management Parameters Management Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management Use the Management tab to configure passwords and other service parameters. Passwords The Password tab lets you configure the SNMP, Telnet, and HTTP (Web Interface) passwords. For all password fields, the passwords must be between 6 and 32 characters. Changes take effect immediately after you click OK. The following passwords are configurable:
SNMP Read Community Password: The password for read access using SNMP. Enter a password in both the Password field and the Confirm field. The default password is public. SNMP Read/Write Community Password: The password for read and write access using SNMP. Enter a password in both the Password field and the Confirm field. The default password is public. Telnet (CLI) Password: The password for the CLI interface. Enter a password in both the Password field and the Confirm field. The default password is public. HTTP (Web) Password: The password for the Web browser HTTP interface. Enter a password in both the Password field and the Confirm field. The default password is public. Services The Services tab lets you configure the SNMP, Telnet, HTTP (Web Interface), and serial connection parameters. Changes to these parameters require a reboot to take effect. 91 Configuration Management Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management SNMP Configuration Settings SNMP Interface Bitmask: Configure the interface or interfaces (Ethernet, Wireless, All Interfaces) from which you will manage the unit using SNMP. You also can select Disabled to prevent a user from accessing the unit through SNMP. HTTP Configuration Settings HTTP Interface Bitmask: Configure the interface or interfaces (Ethernet, Wireless, All Interfaces) from which you will manage the unit through the Web interface. For example, to allow Web configuration through the Ethernet network only, set HTTP Interface Bitmask to Ethernet. You can also select Disabled to prevent a user from accessing the unit from the Web interface. HTTP Port: Configure the HTTP port from which you will manage the unit through the Web interface. By default, the HTTP port is 80. HTTP Connections: The number of active HTTP connections. Telnet Configuration Settings NOTE: To use HyperTerminal for CLI access, make sure to check Send line ends with line feeds in the ASCII Setup window (in the HyperTerminal window, click Properties; then select Setup > ASCII Setup. See HyperTerminal Connection Properties in the Tsunami MP.11/QB.11 Reference Manual for more information). Telnet Interface Bitmask: Select the interface (Ethernet, Wireless, All Interfaces) from which you can manage the unit through telnet. This parameter can also be used to disable telnet management. Telnet Port Number: The default port number for Telnet applications is 23. However, you can use this field if you want to change the Telnet port for security reasons (but your Telnet application also must support the new port number you select). Telnet Login Timeout (seconds): Enter the number of seconds the system is to wait for a login attempt. The unit terminates the session when it times out. The range is 1 to 300 seconds; the default is 30 seconds. Telnet Session Timeout (seconds): Enter the number of seconds the system is to wait during a session while there is no activity. The unit ends the session upon timeout. The range is 1 to 36000 seconds; the default is 900 seconds. Telnet Connections: The number of active Telnet connections. 92 Configuration Management Parameters Serial Configuration Settings MP.11-R Installation and Management The serial port interface on the unit is enabled at all times. See Serial Port in the Tsunami MP.11/QB.11 Reference Manual for information about how to access the CLI interface through the serial port. You can configure and view following parameters:
Serial Baud Rate: Select the serial port speed (bits per second). Choose between 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600; the default Baud Rate is 9600. Serial Flow Control: Select either None (default) or Xon/Xoff (software controlled) data flow control. To avoid potential problems when communicating with the unit through the serial port, Proxim recommends that you leave the Flow Control setting at None (the default value). Serial Data Bits: This is a read-only field and displays the number of data bits used in serial communication (8 data bits by default). Serial Parity: This is a read-only field and displays the number of parity bits used in serial communication (no parity bits by default). Serial Stop Bits: This is a read-only field that displays the number of stop bits used in serial communication (1 stop bit by default). The serial port bit configuration is commonly referred to as 8N1. 93 Configuration Security Parameters Security Parameters MAC Authentication (BSU Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management Click Configure > Security > MAC Auth to build a list of authorized wireless stations that can register at the unit and access the network. MAC Authentication is supported on the wireless interface and only wireless MAC addresses should be entered in the list. For example, you might build a list of wireless MAC addresses of SUs authorized on the BSU NOTE: MAC authentication is available only for BSUs. Add Entries to MAC Access Control Table 1. To add table entries, click the Add Table Entries button; a window such as the following is displayed:
2. Enter the MAC address and any comment, then click Add. The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be entered is 250. Edit/Delete Entries in MAC Access Control Table 1. To edit or delete table entries, click the Edit/Delete Table Entries button 2. Make your corrections in the window displayed and click OK. 94 Configuration Security Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management Encryption NOTE: Be sure to set the encryption parameters and change the default passwords. You can protect the wireless data link by using encryption. In addition to Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) and Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), the unit supports Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) 128-bit encryption. To provide even stronger encryption, the AES CCM Protocol is also supported. Encryption keys can be 5 (64-bit), 13 (WEP 128-bit), or 16 (AES 128-bit) characters in length. Both ends of the wireless data link must use the same parameter values. Click Configure > Security > Encryption to set encryption keys for the data transmitted and received by the unit. Note that all devices in one network must use the same encryption parameters to communicate to each other. RADIUS Authentication (BSU Only) In large networks with multiple units, you can maintain a list of MAC addresses on a centralized location using a RADIUS authentication server that grants or denies access. If you use this kind of authentication, you must specify at least the primary RADIUS server. The backup RADIUS server is optional. Click Configure > Security > Radius Auth to set the IP address of the RADIUS server containing the central list of MAC addresses that are allowed to access the network. The RADIUS parameters let you enable HTTP or Telnet RADIUS management access to configure a RADIUS Profile for management access control, to enable or disable local user access, and to configure the local password. NOTE: RADIUS authentication is available only for BSUs. 95 Configuration Security Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management 96 Configuration Filtering Parameters Filtering Parameters Overview MP.11-R Installation and Management Click Configure > Filtering to configure packet filtering. Packet filtering can be used to control and optimize network performance. The Filtering feature can selectively filter specific packets based upon their Ethernet protocol type. Protocol filtering is done at the Bridge layer. Protocol filters are useful for preventing bridging of selected protocol traffic from one segment of a network to other segments (or subnets). You can use this feature both to increase the amount of bandwidth available on your network and to increase network security. Increasing Available Bandwidth It may be unnecessary to bridge traffic from a subnet using IPX/SPX or AppleTalk to a segment of the network with UNIX workstations. By denying the IPX/SPX AppleTalk traffic from being bridged to the UNIX subnet, the UNIX subnet is free of this unnecessary traffic. Increasing Network Security By bridging IP and IP/ARP traffic and blocking LAN protocols used by Windows, Novell, and Macintosh servers, you can protect servers and client systems on the private local LAN from outside attacks that use those LAN protocols. This type of filtering also prevents private LAN data from being bridged to an untrusted remote network or the Internet. To prevent blocking your own access (administrator) to the unit, Proxim recommends that IP (0x800) and ARP (0x806) protocols are always passed through. Sample Use and Validation Configure the protocol filter to let only IP and ARP traffic pass through the unit (bridge) from one network segment to another. Then, attempt to use Windows file sharing across the bridge. The file should not allow sharing; the packets are discarded by the bridge. Setting the ARP Filter There may be times when you need to set the ARP or Multicast. Usually, this is required when there are many nodes on the wired network that are sending ARP broadcast messages or multicast packets that unnecessarily consume the wireless bandwidth. The goal of these filters is to allow only necessary ARP and multicast traffic through the 1.6 Mbps wireless pipe. The TCP/IP Internet Protocol Suite uses a method known as ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) to match a device's MAC (Media Access Control) address with its assigned IP address. The MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier assigned to each hardware device at the factory by the manufacturer. The MAC address is commonly represented as 6 pairs of hexadecimal digits separated by colons. For example, a device may have the MAC address of 00:20:A6:33:ED:45. When devices send data over the network (Ethernet, Token Ring, or wireless), they use the MAC address to identify a packet's source and destination. Therefore, an IP address must be mapped to a MAC address in order for a device to send a packet to particular IP address. In order to resolve a remote node's IP address with its MAC address, a device sends out a broadcast packet to all nodes on the network. This packet is known as an ARP request or ARP broadcast and requests that the device assigned a particular IP address respond to the sender with its MAC address. Because ARP requests are broadcast packets, these packets are forwarded to wireless nodes by default, even if the packet is not meant for a wireless node. As the number of nodes on a network backbone increases, so does the number of ARP broadcasts that are forwarded to the wireless nodes. Many of these ARP broadcasts are unnecessary and can 97 Configuration Filtering Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management consume valuable wireless bandwidth. On some networks, there are so many ARP broadcasts that the performance of the wireless network will degrade due to the amount of bandwidth being consumed by these messages. To reduce the number of ARP broadcasts that are forwarded to the wireless nodes, you can enable ARP filtering. When enabled, the ARP Filter allows the unit to forward only those ARP broadcasts destined for an IP address that falls within the range specified by the ARP Filter Network Address and the ARP Filter Subnet Mask. The ARP Filter performs a logical AND function (essentially keeping what is the same and discarding what is different) on the IP address of the ARP request and the ARP Filter Subnet Mask. It then compares the result of the logical AND to the ARP Filter Network Address. If the two values match, the ARP broadcast is forwarded to the wireless network by the unit. Ethernet Protocol The Ethernet Protocol filter blocks or forwards packets based upon the Ethernet protocols they support. Click Configure
> Filtering > Ethernet Protocol to enable or disable certain protocols in the table. Entries can be selected from a drop-
down box. Follow these steps to configure the Ethernet Protocol Filter:
1. Select the interfaces that will implement the filter from the Ethernet Protocol Filtering drop-down menu. Ethernet: Packets are examined at the Ethernet interface Wireless-Slot A or Wireless-Slot B: Packets are examined at the Wireless A or B interfaces Disabled: The filter is not used 2. Select the Filter Operation Type. All Interfaces: Packets are examined at both interfaces If set to Block, the bridge blocks enabled Ethernet Protocols listed in the Filter Table. If set to Passthru, only the enabled Ethernet Protocols listed in the Filter Table pass through the bridge. 3. Configure the Filter Table. See below. NOTE: Entries must be enabled in order to be subject to the filter. Add Entries to the Filter Table 1. Click Add Table Entries. You may add one of the supplied Ethernet Protocol Filters, or you may enter additional filters by specifying the appropriate parameters:
To add one of the supplied Ethernet Protocol Filters to the filter table:
Select the appropriate filter from the Specify Common Protocol drop-down menu. Protocol Name and Protocol Number fields will be filled in automatically. Click Add To add a new filter to the filter table:
98 Configuration Filtering Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management Enter the Protocol Number. See http://www.iana.org/assignments/ethernet-numbers for a list of protocol numbers. Enter the Protocol Name. Click Add. Edit/Delete Entries in the Filter Table 1. Click Edit and change the information, or select Enable, Disable, or Delete from the Status drop-down menu. Static MAC Address Filtering Overview The Static MAC Address filter optimizes the performance of a wireless (and wired) network. When this feature is configured properly, the unit can block traffic between wired devices on the wired (Ethernet) interface and devices on the wireless interface based upon MAC address. NOTE: The device on the wireless interface can be any device connected through the link, it can be directly connected to the Ethernet interface of the peer unit, or it can be attached through multiple hops. The MAC address in the packets arriving at the wireless interface is the important element. The filter is an advanced feature that lets you limit the data traffic between two specific devices (or between groups of devices based upon MAC addresses and masks) through the units wireless interface. For example, if you have a server on your network with which you do not want wireless clients to communicate, you can set up a static MAC filter to block traffic between these devices. The Static MAC Filter Table performs bi-directional filtering. However, note that this is an advanced filter and it may be easier to control wireless traffic through other filter options, such as Protocol Filtering. Each MAC address or mask is comprised of 12 hexadecimal digits (0-9 and A-F) that correspond to a 48-bit identifier. Each hexadecimal digit represents 4 bits (0 or 1). Taken together, a MAC address/mask pair specifies an address or a range of MAC addresses that the unit looks for when examining packets. The unit uses Boolean logic to perform an and operation between the MAC address and the mask at the bit level. However, for most users, you do not need to think in terms of bits. It should be sufficient to create a filter using only the hexadecimal digits 0 and F in the mask (where 0 is any value and F is the value specified in the MAC address). A mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 corresponds to all MAC addresses, and a mask of FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF applies only to the specified MAC address. For example, if the MAC address is 00:20:A6:12:54:C3 and the mask is FF;FF;FF;00:00:00, the unit examines the source and destination addresses of each packet looking for any MAC address starting with 00:20:A6. If the mask is FF;FF;FF;FF;FF;FF, the unit looks only for the specific MAC address (in this case, 00:20:A6:12:54:C3). When creating a filter, you can configure the Wired parameters only, the Wireless parameters only, or both sets of parameters. Which parameters to configure depends upon the traffic that you want to block:
To prevent all traffic from a specific wired MAC address from being forwarded to the wireless network, configure only the Wired MAC address and Wired mask (leave the Wireless MAC and Wireless mask set to all zeros). To prevent all traffic from a specific wireless MAC address from being forwarded to the wired network, configure only the Wireless MAC and Wireless mask (leave the Wired MAC address and Wired mask set to all zeros). To block traffic between a specific wired MAC address and a specific wireless MAC address, configure all four parameters. See Static MAC Filter Examples for more detailed examples. Static MAC Filter Examples Consider a network that contains a wired server and three wireless clients. The MAC address for each unit is as follows:
99 Configuration Filtering Parameters Wired Server: 00:40:F4:1C:DB:6A Wireless Client 1: 00:02:2D:51:94:E4 Wireless Client 2: 00:02:2D:51:32:12 Wireless Client 3: 00:20:A6:12:4E:38 MP.11-R Installation and Management Prevent two specific devices from communicating:
Configure the following settings to prevent the Wired Server and Wireless Client 1 from communicating:
Wired MAC Address: 00:40:F4:1C:DB:6A Wired Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Wireless MAC Address: 00:02:2D:51:94:E4 Wireless Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Result: Traffic between the Wired Server and Wireless Client 1 is blocked. Wireless Clients 2 and 3 still can communicate with the Wired Server. Prevent Multiple Wireless Devices From Communicating With a Single Wired Device Configure the following settings to prevent Wireless Clients 1 and 2 from communicating with the Wired Server:
Wired MAC Address: 00:40:F4:1C:DB:6A Wired Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Wireless MAC Address: 00:02:2D:51:94:E4 Wireless Mask: FF:FF:FF:00:00:00 Result: When a logical AND is performed on the Wireless MAC Address and Wireless Mask, the result corresponds to any MAC address beginning with the 00:20:2D prefix. Since Wireless Client 1 and Wireless Client 2 share the same prefix (00:02:2D), traffic between the Wired Server and Wireless Clients 1 and 2 is blocked. Wireless Client 3 can still communicate with the Wired Server since it has a different prefix (00:20:A6). Prevent All Wireless Devices From Communicating With a Single Wired Device Configure the following settings to prevent all three Wireless Clients from communicating with Wired Server:
Wired MAC Address: 00:40:F4:1C:DB:6A Wired Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Wireless MAC Address: 00:00:00:00:00:00 Wireless Mask: 00:00:00:00:00:00 Result: The unit blocks all traffic between the Wired Server and all wireless clients. Prevent A Wireless Device From Communicating With the Wired Network Configure the following settings to prevent Wireless Client 3 from communicating with any device on the Ethernet:
Wired MAC Address: 00:00:00:00:00:00 Wired Mask: 00:00:00:00:00:00 Wireless MAC Address: 00:20:A6:12:4E:38 Wireless Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Result: The unit blocks all traffic between Wireless Client 3 and the Ethernet network. Prevent Messages Destined for a Specific Multicast Group from Being Forwarded to the Wireless LAN If devices on your Ethernet network use multicast packets to communicate and these packets are not required by your wireless clients, you can set up a Static MAC filter to preserve wireless bandwidth. For example, if routers on your 100 Configuration Filtering Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management network use a specific multicast address (such as 01:00:5E:00:32:4B) to exchange information, you can set up a filter to prevent these multicast packets from being forwarded to the wireless network:
Wired MAC Address: 01:00:5E:00:32:4B Wired Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Wireless MAC Address: 00:00:00:00:00:00 Wireless Mask: 00:00:00:00:00:00 Result: The unit does not forward any packets that have a destination address of 01:00:5E:00:32:4B to the wireless network. Static MAC Filter Configuration Click Configure > Filtering > Static MAC to access the Static MAC Address filter. Add Entries to the Static MAC Filter Table To add the entries to Filter table, click the Add Table Entries button. The following fields are may be configured or viewed:
Wired MAC Address: Enter the MAC address of the device on the Ethernet network that you want to prevent from communicating with a device on the wireless network. Wired Mask: Enter the appropriate bit mask to specify the range of MAC addresses to which this filter is to apply. To specify only the single MAC address you entered in the Wired MAC Address field, enter 00:00:00:00:00:00 (all zeroes). Wireless MAC Address: Enter the MAC address of the wireless device on the wireless interface that you want to prevent from communicating with a device on the wired network. 101 Configuration Filtering Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management Wireless Mask: Enter the appropriate bit mask to specify the range of MAC addresses to which this filter is to apply. To specify only the single MAC address you entered in the Wireless MAC Address field, enter 00:00:00:00:00:00 (all zeroes). Comment: Enter related information. After entering the data, click the Add button. The entry is enabled automatically when saved. Edit/Delete Entries in the Static MAC Filter Table To edit an entry, click Edit. To disable or remove an entry, click Edit and change the Status field from Enable to Disable or Delete. Storm Threshold Click Configure > Filtering > Storm Threshold to use threshold limits to prevent broadcast/multicast overload. Storm Threshold is an advanced Bridge setup option that you can use to protect the network against data overload by specifying:
A maximum number of frames per second as received from a single network device (identified by its MAC address). An absolute maximum number of messages per port. The Storm Threshold parameters let you specify a set of thresholds for each port of the unit, identifying separate values for the number of broadcast messages per second and multicast messages per second. When the number of frames for a port or identified station exceeds the maximum value per second, the unit ignores all subsequent messages issued by the particular network device, or ignores all messages of that type. The following parameters are configurable:
Per Address Threshold: Enter the maximum allowed number of packets per second. Ethernet Threshold: Enter the maximum allowed number of packets per second. Wireless Threshold: Enter the maximum allowed number of packets per second. Broadcast Protocol Filtering Click Configure > Filtering > Broadcast Protocol to deny specific IP broadcast, IPX broadcast, and multicast traffic. 102 Configuration Filtering Parameters MP.11-R Installation and Management Click the Edit Table Entries button to display an editable window such as the following. You can configure whether this traffic must be blocked for Ethernet to wireless, wireless to Ethernet, or both. IP Access Table Filtering Click Configure > Filtering > IP Access Table to limit in-band management access to the IP addresses or range of IP addresses specified in the table. For example, 172.17.23.0/255.255.255.0 allows access from all wireless stations with an IP address in the 172.17.23.xxx range. This feature applies to all management services (SNMP, HTTP, and CLI), except for CLI management over the serial port. 103 Configuration Filtering Parameters Add Entries to the IP Access Table MP.11-R Installation and Management To add an entry, click the Add Table Entries button, specify the IP address and mask of the wireless stations to which you want to grant access, and click Add. CAUTION: Ensure that the IP address of the management PC you use to manage the unit is within the first entry in the table, as this filter takes effect immediately. Otherwise, you will have locked yourself out. If you do lock yourself out, you may try to give the PC the correct IP address for management; otherwise you must reset the unit via the CLI over the serial port. Edit/Delete Entries in the IP Access Table To edit or delete table entries, click the Edit/Delete Table Entries button, make your changes, and click OK. 104 Configuration Intra-Cell Blocking (BSU Only; Bridge Mode Only) Intra-Cell Blocking (BSU Only; Bridge Mode Only) Overview MP.11-R Installation and Management The Intra-Cell Blocking feature lets traffic be blocked between two SUs registered to the same Base Station. There are two potential reasons to isolate traffic among wireless subscribers:
To provide better security to the subscribers by isolating the traffic from one subscriber to another in a public space. To block unwanted traffic between subscribers to prevent this traffic from using bandwidth. You can form groups of SUs at the Base Station, which define the filtering criteria. All data to or from SUs belonging to the same group are bridged. All other data from SUs that do not belong to a particular group are automatically forwarded through the Ethernet interface of the Base Station. If an SU does not belong to any group, the Base Station discards the data. You can also configure a Security Gateway to block traffic between SUs connected to different BSUs. All packets destined for SUs not connected to the same Base Station are forwarded to the Security Gateway MAC address
(configured in the Security Gateway tab). NOTE: Intra-Cell Blocking is configurable only in Bridge mode. When you change the device from Bridge to Routing mode, Intra-Cell Blocking stops working with or without a reboot. When you change the device from Routing to Bridge mode, Intra-Cell Blocking starts working with or without a reboot. The following rules apply to Intra-Cell Blocking Groups:
One SU can be assigned to more than one group. An SU that has not been assigned to any group cannot communicate to any other SU connected to the same or different BSU. Example of Intra-Cell Blocking Groups Assume that four Intra-Cell Blocking Groups have been configured on one BSU. SUs 1 through 6 are registered to BSU 1. SUs 7 through 9 are registered to BSU 2. Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Intra-Cell Blocking Group Example SU 1 SU 4 SU 5 SU 2 SU 3 SU 8 SU 6 SU 1 SU 3 SU 8 SU 9 SU 2 In this example, SU 1 belongs to two groups, Group 1 and Group 3. Therefore, packets from SU 1 destined to SU 4, SU 5, SU 6, and SU 3 are not blocked. However, SU 9 belongs to group 4 only and packets from SU 9 are blocked unless sent to SU 8 or SU 2. Achieving Communication Between Two SUs In a multipoint configuration, an SU can communicate with another SU through the BSU when in Bridge mode by default. Use the intra-cell blocking feature if this is not desired. In a routing configuration, each of the SUs must have a different subnet on their Ethernet port to distinguish traffic for each SU, and each subnet must be entered into a routing rule in the BSU as well as into an upstream router. The wireless side of all SUs must share the same subnet with the BSU wireless interface. These IP addresses must be used as next hop when creating the routes for the SU subnets. Intra-Cell Blocking Group Table Click Configure > Intra-Cell Blocking > Group Table to enable the Intra-Cell Blocking feature and to configure Intra-
Cell Blocking Groups. 105 Configuration Intra-Cell Blocking (BSU Only; Bridge Mode Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management The following items are configurable:
Group Table: Entries in this table show the Intra-Cell Blocking filter groups that have been configured. When Intra-
Intra-Cell Blocking Status: Enables or disables the Intra-Cell Blocking feature. Cell Blocking is enabled, the Base Station Unit discards all packets coming from one SU to another SU, if both SUs do not belong to the same filter group. Configure Intra-Cell Blocking Groups Click the Add Table Entries button to add groups to the Group Table. Enter the group name, and click Add. The group is assigned an Index and appears in the Group Table. Up to 16 groups can be configured per Base Station. You can enable, disable or delete an existing filter group by using the Edit/Delete Table Entries button. 106 Configuration Intra-Cell Blocking (BSU Only; Bridge Mode Only) MAC Table MP.11-R Installation and Management After configuring the Intra-Cell Blocking Groups on the Group Table tab, use the MAC Table tab to assign specific MAC addresses to an Intra-Cell Blocking Group. Adding Entries Click the Add Table Entries button. Enter the MAC address of the SU. Select Enable from the drop-down menu for the Group Index Click Add. The MAC address is assigned to the groups. Additions to the MAC Table take effect immediately after clicking the Add button. You can Enable, Disable, Delete, or Reassign the groups for a MAC address by using the Edit/Delete Table Entries button. A maximum of 250 MAC addresses can be added among all filter groups. 107 Configuration Intra-Cell Blocking (BSU Only; Bridge Mode Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management Security Gateway You can configure a Security Gateway to block traffic between SUs connected to different BSUs. Verify that Intra-Cell Blocking has been enabled on the Group Table tab before configuring the Security Gateway. Security Gateway Status: Enables or disables packet forwarding to the external Security Gateway. Security Gateway MAC Address: Lets you configure the MAC address of the external Security Gateway. 108 Configuration VLAN Parameters (BSU Only; Bridge Mode Only) VLAN Parameters (BSU Only; Bridge Mode Only) Overview MP.11-R Installation and Management For an introduction to VLAN principles, seeVirtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) in the System Overview chapter. NOTE: VLANs are configurable only in Bridge mode. VLAN Modes Transparent Mode Transparent mode is available on both the SU and the BSU. This mode is equivalent to NO VLAN support and is the default mode. It is used when the devices behind the SU and BSU are both VLAN aware and unaware. The SU/BSU transfers both tagged and untagged frames received on the Ethernet or WORP interface. Both tagged and untagged management frames can access the device. Trunk Mode Trunk mode VLAN is available on both the SU and the BSU. It is used when all devices behind the SU and BSU are VLAN aware. The SU and BSU transfer only tagged frames received on the Ethernet or WORP interface. Both tagged and untagged management frames can access the device. Access Mode Access mode is available only on the SU. It is used when the devices behind the SU are VLAN unaware. Frames to and from the Ethernet interface behind the SU map into only one VLAN segment. Frames received on the Ethernet interface are tagged with the configured Access VLAN ID before forwarding them to the WORP interface. Both tagged and untagged management frames can access the device from the WORP interface. However, only untagged management frames can access the device from the Ethernet Interface. VLAN Forwarding The VLAN Trunk mode provides a means to configure a list of VLAN IDs in a Trunk VLAN Table. The SU and BSU only forward frames (between Ethernet and WORP interface) tagged with the VLAN IDs configured in the Trunk VLAN Table. Up to 256 VLAN IDs can be configured for the BSU and up to 16 VLAN IDs can be configured for the SU (depending upon the capabilities of your switching equipment). VLAN Relaying The VLAN Trunk mode for BSU operation provides an option to enable and disable a VLAN relaying flag; when enabled, the BSU shall relay frames between SUs on the same BSU having the same VLAN ID. Management VLAN The BSU and SU allow the configuration of a separate VLAN ID and priority for SNMP, ICMP, Telnet, and TFTP management frames for device access. The management VLAN ID and management VLAN priority may be applied in any mode. The management stations tag the management frames they send to the BSU or SU with the management VLAN ID configured in the device. The BSU and SU tag all the management frames from the device with the configured management VLAN and priority. BSU and SU in Transparent Mode When the BSU is in Transparent mode, all associated SUs must be in Transparent mode. 109 Configuration VLAN Parameters (BSU Only; Bridge Mode Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management How the BSU and SUs function in Transparent mode is described in the following table. BSU Function Transparent Mode BSU forwards both tagged and untagged SU Function Transparent Mode SU forwards both tagged and untagged frames frames received from the Ethernet interface or from any of the associated SUs. If a valid management VLAN ID is configured, BSU allows only management frames tagged with the configured management VLAN ID to access it. If a valid management VLAN ID is configured, BSU tags all management frames generated by the BSU with the configured management VLAN ID and priority. If the management VLAN ID is configured as -
1 (untagged), BSU allows only untagged management frames to access it. received from the Ethernet interface or from the BSU. If a valid management VLAN ID is configured, SU allows only management frames tagged with the configured management VLAN ID to access it. If a valid management VLAN ID is configured, SU tags all management frames generated by the SU with the configured management VLAN ID and priority. If the management VLAN ID is configured as -
1 (untagged), SU allows only untagged management frames to access them. BSU in Trunk Mode and SU in Trunk/Access Mode When the BSU is in Trunk mode, the associated SUs must be in either Trunk mode or Access mode. When an SU associates to a BSU that is in Trunk mode, it gets the VLAN mode from the BSU. How the BSU and SU function in Trunk mode, and the SU in Access mode, is described in the following table. 110 Configuration VLAN Parameters (BSU Only; Bridge Mode Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management BSU Function Trunk Mode SU Function Trunk Mode SU Function Access Mode Up to 256 VLAN IDs can be configured on a BSU. Up to 16 VLAN IDs can be configured on an SU. BSU discards all untagged SU discards all untagged frames frames received from the Ethernet interface or from any of the associated SUs
(unexpected). If a valid VLAN ID is configured, BSU forwards only VLAN-tagged frames received from the Ethernet interface or from any of the associated SUs that are tagged with the configured VLAN IDs; it discards all other tagged frames. If a valid management VLAN ID is configured, BSU allows only management frames tagged with the configured management VLAN ID to access it. If a valid management VLAN ID is configured, BSU tags all management frames generated by the BSU with the configured management VLAN ID and priority. If the management VLAN ID is configured as -1 (untagged), BSU allows only untagged management frames to access it. received from the Ethernet interface or from the BSU
(unexpected). If a valid VLAN ID is configured, SU forwards only VLAN-tagged frames received from the Ethernet interface or from the BSU that are tagged with the configured VLAN IDs; it discards all other tagged frames. If a valid management VLAN ID is configured, SU allows only management frames tagged with the configured management VLAN ID to access it. If a valid management VLAN ID is configured, SU tags all management frames generated by the SU with the configured management VLAN ID and priority. If the management VLAN ID is configured as -1 (untagged), SU allows only untagged management frames to access it. SU discards all tagged frames received from the Ethernet interface and all untagged frames received from the BSU (unexpected). SU tags all untagged frames received from the Ethernet interface with the configured Access VLAN ID and forwards them to the BSU. SU untags all tagged frames received from the BSU that are tagged with the configured Access VLAN ID and forwards them to the Ethernet interface; it discards all other tagged frames from the BSU. If a valid management VLAN ID is configured, SU allows only management frames tagged with the configured management VLAN ID to access it from the BSU. If a valid management VLAN ID is configured, SU tags all management frames generated by the SU with the configured management VLAN ID and priority and forwards them to the BSU. If the management VLAN ID is configured as -1 (untagged), SU allows only untagged management frames to access it from the BSU. SU allows only untagged management frames to access it from the Ethernet interface, regardless of the value of the management VLAN ID. BSU VLAN Configuration The HTTP Interface to configure BSU VLAN parameters is shown in the following figure. 111 Configuration VLAN Parameters (BSU Only; Bridge Mode Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management Configure the following parameters:
BSU VLAN Mode: The BSU VLAN mode can be either Transparent or Trunk. By default, the BSU is in Transparent mode. Management VLAN ID: The Management VLAN ID is configurable in any mode. The management VLAN ID has a default value of untagged and may be configured with a value in the range of 1 to 4095. Management VLAN Priority: The Management VLAN priority values range from 0 to 7 and the default priority is 0
(zero). Relaying Flag: When this flag is enabled, the BSU relays frames between SUs on the same BSU. BSU VLAN Table: The BSU VLAN Table is configurable in both Transparent and Trunk mode, but applies only when the BSU is in Trunk mode. The VLAN ID values for the BSU VLAN Table range from 1 to 4095. The maximum number of VLAN IDs that can be configured in the BSU VLAN Table is 256. An SU in Trunk mode is assigned VLAN IDs from this table. Add BSU VLAN Table Entries To add entries to the BSU VLAN table, click the Add Table Entries button. Enter a VLAN ID and select a Status, then click Add to add your entry to the table. Edit or Delete BSU VLAN Table Entries To edit or delete entries in the BSU VLAN Table, click the Edit/Delete Table Entries button, make your changes, then click OK for your changes to take effect. 112 Configuration VLAN Parameters (BSU Only; Bridge Mode Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management Restricting Unit Management Management access to the unit can be easily secured by making management stations or hosts and the unit itself members of a common VLAN. Simply configure a non-zero management VLAN ID: management of the unit will be restricted to members of the same VLAN. CAUTION: If a non-zero management VLAN ID is configured, management access to the unit is restricted to hosts that are members of the same VLAN. Ensure your management platform or host is a member of the same VLAN before attempting to manage the unit or you will lose access to the unit. Providing Access to Hosts in the Same VLAN The VLAN feature lets hosts manage the unit. If the Management VLAN ID matches a VLAN User ID, those hosts who are members of that VLAN will have management access to the unit. CAUTION: Once a VLAN Management ID is configured and is equivalent to one of the VLAN User IDs, all members of that VLAN will have management access to the unit. Be careful to restrict VLAN membership to those with legitimate access to the unit. SU VLAN Configuration The HTTP Interface to configure SU VLAN parameters is shown in the following figure. Add SU Table Entries To add entries to the SU VLAN Table, click the Add Table Entries button. Enter the desired parameters in the corresponding fields, then click Add to add and save the entry. 113 Configuration VLAN Parameters (BSU Only; Bridge Mode Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management The following parameters are configurable:
MAC: Enter the MAC address of the SU to be configured. SU VLAN Mode: The SU VLAN mode can be either Transparent, Trunk, or Access (by default, the BSU is in Transparent mode). When the BSU is in Transparent mode, the SU must be in Transparent mode. When the BSU is in Trunk mode, the SU must be in either Access mode or Trunk mode. When the BSU is changed from Transparent mode to Trunk mode, all the configured SUs are changed to Trunk mode by default. Access VLAN ID: The Access VLAN ID is configurable in any mode, but applies only when the SU is in Access mode. The Access VLAN ID values range from 1 to 4095; the default value is 1. Access VLAN Priority: The Access VLAN Priority is configurable in any mode, but applies only when the SU is in Access mode. The Access VLAN priority values range from 0 to 7; the default priority is 0. For voice frames, the priority field is set to the VoIP configured value (5 according to latest IETF draft, or 6 according to IEEE 802.1D) regardless of the priority value configured. Management VLAN ID: The management VLAN ID is configurable in any mode. The management VLAN ID has a default value of untagged (-1) and may be configured with a value in the range of 1 to 4095. Management Priority: The Management VLAN priority values range from 0 to 7 and the default priority is 0 (zero). VLAN 1-16: The VLAN IDs are configurable in any mode, but apply only when the SU is in Trunk mode. The VLAN ID values range from 1 to 4095; the default value is untagged (-1). The maximum number of VLAN IDs that can be configured in the SU VLAN Table is 16 for each SU. The SU VLAN IDs must be in the BSU VLAN Table that corresponds to the BSU. Edit SU Table Entries To edit SU table entries, click the Edit/Delete Table Entries button; make your changes on the window displayed, then click OK to save your changes. NOTE: If an SU is associated to a BSU, it cannot be deleted from the VLAN table. Typical User VLAN Configurations VLANs segment network traffic into groups, which lets you limit broadcast and multicast traffic. These groups enable hosts from different VLANs to access different resources using the same network infrastructure. Hosts using the same physical network are limited to those resources available to their workgroup. The unit can segment users into a maximum of 16 different VLANs per unit, based upon a VLAN ID. The primary scenarios for using VLAN workgroups are as follows:
VLAN disabled: Your network does not use VLANs. VLAN enabled: Each VLAN workgroup uses a different VLAN ID Tag. A mixture of Tagged and Untagged workgroups may be supported. 114 Configuration QoS (Quality of Service) Parameters (BSU Only) QoS (Quality of Service) Parameters (BSU Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management The Quality of Service (QoS) feature is based on 802.16 standard and defines the classes, service flows (SFCs), and packet identification rules (PIRs) for specific types of traffic. The main priority of QoS is to guarantee a reliable and adequate transmission quality for all traffic types under conditions of high congestion and bandwidth over-subscription
(for a complete discussion on QoS see Quality of Service (QoS) in the System Overview chapter. There are several pre-defined QoS classes, SFCs, and PIRs available that you may choose from which cover the most common types of traffic. If you want to configure something else, build the hierarchy of a QoS class as follows:
1. Define PIRs. 2. Associate some of those PIRs to specific Service Flow classes (SFCs). 3. Assign priorities to each PIR within each SFC. 4. Define the QoS class by associating relevant SFCs to each QoS class. QoS PIR Configuration Click Configure > QoS > QoS PIR Table. The 17 predefined PIRs are shown. To view/edit the parameters of each PIR click on its Details button. You may enable, disable or delete any PIR entry by clicking on the Status drop-down box and then clicking OK. 115 Configuration QoS (Quality of Service) Parameters (BSU Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management To add entries to the PIR Table, click the Add Table Entries button. Enter the Rule Name and select Enable or Disable from the Entry Status drop-down box, then click Add to add the entry. Once the new entry appears in the QoS PIR Table on this page, click its Details button to view/edit its parameters. QoS SFC Configuration Click Configure > QoS > QoS SF Class. The 7 predefined SFCs are shown. 116 Configuration QoS (Quality of Service) Parameters (BSU Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management To add entries to the SFC Table, click the Add Table Entries button. The following parameters are configurable:
SF Name: Enter the name of the SF class you want to add. SF Schd Type: This field can be set to BE (Best Effort) or RtPS (Real-Time Polling Service). SF Direction: This field can be set to Downlink (traffic from BSU to SU) or Uplink (traffic from SU to BSU). MIR (Maximum Information Rate): The maximum sustained data rate specified in units of 1 Kbps from 8 Kbps up to the maximum rate of 108000 Kbps per SU. CIR (Committed Information Rate): The minimum reserved traffic rate specified in units of 1 Kbps from 0 Kbps up to the maximum rate of 10000 Kbps per SU. Latency: The maximum allowed latency specified in increments of 5 ms steps from a minimum of 5 ms up to a maximum of 100 ms. Jitter: The maximum tolerable jitter specified in increments of 5 ms steps from a minimum of 0 ms up to the Maximum Latency (in ms). Priority: The priority of this SFC from zero (0) to seven (7), 0 being the lowest, 7 being the highest. Number of Frames per Burst: The maximum number of data messages in a Multi-Frame burst from one (1) to four
(4), which affects the percentage of the maximum throughput of the system according to following table. 117 Configuration QoS (Quality of Service) Parameters (BSU Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management No. of messages in a burst: % of the maximum throughput:
4 3 2 1 100%
97.6%
92.9%
76.2%
SF Entry State: This field can be set to Enable, Disable, or Delete. Click Add to add the entry. The new entry will appear on the screen, taking up the next sequential index entry. To make changes to the entries of the SFC Table, click the Edit/Delete Table Entries button. Enter your changes and click OK. To delete an entry, click the Status drop-down box and select Delete, then click OK. QoS Class Configuration Click Configure > QoS > QoS Class. The 4 predefined QoS classes are shown. From this screen, you may either:
Create a New QoS Class View/Edit an Existing QoS Class Create a New QoS Class On the QoS Class screen, click the Add Table Entries button. 118 Configuration QoS (Quality of Service) Parameters (BSU Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management The following parameters are configurable:
Class Name: Enter the name of the QoS class you want to add. SF Table Reference Index: Select one of the possible SFCs that have been previously configured from the drop-
down box to associate to this QoS Class. PIR Table Reference Index: Select one of the possible PIRs that have been previously configured from the drop-
down box to associate to this SFC. PIR Priority: This priority per rule defines the order of execution of PIRs during packet identification process. The PIR priority is a number in the range 0-63, with priority 63 being executed first, and priority 0 being executed last. The PIR priority is defined within a QoS class, and can be different for the same PIR in some other QoS class. If all PIRs within one QoS class have the same priority, the order of execution of PIR rules will be defined by the order of definition of SFCs, and by the order of definition of PIRs in each SFC, within that QoS class. Entry Status: This field is always set to Enable. Click Add to add the entry. The new entry will be listed as the next sequential index entry in the QoS Class Table. From this screen you may also edit an existing QoS Class by clicking on its Details button. See View/Edit an Existing QoS Class. View/Edit an Existing QoS Class To view/edit a QoS Class click on the class Details button. 119 Configuration QoS (Quality of Service) Parameters (BSU Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management You may enable, disable or delete this QoS Class entry by clicking on the Status drop-down box and then clicking OK. You may also edit an existing SFC associated to this QoS class, or associate a new SFC to this QoS class. See the following sections. Edit an Existing SFC Associated with the QoS Class To edit an existing SFC associated to this QoS Class, click its Details button. You may enable, disable or delete this SFC entry by clicking on the Status drop-down box and then clicking OK. To add more PIRs to this SFC click the Add Table Entries button. 120 Configuration QoS (Quality of Service) Parameters (BSU Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management Configure the following parameters:
PIR Table Reference Index: Select one of the possible PIRs that have been previously configured from the drop-
down box. PIR Priority: This priority per rule defines the order of execution of PIRs during packet identification process. The PIR priority is a number in the range 0-63, with priority 63 being executed first, and priority 0 being executed last. The PIR priority is defined within a QoS class, and can be different for the same PIR in some other QoS class. If all PIRs within one QoS class have the same priority, the order of execution of PIR rules will be defined by the order of definition of SFCs, and by the order of definition of PIRs in each SFC, within that QoS class. Entry Status: This field is always set to Enable. Click Add to add the entry. The new entry will be added to the PIR list, taking up the next sequential index entry. You may delete any PIR entry by clicking on the Status drop-down box and selecting Delete. Associate a New SFC with a QoS Class On the QoS Class screen, click the Details button next to Class with which you want to associate a new SFC. Then click the Add Table Entries button under the SF Details heading to add a new SFC and associate it to this QoS Class. 121 Configuration QoS (Quality of Service) Parameters (BSU Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management The following parameters are configurable:
SF Table Reference Index: Select one of the possible SFCs that have been previously configured from the drop-
down box to associate to this QoS Class. PIR Table Reference Index: Select one of the possible PIRs that have been previously configured from the drop-
down box to associate to this SFC. PIR Priority: This priority per rule defines the order of execution of PIRs during packet identification process. The PIR priority is a number in the range 0-63, with priority 63 being executed first, and priority 0 being executed last. The PIR priority is defined within a QoS class, and can be different for the same PIR in some other QoS class. If all PIRs within one QoS class have the same priority, the order of execution of PIR rules will be defined by the order of definition of SFCs, and by the order of definition of PIRs in each SFC, within that QoS class. Entry Status: This field is always set to Enable. Click Add to add the entry. The new entry will be listed as the next sequential index entry in the SF Details table. From this screen you may also edit an existing SFC by clicking on its Details button. See Edit an Existing SFC Associated with the QoS Class for more information. QoS SU Configuration Click Configure > QoS > QoS SU. This screen defines which QoS Classes will be associated to which SUs, using the SUs MAC addresses. 122 Configuration QoS (Quality of Service) Parameters (BSU Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management To add entries to the QoS SU Table, click the Add Table Entries button. Enter the following information:
SU MAC Address: The MAC Address of the SU you want to associate to a specific QoS Class. SU QOSC Index: Select one of the possible QoS Classes that have been previously configured from the drop-down box to associate to this SU. SU QOSC State: This field can be set to Enable, Disable, or Delete. Click Add to add the entry. The new entry will be listed as the next sequential index entry in the QoS SU Table. To make changes to the QoS SU Table, return to the QoS SU page, and click the Edit/Delete Table Entries button. Enter your changes, and click OK. To delete an entry, click the Status drop-down box and select Delete, then click OK. 123 Configuration NAT (SU Only; Routing Mode Only) NAT (SU Only; Routing Mode Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management The NAT (Network Address Translation) feature lets hosts on the Ethernet side of the SU transparently access the public network through the BSU. All hosts in the private network can have simultaneous access to the public network. NOTE: The NAT tab is available for SUs in Routing mode only. The SU supports NAPT (Network Address Port Translation) where all private IP addresses are mapped to a single public IP address, and does not support Basic NAT (where private IP addresses are mapped to a pool of public IP addresses). Both dynamic mapping (allowing private hosts to access hosts in the public network) and static mapping (allowing public hosts to access hosts in the private network) are supported:
In dynamic mapping, the SU maps the private IP addresses and its transport identifiers to transport identifiers of a single Public IP address as they originate sessions to the public network. This is used only for outbound access. Static mapping is used to provide inbound access. The SU maps a private IP address and its local port to a fixed public port of the global IP address. This is used to provide inbound access to a local server for hosts in the public network. Static port mapping allows only one server of a particular type. Up to 1000 ports (500 UDP and 500 TCP) are supported. The following parameters are configurable:
NOTE: Changes to NAT parameters, including the NAT Static Port Mapping Table, require a reboot to take effect. NOTE: When NAT is enabled, the DHCP Relay Agent feature is not supported (DHCP Relay Agent must be disabled before NAT is enabled) and RIP updates are not sent or received. You can configure a DHCP server to allocate IP addresses to hosts on the Ethernet side of the SU/ BSU (see DHCP Server). NAT Status: Enables or disables the NAT feature. NAT can be enabled only for SUs in Routing mode. The default is disabled. NAT Static Bind Status: Enables or disables the NAT Static Bind status (static mapping) allowing public hosts to access hosts in a private network. The default is disabled. Public IP Address: The NAT Public IP address is the wireless interface IP address. NAT Static Port Mapping Table Adding entries to the NAT Static Mapping Table lets configured hosts in a private address realm on the Ethernet side of the SU access hosts in the public network using Network Address Port Translation (NAPT). Up to 1000 entries can be configured (500 UDP ports and 500 TCP ports). Add Entries to the NAT Static Port Mapping Table 1. Click the Add Table Entries button. 124 Configuration NAT (SU Only; Routing Mode Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management 2. Enter the following information, and click Add:
Enter the Local IP Address of the host on the Ethernet side of the SU. Select the Port Type: TCP, UDP, or Both. Enter the Start Port and End Port. Edit/Delete Entries in the NAT Static Port Mapping Table 1. Click the Edit/Delete Table Entries button. 2. Enter your changes. To delete an entry, click the Status drop-down box and select Delete. Then Click OK. Supported Session Protocols The NAT feature supports the following session protocols for both inbound and outbound access with the required support, applications, and limitations given in the following table. Certain Internet applications require an Application Level Gateway (ALG) to provide the required transparency for an application running on a host in a private network to connect to its counterpart running on a host in the public network. An ALG may interact with NAT to set up state information, use NAT state information, modify application specific payload and perform the tasks necessary to get the application running across address realms. No more than one server of a particular type is supported within the private network behind the SU. These VPN protocols are supported with their corresponding ALGs: IPsec, PPTP, L2TP. The following session protocols are supported:
Protocol Support ICMP FTP H.323 ICMP ALG FTP ALG H.323 ALG Applications Ping File transfer Multimedia conferencing Limitations 125 Configuration NAT (SU Only; Routing Mode Only) MP.11-R Installation and Management Protocol Support Applications Limitations HTTP TFTP Telnet CUSeeMe IMAP PNM POP3 SMTP RTSP ICQ IRC MSN Messenger Net2Phone Port mapping for inbound connection. Port mapping for inbound connection. Port mapping for inbound connection. Port mapping for inbound and outbound connection. Port mapping for inbound connection. Port mapping for inbound connection. Port mapping for inbound connection. Port mapping for inbound connection. Port mapping for inbound connection. Port mapping for inbound connection. Port mapping for inbound connection. Port mapping for inbound and outbound connection. Port mapping for inbound and outbound connection. Pass Through IP Multicast Stream works Port mapping for inbound Quake connection. Port mapping for inbound connection. Web browser File transfer Remote login Video conferencing One user is allowed for video conferencing Mail Streaming media with Real Player E-mail E-mail Streaming audio/video with Quick Time and Real Player Chat and file transfer Chat and file transfer Conference and Share files with Net meeting Voice communication Multicasting Streaming video Games Mails with IP addresses of MTAs or using IP addresses in place of FQDN are not supported (requires SMTP ALG). Each host using ICQ needs to be mapped for different ports. Each host using IRC needs to be mapped for different ports. Only one user is allowed for net meeting. When a Quake server is configured within the private network behind a SU, the SU cannot provide information about that server on the public network. Also, certain Quake servers do not let multiple users log in using the same IP address, in which case only one Quake user is allowed. 126 Monitoring MP.11-R Installation and Management 7 ICMP This chapter describes using the Web interface to obtain detailed information about the settings and performance of the unit. Click the Monitor button to access this information. The following tabs appear in the Monitor section:
Wireless Per Station Features Link Test Interfaces IP ARP Table IP Routes Learn Table RIP RADIUS QoS Temperature Help and Exit buttons also appear on each page of the Web interface; click the Help button to access online help; click the Exit button to exit the application. For an introduction to the basics of management, see Basic Management. 127 Monitoring Wireless Wireless General Performance MP.11-R Installation and Management Click Monitor > Wireless > General to monitor the general performance of the wireless interface. WORP Interface Performance Click Monitor > Wireless > WORP tab to monitor the performance of the WORP Base or WORP SU interfaces. The Registration Last Reason field indicates either a successful registration (a value of 1) or it indicates the reason why the last registration failed. Possible values for the Registration Last Reason field are as follows:
None (successful registration) Maximum number of SUs reached Authentication failure Roaming No response from SU within the Registration Timeout Period 128 Monitoring Wireless Low Signal Quality MP.11-R Installation and Management 129 Monitoring ICMP ICMP MP.11-R Installation and Management Click Monitor > ICMP to view the number of ICMP messages sent and received by the unit. It includes ping, route, and host unreachable messages. 130 Monitoring Per Station Per Station MP.11-R Installation and Management Click Monitor > Per Station to view Station Statistics. On the SU, the Per Station page shows statistics of the BSU to which the SU is registered. On the BSU, it shows statistics of all the SUs connected to the BSU. The pages statistics refresh every 4 seconds. 131 Monitoring Features Features Click Monitor > Features to view the following information. MP.11-R Installation and Management NOTE: A BSU shows how many WORP SUs it can support; the SU shows how many Ethernet hosts it supports on its Ethernet port as the Max Users on Satellite parameter. 132 Monitoring Link Test Link Test MP.11-R Installation and Management Click Monitor > Link Test to find out which wireless stations are in range and to check their link quality. NOTE: Link Test requires Internet Explorer version 6.0 or later. Earlier versions do not support Link Test. Link Test for the unit reports the Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) value in dB; the higher this number, the better the signal quality. Furthermore, it reports the signal level and noise level in dBm. The latter two are approximations of the level at which the unit receives the signal of the peer unit and the background noise. Clicking Explore from a BSU displays all its registered SUs. Clicking Explore from an SU displays only the BSU with which it is registered. All stations displayed after Explore come up Disabled. Select a station by changing Disabled to Start and click the Link Test button. You can change multiple stations to Start, but only the last station in the list is displayed as the remote partner when you click the Link Test button. The Link Test provides SNR, Signal, and Noise information for both, the local and the remote units levels. Link Test stops when you close the Link Test page. 133 Monitoring Interfaces Interfaces MP.11-R Installation and Management Click Monitor > Interfaces to view detailed information about the IP-layer performance of the units interfaces. There are two sub-tabs: Wireless and Ethernet. The following figures show both interfaces. 134 Monitoring IP ARP Table IP ARP Table MP.11-R Installation and Management Click Monitor > IP ARP Table to view the mapping of the IP and MAC addresses of all radios registered at the BSU. This information is based upon the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP). 135 Monitoring IP Routes IP Routes MP.11-R Installation and Management Click Monitor > IP Routes to view all active IP routes of the unit. These can be either static or dynamic (obtained through RIP). This tab is available only in Routing mode, and you can add routes only when in Routing mode. 136 Monitoring Learn Table Learn Table MP.11-R Installation and Management Click Monitor > Learn Table to view all MAC addresses the unit has detected on an interface. The Learn Table displays information relating to network bridging. It reports the MAC address for each node that the device has learned is on the network and the interface on which the node was detected. There can be up to 10,000 entries in the Learn Table. This tab is only available in Bridge mode. 137 Monitoring RIP RIP MP.11-R Installation and Management Click Monitor > RIP to view Routing Internet Protocol data for the Ethernet and Wireless interfaces. 138 Monitoring RADIUS RADIUS MP.11-R Installation and Management Click Monitor > Radius to view information about the traffic exchanged with a RADIUS server. 139 Monitoring QoS QoS MP.11-R Installation and Management Click Monitor > QoS to view summary information about the Quality of Service per BSU and for each SU registered with that BSU. This tab is available only on the BSU. 140 Monitoring Temperature Temperature MP.11-R Installation and Management The feature for reporting and logging internal unit temperature observes and reports the internal temperature of the unit. Temperature is logged and an SNMP trap sent when the internal temperature crosses the limit of 0C to 55C (at 5 degrees before the limit, the unit issues a warning trap). You can select a recording interval from one to sixty minutes, in 5-minute increments on the Configure: System tab. A log file holds the recorded data. The log can hold at least 576 entries (two days with the refresh time of 5 minutes). For further analysis, the log can be exported to a text file with a new line feed as a line separator. The Temperature Log contains two sub-tabs:
The Current Temperature tab indicates the units current temperature. The current temperature value is refreshed every 4 seconds. The Log tab keeps track of the temperature recorded at the end of each configured logging interval. You can reset or refresh the log using the Reset and Refresh buttons. 141 Commands MP.11-R Installation and Management 8 This chapter describes the commands that you can issue with the Web Interface. Click the Commands button to access available commands. See the following:
Download Upload Reboot Reset Help Link Help and Exit buttons also appear on each page of the Web interface; click the Help button to access online help; click the Exit button to exit the application. For an introduction to the basics of management, see Basic Management. Download Click Commands > Download tab to download configuration, image and license files to the unit via a TFTP server (see TFTP Server Setup for information about the SolarWinds TFTP server software located on your product installation CD). Enter the following information:
Server IP address: Enter the TFTP Server IP address. File Name: Enter the name of the file to be downloaded. If you are using the SolarWinds TFTP server software located on your product installation CD, the default directory for downloading files is C:\TFTP-Root. File Type: Choose either Config, image, BspBl, or license. File Operation: Choose either Download or Download and Reboot. Click OK to start the download. 142 Commands Upload Upload MP.11-R Installation and Management Click Commands > Upload to upload a configuration or log file from the unit to a TFTP server (see TFTP Server Setup for information about the SolarWinds TFTP server software located on your product installation CD). Enter the following information:
Server IP address: Enter the TFTP Server IP address. File Name: Enter the name of the file to be uploaded. If you are using the SolarWinds TFTP server software located on your product installation CD, the default directory for uploading files is C:\TFTP-Root. File Type: Choose either Config, Templog, or Eventlog. Click OK to start the upload. 143 Commands Reboot Reboot MP.11-R Installation and Management Click Commands > Reboot to reboot the units embedded software. Configuration changes are saved and the unit is reset. CAUTION: Rebooting the unit causes all users currently connected to lose their connection to the network until the unit has completed the reboot process and resumed operation. 144 Commands Reset Reset MP.11-R Installation and Management Click Commands > Reset to restore the configuration of the unit to the factory default values. You can also reset the unit by pressing the RELOAD button located on the side of the power brick. See Hard Reset to Factory Default for more information. CAUTION: Resetting the unit to its factory default configuration permanently overwrites all changes made to the unit. The unit reboots automatically after this command has been issued. 145 Commands Help Link Help Link MP.11-R Installation and Management Click Commands > Help Link to set the location of the help files of the Web Interface. Upon installation, the help files are installed in the C:\Program Files\Tsunami\MP.11 [Product Name]\Help folder. If you want to place these files on a shared drive, copy the Help folder to the new location and specify the new path in the Help Link box. 146 Procedures MP.11-R Installation and Management 9 This chapter describes the following procedures:
TFTP Server Setup: Prepares the TFTP server for transferring files to and from the unit. This procedure is used by the other procedures that transfer files. Web Interface Image File Download: Upgrades the embedded software. Configuration Backup: Saves the configuration of the unit. Configuration Restore: Restores a previous configuration through configuration file download. Soft Reset to Factory Default: Resets the unit to the factory default settings through the Web or Command Line Interface. Hard Reset to Factory Default: In some cases, it may be necessary to revert to the factory default settings (for example, if you cannot access the unit or you lost the password for the Web Interface). Forced Reload: Completely resets the unit and erases the embedded software. Use this procedure only as a last resort if the unit does not boot and the Hard Reset to Factory Default procedure did not help. If you perform a Forced Reload, you must download a new image file as described in Image File Download with the Bootloader. Image File Download with the Bootloader: If the unit does not contain embedded software, or the embedded software is corrupt, you can use this procedure to download a new image file. 147 Procedures TFTP Server Setup TFTP Server Setup MP.11-R Installation and Management A Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server lets you transfer files across a network. You can upload files from the unit for backup or copying, and you can download the files for configuration and image upgrades. The SolarWinds TFTP server software is located on the product installation CD, or can be downloaded from http://support.proxim.com. You can also download the latest TFTP software from SolarWinds Web site at http://www.solarwinds.net. The instructions that follow assume that you are using the SolarWinds TFTP server software; other TFTP servers may require different configurations. NOTE: If a TFTP server is not available in the network, you can perform similar file transfer operations using the HTTP interface. To download or upload a file, you must connect to the computer with the TFTP server through the units Ethernet port. This can be any computer in the network or a computer connected to the unit with a cross-over Ethernet cable. For information about installing the TFTP server, see Step 13: Install Documentation and Software. Ensure that:
1. The upload or download directory is correctly set (the default directory is C:\TFTP-Root). 2. The required image file is present in the directory. 3. The TFTP server is running. The TFTP server must be running only during file upload and download. You can check the connectivity between the unit and the TFTP server by pinging the unit from the computer that hosts the TFTP server. The ping program should show replies from the unit. 4. The TFTP server is configured to both Transmit and Receive files (on the Security tab under File > Configure), with no automatic shutdown or time-out (on the Auto-Close tab). 148 Procedures Web Interface Image File Download Web Interface Image File Download MP.11-R Installation and Management In some cases, it may be necessary to upgrade the embedded software of the unit by downloading an image file. To download an image file through the Web Interface:
1. Set up the TFTP server as described in TFTP Server Setup. 2. Access the unit as described in Logging in to the Web Interface. 3. Click Commands > Download tab. 4. Fill in the following details:
Server IP Address: <IP address TFTP server>
File Name: <image file name>
File Type: Image File Operation: Download 5. Click OK to start the file transfer. The unit downloads the image file. The TFTP server program should show download activity after a few seconds. When the download is complete, the unit is ready to start the embedded software upon reboot. 149 Procedures Configuration Backup Configuration Backup MP.11-R Installation and Management You can back up the units configuration by uploading the configuration file. You can use this file to restore the configuration or to configure another unit (see Configuration Restore). To upload a configuration file through the Web Interface:
1. Set up the TFTP server as described in TFTP Server Setup. 2. Access the unit as described in Logging in to the Web Interface. 3. Click Commands > Upload. 4. Fill in the following details:
Server IP Address: <IP address TFTP server>
File Name: <configuration file name>
File Type: Config File Operation: Upload 5. Click OK to start the file transfer. The unit uploads the configuration file. The TFTP server program should show upload activity after a few seconds. When the upload is complete, the configuration is backed up. 150 Procedures Configuration Restore Configuration Restore MP.11-R Installation and Management You can restore the configuration of the unit by downloading a configuration file. The configuration file contains the configuration information of a unit. To download a configuration file through the Web Interface:
1. Set up the TFTP server as described in TFTP Server Setup. 2. Access the unit as described in Logging in to the Web Interface. 3. Click Commands > Download tab. 4. Fill in the following details:
Server IP Address: <IP address TFTP server>
File Name: <configuration file name>
File Type: Config File Operation: Download 5. Click OK to start the file transfer. The unit downloads the configuration file. The TFTP server program should show download activity after a few seconds. When the download is complete and the system rebooted, the configuration is restored. 151 Procedures Soft Reset to Factory Default Soft Reset to Factory Default MP.11-R Installation and Management If necessary, you can reset the unit to the factory default settings. Resetting to default settings means that you must configure the unit anew. To reset to factory default settings using the Web Interface:
1. Click Commands > Reset. 2. Click the Reset to Factory Default button. The device configuration parameter values are reset to their factory default values. If you do not have access to the unit, you can use the procedure described in Hard Reset to Factory Default below as an alternative. 152 Procedures Hard Reset to Factory Default Hard Reset to Factory Default MP.11-R Installation and Management If you cannot access the unit or you have lost its password, you can reset the unit to the factory default settings. Resetting to default settings means you must configure the unit anew. To reset to factory default settings, press and hold the RELOAD button on the side of the units power supply for a minimum of 5 seconds but no more than 10 seconds. The configuration is deleted from the unit and the unit reboots, writing and using a default configuration. CAUTION: It you hold the RELOAD button for longer than 20 seconds, you may go into Forced Reload mode, which erases the units embedded software. This software image must be reloaded through an Ethernet connection with a TFTP server. The image filename to be downloaded can be configured with either ScanTool through the Ethernet interface or with the Boot Loader CLI through the serial port to make the unit functional again. 153 Procedures Forced Reload Forced Reload MP.11-R Installation and Management With Forced Reload, you erase the embedded software. Use this procedure only as a last resort if the unit does not boot and the Reset to Factory Defaults procedure did not help. If you perform a Forced Reload, you must download a new image file with the Bootloader (see Image File Download with the Bootloader below). CAUTION: The following procedure erases the embedded software of the unit. This software image must be reloaded through an Ethernet connection with a TFTP server. The image filename to be downloaded can be configured with ScanTool through the Ethernet interface to make the unit functional again. To do a forced reload:
1. Disconnect and reconnect power to the unit; the unit resets and the LEDs flash. 2. Immediately press and hold the RELOAD button on the side of the units power supply for about 20 seconds. The software image and configuration are deleted from the unit. 3. Follow the Image File Download with the Bootloader procedure to download an image file. 154 Procedures Image File Download with the Bootloader Image File Download with the Bootloader MP.11-R Installation and Management The following procedures download an image file to the unit after the embedded software has been erased with Forced Reload or when the embedded software cannot be started by the Bootloader. A new image file can be downloaded to the unit with ScanTool, or the Command Line Interface through the units serial port. In both cases, the file is transferred through Ethernet with TFTP. Because the CLI serial port option requires a serial RS-232C cable, Proxim recommends the ScanTool option. Download with ScanTool To download an image file with the ScanTool:
1. Set up the TFTP server as described in TFTP Server Setup. 2. Download the latest software from http://support.proxim.com. 3. Copy the latest software updates to your TFTP servers root directory. 4. Run ScanTool on a computer that is connected to the same LAN subnet as the unit. ScanTool scans the subnet for units and displays the found units in the main window. If in Forced Reload, ScanTool does not find the device until the unit Bootloader times out from its default operation to download an image. Click Rescan to re-scan the subnet and update the display until the unit shows up in Bootloader mode. 5. Select the unit to which you want to download an image file and click Change. 6. Ensure that IP Address Type Static is selected and fill in the following details:
Password IP Address and Subnet Mask of the unit. TFTP Server IP Address and, if necessary, the Gateway IP Address of the TFTP server. Image File Name of the file with the new image. 7. Click OK to start the file transfer. The unit downloads the image file. The TFTP server program should show download activity after a few seconds. When the download is complete, the LED pattern should return to reboot state. The unit is ready to start the embedded software. After a Forced Reload procedure, the unit returns to factory default settings and must be reconfigured. ScanTool can be used to set the system name and IP address. To access the unit, see Logging in to the Web Interface. Download with CLI To use the CLI through the serial port of the unit, you need a connector cable with a male RJ11 and a female DB9 connector (included with the unit) and an ASCII terminal program such as HyperTerminal. Proxim recommends you switch off the unit and the computer before connecting or disconnecting the serial RS-232C cable. To download an image file:
1. Set up the TFTP server as described in TFTP Server Setup. 2. Download the latest software from http://support.proxim.com. 3. Copy the latest software updates to your TFTP servers root directory. 4. Start the terminal program (such as HyperTerminal), set the following connection properties, and then connect:
Bits per second: 9600 COM port: for example, COM1 or COM2 to which the unit serial port is connected) Data bits: 8 Stop bits: 1 Flow control: None 155 Procedures Image File Download with the Bootloader Parity: None MP.11-R Installation and Management 5. Disconnect and reconnect power to reset the unit; the terminal program displays Power On Self Test (POST) messages. 6. When the Sending Traps to SNMP manager periodically message is displayed (after about 30 seconds), press the ENTER key. 7. The command prompt is displayed; enter the following commands:
set ipaddr <IP address nit>
set ipsubmask <subnet mask>
set ipaddrtype static set tftpipaddr <IP address TFTP server>
set tftpfilename <image file name>
set ipgw <gateway IP address>
reboot For example:
set ipaddr 10.0.0.12 set ipsubmask 255.255.255.0 set ipaddrtype static set tftpipaddr 10.0.0.20 set tftpfilename image.bin set ipgw 10.0.0.30 reboot The unit reboots and downloads the image file. The TFTP server program should show download activity after a few seconds. When the download is complete, the unit is ready for configuration. To access the unit, see Logging in to the Web Interface. Note that the IP configuration in normal operation differs from the IP configuration of the Boot Loader. 156 Troubleshooting MP.11-R Installation and Management 10 This chapter helps you to isolate and solve problems with your unit. In the event this chapter does not provide a solution, or the solution does not solve your problem, check our support website at http://support.proxim.com. Before you start troubleshooting, it is important that you have checked the details in the product documentation. For details about RADIUS, TFTP, terminal and telnet programs, and Web browsers, refer to the appropriate documentation. In some cases, rebooting the unit clears the problem. If nothing else helps, consider a Soft Reset to Factory Default or a Forced Reload. The Forced Reload option requires you to download a new image file to the unit. See the following:
Connectivity Issues Communication Issues Setup and Configuration Issues VLAN Operation Issues Link Problems Connectivity Issues The issues described in this section relate to the connections of the unit. Unit Does Not Boot The unit shows no activity (the power LED is off). 1. Ensure that the power supply is properly working and correctly connected. 2. Ensure that all cables are correctly connected. 3. Check the power source. 4. If you are using an Active Ethernet splitter, ensure that the voltage is correct. Serial Link Does Not Work The unit cannot be reached through the serial port. 1. Check the cable connection between the unit and the computer. 2. Ensure that the correct COM port is used. 3. Start the terminal program; set the following connection properties (also see HyperTerminal Connection Properties Bits per second: 9600 in the Tsunami MP.11/QB.11 Reference Manual), and then connect. COM port: for example, COM1 or COM2 to which the unit serial port is connected) Data bits 8 Stop bits: 1 Flow control: None Parity: None 4. Ensure that the unit and the computer use the same serial port configuration parameters. 5. Disconnect and reconnect power to reset the unit. The terminal program displays Power On Self Tests (POST) messages and displays the following after approximately 90 seconds: Please enter password:
157 Troubleshooting Connectivity Issues HyperTerminal Connection Problems MP.11-R Installation and Management The serial connection properties can be found in HyperTerminal as follows:
1. Start HyperTerminal and select Properties from the File menu. 2. Select Direct to Com 1 in the Connect using: drop-down list (depending upon the COM port you use); then click Configure. 3. Enter or edit the information as follows, and click OK. Bits per second: 9600 Data bits: 8 Parity: None Stop bits: 1 Flow control: None 4. Click the Settings tab and then click ASCII Setup. 5. Ensure that Send line ends with line feeds is selected and click OK twice. HyperTerminal is now correctly configured. Ethernet Link Does Not Work 1. First check the Ethernet LED:
Solid Green: Power is on, the radio is up, and the Ethernet link is also up. Blinking Green: Power is on, the radio is coming up and the Ethernet is down. 2. Verify pass-through versus cross-over cable. Cannot Use the Web Interface 1. Open a command prompt window and enter ping <ip address unit> (for example ping 10.0.0.1). If the unit does not respond, make sure that you have the correct IP address. If the unit responds, the Ethernet connection is working properly, continue with this procedure. 2. Ensure that you are using one of the following Web browsers:
Microsoft Internet Explorer version 5.0 or later (Version 6.0 or later recommended) Netscape version 6.0 or later. 3. Ensure that you are not using a proxy server for the connection with your Web browser. 4. Ensure that you have not exceeded the maximum number of Web Interface or CLI sessions. 5. Double-check the physical network connections. Use a well-known unit to ensure the network connection is properly functioning. 6. Perform network infrastructure troubleshooting (check switches, routers, and so on). 158 Troubleshooting Communication Issues Communication Issues Two Units Are Unable to Communicate Wirelessly MP.11-R Installation and Management If a wireless link is possible after testing two units within close distance of each other, then there are two possible reasons why wireless connectivity is not possible while the MP.11 units are at their desired locations:
1. There may be a problem in the RF path, for example, a bad connector attachment (this is the most common problem in installations) or a bad cable (water ingress). NOTE: The cables can be swapped with known good ones as a temporary solution to verify cable quality. 2. Another reason may be related to an interference problem caused by a high signal level from another radio. This can be checked by changing the frequency and then verifying whether another channel works better or by changing the polarization as a way of avoiding the interfering signal. To know in advance how much interference is present in a given environment, a Spectrum Analyzer can be attached to a (temporary) antenna for measuring the signal levels on all available Channels. NOTE: The antennas are usually not the problem, unless mounted upside down causing the drain hole to be quickly filled with radome. If a wireless link is not possible after testing two units within close distance of each other, then the problem is either hardware or configuration related, such as a wrong Network name, Encryption key, Network Secret or Base Station Name. To eliminate these issues from being a factor, resetting the both units to factory defaults is the recommended solution. If a wireless link is not possible after resetting the units and verifying that one unit is a BSU with WORP Base interface configured and the other is a Satellite, then the problem is not configuration related and the only remaining reason is a possible hardware problem. Acquiring a third unit and then testing it amongst the existing units will help pinpoint the broken unit. 159 Troubleshooting Setup and Configuration Issues Setup and Configuration Issues The following issues relate to setup and configuration problems. Lost Password MP.11-R Installation and Management If you lost your password, you must reset the unit to the default settings. See Hard Reset to Factory Default. The default password is public. If you record your password, keep it in a safe place. The Unit Responds Slowly If the unit takes a long time to become available, it could mean that:
No DHCP server is available. The IP address of the unit is already in use. Verify that the IP address is assigned only to the unit. Do this by switching off the unit and then pinging the IP address. If there is a response to the ping, another device in the network is using the same IP address. If the unit uses a static IP address, switching to DHCP mode could remedy this problem. Also see Setting the IP Address with ScanTool. There is too much network traffic. Web Interface Does Not Work If you cannot connect to the unit Web server through the network:
1. Connect a computer to the serial port of the unit and check the HTTP status. The HTTP status can restrict HTTP access at different interfaces. For more information, see Serial Port in the Tsunami MP.11/QB.11 Reference Manual. 2. Open a command prompt window and enter: ping <ip address unit> (for example ping 10.0.0.1) If the unit does not respond, ensure that you have the correct IP address. If the unit responds, the Ethernet connection is working properly; continue with this procedure. 3. Ensure that you are using one of the following Web browsers:
Microsoft Internet Explorer version 5.0 or later (Version 6.0 or later recommended) Netscape version 6.0 or later 4. Ensure that you are not using a proxy server for the connection with your Web browser. 5. Ensure that you have not exceeded the maximum number of Web Interface sessions. Command Line Interface Does Not Work If you cannot connect to the unit through the network:
1. Connect a computer to the serial port of the unit and check the SNMP table. The SNMP table can restrict telnet or 2. Open a command prompt window and enter: ping <ip address unit> (for example ping 10.0.0.1). HTTP access. For more information, see Serial Port in the Tsunami MP.11/QB.11 Reference Manual. If the unit does not respond, ensure that you have the correct IP address. If the unit responds, the Ethernet connection is working properly; continue with this procedure. 3. Ensure that you have not exceeded the maximum number of CLI sessions. TFTP Server Does Not Work With TFTP, you can transfer files to and from the unit. Also see TFTP Server Setup. If a TFTP server is not properly configured and running, you cannot upload and download files. The TFTP server:
160 Troubleshooting Setup and Configuration Issues MP.11-R Installation and Management Can be situated either local or remote Must have a valid IP address Must be set for send and receive without time-out Must be running only during file upload and download If the TFTP server does not upload or download files, it could mean:
The TFTP server is not running The IP address of the TFTP server is invalid The upload or download directory is not correctly set The file name is not correct Online Help Is Not Available Online help is not available:
1. Make sure that the Help files are installed on your computer or server. Also see Step 13: Install Documentation and Software. 2. Verify whether the path of the help files in the Web Interface refers to the correct directory. See Help Link. Changes Do Not Take Effect Changes made in the Web Interface do not take effect:
1. Restart your Web browser. 2. Log into the radio unit again and make changes. 3. Reboot the radio unit when prompted to do so. Wait until the reboot is completed before accessing the unit again. 161 Troubleshooting VLAN Operation Issues VLAN Operation Issues MP.11-R Installation and Management The correct VLAN configuration can be verified by pinging wired hosts from both sides of the device and the network switch. Traffic can be sniffed on the wired (Ethernet) network. Packets generated by hosts and viewed on one of the backbones should contain IEEE 802.1Q compliant VLAN headers when in Transparent mode. The VLAN ID in the headers should correspond to one of the VLAN Management IDs configured for the unit in Trunk mode. The correct VLAN assignment can be verified by pinging:
The unit to ensure connectivity The switch to ensure VLAN properties Hosts past the switch to confirm the switch is functional Ultimately, traffic can be sniffed on the Ethernet interface using third-party packages. Most problems can be avoided by ensuring that 802.1Q compliant VLAN tags containing the proper VLAN ID have been inserted in the bridged frames. The VLAN ID in the header should correspond to the assigned VLAN. What if network traffic is being directed to a nonexistent host?
All sessions are disconnected, traffic is lost, and a manual override is necessary. Workaround: You can configure the switch to mimic the nonexistent host. 162 Troubleshooting Link Problems Link Problems MP.11-R Installation and Management While wireless networking emerges more and more, the number of wireless connections to networks grows every day. The Tsunami MP.11 unit is one of the successful product families used by customers today who enjoy the day after day high-speed, cost-effective connections. To successfully use the connections, technicians must be able to troubleshoot the system effectively. This section gives hints on how a unit network could be analyzed in the case of no link, a situation in which the customer thinks that the link is down because there is no traffic being passed. The four general reasons that a wireless link may not work are related to:
Hardware Configuration Path issues (such as distance, cable loss, obstacles) Environment (anything that is outside the equipment and not part of the path itself) You have tested the equipment in the office and have verified that the hardware and configurations are sound. The path calculation has been reviewed, and the path has been double-checked for obstacles and canceling reflections. Still, the user reports that the link does not work. Most likely, the problem reported is caused by the environment or by improper tests to verify the connection. This article assumes that the test method, cabling, antennas, and antenna alignment have been checked. Always do this before checking the environment. General Check Two general checks are recommended before taking any action:
Check whether the software version at both sides is the most current Check for any reported alarm messages in the Event Log Statistics Check Interference and other negative environment factors always have an impact on the number of correctly received frames. The Tsunami MP.11 models give detailed information about transmission errors in the Web interface, under Monitor. The windows that are important for validating the health of the link are:
Monitor / Wireless / General (Lowest level of the wireless network): Check FCS errors: Rising FCS errors indicate interference or low fade margin. So does Failed count. If only one of those is high, this indicates that a source of interference is significant near one end of the link. Monitor / Interfaces / Wireless (One level higher than Wireless / General): The information is given after the wireless Ethernet frame is converted into a normal Ethernet frame. The parameters shown are part of the MIB-II. Both operational and admin status should be up. An admin status of down indicates that the interface is configured to be down. In Discards and Out Discards indicate overload of the buffers, likely caused by network traffic, which is too heavy. In Errors and Out Errors should never happen; however, it might happen if a frames FCS was correct while the content was still invalid. Monitor / Wireless / WORP (Statistics on WORP): WORP runs on top of normal Ethernet, which means that the WORP frame is in fact the data field of the Ethernet frame. Send Failure or Send Retries must be low in comparison to Send Success. Low is about 1%. The same applies for Receive Success versus Receive Retries and Receive Failures. Note that the Receive Failures and Retries can be inaccurate. A frame from the remote site might have been transmitted without even being received; therefore, the count of that frame might not have been added to the statistics and the receiver simply could not know that there was a frame. 163 Troubleshooting Link Problems MP.11-R Installation and Management Remote Partners indicates how many SUs are connected (in case of a BSU) or whether a Base is connected (in case of a Subscriber). Base Announces should increase continuously. Registration Requests and Authentication Requests should be divisible by 3. WORP is designed in a way that each registration sequence starts with 3 identical requests. It is not a problem if, once in a while, one of those requests is missing. Missing requests frequently is to be avoided. Monitor / Per Station (Information per connected remote partner): Check that the received signal level (RSL) is the same on both sides; this should be the case if output power is the same. Two different RSLs indicate a broken transmitter or receiver. A significant difference between Local Noise and Remote Noise could indicate a source of interference near the site with the highest noise. Normally, noise is about 80 dBm at 36 Mbps. This number can vary from situation to situation, of course, also in a healthy environment. Monitor / Link Test (Information used by Administrators for on-the-spot checking): Check the received signal level (RSL) and noise level. Compare the RSL with the values from path analysis. If the figures differ significantly from the values recorded at the Per Station window, check for environment conditions that change over time. Analyzing the Spectrum The ultimate way to discover whether there is a source of interference is to use a spectrum analyzer. Usually, the antenna is connected to the analyzer when measuring. By turning the antenna 360 degrees, one can check from which direction the interference is coming. The analyzer will also display the frequencies and the level of signal is detected. Proxim recommends performing the test at various locations to find the most ideal location for the equipment. Avoiding Interference When a source of interference is identified and when the level and frequencies are known, the next step is to avoid the interference. Some of the following actions can be tried:
Changing the channel to a frequency away from the interference is the first step in avoiding interference. For countries that require DFS, it might be not possible to manually select a different frequency. Each antenna has a polarization; try to change to a polarization different from the interferer. A small beam antenna looks only in one particular direction. Because of the higher gain of such an antenna, lowering the output power or adding extra attenuation might be required to stay legal. This solution cannot help when the source of interference is right behind the remote site. Lowering the antennas can help avoid seeing interference from far away. Move the antennas to a different location on the premises. This causes the devices to look from a different angle, causing a different pattern in the reception of the signals. Use obstructions such as buildings, when possible, to shield from the interference. Conclusion A spectrum analyzer can be a great help to identify whether interference might be causing link problems on Tsunami MP.11 systems. Before checking for interference, the link should be verified by testing in an isolated environment, to make sure that hardware works and your configurations are correct. The path analysis, cabling and antennas should be checked as well. Statistics in the web interface under Monitor tell if there is a link, if the link is healthy, and a continuous test can be done using the Link Test. 164 Country Codes and Channels MP.11-R Installation and Management A In the CLI and MIB browser, the country code is set using the string code, as shown in the following example. Example: To set Taiwan as the country:
set syscountrycode TW NOTE: The country code must be entered in capital letters. NOTE: Country is not configurable for the 4954-R. See the following tables:
2.4 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country 5 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country 4.9 GHz Channels/Frequencies 2.4 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country Country Code Frequency Band Allowed Channels (Center Frequency) for 5 MHz, 10 MHz, and 20 MHz Albenia (AL) Algeria (DZ) Argentina (AR) Armenia (AM) Australia (AU) Austria (AT) Azerbaijan (AZ) Bahrain (BH) Belarus (BY) Belgium (BE) Belize (BZ) Bolivia (BO) Brazil (BR), Brunei Darussalam (BN) Bulgaria (BG) 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 165 Country Codes and Channels 2.4 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country Country Code Frequency Band Canada (CA) China (CN) Colombia (CO) Costa Rica (CR) Croatia (HR) Cyprus (CY) Denmark (DK) Dominican Republic (DO) Egypt (EG) El Salvador (SV) Estonia (EE) Finland (FI) France (FR) Georgia (GE) Germany (DE) Greece (GR) Guatemala (GT) Honduras (HN) Hong Kong (HK) Hungary (HU) Iceland (IS) India (IN) Indonesia (ID) Iran (IR) Ireland (IE) 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz MP.11-R Installation and Management Allowed Channels (Center Frequency) for 5 MHz, 10 MHz, and 20 MHz 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 166 Country Codes and Channels 2.4 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country Country Code Frequency Band Israel (IL) Italy (IT) Japan (JP) Jordon (JO) Kazakhstan (KZ) Korea Republic (KR) Kuwait (KW) Latvia (LV) Lebanon (LB) Liechtenstein (LI) Lithuania (LT) Luxembourg (LU) Macau (MO) Macedonia (MK) Malaysia (MY) Malta (MT) Mexico (MX) Monaco (MC) Morocco (MA) Netherlands (NL) New Zealand (NZ) North Korea (KP) Norway (NO) Oman (OM) Pakistan (PK) 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz MP.11-R Installation and Management Allowed Channels (Center Frequency) for 5 MHz, 10 MHz, and 20 MHz 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 167 Country Codes and Channels 2.4 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country Country Code Frequency Band Panama (PA) Peru (PE) Philippines (PH) Poland (PL) Portugal (PT) Puerto Rico (PR) Quatar (QA) Romania (RO) Russia (RU) Saudia Arabia (SA) Singapore (SG) Slovak Republic (SK) Slovenia (SI) South Africa (ZA) Spain (ES) Sweden (SE) Switzerland (CH) Syria (SY) Taiwan (TW) Thailand (TH) Trinidad and Tobago (TT) Tunisia (TN) Turkey (TR) Ukraine (UA) United Arab Emirates (AE) 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz MP.11-R Installation and Management Allowed Channels (Center Frequency) for 5 MHz, 10 MHz, and 20 MHz 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 168 Country Codes and Channels 2.4 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country Country Code Frequency Band United Kingdom (GB) Uruguay (UY) USA (US) Uzbekistan (UZ) Vietnam (VN) Yemen (YE) Zimbabwe (ZW) 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz MP.11-R Installation and Management Allowed Channels (Center Frequency) for 5 MHz, 10 MHz, and 20 MHz 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 1 (2412), 2 (2417), 3 (2422), 4 (2427), 5 (2432), 6 (2437), 7 (2442), 8 (2447), 9 (2452), 10 (2457), 11 (2462), 12 (2467), 13 (2472) 169 Country Codes and Channels 5 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country 5 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country MP.11-R Installation and Management Country (Code) Frequency Bands DFS Argentina (AR) 5.25 - 5.35 GHz and 5.725 - 5.825 GHz No Australia (AU) 5.725 - 5.85 GHz No Austria (AT) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes Belgium (BE) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes Belize (BZ) 5.725 - 5.85 GHz No Bolivia (BO) 5.725 - 5.85 GHz No 20 MHz 10 MHz 5 MHz Allowed Channels (Center Freq) 56 (5280), 60 (5300), 64 (5320), 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805) 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805), 165 (5825) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805), 165 (5825) 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805), 165 (5825) 56 (5280), 58 (5290), 60 (5300), 62 (5310), 64 (5320), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805) 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835) 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835) 56 (5280), 57 (5285), 58 (5290), 59 (5295), 60 (5300), 61 (5305), 62 (5310), 63 (5315), 64 (5320), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805) 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835) 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835) 170 Country Codes and Channels 5 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country MP.11-R Installation and Management 20 MHz 10 MHz 5 MHz Allowed Channels (Center Freq) Country (Code) Frequency Bands DFS Brazil (BR) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes Brazil 5.8 GHz (B1) 5.725 - 5.85 GHz No Brunei Darussalam (BN) 5.725 - 5.85 GHz No Bulgaria (BG) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805), 165 (5825) 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805), 165 (5825) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) Canada (CA) 5.725 - 5.85 GHz No 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805), 165 (5825) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835) 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835) 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835) 171 Country Codes and Channels 5 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country MP.11-R Installation and Management Country (Code) Frequency Bands DFS Canada DFS (C1) 5.25 - 5.35 GHz and 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes China (CN) 5.725 - 5.85 GHz No Colombia (CO) 5.25 - 5.35 GHz and 5.725 - 5.85 GHz No Cyprus (CY) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes 20 MHz 56 (5280), 60 (5300), 64 (5320), 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805), 165 (5825) 56 (5280), 60 (5300), 64 (5320), 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805), 165 (5825) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) Allowed Channels (Center Freq) 10 MHz 54 (5270), 56 (5280), 58 (5290), 60 (5300), 62 (5310), 64 (5320), 66 (5330), 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835) 54 (5270), 56 (5280), 58 (5290), 60 (5300), 62 (5310), 64 (5320), 66 (5330), 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 5 MHz 53 (5265), 54 (5270), 55 (5275), 56 (5280), 57 (5285), 58 (5290), 59 (5295), 60 (5300), 61 (5305), 62 (5310), 63 (5315), 64 (5320), 65 (5325), 66 (5330), 67 (5335), 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835) 53 (5265), 54 (5270), 55 (5275), 56 (5280), 57 (5285), 58 (5290), 59 (5295), 60 (5300), 61 (5305), 62 (5310), 63 (5315), 64 (5320), 65 (5325), 66 (5330), 67 (5335), 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 172 Country Codes and Channels 5 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country MP.11-R Installation and Management 20 MHz 10 MHz 5 MHz Allowed Channels (Center Freq) Country (Code) Frequency Bands DFS Czech Republic 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes Denmark (DK) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) Dominican Republic (DO) 5.25 - 5.35 GHz and 5.725 - 5.85 GHz No 56 (5280), 60 (5300), 64 (5320), 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805), 165 (5825) Estonia (EE) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 54 (5270), 56 (5280), 58 (5290), 60 (5300), 62 (5310), 64 (5320), 66 (5330), 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 53 (5265), 54 (5270), 55 (5275), 56 (5280), 57 (5285), 58 (5290), 59 (5295), 60 (5300), 61 (5305), 62 (5310), 63 (5315), 64 (5320), 65 (5325), 66 (5330), 67 (5335), 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 173 Country Codes and Channels 5 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country MP.11-R Installation and Management Country (Code) Frequency Bands DFS Finland (FI) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes France (FR) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes Germany (DE) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes Greece (GR) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes 20 MHz 10 MHz 5 MHz Allowed Channels (Center Freq) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 174 Country Codes and Channels 5 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country MP.11-R Installation and Management Country (Code) Frequency Bands DFS Guatemala (GT) 5.25 - 5.35 GHz and 5.725 - 5.85 GHz No Hong Kong (HK) 5.725 - 5.85 GHz No Hungary (HU) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes Iceland (IS) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes 20 MHz 10 MHz 5 MHz Allowed Channels (Center Freq) 56 (5280), 60 (5300), 64 (5320), 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805), 165 (5825) 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805), 165 (5825) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 54 (5270), 56 (5280), 58 (5290), 60 (5300), 62 (5310), 64 (5320), 66 (5330), 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835) 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 53 (5265), 54 (5270), 55 (5275), 56 (5280), 57 (5285), 58 (5290), 59 (5295), 60 (5300), 61 (5305), 62 (5310), 63 (5315), 64 (5320), 65 (5325), 66 (5330), 67 (5335), 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835) 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 175 Country Codes and Channels 5 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country MP.11-R Installation and Management 20 MHz 10 MHz 5 MHz Allowed Channels (Center Freq) Country (Code) Frequency Bands DFS India (IN) 5.15 - 5.35 GHz and 5.725 - 5.825 GHz No Iran (IR) 5.725 - 5.85 GHz No Ireland (IE) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes 36 (5180), 40 (5200), 44 (5220), 48 (5240), 52 (5260), 56 (5280), 60 (5300), 64 (5320), 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805) 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805), 165 (5825) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) Ireland 5.8 GHz (I1) 5.725 - 5.85 GHz Yes 147 (5735), 151 (5755), 155 (5775), 167 (5835) Italy (IT) 5.47 GHz Yes 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 36 (5180), 38 (5190), 40 (5200), 42 (5210), 44 (5220), 46 (5230), 48 (5240), 50 (5250), 52 (5260), 54 (5270), 56 (5280), 58 (5290), 60 (5300), 62 (5310), 64 (5320), 66 (5330), 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815) 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 145 (5725), 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835), 169 (5845) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 36 (5180), 37 (5185), 38 (5190), 39 (5195), 40 (5200), 41 (5205), 42 (5210), 43 (5215), 44 (5220), 45 (5225), 46 (5230), 47 (5235), 48 (5240), 49 (5245), 50 (5250), 51 (5255), 52 (5260), 53 (5265), 54 (5270), 55 (5275), 56 (5280), 57 (5285), 58 (5290), 59 (5295), 60 (5300), 61 (5305), 62 (5310), 63 (5315), 64 (5320), 65 (5325), 66 (5330), 67 (5335), 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815) 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 145 (5725), 146 (5730), 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835), 168 (5840), 169 (5845), 170 (5850) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 176 Country Codes and Channels 5 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country MP.11-R Installation and Management Country (Code) Frequency Japan (JP) Bands 5.25 - 5.35 GHz DFS Yes 20 MHz 56 (5280), 60 (5300), 64 (5320) Japan2 (J2) 5.15 - 5.25 GHz No 34 (5170), 38 (5190), 42 (5210), 46 (5230) Korea Republic (KR) 5.725 - 5.825 GHz No 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805) Korea Republic2 (K2) 5.725 - 5.825 GHz No 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805) Latvia (LV) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes Liechtenstein (LI) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) Allowed Channels (Center Freq) 10 MHz 54 (5270), 56 (5280), 58 (5290), 60 (5300), 62 (5310), 64 (5320), 66 (5330) 32 (5160),34 (5170), 36 (5180), 38 (5190), 40 (5200), 42 (5210), 44 (5220), 46 (5230), 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815) 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 5 MHz 53 (5265), 54 (5270), 55 (5275), 56 (5280), 57 (5285), 58 (5290), 59 (5295), 60 (5300), 61 (5305), 62 (5310), 63 (5315), 64 (5320), 65 (5325), 66 (5330), 67 (5335) 32 (5160), 33 (5165), 34 (5170), 35 (5175), 36 (5180), 37 (5185), 38 (5190), 39 (5195), 40 (5200), 41 (5205), 42 (5210), 43 (5215), 44 (5220), 45 (5225), 46 (5230) 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815) 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 177 Country Codes and Channels 5 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country MP.11-R Installation and Management Country (Code) Frequency Bands DFS Lithuania (LT) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes Luxembourg (LU) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes Macau (MO) 5.725 - 5.85 GHz No Malaysia (MY) 5.25 - 5.35 GHz and 5.725 - 5.85 GHz No 20 MHz 10 MHz 5 MHz Allowed Channels (Center Freq) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805), 165 (5825) 56 (5280), 60 (5300), 64 (5320), 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805), 165 (5825) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835) 54 (5270), 56 (5280), 58 (5290), 60 (5300), 62 (5310), 64 (5320), 66 (5330), 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835) 53 (5265), 54 (5270), 55 (5275), 56 (5280), 57 (5285), 58 (5290), 59 (5295), 60 (5300), 61 (5305), 62 (5310), 63 (5315), 64 (5320), 65 (5325), 66 (5330), 67 (5335), 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835) 178 Country Codes and Channels 5 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country MP.11-R Installation and Management 20 MHz 10 MHz 5 MHz Allowed Channels (Center Freq) Country (Code) Frequency Bands DFS Malta (MT) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes Mexico (MX) 5.725 - 5.85 GHz No Netherlands (NL) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805), 165 (5825) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) New Zealand (NZ) 5.725 - 5.85 GHz No 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805), 165 (5825) North Korea (KP) 5.725 - 5.825 GHz No 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835) 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835) 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815) 179 Country Codes and Channels 5 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country MP.11-R Installation and Management Country (Code) Frequency Bands DFS Norway (NO) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes 20 MHz 10 MHz 5 MHz Allowed Channels (Center Freq) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) Panama (PA) 5.25 - 5.35 GHz and 5.725 - 5.85 GHz No 56 (5280), 60 (5300), 64 (5320), 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805), 165 (5825) Philippines (PH) 5.25 - 5.35 GHz and 5.725 - 5.85 GHz No 56 (5280), 60 (5300), 64 (5320), 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805), 165 (5825) Poland (PL) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 54 (5270), 56 (5280), 58 (5290), 60 (5300), 62 (5310), 64 (5320), 66 (5330), 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835) 54 (5270), 56 (5280), 58 (5290), 60 (5300), 62 (5310), 64 (5320), 66 (5330), 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 53 (5265), 54 (5270), 55 (5275), 56 (5280), 57 (5285), 58 (5290), 59 (5295), 60 (5300), 61 (5305), 62 (5310), 63 (5315), 64 (5320), 65 (5325), 66 (5330), 67 (5335), 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835) 53 (5265), 54 (5270), 55 (5275), 56 (5280), 57 (5285), 58 (5290), 59 (5295), 60 (5300), 61 (5305), 62 (5310), 63 (5315), 64 (5320), 65 (5325), 66 (5330), 67 (5335), 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 180 Country Codes and Channels 5 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country MP.11-R Installation and Management Country (Code) Frequency Bands DFS Portugal (PT) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes 20 MHz 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) Puerto Rico (PR) 5.25 - 5.35 GHz and 5.725 - 5.85 GHz No 56 (5280), 60 (5300), 64 (5320), 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805), 165 (5825) Allowed Channels (Center Freq) 10 MHz 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 54 (5270), 56 (5280), 58 (5290), 60 (5300), 62 (5310), 64 (5320), 66 (5330), 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835) 5 MHz 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 53 (5265), 54 (5270), 55 (5275), 56 (5280), 57 (5285), 58 (5290), 59 (5295), 60 (5300), 61 (5305), 62 (5310), 63 (5315), 64 (5320), 65 (5325), 66 (5330), 67 (5335), 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835) 181 Country Codes and Channels 5 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country MP.11-R Installation and Management Country (Code) Frequency Russia (RU) Bands 5.15 - 6.08 GHz DFS No 20 MHz 30 (5150), 34 (5170), 38 (5190), 42 (5210), 46 (5230), 50 (5250), 54 (5270), 58 (5290), 62 (5310), 66 (5330), 70 (5350), 74 (5370), 78 (5390), 82 (5410), 86 (5430), 90 (5450), 94 (5470), 98 (5490), 102 (5510), 106 (5530), 110 (5550), 114 (5570), 118 (5590), 122 (5610), 126 (5630), 130 (5650), 134 (5670), 138 (5690), 142 (5710), 146 (5730), 150 (5750), 154 (5770), 158 (5790), 162 (5810), 166 (5830), 170 (5850), 174 (5870), 178 (5890), 182 (5910), 186 (5930), 190 (5950), 194 (5970), 198 (5990), 202 (6010), 206 (6030), 210 (6060), 214 (6070) Allowed Channels (Center Freq) 10 MHz 30 (5150), 32 (5160), 34 (5170), 36 (5180) 38 (5190), 40 (5200), 42 (5210), 44 (5220), 46 (5230), 48 (5240), 50 (5250), 52 (5260), 54 (5270), 56 (5280), 58 (5290), 60 (5300), 62 (5310), 64 (5320), 66 (5330), 68 (5340), 70 (5350), 72 (5360), 74 (5370), 76 (5380), 78 (5390), 80 (5400), 82 (5410), 84 (5420), 86 (5430), 88 (5440), 90 (5450), 92 (5460), 94 (5470), 96 (5480), 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710), 144 (5720), 146 (5730), 148 (5740), 150 (5750), 152 (5760), 154 (5770), 156 (5780), 158 (5790), 160 (5800), 162 (5810), 164 (5820), 166 (5830), 168 (5840), 170 (5850), 172 (5860), 174 (5870), 176 (5880) 178 (5890), 180 (5900), 182 (5910), 184 (5920), 186 (5930), 188 (5940), 190 (5950), 192 (5960), 194 (5970), 196 (5980), 198 (5990), 200 (6000), 202 (6010), 204 (6020), 206 (6030), 208 (6040), 210 (6050), 212 (6060), 214 (6070) 5 MHz 30 (5150), 31 (5155), 32 (5160), 33 (5165), 34 (5170), 35 (5175), 36 (5180), 37 (5185), 38 (5190), 39 (5195), 40 (5200), 41 (5205), 42 (5210), 43 (5215), 44 (5220), 45 (5225), 46 (5230), 47 (5235), 48 (5240), 49 (5245), 50 (5250), 51 (5255), 52 (5260), 53 (5265), 54 (5270), 55 (5275), 56 (5280), 57 (5285), 58 (5290), 59 (5295), 60 (5300), 61 (5305), 62 (5310), 63 (5315), 64 (5320), 65 (5325), 66 (5330), 67 (5335), 68 (5340), 69 (5345), 70 (5350), 71 (5355), 72 (5360), 73 (5365), 74 (5370), 75 (5375), 76 (5380), 77 (5385), 78 (5390), 79 (5395), 80 (5400), 81 (5405), 82 (5410), 83 (5415), 84 (5420), 85 (5425), 86 (5430), 87 (5435), 88 (5440), 89 (5445), 90 (5450), 91 (5455), 92 (5460), 93 (5465), 94 (5470), 95 (5475), 96 (5480), 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710), 143 (5715), 144 (5720), 145 (5725), 146 (5730), 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835), 168 (5840), 169 (5845), 170 (5850), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835), 168 (5840), 169 (5845), 170 (5850), 171 (5855), 172 (5860), 173 (5865), 174 (5870), 175 (5875), 176 (5880), 177 (5885), 178 (5890), 179 (5895), 180 (5900), 181 (5905), 182 (5910), 183 (5915), 184 (5920), 185 (5925), 186 (5930), 187 (5935), 188 (5940), 189 (5945), 190 (5950), 191 (5955), 192 (5960), 193 (5965), 194 (5970), 195 (5975), 196 (5980), 197 (5855), 198 (5990), 199 (5995), 200 (6000), 201 (6005), 202 (6010), 203 (6015), 204 (6020), 205 (6025), 206 (6030), 207 (6035), 208 (6040), 209 (6045), 210 (6050), 211 (6055), 212 (6060), 213 (6065), 214 (6070) 215 (6075) 182 Country Codes and Channels 5 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country MP.11-R Installation and Management Country (Code) Frequency Bands DFS Saudi Arabia (SA) 5.15 - 5.35 GHz and 5.725 - 5.825 GHz No Singapore (SG) 5.15 - 5.25 GHz and 5.725 - 5.85 GHz No Slovak Republic (SK) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes Slovenia (SI) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes 20 MHz 10 MHz 5 MHz Allowed Channels (Center Freq) 36 (5180), 40 (5200), 44 (5220), 48 (5240), 52 (5260), 56 (5280), 60 (5300), 64 (5320), 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805) 36 (5180), 40 (5200), 44 (5220), 48 (5240), 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805), 165 (5825) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 36 (5180), 38 (5190), 40 (5200), 42 (5210), 44 (5220), 46 (5230), 48 (5240), 50 (5250), 52 (5260), 54 (5270), 56 (5280), 58 (5290), 60 (5300), 62 (5310), 64 (5320), 66 (5330), 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815) 36 (5180), 38 (5190), 40 (5200), 42 (5210), 44 (5220), 46 (5230), 48 (5240), 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 36 (5180), 37 (5185), 38 (5190), 39 (5195), 40 (5200), 41 (5205), 42 (5210), 43 (5215), 44 (5220), 45 (5225), 46 (5230), 47 (5235), 48 (5240), 49 (5245), 50 (5250), 51 (5255), 52 (5260), 53 (5265), 54 (5270), 55 (5275), 56 (5280), 57 (5285), 58 (5290), 59 (5295), 60 (5300), 61 (5305), 62 (5310), 63 (5315), 64 (5320), 65 (5325), 66 (5330), 67 (5335), 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815) 36 (5180), 37 (5185), 38 (5190), 39 (5195), 40 (5200), 41 (5205), 42 (5210), 43 (5215), 44 (5220), 45 (5225), 46 (5230), 47 (5235), 48 (5240), 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 183 Country Codes and Channels 5 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country MP.11-R Installation and Management Country (Code) Frequency Bands DFS South Africa (ZA) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes Spain (ES) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes Sweden (SE) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes Switzerland (CH) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes 20 MHz 10 MHz 5 MHz Allowed Channels (Center Freq) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 184 Country Codes and Channels 5 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country MP.11-R Installation and Management Country (Code) Frequency Bands DFS Taiwan (158) 5.25 - 5.35 GHz and 5.725 - 5.825 GHz No 56 (5280), 60 (5300), 64 (5320), 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805) 20 MHz 10 MHz 5 MHz Allowed Channels (Center Freq) Thailand (TH) 5.725 - 5.825 GHz No 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805) United Kingdom (GB) 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) United Kingdom 5.8 GHz (G1) 5.725 - 5.85 GHz Yes 147 (5735), 151 (5755), 155 (5775), 167 (5835) United States (US) 5.725 - 5.85 GHz No 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805), 165 (5825) 54 (5270), 56 (5280), 58 (5290), 60 (5300), 62 (5310), 64 (5320), 66 (5330), 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815) 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815) 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 145 (5725), 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835), 169 (5845) 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815), 165 (5825), 167 (5835) 53 (5265), 54 (5270), 55 (5275), 56 (5280), 57 (5285), 58 (5290), 59 (5295), 60 (5300), 61 (5305), 62 (5310), 63 (5315), 64 (5320), 65 (5325), 66 (5330), 67 (5335), 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815) 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815) 97 (5485), 98 (5490), 99 (5495), 100 (5500), 101 (5505), 102 (5510), 103 (5515), 104 (5520), 105 (5525), 106 (5530), 107 (5535), 108 (5540), 109 (5545), 110 (5550), 111 (5555), 112 (5560), 113 (5565), 114 (5570), 115 (5575), 116 (5580), 117 (5585), 118 (5590), 119 (5595), 120 (5600), 121 (5605), 122 (5610), 123 (5615), 124 (5620), 125 (5625), 126 (5630), 127 (5635), 128 (5640), 129 (5645), 130 (5650), 131 (5655), 132 (5660), 133 (5665), 134 (5670), 135 (5675), 136 (5680), 137 (5685), 138 (5690), 139 (5695), 140 (5700), 141 (5705), 142 (5710) 145 (5725), 146 (5730), 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835), 168 (5840), 169 (5845), 170 (5850) 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815), 164 (5820), 165 (5825), 166 (5830), 167 (5835) 185 Country Codes and Channels 5 GHz Channels/Frequencies by Country MP.11-R Installation and Management Country (Code) Frequency Bands DFS United States DFS (U1) 5.25 - 5.35 GHz and 5.47 - 5.725 GHz Yes 20 MHz 56 (5280), 60 (5300), 64 (5320), 100 (5500), 104 (5520), 108 (5540), 112 (5560), 116 (5580), 120 (5600), 124 (5620), 128 (5640), 132 (5660), 136 (5680), 140 (5700) Uruguay (UY) 5.725 - 5.825 GHz No 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805) Venezuela (VE) 5.725 - 5.825 GHz No 149 (5745), 153 (5765), 157 (5785), 161 (5805) Allowed Channels (Center Freq) 10 MHz 54 (5270), 56 (5280), 58 (5290), 60 (5300), 62 (5310), 64 (5320), 66 (5330), 98 (5490), 100 (5500), 102 (5510), 104 (5520), 106 (5530), 108 (5540), 110 (5550), 112 (5560), 114 (5570), 116 (5580), 118 (5590), 120 (5600), 122 (5610), 124 (5620), 126 (5630), 128 (5640), 130 (5650), 132 (5660), 134 (5670), 136 (5680), 138 (5690), 140 (5700), 142 (5710) 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815) 147 (5735), 149 (5745), 151 (5755), 153 (5765), 155 (5775), 157 (5785), 159 (5795), 161 (5805), 163 (5815) 5 MHz NA 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815) 147 (5735), 148 (5740), 149 (5745), 150 (5750), 151 (5755), 152 (5760), 153 (5765), 154 (5770), 155 (5775), 156 (5780), 157 (5785), 158 (5790), 159 (5795), 160 (5800), 161 (5805), 162 (5810), 163 (5815) 186 Country Codes and Channels 4.9 GHz Channels/Frequencies 4.9 GHz Channels/Frequencies MP.11-R Installation and Management Frequency Bands 4.940 -4.990 GHz Allowed Channels (Center Frequency) 5 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz 5 (4942.5), 15 (4947.5), 25 (4952.5), 35 (4957.5), 45 (4962), 55 (4967.5), 65 (4972.5), 75 (4977.5), 85 (4982.5), 95 (4987.5) 10 (4945), 20 (4950), 30 (4955), 40 (4960), 50 (4965), 60 (4970), 70 (4975), 80 (4980), 90 (4985) 20 (4950), 30 (4955), 40 (4960), 50 (4965), 60 (4970), 70 (4975), 80 (4980) 187 Technical Specifications MP.11-R Installation and Management B Interfaces Integrated Antenna Specifications Please see the following sections:
Part Numbers Regulatory Approvals and Frequency Ranges OFDM Modulation Rates Wireless Protocol Receive Sensitivity Maximum Throughput Latency Transmit Power Settings Range Information Hardware Specifications Software Features Management LEDs Power Requirements Physical and Environmental Specifications MTBF and Warranty 188 Technical Specifications Part Numbers Part Numbers Radio Units North America Region Model 2454-R Base Station Unit Part Number MP.11-R Installation and Management Description 2454-BSUR-US-WORLD Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector US PSU -WORLD Subscriber Unit Part Number 2454-SUA-US-WORLD 2454-SUR-US-WORLD Model 5054-R Base Station Unit Part Number 5054-BSUR-US Subscriber Unit Part Number 5054-SUA-US 5054-SUR-US Model 5054-R-LR Base Station Unit Part Number 5054-BSUR-LR-US 5054-BSUR-LR-US-
WORLD Subscriber Unit Part Number 5054-SUA-LR-US 5054-SUA-LR-WORLD 5054-SUR-LR-US 5054-SUR-LR-WORLD Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector US PSU -WORLD Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 16-dBi Antenna US PSU -
WORLD Description Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector US PSU Description Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector US PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 23-dBi Antenna US PSU Description Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R-LR Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector US PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R-LR Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector World Description Description Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector US PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector World Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 23-dBi Antenna US PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 23-dBi Antenna World 189 Technical Specifications Part Numbers Model 4954-R Base Station Unit Part Number 4954-BSUR-US 4954-BSUR-WORLD Subscriber Unit Part Number 4954-SUA-US 4954-SUR-US MP.11-R Installation and Management Tsunami MP.11 Model 4954-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector US PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 4954-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector, World Description Tsunami MP.11 Model 4954-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector US PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 4954-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 21 dBi Antenna US PSU Description Europe and Middle East Regions Model 2454-R Base Station Unit Part Number 2454-BSUR-EU 2454-BSUR-UK Subscriber Unit Part Number 2454-SUA-EU 2454-SUA-UK 2454-SUR-EU 2454-SUR-UK Model 5054-R Base Station Unit Part Number 5054-BSUR-EU 5054-BSUR-UK Subscriber Unit Part Number 5054-SUA-EU 5054-SUA-UK 5054-SUR-EU 5054-SUR-UK Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector Europe PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector UK PSU Description Description Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector Europe PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector UK PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 16-dBi Antenna Europe PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 16-dBi Antenna UK PSU Description Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector Europe PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector UK PSU Description Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector Europe PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector UK PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 23-dBi Antenna Europe PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 23-dBi Antenna UK PSU 190 Technical Specifications Part Numbers Asia Pacific Region Model 2454-R Base Station Unit Part Number 2454-BSUR-AU 2454-BSUR-UK 2454-BSUR-US 2454-BSUR-EU 2454-BSUR-CN 2454-BSUR-SK 2454-BSUR-US-WORLD Subscriber Unit Part Number 2454-SUA-AU 2454-SUA-UK 2454-SUA-US 2454-SUA-EU 2454-SUA-CN 2454-SUA-SK 2454-SUA-US WORLD 2454-SUR-AU 2454-SUR-UK 2454-SUR-US 2454-SUR-EU 2454-SUR-CN 2454-SUR-SK 2454-SUR-US-WORLD MP.11-R Installation and Management Description Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector Australia PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector UK PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector US PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector Europe PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector China PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector South Korea PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector US/CAN PSU WORLD Description Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector Australia PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector UK PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector US PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector EU PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector China PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector South Korea PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector US/CAN PSU WORLD Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 16-dBi Antenna Australia PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 16-dBi Antenna UK PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 16-dBi Antenna US PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 16-dBi Antenna EU PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 16-dBi Antenna China PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 16-dBi Antenna South Korea PS Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 16-dBi Antenna US/
CAN PSU - WORLD 191 Technical Specifications Part Numbers Model 5054-R Base Station Unit Part Number 5054-BSUR-AU 5054-BSUR-UK 5054-BSUR-US 5054-BSUR-EU 5054-BSUR-US-WORLD Subscriber Unit Part Number 5054-SUA-AU 5054-SUA-UK 5054-SUA-US 5054-SUA-EU 5054-SUA-US-WORLD 5054-SUR-AU 5054-SUR-UK 5054-SUR-US 5054-SUR-EU 5054-SUR-US-WORLD MP.11-R Installation and Management Description Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector Australia PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector UK PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector US PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector Europe PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector US/CAN PSU - WORLD Description Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector Australia PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector UK PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector US PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector EU PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector US/CAN PSU - WORLD Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 23-dBi Antenna Australia PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 23-dBi Antenna UK PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 23-dBi Antenna US PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 23-dBi Antenna EU PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 23-dBi Antenna US/
CAN PSU - WORLD Caribbean and Latin America Region Model 2454-R Base Station Unit Part Number 2454-BSUR-BR 2454-BSUR-US-WORLD Subscriber Unit Part Number 2454-SUA-US 2454-SUA-US-WORLD Description Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector Brazil PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector US/CAN PSU - WORLD Description Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector US PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector US/CAN PSU - WORLD 192 Technical Specifications Part Numbers Part Number 2454-SUR-US 2454-SUR-US-WORLD Model 5054-R Base Station Unit Part Number 5054-BSUR-US 5054-BSUR-BR Subscriber Unit Part Number 5054-SUA-US 5054-SUA-BR 5054-SUR-US 5054-SUR-BR Accessories Surge Arrestors/Cables Part Number 5054-SURGE 848 274 171 848 332 789 5054-ULA400-50 848 274 205 69828 5054-LMR600-50 70251 Power Injector Part Number MP.11-R Installation and Management Description Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 23-dBi Antenna US PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector US/CAN PSU - WORLD Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector US PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Base Station Unit with Type-N Connector Brazil PSU Description Description Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector US PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector Brazil PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 23-dBi Antenna US PSU Tsunami MP.11 Model 5054-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 23-dBi Antenna Brazil PSU Description Surge Arrestor 0-6 GHz - Standard-N Female to Female 20 ft Low Loss Antenna Cable St-N - Male-Male LMR 200 20 ft Low Loss Antenna Cable St-N - Male-Male LMR 400 50 ft Low Loss Antenna Cable St-N - Male-Male LMR 400 75 ft Low Loss Antenna Cable St-N - Male-Male LMR 400 6 ft Low Loss Antenna Cable St-N - Male-Male LMR 600 50 ft Low Loss Antenna Cable St-N - Male-Male LMR 600 PoE (Power over Ethernet) Surge Arrestor for Tsunami MP.11 and QuickBridge.11 Description 69823 Spare Power DC Injector for Tsunami MP.11 or QB.11 (-R model ONLY) Outdoor Ethernet Cables Part Number 69819 69820 Description 25m outdoor, terminated CAT5 cable for Tsunami MP.11 or QB.11 with three RJ-45 and one weather-proof Ethernet port cap 50m outdoor, terminated CAT5 cable for Tsunami MP.11 or QB.11 with three RJ-45 and one weather-proof Ethernet port cap 193 Technical Specifications MP.11-R Installation and Management Part Number 69821 External Antennas 2.4 GHz Antennas Part Number 848 515 722 848 312 591 848 515 698 848 515 706 848 515 714 2400-SA60-14 10860PA24-14 5 GHz Antennas Part Number 5054-PA-18 5054-PA-23 5054-OA-8 5054-OA-10 5054-SA120-14 5054-SA60-17 75m outdoor, terminated CAT5 cable for Tsunami MP.11 or QB.11 with three RJ-45 and one weather-proof Ethernet port cap Description Description 5 dBi Omni-Directional Vehicle Antenna w/Integrated 250 cm cable 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna - St-N Female 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna - St-N Female 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna (120 degrees) - St-N Female 24 dBi Directional Antenna (Parabolic Grid) - St-N Female 4 dBi Directional sector antenna (60 degrees) 2.4 GHz St-N Female 14 dBi Panel Antenna St-N-Female Description 18 dBi Panel Antenna - St-N Female - 5.25 - 5.875 GHz 23 dBi Panel Antenna - St-N Female - 5.725 - 5.875 GHz 8 dBi Omni Directional Antenna - St-N Female - 5.47-5.850 GHz 10 dBi Omni Directional Antenna - St-N Female - 5.47-5.850 GHz 14 dBi Sector Antenna - St-N Female - 5.25-5.850 GHz - 120 degrees 17 dBi Sector Antenna - St-N Female - 5.25-5.850 GHz - 60 degrees 194 Technical Specifications Regulatory Approvals and Frequency Ranges Regulatory Approvals and Frequency Ranges Model 2454-R Regulatory Approval and Frequency Ranges MP.11-R Installation and Management Region/Country Country GHz Number of Channels Certification North America USA Canada Mexico Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Latvia Luxemburg Lithuania Malta Netherlands Poland Portugal Spain Sweden Slovakia Slovenia United Kingdom Iceland Liechtenstein Norway Switzerland Brazil EU Countries Other European Countries South America 5 MHz 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.472 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.472 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.472 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 11 13 11 13 11 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 10 MHz Up to 11 Up to 13 Up to 11 Up to 13 Up to 11 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 20 MHz Up to 11 Up to 13 Up to 11 Up to 13 Up to 11 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes In Process 195 Technical Specifications Regulatory Approvals and Frequency Ranges Model 2454-R Regulatory Approval and Frequency Ranges (continued) MP.11-R Installation and Management Region/Country Country GHz Number of Channels Certification APAC New Zealand Japan Hong Kong S. Korea China Taiwan 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 2.40 - 2.4835 13 13 13 13 13 13 5 MHz 10 MHz Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 20 MHz Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Up to 13 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 196 Technical Specifications Regulatory Approvals and Frequency Ranges MP.11-R Installation and Management Model 5054-R Regulatory Approval and Frequency Ranges Region/Country Country GHz Number of Channels Certification North America USA EU Countries Other European Countries Canada Mexico Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Latvia Lithuania Luxemburg Malta Netherlands Poland Portugal Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden United Kingdom Iceland Liechtenstein Norway Russia Switzerland 5.25 - 5.35 5.47 - 5.725 5.725 - 5.85 5.25 - 5.35 5.47 - 5.725 5.725 - 5.85 5.725 - 5.85 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.725 - 5.85 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.725 - 5.85 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.47 - 5.70 5.15 - 5.85 5.47 - 5.70 5 MHz 10 MHz Up to 30 NA Up to 30 NA Up to 11 Up to 21 Up to 30 Up to 61 Up to 30 Up to 61 Up to 11 Up to 21 Up to 11 Up to 21 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 11 Up to 23 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 11 Up to 23 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 46 Up to 46 Up to 23 Up to 141 Up to 71 Up to 46 Up to 23 20 MHz Up to 14 Up to 14 Up to 5 Up to 14 Up to 14 Up to 5 Up to 5 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 4 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 4 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 36 Up to 11 In Process In Process Yes In Process In Process Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes In Process Yes 197 Technical Specifications Integrated Antenna Specifications Model 5054-R Regulatory Approval and Frequency Ranges (continued) MP.11-R Installation and Management Region/Country Country GHz Number of Channels Certification South America Argentina APAC Brazil Colombia Australia China Hong Kong India New Zealand S. Korea Singapore Taiwan 5.25 - 5.35 5.725 - 5.85 5.47 - 5.70 5.725 - 5.85 5.25 - 5.35 5.725 - 5.85 5.725 - 5.85 5.725 - 5.85 5.725 - 5.85 5.15 - 5.35 5.725 - 5.85 5.725 - 5.85 5.725 - 5.85 5.15 - 5.25 5.725 - 5.85 5.25 - 5.35 5.725 - 5.85 5 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz Up to 9 Up to 19 Up to 46 Up to 19 Up to 15 Up to 21 Up to 21 Up to 17 Up to 21 Up to 32 Up to 17 Up to 21 Up to 17 Up to 13 Up to 17 Up to 15 Up to 17 Up to 5 Up to 10 Up to 23 Up to 10 Up to 7 Up to 11 Up to 11 Up to 9 Up to 11 Up to 16 Up to 9 Up to 11 Up to 9 Up to 7 Up to 9 Up to 7 Up to 9 Up to 3 Up to 5 Up to 11 Up to 5 Up to 3 Up to 5 Up to 5 Up to 5 Up to 5 Up to 7 Up to 5 Up to 5 Up to 5 Up to 4 Up to 5 Up to 3 Up to 5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes In Process Yes Yes In Process Yes Model 5054-R-LR Regulatory Approval and Frequency Ranges Region/Country Country GHz Number of Channels Certification North America USA 5.25 - 5.35 5.47 - 5.725 5.725 - 5.85 5 MHz Up to 61 Up to 61 Up to 21 10 MHz Up to 30 Up to 30 Up to 11 20 MHz Up to 14 Up to 14 Up to 5 In Process In Process Yes Model 4954-R Regulatory Approval and Frequency Ranges Region/Country Country GHz Number of Channels Certification North America USA 4.940-4.990 5 MHz Up to 10 10 MHz 20 MHz Up to 9 Up to 7 Yes Integrated Antenna Specifications Model 2454-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 16-dBi Antenna Specification Feature Part Number Frequency range Nominal Impedance Gain Front-to-Back Ratio HPBW/vertical 2454-SUR-xx 2.4 to 2.5 GHz 50 Ohms 16 dBi 25 dB 22 degrees 198 Technical Specifications Integrated Antenna Specifications Feature HPBW/horizontal Cross Polarization Power handling VSWR 15 degrees 20 dB 1 W 1.5 : 1 Max MP.11-R Installation and Management Specification Model 5054-R/5054-R-LR Subscriber Unit with Integrated 23-dBi Antenna Specification Feature Part Number Frequency range Nominal Impedance Gain Front-to-Back Ratio HPBW/vertical HPBW/horizontal Cross Polarization Power handling VSWR 5054-SUR-xx 5250 - 5875 MHz 50 ohms 23 dBi 35 dB 9 degrees 9 degrees 23 dB 1 W (cw) 2.0: 1 Max 4954-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 21-dBi Antenna Specification Feature Part Number Frequency range Nominal Impedance Gain Front-to-Back Ratio HPBW/vertical HPBW/horizontal Cross Polarization Power handling VSWR 4954-SUR-xx 4900 - 5100 MHz 50 ohms 21 dBi 35 dB 10 degrees 10 degrees 22 dB 1 W (cw) 1.5: 1 Max 199 Technical Specifications OFDM Modulation Rates OFDM Modulation Rates NOTE: Maximum packet size: 1526 Bytes MP.11-R Installation and Management Modulation Rate 20 MHz Channels 10 MHz Channels 5 MHz Channels BPSK QPSK 16-QAM 64-QAM 6 and 9 Mbps 12 and 18 Mbps 24 and 36 Mbps 48 and 54 Mbps 3 and 4.5 Mbps 6 and 9 Mbps 12 and 18 Mbps 24 and 36 Mbps 2.25 and 1.5 Mbps 3 and 4.5 Mbps 6 and 9 Mbps 12 and 18 Mbps Wireless Protocol Category Wireless Protocol Worp (Wireless Outdoor Router Protocol Specification Specification Auto-sensing 10/100BASE-TX Ethernet RJ11 port built-into the unit, DB9 Female via a converter included Standard Type-N Female Interfaces Category Wired Ethernet Serial Connector Antenna Connector for BSU and SU with Type-N Connector Receive Sensitivity NOTE: BER=10-6 Model 2454-R Modulation 64QAM 64QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK BPSK BPSK Model 5054-R Modulation 64QAM 64QAM 20 MHz Channels 10 MHz Channels
-71 dBm @ 54 Mbps
-74 dBm @ 48 Mbps
-79 dBm @ 36 Mbps
-84 dBm @ 24 Mbps
-87 dBm @ 18 Mbps
-89 dBm @ 12 Mbps
-91 dBm @ 9 Mbps
-91 dBm @ 6 Mbps
-74 dBm @ 27 Mbps
-77 dBm @ 24 Mbps
-82 dBm @18 Mbps
-87 dBm @12 Mbps
-90 dBm @ 9 Mbps
-92 dBm @ 6 Mbps
-94 dBm @ 4.5 Mbps
-94 dBm @ 3 Mbps 5 MHz Channels
-77 dBm @ 18 Mbps
-80 dBm @ 12 Mbps
-85 dBm @ 9 Mbps
-90 dBm @ 6 Mbps
-93 dBm @ 4.5 Mbps
-95 dBm @ 3 Mbps
-97 dBm @ 2.25 Mbps
-97 dBm @ 1.5 Mbps 40 MHz Channels Turbo Mode
(US Non-DFS Only)
-66 dBm @ 108 Mbps
-68 dBm @ 96 Mbps 20 MHz Channels Standard Mode 10 MHz Channels Standard Mode 5 MHz Channels Standard Mode
-69 dBm @ 54 Mbps
-72 dBm @ 48 Mbps
-72 dBm @ 36 Mbps
-75 dBm @ 24 Mbps
-75 dBm @ 18 Mbps
-78 dBm @ 12 Mbps 200 Technical Specifications Maximum Throughput MP.11-R Installation and Management Modulation 40 MHz Channels Turbo Mode
(US Non-DFS Only) 20 MHz Channels Standard Mode 10 MHz Channels Standard Mode 5 MHz Channels Standard Mode 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK BPSK BPSK
-75dBm @ 72 Mbps
-78dBm @ 48 Mbps
-81dBm @ 36 Mbps
-83 dBm @ 24 Mbps
-84 dBm @ 18 Mbps
-85 dBm @ 12 Mbps
-77 dBm @ 36 Mbps
-80 dBm @ 24 Mbps
-83 dBm @ 18 Mbps
-86 dBm @ 12 Mbps
-87 dBm @ 9 Mbps
-88 dBm @ 6 Mbps
-80 dBm @ 18 Mbps
-83 dBm @ 12 Mbps
-86 dBm @ 9 Mbps
-89 dBm @ 6 Mbps
-90 dBm @ 4.5 Mbps
-91 dBm @ 3 Mbps
-83 dBm @ 9 Mbps
-86 dBm @ 6 Mbps
-89 dBm @ 4.5 Mbps
-92 dBm @ 3 Mbps
-93 dBm @ 2.25 Mbps
-94 dBm @ 1.5 Mbps Model 5054-R-LR Modulation 64QAM 64QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK BPSK BPSK 40 MHz Channels Turbo Mode
(US Non-DFS Only)
-70 dBm @ 108 Mbps
-72 dBm @ 96 Mbps
-74 dBm @ 72 Mbps
-78 dBm @ 48 Mbps
-81 dBm @ 36 Mbps
-83 dBm @ 24 Mbps
-84 dBm @ 18 Mbps
-85 dBm @ 12 Mbps 20 MHz Channels Standard Mode 10 MHz Channels Standard Mode 5 MHz Channels Standard Mode
-73 dBm @ 54 Mbps
-75 dBm @ 48 Mbps
-84 dBm @ 36 Mbps
-85 dBm @ 24 Mbps
-89 dBm @ 18 Mbps
-90 dBm @ 12 Mbps
-93 dBm @ 9 Mbps
-94 dBm @ 6 Mbps
-73 dBm @ 36 Mbps
-76 dBm @ 24 Mbps
-81 dBm @ 18 Mbps
-84 dBm @ 12 Mbps
-87 dBm @ 9 Mbps
-90 dBm @ 6 Mbps
-81 dBm @ 4.5 Mbps
-91 dBm @ 3 Mbps
-76 dBm @ 18 Mbps
-79 dBm @ 12 Mbps
-83 dBm @ 9 Mbps
-86 dBm @ 6 Mbps
-89 dBm @ 4.5 Mbps
-92 dBm @ 3 Mbps
-93 dBm @ 2.25 Mbps
-95 dBm @ 1.5 Mbps Model 4954-R Modulation 64QAM 64QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK BPSK BPSK 20 MHz Channels 10 MHz Channels
-71.4 dBm @ 54 Mbps
-72.9 dBm @ 48 Mbps
-79.3 dBm @ 36 Mbps
-82.4 dBm @ 24 Mbps
-86.2 dBm @ 18 Mbps
-88.2 dBm @ 12 Mbps
-90.2 dBm @ 9 Mbps
-91.2 dBm @ 6 Mbps
-76.2 dBm @ 27 Mbps
-82.2 dBm @ 24 Mbps
-83.3 dBm @ 18 Mbps
-87 dBm @ 12 Mbps
-90 dBm @ 9 Mbps
-92 dBm @ 6 Mbps
-93 dBm @ 4.5 Mbps
-94 dBm @ 3 Mbps 5 MHz Channels
-78.4 dBm @ 13.5 Mbps
-79.9 dBm @ 12 Mbps
-86.3 dBm @ 9 Mbps
-90 dBm @ 6 Mbps
-93 dBm @ 4.5 Mbps
-95 dBm @ 3 Mbps
-96 dBm @ 2.25 Mbps
-97 dBm @ 1.5 Mbps Maximum Throughput NOTE: Actual throughput performance in the field may vary. Model 2454-R Data Rate 54 Mbps 48 Mbps 36 Mbps 24 Mbps 20 MHz Channels 30 Mbps 28 Mbps 18 Mbps 14 Mbps 10 MHz Channels 5 MHz Channels 201 Technical Specifications Maximum Throughput MP.11-R Installation and Management Data Rate 18 Mbps 12 Mbps 9 Mbps 6 Mbps 4.5 Mbps 3 Mbps 2.25 Mbps 1 Mbps 20 MHz Channels 12 Mbps 9 Mbps 7 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 MHz Channels 12 Mbps 9 Mbps 7 Mbps 5 Mbps 4 Mbps 2 Mbps 5 MHz Channels 6.8 Mbps 5 Mbps 4 Mbps 2.7 Mbps 2 Mbps 1.4 Mbps Model 5054-R/5054-R-LR Data Rate 108 Mbps Turbo 54 96 Mbps Turbo 48 72 Mbps Turbo 36 48 Mbps Turbo 24 36 Mbps Turbo 18 24 Mbps Turbo 12 54 Mbps 48 Mbps 36 Mbps 24 Mbps 18 Mbps 12 Mbps 9 Mbps 6 Mbps 4.5 Mbps 3 Mbps 2.25 Mbps 1 Mbps Model 4954-R 40 MHz Channels Turbo Mode
(US Non-DFS Only) 35 Mbps 35 Mbps 35 Mbps 27 Mbps 22 Mbps 16 Mbps 20 MHz Channels Standard Mode 10 MHz Channels Standard Mode 5 MHz Channels Standard Mode 29 Mbps 27 Mbps 22 Mbps 16 Mbps 13 Mbps 9 Mbps 7 Mbps 5 Mbps 16 Mbps 13 Mbps 9 Mbps 7 Mbps 5 Mbps 3.6 Mbps 2.4 Mbps 7 Mbps 4.7 Mbps 3.8 Mbps 2.7 Mbps 2 Mbps 1.2 Mbps Data Rate 20 MHz Channels 10 MHz Channels 5 MHz Channels 54 Mbps 48 Mbps 36 Mbps 24 Mbps 18 Mbps 29 Mbps 27 Mbps 22 Mbps 16 Mbps 13 Mbps 16 Mbps 13 Mbps 202 Technical Specifications Latency MP.11-R Installation and Management Data Rate 20 MHz Channels 10 MHz Channels 5 MHz Channels 12 Mbps 9 Mbps 6 Mbps 4.5 Mbps 3 Mbps 2.25 Mbps 1 Mbps Latency 9 Mbps 7 Mbps 5 Mbps 9 Mbps 7 Mbps 5 Mbps 3.6 Mbps 2.4 Mbps 7 Mbps 4.7 Mbps 3.8 Mbps 2.7 Mbps 2 Mbps 1.2 Mbps Category Typical at Max Throughput 10 ms (as measured with test equipment under controlled lab conditions and best performing packet size) Specification Transmit Power Settings Output Power Attenuation: 0 - 18 dB, in 1 dB steps Output Power Values will have a tolerance of +- 1.5 dB Model 2454-R Frequency 6-24 Mbps @ 20 MHz 16QAM ; QPSK ;
QPSK ; BPSK ;
BPSK 36 Mbps @ 20 MHz 16QAM 48 Mbps @ 20 MHz 64QAM 54 Mbps @ 20 MHz 64QAM 2.400-2.483 GHz 16 dBm 16 dBm 14 dBm 13 dBm Model 5054-R Frequency 6-24 Mbps @ 20 MHz 16QAM ; QPSK ;
QPSK ; BPSK ;
BPSK 36 Mbps @ 20 MHz 16QAM 48 Mbps @ 20 MHz 64QAM 54 Mbps @ 20 MHz 64QAM 5.25-5.35 GHz 5.47-5.725 GHz 5.725-5.850 GHz 15 dBm 16 dBm 16 dBm 13 dBm 13 dBm 13 dBm 12 dBm 12 dBm 12 dBm 11 dBm 11 dBm 11 dBm Model 5054-R-LR Frequency 6-24 Mbps @ 20 MHz 16QAM ; QPSK ;
QPSK ; BPSK ;
BPSK 36 Mbps @ 20 MHz 16QAM 48 Mbps @ 20 MHz 64QAM 54 Mbps @ 20 MHz 64QAM 5.25 - 5.35 GHz 5.725 - 5.85 GHz 20 dBm 25 dBm 20 dBm 23 dBm 20 dBm 22 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 203 Technical Specifications Range Information Model 4954-R Frequency 6-24 Mbps @ 20 MHz 16QAM ; QPSK ;
QPSK ; BPSK ;
BPSK MP.11-R Installation and Management 36 Mbps @ 20 MHz 16QAM 48 Mbps @ 20 MHz 64QAM 54 Mbps @ 20 MHz 64QAM 4.945-4.990 GHz 16 dBm 15 dBm 14 dBm 13 dBm Range Information Model 2454-R Frequency 54 Mbps 36 Mbps 6 Mbps 2.4-2.4835 GHz (US) 3 mi/4.8 km 2.4-2.8 GHz (ETSI) 1 mi/1.6 km Note: Minimum fade margin; 99.995% or better availability; average terrain/climate; no unusual mulitpath; proper path clearance (0.6F1) 3 mi/4.8 km 2.6 mi/4.2 km 5 mi/8.05 km 2.6 mi/4.2 km Model 5054-R Frequency 54 Mbps 36 Mbps 6 Mbps 5.25-5.35 GHz (US) 5.47-5.7GHz (ETSI) 5.725-5.850 (US) Note: Minimum fade margin; 99.995% or better availability; average terrain/climate; no unusual mulitpath; proper path clearance (0.6F1). Dis-
3 mi/4.8 km 2.1 mi/3.8km 3 mi/4.8 km 3 mi/4.8 km 3 mi/4.8 km 3 mi/4.8 km 6 mi/9.6 km 6 mi/9.6 km 6 mi/9.6 km tance calculations for 5 MHz and 10 MHz are comparable for ETSI regulatory domains. Proper TPC settings (-9 dB @ 20 MHz, -12 dB @
10 MHz, -15 dB @ 5 MHz) should be set to meet power density rules. Increased distances are possible in the US with proper engineering. Model 5054-R-LR Frequency 54 Mbps 36 Mbps 6 Mbps 5 mi/8.05 km 5.25 - 5.35 GHz (US) 5.725 - 5.85 GHz (ETSI) 5 mi/8.05 km Note: Ranges calculated with a minimum of 15 dB theoretical system operating margin with a 20 MHz bandwidth. Assumes the integrated 23 dBi 5 mi/8.05 km 20 mi/32 km 6 mi/9.6 km 20 mi/32 km antenna is used at each end, the link has clear line of site, proper path clearance (0.6F1), average terrain/climate, and no unusual multi-
path. US values presume transmit power is reduced to -3 dBm to comply with FCC EIRP limitations. ETSI values presume transmit power is set to maximum, which complies with regulations. Model 4954-R Frequency 54 Mbps 1.0 mi/1.6 km 4.940 - 4.990 GHz Note: 6 Mbps uses 24 dBi external antenna Hardware Specifications 36 Mbps 3 mi/4.8 km 6 Mbps 10 mi/16.1 km Category Processor Memory Specification 166 MHz Motorola 8241 processor Flash: 8 MB; RAM: 16 MB 204 Technical Specifications Software Features Software Features Category Key Features Bridging and Routing Filtering Services VLAN Security Features MP.11-R Installation and Management Specification Integrity Check for Software Upload IP/ RIPv1 (RFC 1058) IP/ RIPv2 (RFC 1388) WORP protocol Dynamic Data Rate Selection (Configured on BSU) Transmit Power Control Antenna Alignment (CLI output) Mobility with Auto-scanning QoS Support; up to 8 classes of service, up to 8 service flows per class (BSU only) Satellite Density Enhanced Dynamic Frequency Selection (Configured on BSU) Redundancy Spanning Tree (802.1D) Bridge (802.1d) CIDR (RFC 1519) ICMP (RFC 792) IP (RFC 791) ARP (RFC 826) Ethernet protocol (Ethertype) Static MAC Storm threshold Broadcast protocol DHCP Server (RFC 2131) DHCP Client (RFC 2131) Bi-Directional Bandwidth Control NAT (RFC 3022) (Configured on SU) DHCP Relay (RFC 2131) (Configured on SU) 802.1Q (Configured on BSU) Critical feature support via WORP for secure long-range wireless deployments in Intra Cell Blocking (Configured on BSU) IP address unlicensed frequency spectrum MD5 (embedded in WORP) authentication between BSU and SU Filter based on packet information such as unicast/multicast/ broadcast MAC or IP MAC Authentication (Configured on BSU) Secure over the air encryption with WEP, WEP+, and AES, and AES-CCB RADIUS MAC Access Control (Configured on BSU) RADIUS (RFC 2138) Intra-cell blocking to allow the BSU to act as the central policy enforcer for SU to SU communications Management Category Specification Local RS-232 Serial port (RJ11 port built-into the unit; DB9 female via a converter, included) 205 Technical Specifications LEDs Category Remote SNMP MP.11-R Installation and Management Specification HTTP Server (RFC 2616); Telnet (RFC 855), TFTP Client (RFC 783), Link Test, SU/BSU Statistics, temperature logging, remote reboot/reset SNMPv1/v2 (RFC 1157); SNMPv2c (RFC 1907); MIB-II (RFC 1213); Ethernet-like MIB
(RFC 1643); BridgeMIB (RFC 1483); 802.3MAU (RFC 2668); 802.11 MIB; Private MIB;
ORiNOCO MIB LEDs Types Category Specification Two indicators on RJ45 connector to indicate:
Power Wireless Activity Ethernet Activity Power Requirements Category Power-over-Ethernet Outdoor Radio Unit Specification Input: Voltage 110 to 250 VAC (47-63Hz) Custom Power over Ethernet (802.3af compatible) Output: 48V @ 420mA MAX (injected into the Cat-5 Cable) Power Consumption: 7.5W typical. Up to 20 Watts across full operating temperature range. Input: Voltage 42 to 60 VDC Physical and Environmental Specifications Category Physical Dimensions (unpackaged) Weight (unpackaged) Specification All Base Station and Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector:
10.5 in x 10.5 in x 3.25 in (267 mm x 267 mm x 83 mm) Subscriber Unit with Integrated 23 dBi or 21 dBi Antenna:
12.60 in x 12.60 in x 3.50 in (320 mm x 320 mm x 89 mm) Model 2454-R/5054-R/5054-R-LR Base Station and Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector:
5.5 lbs (2.49 kg) Unit-only; .45 lbs (.20 kg) for power supply Model 4954-R Base Station and Subscriber Unit with Type-N Connector:
6.5 lbs (2.9 kg) Unit-only; .45 lbs (.20 kg) for power supply Model 2454-R/5054-R/5054-R-LR Subscriber Unit with Integrated 23 dBi Antenna:
6.0 lbs (2.72 kg) Unit-only,.45 lbs (.20 kg) for power supply Model 4954-R Subscriber Unit with Integrated 21 dBi Antenna:
7.0 lbs (3.18 kg) Unit-only,.45 lbs (.20 kg) for power supply Environmental Storage Temperature Operating Temperature Humidity Wind Loading
-55 to 80C (-41 to 176 Fahrenheit)
-33 to 60C (-27.5 to 140 Fahrenheit) 100%
125 m.p.h 206 Technical Specifications MTBF and Warranty MTBF and Warranty Category MTBF Warranty
>100,000 hours 1 year parts and labor Specification MP.11-R Installation and Management 207 Lightning Protection MP.11-R Installation and Management C Lightning protection is used to maximize the reliability of communications equipment by safely re-directing current from a lightning strike or a power surge traveling along the Cat 5 Ethernet cabling to ground using the shortest path possible. Designing a proper grounding system prior to installing any communications equipment is critical to minimize the possibility of equipment damage, void warranties, and cause serious injury. The surge arrestor (sometimes referred to as a lightning protector) can protect your sensitive electronic equipment from high-voltage surges caused by discharges and transients at the PoE. Proxim Wireless offers superior lightning and surge protection for Tsunami MP.11 and Tsunami QuickBridge.11 products. Contact your reseller or distributor for more information. 208 Technical Services and Support Obtaining Technical Services and Support MP.11-R Installation and Management D If you are having trouble utilizing your Proxim product, please review this manual and the additional documentation provided with your product. If you require additional support and would like to use Proxims free Technical Service to help resolve your issue, please be ready to provide the following information before you contact Proxims Technical Services:
Product information:
Part number of suspected faulty unit Serial number of suspected faulty unit Trouble/error information:
Trouble/symptom being experienced Activities completed to confirm fault Network information (what kind of network are you using?) Circumstances that preceded or led up to the error Message or alarms viewed Steps taken to reproduce the problem Servpak information (if a Servpak customer):
Servpak account number Registration information:
If the product is not registered, date when you purchased the product If the product is not registered, location where you purchased the product NOTE: If you would like to register your product now, visit the Proxim eService Web Site at http://support.proxim.com and click on New Product Registration. 209 Technical Services and Support Support Options Support Options Proxim eService Web Site Support MP.11-R Installation and Management The Proxim eService Web site is available 7x24x365 at http://support.proxim.com. On the Proxim eService Web Site, you can access the following services:
New Product Registration: Register your product for free support. Open a Ticket or RMA: Open a ticket or RMA and receive an immediate reply. Search Knowledgebase: Locate white papers, software upgrades, and technical information. ServPak (Service Packages): Receive Advanced Replacement, Extended Warranty, 7x24x365 Technical Support, Priority Queuing, and On-Site Support. Your Stuff: Track status of your tickets or RMAs and receive product update notifications. Provide Feedback: Submit suggestions or other types of feedback. Customer Survey: Submit an On-Line Customer Survey response. Repair Tune-Up: Have your existing Proxim equipment inspected, tested, and upgraded to current S/W and H/W revisions, and extend your warranty for another year. Telephone Support Contact technical support via telephone as follows:
Domestic: 866-674-6626 International: +1-408-542-5390 Hours of Operation North America: 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. PST, Monday through Friday EMEA: 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. GMT, Monday through Friday ServPak Support Proxim understands that service and support requirements vary from customer to customer. It is our mission to offer service and support options that go above-and-beyond normal warranties to allow you the flexibility to provide the quality of service that your networks demand. In recognition of these varying requirements we have developed a support program called ServPak. ServPak is a program of Enhanced Service Options that can be purchased individually or in combinations to meet your needs. Advanced Replacement: This service offers customers an advance replacement of refurbished or new hardware.
(Available in the U.S., Canada, and select countries. Please inquire with your authorized Proxim distributor for availability in your country.) Extended Warranty: This service provides unlimited repair of your Proxim hardware for the life of the service contract. 7x24x365 Technical Support: This service provides unlimited, direct access to Proxims world-class technical support 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year. Priority Queuing: This service allows your product issue to be routed to the next available Customer Service Engineer. To purchase ServPak support services, please contact your authorized Proxim distributor. To receive more information or for questions on any of the available ServPak support options, please call Proxim Support at +1-408-542-5390 or send an email to servpak@proxim.com. 210 Statement of Warranty Warranty Coverage MP.11-R Installation and Management E Proxim Wireless Corporation warrants that its Products are manufactured solely from new parts, conform substantially to specifications, and will be free of defects in material and workmanship for a Warranty Period of 1 year from the date of purchase. Repair or Replacement In the event a Product fails to perform in accordance with its specification during the Warranty Period, Proxim offers return-to-factory repair or replacement, with a thirty (30) business-day turnaround from the date of receipt of the defective Product at a Proxim Wireless Corporation Repair Center. When Proxim Wireless has reasonably determined that a returned Product is defective and is still under Warranty, Proxim Wireless shall, at its option, either: (a) repair the defective Product; (b) replace the defective Product with a refurbished Product that is equivalent to the original; or (c) where repair or replacement cannot be accomplished, refund the price paid for the defective Product. The Warranty Period for repaired or replacement Products shall be ninety (90) days or the remainder of the original Warranty Period, whichever is longer. This constitutes Buyers sole and exclusive remedy and Proxim Wirelesss sole and exclusive liability under this Warranty. Limitations of Warranty The express warranties set forth in this Agreement will not apply to defects in a Product caused; (i) through no fault of Proxim Wireless during shipment to or from Buyer, (ii) by the use of software other than that provided with or installed in the Product, (iii) by the use or operation of the Product in an application or environment other than that intended or recommended by Proxim Wireless, (iv) by modifications, alterations, or repairs made to the Product by any party other than Proxim Wireless or Proxim Wirelesss authorized repair partners, (v) by the Product being subjected to unusual physical or electrical stress, or (vii) by failure of Buyer to comply with any of the return procedures specified in this Statement of Warranty. Support Procedures International: +1-408-542-5390 Buyer should return defective LAN1 Products within the first 30 days to the merchant from which the Products were purchased. Buyer can contact a Proxim Wireless Customer Service Center either by telephone or via web. Calls for support for Products that are near the end of their warranty period should be made not longer than seven (7) days after expiration of warranty. Repair of Products that are out of warranty will be subject to a repair fee. Contact information is shown below. Additional support information can be found at Proxim Wirelesss web site at http://support.proxim.com. Domestic: 866-674-6626 Hours of Operation North America: 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. PST, Monday through Friday EMEA: 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. GMT, Monday through Friday When contacting the Customer Service for support, Buyer should be prepared to provide the Product description and serial number and a description of the problem. The serial number should be on the product. In the event the Customer Service Center determines that the problem can be corrected with a software update, Buyer might be instructed to download the update from Proxim Wirelesss web site or, if thats not possible, the update will be sent to Buyer. In the event the Customer Service Center instructs Buyer to return the Product to Proxim Wireless for 1. LAN products include: ORiNOCO 211 Statement of Warranty Other Information MP.11-R Installation and Management repair or replacement, the Customer Service Center will provide Buyer a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number and shipping instructions. Buyer must return the defective Product to Proxim Wireless, properly packaged to prevent damage, shipping prepaid, with the RMA number prominently displayed on the outside of the container. Calls to the Customer Service Center for reasons other than Product failure will not be accepted unless Buyer has purchased a Proxim Wireless Service Contract or the call is made within the first thirty (30) days of the Products invoice date. Calls that are outside of the 30-day free support time will be charged a fee of $25.00 (US Dollars) per Support Call. If Proxim Wireless reasonably determines that a returned Product is not defective or is not covered by the terms of this Warranty, Buyer shall be charged a service charge and return shipping charges. Other Information Search Knowledgebase Proxim Wireless stores all resolved problems in a solution database at the following URL: http://support.proxim.com. Ask a Question or Open an Issue Submit a question or open an issue to Proxim Wireless technical support staff at the following URL: http://
support.proxim.com/cgi-bin/proxim.cfg/php/enduser/ask.php. Other Adapter Cards Proxim Wireless does not support internal mini-PCI devices that are built into laptop computers, even if identified as
"ORiNOCO" devices. Customers having such devices should contact the laptop vendor's technical support for assistance. For support for a PCMCIA card carrying a brand name other than Proxim, ORiNOCO, Lucent, Wavelan, or Skyline, Customer should contact the brand vendor's technical support for assistance. 212
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2007-10-29 | 5500 ~ 5700 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 5745 ~ 5825 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
3 | 2007-10-12 | 5500 ~ 5700 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | |
4 | 2004-09-30 | 5745 ~ 5850 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
5 | 5280 ~ 5320 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 | Effective |
2007-10-29
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
2007-10-12
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
2004-09-30
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Proxim Wireless Corporation
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0005850607
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Physical Address |
47633 Westinghouse Drive
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
Fremont, California 94539
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | TCB Application Email Address |
m******@ccsemc.com
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
j******@baclcorp.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Grantee Code |
HZB
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Equipment Product Code |
MP11R-ABG
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Name |
C**** v****
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Title |
Sr. Regulatory and Compliance Manager
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Telephone Number |
408 3********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Fax Number |
408 3********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
c******@proxim.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Firm Name |
COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATION SERVICES
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
Proxim Wireless Corporation
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Name |
T******** C****
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
C**** Y********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Physical Address |
47173 BENICIA STREET
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
2115 O'Nel Drive
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
FREMONT, California 94538
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
FREMONT
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
San Jose, California 95131
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Telephone Number |
510-7********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
408 5******** Extension:
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Fax Number |
510-6********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
408 5********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
T******@CCSEMC.COM
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
c******@proxim.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Firm Name |
COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATION SERVICES
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
Proxim Wireless Corporation
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Name |
T****** C******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
C**** Y******
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Physical Address |
47173 BENICIA STREET
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
2115 O'Nel Drive
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
FREMONT, California 94538
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
FREMONT
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
San Jose, California 95131
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Telephone Number |
510-7********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
408 5******** Extension:
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Fax Number |
510-6********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
408 5********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
T******@CCSEMC.COM
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
c******@proxim.com
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 11/26/2007 | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | 11/14/2004 | |||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Equipment Class | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Wireless Access Point | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | MP.11x outdoor wireless Etherenet system | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | MP.11x Outdoor Wireless Ethernet System | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Grant Comments | Class II Permissive Change. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be fixed-mounted on outdoor permanent structures with a separation distance of at least 1.12 meters from all persons during normal operation. Users and installers must be provided with appropriate antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions, including antenna co-location requirements of 1.1307(b)(3), for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The minimum antenna gain for DFS compliance is 5 dBi. | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Class II Permissive Change. Power Output listed is Conducted. The antennas used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 1.12 meters from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Users and installers must be provided with appropriate antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions, including antenna co-location requirements of 1.1307(b)(3), for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be fixed-mounted on outdoor permanent structures with a separation distance of at least 1.12 meters from all persons during normal operation. Users and installers must be provided with appropriate antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions, including antenna co-location requirements of 1.1307(b)(3), for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The minimum antenna gain for DFS compliance is 5 dBi. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Power Output listed is Conducted. The antennas used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 1.12 meters from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Firm Name |
Compliance Certification Services
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
Bay Area Compliance Laboratory
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Name |
B**** J********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
T**** C****
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
J**** C****
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Telephone Number |
510-7******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
510-7********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
408-7********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Fax Number |
510-6********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
408-7********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
b******@ccsemc.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
t******@ccsemc.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
b******@baclcorp.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15E | CC ND | 5500 | 5700 | 0.249 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 15E | CC ND | 5280 | 5320 | 0.04 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412 | 2462 | 0.103 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 15C | CC | 5745 | 5825 | 0.072 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15E | CC ND | 5500 | 5700 | 0.249 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 15E | CC ND | 5280 | 5320 | 0.04 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 15C | 2412 | 2462 | 0.103 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 2 | 15C | 5745 | 5850 | 0.072 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 1 | 15E | 5280.00000000 | 5320.00000000 | 0.0400000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC